Essential Course of English: Topical Texts, Lexical – Grammar Exercises/comp.

: Oxana
Golubovschi [et al.]; coord.: Ana Budnic. – Chișinău: S.n., 2013 (Tipogr.UPS “ Ion Creangă”). –
ISBN 978-9975-46-165-8.
Book 1. – 2013. – 300p. – ISBN 978-9975-46-166-5.
811.111’36 (075.8)
E 57

1
Essential Course of English
Book I
Topical Texts,
Grammar, Lexical Exercises

Book 1

Compiled
by

Oxana Golubovschi
Alina Mardari
Lilia Herta
Olesea Bucuci
Tatiana Portaresco

Coordinator
PhD, Ana Budnic

2
PREFACE

English Essential Course is the book designed and presented for 1st year learners of the English
language at teacher training universities. This practical course consists of 10 sections provided with
Selected Texts, Grammar and Vocabulary Exercises. Collected exercises and activities will help
learners to enlarge their vocabulary, to sort out the essential literary and linguistic data as well as to
develop the learners’ power of their spontaneous speech.
The aim of the book is to help learners understand English grammar structures, topical vocabulary
and pronunciation rules through comprehensive theory tables and functional examples.
The book adheres to the principle that every structure should first be heard, then practised in oral
and finally, in written form. The book encourages learners to speak before writing, and allows them
to practise English structures through a variety of enjoyable and useful activities.
The book consists of 10 units, each focusing on a particular grammar and vocabulary
topic. A typical unit contains:
• presentation of grammar structures by means of visual prompts.
• simple, concise explanations of the grammar structures.
• examples in everyday conversational English, together with a few expressions showing slightly
more formal use.
• exercises practising the new grammar and vocabulary structures, to help learners use correct,
appropriate patterns in everyday situations.
• speaking and writing activities - to practise the new grammar and vocabulary structures in oral
and written form.
By the end of the academic course the learners will enlarge their vocabulary by reading the topical
texts, will be able to write summaries, solve puzzles, share feelings, ideas about an experience they
have in common, express their views and attitudes, likes and dislikes which will bring to a greater
awareness of their values and aims in life.

3
 CONTENTS
Preface Page 3

Lesson 1. Page 7
Grammar: Subject Personal Pronouns. Possessive Adjectives. Page 7
The verb – to be. Numerals: cardinal/ordinal
Vocabulary: Nice to Meet You. Page 12
Unit I

Lesson 2. Page 19
Grammar: Demonstrative Pronouns. Plural of Nouns. Definite Page 19
and Indefinite Articles.
Vocabulary: Meeting People. Page 24
Lesson 3. Page 30
Grammar: Possessive case of Nouns. Page 31
Degrees of Comparison of Adjectives. Present Simple Tense.
Vocabulary: My Family. Page 39

Lesson 1. Page 45
Grammar: Adverbs of Frequency. 2. Prepositions of Time. Page 47
Prepositions of Place. Prepositions of Movement.
Vocabulary: My World. Page 52
Unit II

Lesson 2. Page 62
Grammar: There is/are. Some/Any/No. Have/has got. Page 62
Vocabulary: My House. Page 68
Lesson 3. Page 71
Grammar: Modal Verbs – Can/May/Must. Have/Has Got. Page 71
Vocabulary: Our English Lesson. Page 76

Lesson 1. Page 80
Grammar: Present Continuous Tense. Page 80
Vocabulary: Looking Good! Page 86
Unit III

Lesson 2. Page 88
Grammar: Adjectives. Degrees of Comparison. Page 88
Vocabulary: Physical Appearance. Page 93
Lesson 3. Page 96
Grammar: Order of Adjectives. Page 96
Vocabulary: Clothes. Page 97

Lesson 1. Page 100

Grammar: Nouns: 1. Countable and Uncountable. 2. Much, Page 100
Many, A lot of. 3. Would Like.
Vocabulary: The World of Food. Page 105
Unit IV

Lesson 2. Page 107

Grammar: 1. The Imperative. 2. Verb Patterns. 3. Page 107
Neither…nor.
Vocabulary: Cooking. Page 112
Lesson 3. Page 118
Grammar: 1. Few, Little and a few, a little. 2. Question Words. Page 118
3. Types of Questions.
Vocabulary: In the Canteen. Page 124

4
 Lesson 1. Page 130
Grammar: Past Simple Tense – Regular Verbs/Irregular Verbs. Page 130
Vocabulary: Holidays. Page 135
Lesson 2. Page 140
Unit V
Grammar: Be Going to + Verb. Page 140
Vocabulary: Transport and Travel. Page 142
Lesson 3. Page 150
Grammar: Expressing Movement. Page 150
Vocabulary: Towns and Cities. Page 150

Lesson 1. Page 155

Grammar: Reported Speech (Present Simple) Page 155
Vocabulary: Describing Feelings. Page 158
Unit VI

Lesson 2. Page 162

Grammar: Adverbs: Degrees of Comparison. Order of Adverbs Page 162
Vocabulary: Types of Characters. Page 169
Lesson 3. Page 171
Grammar: Past Continuous Tense. Connecting Ideas. Page 171
Vocabulary: The Rain. Page 176

Lesson 1. Page 177

Grammar: The Future Indefinite Tense. The Future Continuous Page 177
Tense.
Unit VII

Vocabulary: Seasons. Page 182

Lesson 2. Page 185
Grammar: The Future Perfect Tense. Page 185
Vocabulary: Weather and Climate. Page 188
Lesson 3. Page 190
Grammar: Adverbial Clauses of Time and Condition. Page 190
Vocabulary: Introduction to Natural Disasters. Page 194

Lesson 1. Page 199

Grammar: Verb Patterns II: Uses of the Infinitive with to. Uses Page 199
of the Gerund.
Vocabulary: Shopping I. Page 204
Unit VIII

Lesson 2. Page 212

Grammar: Modal Verbs: Can, Could, be able to. Have to, Page 212
Must, Should.
Vocabulary: Shopping II. Page 217
Lesson 3. Page 225
Grammar: Passive: Be + Past Participle. Page 225
Vocabulary: Money. Page 228

Lesson 1. Page 234

Grammar: The Present Perfect Tense. Page 234
Vocabulary: A Student’s Day Page 238
Unit IX

Lesson 2. Page 248

Grammar: The Present Perfect Continuous. Page 248
Vocabulary: Our University. Page 250
Lesson 3. Page 255
Grammar: Used to/to be used to/to get used to. Page 255
Vocabulary: College Life. Page 258

5
 Lesson 1. Page 264
Grammar: Some Verbs and Word Combinations Followed by a Page 264
Gerund.
Vocabulary: Theatre. Page 267
Unit X
Lesson 2. Page 273
Grammar: The Past Perfect Tense. Page 273
Vocabulary: Cinema. Page 277
Lesson 3. Page 284
Grammar: Indirect Speech (Past Tense) Page 284
Vocabulary: Music. Page 290

Appendix: Page 299

Modern English Alphabet Page 299

Pronunciation – Vowels and diphthongs Page 299

Consonants Page 300

Table 1 – Countable and uncountable nouns Page 301

Table 2 – Irregular verbs Page 302

Bibliography Page 307

6
UNIT I
LESSON 1

GRAMMAR: 1. Subject Personal Pronouns

We can use subject personal pronouns before a verb instead of the noun or the name of a person.
These are:
Singular Plural
I
You We
He You
She They
It

Personal pronouns represent specific people or things. We use them depending on:
• number: singular (e.g.: I) or plural (e.g.: we)
• person: 1st person (e.g.: I), 2nd person (e.g.: you) or 3rd person (e.g.: he)
• gender: male (e.g.: he), female (e.g.: she) or neuter (e.g.: it)
• case: subject (e.g.: we) or object (e.g.: us)
We use personal pronouns in place of the person or people that we are talking about.
e.g. My name is Josef but when I am talking about myself I almost always use "I" or "me", not
"Josef". When I am talking direct to you, I almost always use "you", not your name. When I am
talking about another person, say John, I may start with "John" but then use "he" or "him". And so
on.
We use he for a man or a boy. We use she for a woman or a girl. We use It for a thing or an animal
when we do not know its sex. When we talk about our pets or animals whose sex we know we can
use he or she. In the plural we use they for people, animals, plants and things.

I (first person singular)

He (third person singular male)

you (second person singular)

It (third person singular inanimate)

She (third person singular female)

We (first person plural)

7
You (second person plural) They (third person plural)

2. Possessive Adjectives

Singular Plural
My
Your Our
His Your
Her Their
Its

Possessive adjectives modify the noun following it in order to show possession.

Possessive adjectives show: a) that something belongs to somebody, and b) the relationship
between two or more people. We put possessive adjectives before nouns.

3. The Verb "to be"

Affirmative Negative Interrogative

Longform Shortform Long form Short form
I am I'm I am not I'm not Am I?
You are You're You are not You aren't Are you?
He is He's He is not He isn't Is he?
She is She's She is not She isn't Is she?
It is It's It is not It isn't Is it?
We are We're We are not We aren't Are we?
You are You're You are not You aren't Are you?
They are They're They are not They aren't Are they?

Short Answers
Short answers are answers to questions which begin with the verb form is/are. In short answers we do
not repeat the whole question. We only use Yes or No, the subject pronoun and the verb form is (isn't);
are (aren't).
Am I / Are you tall? Yes, I am. No, I'm not.
Is he / she / it in the garden? Yes, he / she / it is. No, he / she / it isn't.
Are we/ you/ they students? Yes, we/ you/ they are. No, we/ you/ they aren’t.

8
4. Numerals 1-12

9
 Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Use the appropriate subject pronouns to rewrite the following sentences:

1. Mrs. Chart is very beautiful. 2. Dr. Phil is a famous person. 3. Fred and Barnie are good
friends. 4. Is James good at basketball? 5. Maria plays tennis. 6. Andy and I are cousins. 7. Wendy
and Robin are good at maths. 8. Mount Everest is very high. 9. Mrs. Rogala has 23 students. 10. Is
the TV too loud? 11. How are Jessie and James? 12. The weather is very hot today.13. Bruce,
Arnold and I are good friends. 14. Are you and Mr. Parker related? 15. The cat looks very friendly.

Exercise 2. Fill in the gaps as in the example:

Long form
1. I ...am... a student. Short form
2. We from Spain. I .. 'm... a student.
3. He not a doctor. We from Spain.
4. You a singer. He a doctor.
5. She an actress. You a singer.
6. It a watch. She an actress.
7. They not painters. It a watch.
8. I not tall. They painters.
I tall.
Exercise 3. Now, fill in is/isn't, are/aren't:

1. Paul from England. He from China. He 34 years old. He a writer. 2. Rosa

from Italy. She 15 years old. She 30 years old. She an actress. She a
writer. 3. Chin and Mei from China. They from Italy. They 25 years old.
They teachers.
Now, write about yourself: I…. ..

Exercise 4. Write the possessive adjectives:

1 You 2. Mary 3. Andy and Sally 4. Mike 5. Mark and I 6. John

7. Susan and Kate 8. Helen 9. The dog 10. Jim and you .

10
 Exercise 5. Replace the noun with a personal pronoun:

1 Mike is ten years old. is ten years old.

2 Tim and I are friends. are friends.
3 Elena is a teacher. is a teacher.
4 The house is old. is old.
5 Cara and Pedro are from Spain. are from Spain.
6 The boys are in the kitchen. are in the kitchen.

Exercise 6. Write in words the following cardinal and ordinal numerals:

3, 9, 11, 12, 14, 15, 19, 33, 44, 60, 99, 100.
1st, 3rd, 5th, 9th, 19th, 2nd, 4th, 8th, 12th, 20th

Exercise 7. Write in words:

M o d e l : 13 + 45 = 58 (Thirteen plus forty-five is fifty-eight). 50 - 31 = 19 (Fifty minus thirty-one

is nineteen). 15 x 2 = 30 (Fifteen multiplied by two is thirty). 30 : 2 = 15 (Thirty divided by two is
fifteen).

Exercise 8. Write he, she, it, we, you or they:

1.Helen 2. Sam 3. Father 4. Mother 5. Father and Mother 6. Ann and Tom
7. Clowns 8. Pen 9. Tom and I 10. Car 11. Dogs 12. You and Jane
13. ball 14. plane 15. sister 16. brother 17. school 18. apples
19. book 20. Nick and I 21. Children 22. Feet 23. Guitar 24. Mary .

Exercise 9. Replace the personal pronouns by possessive adjectives:

1. Where is (I) book? 2.Here is (we) teacher. 3. She goes to school with (she) brother. 4. (They)
father works in a car factory. 5. (You) laptop is very expensive. 6. (He) favourite hobby is tennis. 7.
(I) husband and I want to go to Paris. 8. We want to see (it) historical monuments. 9. Leila likes
(she) dog ! 10. (It) name is Bobby.

Exercise 10. Write the correct possessive adjective:

1. Two students didn't do mathematics homework. 2. I have a car. car is black. 3.

We have a dog. name is Pancho. 4. Nancy is from England. husband is from Australia.
5. Farid and Nadia go to a high school. little brother goes to primary school. 6. Mr O'Brian
has a van. van is very old. 7. We go to a high school. high school is fantastic. 8. I like
singing. mother sings with me. 9. François and Alain are French. family are from
France. 10. Mary likes grandmother. She often visits her.

11
Exercise 11. Complete with the subject personal pronoun:

1. My name is Sue. (Sue) am English. And this is my family. 2. My mum´s name is Angie.
(Angie) _is from Germany. 3. Bob is my dad. (My dad) is a waiter. 4. On the left you can
see Simon. (Simon) _is my brother. 5. (Sue and Simon) are twins. 6. Our dog is a girl, Judy.
(Judy) is two years old. 7. (Sue, Simon, Angie and Bob) live in Canterbury. 8.
(Canterbury) is not far from London. 9. My grandparents live in London. (My grandparents)
often come and see us. 10. What can tell me about your family?

Exercise 12. Correct the sentences:

1. Mrs. Smith is strict. I don´t like him. 2. Ana isn´t good at Maths. I never copy from she. 3. We
have a computer at home, but I don´t use me. 4. My teachers are very good. I like they. 5. I´m not
happy with the children. They don´t listen to I.

Exercise 13. Write the appropriate possessive adjectives:

1. She is mother. (I) 2. They are children. (we) 3. It is pajamas.(he) 4. It is

duck. (I) 5. It is Shampoo. (they) 6. It is pink car. (She) 7. He is new friend.
(he) 8. They are friends. (they) 9. She is mother (She) 10. We are family. (She) 11.
It is dog.(he) 12. It is fast car.(we) 13. I ´m sister.(she) 14.It is new mobile
phone. (He) 15. They are best friends (we) 16. She is cousin. (She) 17. They are in
room. (they) 18.You are in house. (We) 19. He is with friends. (he) 20. We are
brothers. (they) 21. They are in car.(he) 22. She is last chance.(I) 23. He is
father.(I) 24. You are in hotel.(We) 25. It is old chair.(she) 26. It is food.(It)
27. It is cheap television.(He) 28. He is better option.(She)

Exercise 14. Make sentences with ‘be’ using the short forms (choose positive, negative or
question):
Model: (he / be / French) He is French.
1. (we / not / be / cold). 2. (he / be / a footballer?).3. (where / be / John?) 4. (we / be / German). 5. (he
/ not / be / a journalist). 6. (we / not / be / singers). 7. (you / be / a nurse?).8. (they / be / from
Libya).9. (where / be / David?).10. (how / be / your mother?).11. (we / be / thirsty). 12. (how long /
be / the film?).13. (how often / be / you in London?).14. (he / be / handsome).15. (I / not / be /
English).16. (you / not / be / a doctor). 17. (she / not / be / Italian). 18. (he / be / my brother).19. (you
/ not / be / Egyptian).

NICE TO MEET YOU

GREETINGS AND INTRODUCTIONS
• Greetings  Good-byes

Hello, …/ Hi, … Good bye/ Bye/ I’ll say good bye/ See you later/
Good morning/ afternoon/ evening. See you soon.
Good/ Nice to see you again. I must go now.
I’m glad/ happy/ pleased to see you.
12
 How are you? - Fine, thanks. And you?
How have you been? - Very well. And you?
How are things? - Not too bad, thanks.
How is your girlfriend? - She’s fine

Introductions

 Dialogue 1 Study toolbox

A - Hi! My name's Carmen. Expressions to introduce
What's your name? yourself:
B - I'm Paula. • My name is ...
A - Are you a new student?
• I’m...
B - Yes, I am. I'm from Brazil.
• Let me introduce myself; I'm ...
And where are you from?
A - I'm from Spain. • I'd like to introduce myself; I'm
B - Nice to meet you. ...
A - Nice to meet you, too. • Nice to meet you; I'm ...
• Pleased to meet you; I'm ...
 Dialogue 2
Mike: Hi! Don.
Don: Hi! Mike. Who’s your friend?
Mike: Have you met Tina before?
Don: No, I don’t think so.
Mike: Don, this is my friend Tina.
Tina, this is my colleague
Don.
Don: Hello Tina, it’s nice to meet
you.
Tina: It’s nice to meet you, Don.

Study toolbox
Useful responses when introducing
yourself or other people: Exercise 1. Complete the dialogue. Practice in
• Nice to meet you. groups of three:
• Pleased to meet you. 1. , this is .
• Happy to meet you. , this is . Hello .
• How do you do? Hello . Nice to meet
you.

2. Judy : Hello. My name's Judy Koblenz.

Robert : Hello. I'm Robert Smith. Nice to meet you.
Judy : And you.
Exercise 2. Practice in pairs. Say your first name and surname.

A Hello. My name's .
13
 В Hello. I'm . Nice to meet you.
A And you.

Exercise 3. Practice the following dialogues:

1. Pablo: Hi, Ben. How are you? 2.Ben:Hello, Mika. How are you?
Ben: Fine, thanks, Pablo. And you? Mika:Very well, thank you. How are you?
Pablo: I'm OK, thanks. Ben:Fine.

Exercise 4. Complete the conversations. Read and check. Practice the conversations:

Formal and Informal Greetings

Formal Greetings Informal Greetings
- Good morning - Hello
- Good afternoon - Hi
- Good evening - How are you doing?
- How do you do? - How have you been?
- How are you? - How are things going?

Formal Responses Informal Responses

-Good morning - Hello/Hi
- Good afternoon - Hi
- Good evening - Fine, thanks and you?
- Very well, thank you - Great, thanks

Formal closings Informal closings

-It has been a pleasure, goodbye - I have to go now, bye
-Thank you for your time, goodbye - I’ll see you later/around, bye
- Have a nice day, bye

Exercise 5. Good morning! Complete the conversations.

14
 Goodbye! Good night! Good morning! Good
afternoon!

A VISIT
W: Hello, Betty!
В: Good afternoon, Mr. White!
W: Is Doctor Sandford in?
B: No, he isn't. Doctor Sandford is still in the hospital.
W: Is Mrs. Sandford at home?
B: No, she isn't. Mrs. Sandford is out. She is in the park with Benny, and old Mrs.
Sandford is not well.
W: Oh, that's a pity! What's the matter? It isn't the flu, is it?
15
 B: Oh, no, it's a bad cold, she's better today.
W: Is she in bed?
B: No, she isn't. Come in, Mr. White, and have a talk with Mrs. Sandford. She is always
glad to see you.
W: Perhaps, some other day, Betty!
B: I'm so sorry Mr. Sandford isn't at home yet.
W: That's all right. Remember me to Mrs. Sandford.
B: Yes, Mr. White.
W: So long then, Betty!
B: So long, Mr. White. On Saturday Mr. Sandford is at home after four.

Vocabulary
to be in e. g. Is Dr. Sandford in? Ant. to be out e. g. Mrs. Sandford is out.;not to be well = to be
unwell; to feel bad e. g. Mrs. Sandford is not well. I feel bad today.;That's a pity! What's the
matter? What is it? flu n; It's a bad cold. She is in bed. in bed, by bus, to school (use without the
article);to have a talk; to have a smoke;to have a swim;to be glad e. g. She is glad to see you.;
perhaps some other day;to be sorry e. g. I'm sorry, he is out.; Remember me to Mrs.
Sandford.;and conj. ;bag n ;book n ;bus n; Bye! ;camera n ;car n; coffee n; computer n ;cup n
;day ; English adj, n ; everyday adj.; fine adj.;first name n.; Good afternoon! ;Good morning!
;Good night! ; Goodbye!; How are you? ;Nice to meet you.; Have a nice day!; See you later!;
hello; house n ; lovely adj.; my ; name n; OK adj.; phone n. ;photograph ; please; sandwich n;
Sleep well!; surname n; tea n ; television n; thank you; thanks; today n; very well; what?; with
prep; your.

Conversational Phrases
Approval: Well, yes. Right! Good, isn't it? Yes, I see. Quite! Nice, isn't it? Yes, very likely.
That's right. Wonderful! Splendid! Fine! First-rate! Excellent! Magnificent! Fantastic! That's a good
idea!
Disapproval: Pity! That's a pity! What a pity! What a shame! Awful! (What) nonsense! No
wonder! How very strange!

Exercise 6. Memory Work: The possessive adjectives poem

My hat, it has three corners.
Three corners has my hat.
And had it not three corners,
It would not be my hat.
Your hat, it has three corners.
Three corners has your hat.
And had it not three corners,
It would not be your hat.
His hat, it has three corners.
Three corners has his hat.
And had it not three corners,
It would not be his hat.
Her hat, it has three corners.
Three corners has her hat.

16
 And had it not three corners,
It would not be her hat.
Our hats, they have three corners.
Three corners have our hats.
And had they not three corners,
They would not be our hats.
Your hats, they have three corners.
Three corners have your hats.
And had they not three corners,
They would not be your hats.
Their hats, they have three corners.
Three corners have their hats.
And had they not three corners,
They would not be their hats.

Exercise 7. Answer the following questions:

1. Is Doctor Sandford in? 2. Where is he? 3. Is Mrs. Sandford at home? 4. Is Mrs. Sandford in the
park with Benny? 5. She isn't in the garden, is she? 6. Old Mrs. Sandford isn't ill, is she? 7. Is she in
bed? 8. She is better today, isn't she? 9. Is Mr. Sandford at home after four on Saturday? 10. Is he at
home after four or at half past four on Saturday?

Exercise 8. a) Let the members of the class ask and answer questions as in the model. Give a
short answer using contracted forms. Add a sentence of your own:

Model: Is your sister a student?

No, she isn't. She is still a pupil.
b) Respond to the negative sentence of your fellow-student as in the model. Use contracted
forms. Work in pairs.
Model: His father isn't a doctor.
No, he isn't. He is an officer.

Exercise 9. a) Give questions to the following sentences:

1.On Saturday Mr. Sandford is at home after four. 2. My brother is still at the office. 3. Mr. Smith is
a good doctor. 4. My mother is glad to see you.

b) Each sentence describes a certain situation in a concise way. Some points of the situation
are already known to you. Find out some more details about the situation by asking questions.
Work in pairs. Use conversational phrases expressing approval and disapproval where
possible.
Model: Mrs. Sandford is in the park.
Nice, isn't it? Is she alone there?
No, she isn't.
With whom is she there?
With Benny, her son, you know.
Yes, I see.
17
Exercise 10. Translate the following into English:

1. Ce s-a întâmplat? – John este bolnav. 2. Stă la pat? – Da, dar astăzi i s-a făcut mai bine. 3. Tom
este acasă? – Nu. El vine de obicei acasă la ora 5. 4. Sâmbătă eu vin acasă la 4. 5. Unde se află
Benny?- Este în parc. 6. Ce profesie are el? Este medic. 7. Medicul Sandford este acasă? – E încă la
spital. 8. Benny se află în parc, nu-i aşa? 9. Când ei vin acasă sâmbătă? La ora 6. 10. Ei sunt
întotdeauna bucuroşi să vă vadă. 11. Ce păcat, ea este încă în pat.

Exercise 11. Use the expressions and make a dialogue:

Hi./ Nice to meet you./How is your family?/ Goodbye/ Have a nice evening/ See you next week/ Goodbye/
Have a nice day.

Exercise 12. Build short conversations. Use the vocabulary of this lesson and the
conversational phrases.

Exercise 13. Translate the following into English:

1. Ea este medic? - Da, ea este un medic bun. 2. Ea are 17 ani, nu-i aşa? - Da. 3.Fratele tău are 14,
nu-i aşa? - Da. 4. El are 14 ori 15 ani? - El are 14 ani. 5. Aceasta este o minge mică, nu- i aşa? - Da.
6. Creionul este mic ori mare? - El este mare. 7. Ei nu sunt ocupaţi, nu- i aşa? - Nu, ei nu sunt. 8. El
este ocupat, nu-i aşa? - Da, el este ocupat. 9. El nu este acasă, nu-i aşa? - Nu, el nu este acasă. 10. El
este acasă, nu-i aşa? - Da, el este acasă. 11. Aceasta este o servietă de piele, nu-i aşa? – Da, este o
servietă de piele. 12. Acest text este uşor ori greu? - Este uşor. 13. Acest text nu este greu, nu-i aşa?
- Da este. 14. Acuma este ora 11, nu-i aşa ? - Da. 15. Este acuma ora 11 ori 12? - Este ora 11. 16.
Acuma nu este ora 12, nu-i aşa? - Nu, nu este ora 12. 17. Este frig. 18. Este frig? 19. Este frig, nu-i
aşa? 20. Este frig ori cald în sală? - Este frig. 21. În sală nu este cald, nu-i aşa? - Da, nu este cald.
22. Ia această hartă (lampă, stilou, caiet, hârtie). 23. Nu lua mingea (serviet mea, creionul meu,
patinele mele, lucrurile mele). 24. Nu merge acasă singură.25.Este întuneric. Du-te acasă.

Exercise 14. Listening exercise:

a) What are the kinds of questions you ask when meeting someone for the first time? Would you
ask different questions depending on the age, social status, and gender of the person to whom you
are speaking? Write down your ideas before you listen to the conversation.
b) Listen to the tape and answer the questions:
1. Where does this conversation most likely take place?
A. at a park B. at a school C. at a birthday party D. at a music recital
2. What is the girl's name?
A. Kathy B. Karen C. Nancy D. Nanny
3. Where does the girl probably live now?
A. in Scotland B. in France C. in England D. in the United States
4. What does the girl's father do for a living?
A. He is a travel agent B. He is a professor C. He is computer programmer
D. He is a French teacher
5. What is one thing NOT mentioned about the girl's family?
A. why her parents lived in England for several years
B. where her mother works at the present time
18
C. where the girl grew up
D. how old the girl was when she moved to her present location

Exercise 15. Group work:

Introduce yourself to three other people in your class; use the vocabulary of the lesson.

Lesson 2.

Grammar: 1. Demonstrative pronouns

near far

singular this that

plural these those

Demonstrative pronouns demonstrate (verb): to show; to indicate; to point to.

A demonstrative pronoun represents a thing or things:
• near in distance or time (this, these)
• far in distance or time (that, those)
Demonstrative pronouns are those that identify or point to a thing or things and occasionally
persons. They can be both singular and plural and they refer to nouns that are either nearby or far
away in time or space. What does that mean exactly? First of all, there are only four demonstrative
pronouns – this, that, these, those. This and thatrefer to singular nouns and these and those identify
plural nouns. The singular this and the plural these refer to a person or thing near the speaker. The
singular that and the plural those refer to a person or thing far away from the speaker.
Let’s look at some examples to get a clearer picture of this.
Examples of Demonstrative Pronouns:
• This is ridiculous. (This refers to an object or event close to the speaker.)
• That is ridiculous. (That refers to an object or event farther away in space or time.)
• These are ridiculous. (These refer to objects close to the speaker.)
• Those are ridiculous. (Those refer to objects farther away in space and time.)

2. Plural of Nouns
Most nouns form their plural by adding -s. e.g.: A car – two cars.
Nouns ending in -s, -ss, -sh, -ch, -x, -o, take -es in the plural:
E.g. bus - buses, dress - dresses, brush - brushes, torch - torches, box - boxes, tomato - two tomatoes
etc.
But some nouns ending in - o take only –s:e.g. radio - radios, piano - pianos, photo - photos, rhino -
rhinos, hippo - hippos, video - videos, etc.
Nouns ending in a vowel + у take -s in the plural. e.g.: A boy – two boys
Nouns ending in a consonant + y, drop the -y and take -ies in the plural. e.g. strawberry -
19
strawberries.
Nouns ending in -f or -fe, drop the f or -fe and take -ves in the plural. E.g. leaf – leaves, wolf –
wolves
But some nouns ending in -f or -fe take only -s. e.g. roof - roofs, giraffe - giraffes, cliff-cliffs, etc.
Adjectives do not take –s/-es in the plural.
Irregular Plurals
Some nouns are irregular.
e.g.: Child-children, man –men, woman-women, goose-geese, tooth-teeth, foot-feet, ox-oxen, mouse-
mice, sheep-sheep, deer-deer.
Pronunciation
The suffix of the plural form is pronounced:
/s/ when the noun ends in:
/f/, /k/, /p/, /t/ or /0/ sound.
cliffs, books, shops, cats, myths, etc.
/iz/ when the noun ends in:
/s/, /ks/, /j/, /tj/, /dz, /z/ or /3/ sound.
buses, foxes, brushes, torches, bridges, roses, mirages, etc.
/z/ when the noun ends in any other sound.
rooms, boys, pears, leaves, lemons, pianos, etc.

Countable - Uncountable Nouns

Countable nouns are nouns which can be counted (e.g. one apple, two apples, etc.) and can be in the
singular or the plural. We put a before the noun in the singular when it begins with a consonant sound
(b, d, p, etc.) and an when it begins with a vowel sound (a, e, i, o, u). e.g. a flower – two flowers, an
apple – two apples.
Uncountable nouns are nouns which cannot be counted and they usually have no plural. These
nouns include:
food: cheese, butter, meat, salt, pepper, bacon, bread, chocolate, honey, jam, etc.
liquids: coffee, milk, water, tea, wine, lemonade, petrol, oil, etc.
material; gold, iron, silver, wood, paper, etc. abstract nouns: beauty, love, happiness, etc.
others: hair, money, news, snow, furniture, weather, advice, etc.
We use some with uncountable nouns and not a/an. We also use some with countable nouns but only
in the plural.
Some uncountable nouns can be made countable by using the following words in front of them: jar,
bottle, piece, loaf, cup, bar, glass, kilo, carton, bowl, can. jug, slice, tin, packet, etc.
e.g. A jar of marmalade, a bottle of beer, a piece of pie, a loaf of bread, a cup of coffee, a bar of
chocolate, a glass of milk, a kilo of meat, a carton of milk, a bowl of soup, a can of fruit juice, a jug
of orange juice, a slice of bread, a tin of fish, a packet of spaghetti.

3. Definite &Indefinite Articles

The Indefinite Article ”A/An”
The indefinite article a/an is used before singular countable nouns. We use a before nouns which
begin with a consonant sound and an before nouns which begin with a vowel sound.

20
e.g. a dolphin, a university (consonant sound), a house (consonant sound); an elephant, an
umbrella (vowel sound), an hour (h is silent).

We use A/An
 with singular countable nouns when we want to say what somebody/something is or what
someone's job is.
e.g. It is a dog. She is a doctor.
We don’t use A/An
 with uncountable or plural nouns. We can use some instead.
e.g. some chocolate, some eggs
 in front of an adjective when there is no noun after it. But when there is a noun after the
adjective, we use a for adjectives which begin with a consonant sound and an for adjectives which
begin with a vowel sound.
e.g. It is a car. It is fast. It is a fast car. It is also an expensive car.

The Definite article “The”

The definite article the is used with singular or plural nouns.
e.g. the girl, the men, the house.
We use The:
 with nouns when we are talking about something specific, for example when the noun is men-
tioned for a second time or is already known. In other words, when we can answer the question
"Who?" or "Which?".
e.g. I can see a car. The car is red. (Which car? The specific car which we see.)
 with nouns which are unique.
e.g. the earth, the sky, the sun, the Parthenon, the Taj Mahal
 before the names of rivers, seas/oceans, mountain ranges, deserts and groups of
islands/states.
e.g. the Nile, the Mediterranean, the Atlantic, the Alps, the Sahara, the Bahamas, the USA
 before the names of musical instruments.
e.g. the piano, the guitar, the violin
 before nationalities and names of families.
e.g. the Chinese, the Italians, the Smiths, the Browns
 before the words morning, afternoon, evening.
e.g. I go to school in the morning.
We don’t use The:
 with plural nouns when we talk about them in general.
e.g. Lions are wild animals. (Which lions? Ait lions in general.)
 before proper nouns.
e.g. This is Jane
 before names of meals (breakfast, lunch, dinner, etc.) and games/sports (golf, tennis, basketball,
etc.).
e.g. Tennis is an exciting sport
 with the words this/that /these/those. e.g. this car, those bicycles NOT: This the car
 with the words school, church, bed, hospital, prison, home when we refer to the purpose for which
they exist.
e.g. John goes to school at 8:30 in the morning. (=John is a student.)

21
 Pronunciation:
The is pronounced / / before words which begin with a consonant sound
e.g. (the glass, the baby).
The is pronounced / / before words which begin with a vowel sound
e.g. (the egg, the apple).

Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Use `this´ or `these´:

1. Is my drink? 2. aren´t my trainers.3. Is an interesting museum? 4. are

new bikes.5. is my house.6. is a hill.7. are donkeys.8. What is ? 9.
. Hi, Jane! is Michael. 10. is James´ bike.11. are his children.12. are
his sister´s children.13. is Pete.14. is my restaurant.15. are my jewels.16. is
the church of my town.17. are my father´s books.18. is Ajax´s stadium.19. is my
bag.20. Is my TV?21. Are your watches.22. I like clown.23. boys are
American.24. is my money.

Exercise 2. Use `that´ or `those´:

1. a big supermarket.2. are her CDs.3. Are your books?4. is a big

shop.5. is John´s house.6. is a mountain.7. are horses.8. What are ?9. We can
do better than .10. No, is not mine.11. Did you win? is amazing.12. Hello, who
is speaking, please.13. Hello, is you John?14. Is a Dutch ship?15. is a Spanish
woman.16. is my friend´s house.17. is my mother´s car.18. Who is knocking at the
door?19. are turtles.20. are their lunches.21. is my cat.22. blouse is beautiful.23.
Look at !24. Can you see horses?25. These are bigger than .

Exercise 3. Write the plural form of the following nouns. Transcribe them:
College, writer, family, wife, child, mouse, parrot, house, bird, man, goose, woman, leaf, roof, day,
son-in-law, turkey, swine, box, dish, sheep.

Exercise 4. Give the following sentences in the plural:

Model: This is a pen. These are pens.
1. This is a box. 2. This is a spoon. 3. That is a fork. 4. This is a park. 5. That is a garden. 6. This is a
desk. 7. That is a door. 8. This is my bird. 9. That is his dog. 10. That is her daughter.

Exercise 5. Sometimes you don't add -s or -es to a noun to make it plural. Read each sentence.
Figure out the plural of the word in parenthesis and write it on the line:

1. Mrs. Jones has two . (child) 2. A flock of just flew overhead. (goose) 3. Three
scurried through the kitchen. (mouse) 4. Mother cut the sandwich into two . (half) 5. The
dental hygienist cleaned my . (tooth) 6. The at the bus stop had umbrellas. (woman) 7.
Grandpa sharpened the in the kitchen. (knife) 8. Those were making a lot of noise.

22
(person) 9. Mama bought two of bread. (loaf) 10. The were fixing the hole in the street.
(man) 11. I heard a pack of in the forest. (wolf) 12. The farmer had a dozen . (sheep)

Exercise 6. Write each word in its plural form in the correct column:
Child, book, coin, diary, bus, bush, man, mouse, pen, city, class, dictionary, foot, berry,
church
-s -es -ies irregular

Exercise 7. Put the correct indefinite articles:

1) John has old bike.2) She's cooking cake.3) Can I have apple?4) Emily needs
new desk in her room.5) Susan has aunt in London.6) We are listening to English CD.

Exercise 8. Complete the sentences with a, an or the:

1) There's supermarket in Centre Street.2) pen is on my table.3) We have cat

and dog.4) garden is very nice.5) She's hairdresser.6) Tom is architect.7) Can I
have bottle of water?8) sandwiches are very good.9) Eric works in factory.10)
She's English teacher.

Exercise 9. Use `this´ or `these’:

1. is my desk. 2. are my pets. 3. is Pete´s house. 4. It´s raining again. is awful.

5. Hello Kath, is Bob. 6. is my friend, Paul. 7. cake tastes delicious. 8. I don´t like one.
9. apples look good. 10. I´ll take grapes. 11. books belong to Linda. 12. Jack brought
trousers. 13. hamburgers taste good. 14. Have you seen movie? 15. are good times. 16. Do
you like shirts? 17. is much heavier than that. 18. is unbelievable. 19. Is John´s house.
20. Do you like flowers? 21. book is great. 22. is an apple pie. 23. Do you like shoes?
24. I like picture. 25. What is the answer to questions.

Exercise 10. a) Underline the demonstrative pronouns in the following sentences:

1.Paul bought those for two dollars. 2. These are the best shoes I have ever worn. 3. Can you
believe that? 4. This is what I meant. 5. I can see that this is what you want. 6. Those are terrible
jokes. 7. That is the way the cookie crumbles. 8. You can’t have that because it’s mine. 9. This is a
strange play. 10. This is wonderful. 11. These are trying times.

b) Find the demonstrative pronouns in the following sentences and put an S for singular and a
P for plural:
1. I like those. 2. That is fantastic. 3. Bring me that pencil. 4. These are fun games.
5. I can’t believe this. 6. These are the best of times. 7. That is my best friend. 8.
Give me that! 9. That is the greatest news. 10. I can’t see that. 11. I ate those.

23
 MEETING PEOPLE

Alex meets a group of foreign students

Alex: Excuse me, what country are you from?
Voitek: I’m from Poland.
Alex: Do you live in Warsow?
Voitek : No, I don't. I live in a small town in the North of Poland. Let me introduce
you to my friend Lucy.
Alex: I am ever so glad to meet you.
Voitek :Lucy is from France, from Paris. She is French. By the way, do you speak
French?
Alex: I am afraid I don't. I speak only two foreign languages, English and Spanish.
And I prefer to speak Spanish, as I know it much better than English.
Voitek : Oh, that's fine! Lucy speaks Spanish rather well. Her mother is from South
America. As for me I can't speak Spanish but I understand nearly everything.
Lucy and I are pen-friends.
Alex: Would you like to join me and my fellow-students? We can have a good time
together.
Voitek: That’d be lovely.
Alex: Come on, then
Vocabulary
Foreign; foreign language; Excuse me! (Apology used before troubling smb.) e. g. Excuse me!
May I ask you a question? Excuse my back!; Sorry! (I beg your) Pardon! (Apologies used after
doing smth. wrong.) e. g. Sorry, I didn't mean to hurt you. Mind: /Sorry! /Pardon! (Asking to repeat
smth.) e. g. Sorry! (Pardon!) Which street did you say?; introduce vt e. g. He introduced a new
method of working; to introduce smb. to smb. e. g. Will you introduce me to your sister? Let me
introduce myself. (Note: to acquaint smb. with smb. (or smth.) е. g. Mr. Hill acquainted Eric with
his work; to get acquainted with smb. Syn. to meet (col) e. g. We got acquainted last year. This is
John Smith, Ann. - Oh, glad to meet you. I've heard so much about you. Meet my sister Helen.; I am
ever so glad to meet you.; prefer; as for me; pen-friends; to join smb.; come on; jogging;
camping;
originally (adverb)e.g. My mom is originally from a small town in Texas.; currently (adverb)e.g.
She is currently working as a server at a restaurant.; attend (verb)e.g. I want to attend a school near
my family; junior (noun): third-year student e.g. He is only a junior, so he has another year to
graduate; major in (verb) e.g. I'm thinking about majoring in restaurant and hotel management;
cashier (noun): e.g. Kathy found a job as a cashier at a restaurant; grocery store (noun):
supermarket e.g. My brother works full time as the manager of a grocery store; hang out (phrasal
verb): spend time with, socialize e.g. We usually hang out with friends after school.
Cardinal points: the North, the South, the West, the East.
Continents: Europe, Asia, Africa, America, Australia [0:s'trellj=], the Antarctic.
Oceans: the Atlantic Ocean, the Pacific Ocean, the Indian Ocean, the Arctic Ocean.
Seas: the Black Sea, the Baltic Sea.
Rivers: the Thames, the Mississippi.
Islands: Great Britain, Ireland.
Chains of mountains: the Urals, the Alps.

24
The Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) consists of former Soviet Republics.
They are: Russia (Moscow), Ukraine (Kiev), Belarus (Minsk), Uzbekistan (Tashkent), Kazak(h)stan
(Alma-Ata), Georgia (Tbilisi), Azerbaijan (Baku), Moldova (Kishinev), Kirghizia (Bishkek),
Tadzhikistan (Dushanbe), Armenia (Erevan), Turkmenistan, Turkmenia (Ashgabat or Ashkhabad).

Country Nationality Official Language(s)

Australia Australian English
Austria Austrian Austrian
Belgium Belgian French or Flemish
Brazil Brazilian Portuguese
Britain British English
Canada Canadian English or French
China Chinese Mandarin
Denmark Danish Danish
Egypt Egyptian Arabic
England English English
Finland Finnish Finnish
France French French
Germany German German
Greece Greek Greek
Hungary Hungarian Hungarian
Italy Italian Italian
Japan Japanese Japanese
Korea Korean Korean
Mexico Mexican Spanish
Northern Ireland Irish English
Poland Polish Polish
Portugal Portuguese Portuguese
Romania Romanian Romanian
Scotland Scottish English or Gaelic
Afrikaans
South Africa South African
English
Southern Ireland Irish English
Spain Spanish Spanish
Sweden Swedish Swedish
Switzerland Swiss French / German / Italian
The Netherlands Dutch Dutch
25
Turkey Turkish Turkish
The UK British English
The USA American English
Wales Welsh English or Welsh
Country Capital City
Australia Canberra
Austria Vienna
Belgium Brussels
Brazil Brasilia
Britain London
Canada Ottawa
China Beijing
Denmark Copenhagen
Egypt Cairo
England London
Finland Helsinki
France Paris
Germany Berlin
Greece Athens
Hungary Budapest
Ireland (Northern) Belfast (regional capital)
Ireland (Southern) Dublin
Italy Rome
Japan Tokyo
Korea Seoul
Mexico Mexico City
Northern Ireland Belfast
Poland Warsaw
Portugal Lisbon
Romania Bookrest
Scotland Edinburgh (regional capital)
South Africa Cape Town
Southern Ireland Dublin
Spain Madrid
Sweden Stockholm
26
 Switzerland Bern
The Netherlands Amsterdam
Turkey Ankara
The USA Washington
Cardiff (regional capital)
Wales

The adjectives of nationalities are built with the addition of the suffixes “-ian, -an, -n, -ish, -ese, -i,
-ch, -er” to the names of the countries, or with changing the final vowel. Here are the models; the
change in the root is indicated with blue colour and the stressed syllable (in the list) with bold
letters:
• Egypt - Egyptian
• Chile - Chilean
• Algeria -Algerian
• Spain -Spanish
• China - Chinese
• Iraq - Iraqi
• France - French
• Iceland - Icelander
• Argentina - Argentine
How to ask about somebody’s nationality:
- Where do you come from?
- Where are you from?
- What nationality are you?

How to answer:
- I come from Algeria.
- I am from Algeria.
- I am Algerian
Notice: Nationality adjectives start with a capital letter.

My Friend Peter
My friend's name is Peter. Peter is from Amsterdam, in Holland. He is Dutch. He is married and has
two children. His wife, Jane, is American. She is from Boston in The United States. Her family is
still in Boston, but she now works and lives with Peter in Milan. They speak English, Dutch,
German and Italian! Their children are pupils at a local primary school. The children go to school
with other children from all over the world. Flora, their daughter, has friends from France,
Switzerland, Austria and Sweden. Hans, their son, goes to school with students from South Africa,
Portugal, Spain and Canada. Of course, there are many children from Italy. Imagine, French, Swiss,
Austrian, Swedish, South African, American, Italian, Spanish and Canadian children all learning
together in Italy!

Exercise 1. Multiple-choice comprehension check questions:

1. Where is Peter from?

27
a. Germany b. Holland c. Spain d. Canada
2. Where is his wife from?
a. New York b. Switzerland c. Boston d. Italy
3. Where are they now?
a. Madrid b. Boston c. Milan d. Sweden
4. Where is her family?
a. American b. England c. Holland d. Italy
5. What are the children's names?
a. Greta and Peter b. Anna and Frank c. Susan and John d. Flora and Hans
6. The school is:
a. international b. big c. small d. difficult

Exercise 2. True or false:

1. Jane is Canadian. 2. Peter is Dutch. 3. There are many children from different countries at the
school. 4. There are children from Australia at the school.

Exercise 3. Build short conversations. Use the vocabulary of this lesson and conversational
phrases.

Exercise 4. Answer the following questions:

1,What traditional holidays in our country do you know? 2. Is there a New-Year tree at your place
at that time? 3. When do we celebrate Mother's Day? 4. How do you mark this day in your family?
5. Which is the traditional holiday of teachers in our country? 6. When is your birthday? 7. Do you
always invite guests to your birthday party? 8. There is a tradition in some countries to put candles
on the birthday cake so that people can see how old you are. How do you like this tradition? 9. Do
you put candles on your birthday cake? Why?

Exercise 5.
a) Respond to the following sentences. Express your surprise or doubt as in the models:

Model 1: This is a good car.

Is it?
Model 2: This isn't a good car.
Isn't it?

1. This is a light room. 2. This is a big dog. 3. This is a dark garden. 4. This isn't a bad book. 5. This
is a nice animal. 6. This isn't a good shop. 7. This isn't a big city. 8. This is a long sentence. 9. This
isn't a thick exercise-book. 10. This is a difficult test. 11. This is an interesting story. 12. This isn't
a bad idea. 13. This isn't a clever answer. 14. This isn't a small park.

b) Go on with the exercise until everyone has participated. Work in pairs.

Exercise 6. Translate the following sentences in Romanian:

1. This shirt is old. 2. This city is large and that city is small. 3. This car is new and that car is old. 4.
28
This is a new textbook. 5. This textbook is good. 6. These are French students.

Exercise 7. Complete the following chart.

ME CLASSMATE 1 CLASSMATE 2
What’s your name?
How old are you?
What’s your address?
Male or female?
Marital status
(single, married,
divorced, separated)
Place of birth.
Where were you
born?
Date of birth
When were you
born?
What’s your
telephone number?

Exercise 8. Read and translate the following text:

This is John Smith. He’s Colombian but he lives in Brazil. He is a prisoner. Mr Smith is 33 years
old. He doesn’t work or study. Mr Smith cannot read or write but he can play the guitar very well.
He plays the guitar every day at 6:30 pm after dinner. The other prisoners all like his music. Mr
Smith likes POP ROCK but he doesn’t like SAMBA. Mr Smith likes Brazilian food and drinks…He
loves brown chocolate but he doesn’t like white chocolate. His room number in the prison is 333 on
the 3rd floor. People call Mr Smith "The Music Man". Mr Smith is a happy prisoner. He wakes up at
5:15am and has breakfast; he eats very much!!! He has black coffee and bread in the morning but he
doesn’t eat fruit or drink milk. He smokes very much!!!

Exercise 9. Read this information about a man who wants to open a bank account. Fill the
information on the application in the spaces provided:
Gordon Brown wants to open a bank account for himself and his family. He was born in Scotland,
but now he and his family live in London at 11 Dowdy St. His wife is called Margaret, and she is 45
years old - the same age as Gordon. Their two children, Tony and Roger, are at university.
APPLICATION
First name: Gordon
Family name: 1.
Age: 2.
Country of birth: 3.
Address: 4.
Wife's name: Margaret
Number of children: 5.
29
Exercise 10. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions. Then listen again and repeat
(T 1.1):

1. What is the man's name?

A. Craig B. Greg C. Gary
2. Where was the man born?
A. Arizona B. Kansas C. Colorado
3. Which sentence best describes his university studies?
A. He is a third-year student B. He is majoring in Spanish C. He really enjoys his studies
4. Where does the man work?
A. at a bookstore B. at a restaurant C. at a supermarket
5. What is one thing the man likes to do in his free time?
A. reading B. jogging C. camping

Lesson 3.

Grammar: 1. Possessive Case of Nouns

The possessive case of a noun or pronoun shows ownership or association. Nearly all nouns and
indefinite pronouns show possession by ending with the s sound. This is spelled with and
apostrophe plus an s.

adding 's of phrase

usually used for people usually used for things
Ronny's brother the name of the school

the room of my sister —my sister's room

the son of my friend — my friend's son
the answer of the student — the student's answer the
works of Marx — Marx's works
the books of the students — the students' books
the flat of my mother-in-law — my mother-in-law's flat
e. g. My brother's flat is large. The
girl's lace is pretty.
These are Byron's poems.
The students' answers are correct. My
daughter-in-law's room is small.
1) Possessive case of a singular noun that does not end in s is formed by adding
anapostrophe and s:
e.g.:The teacher’s pen is missing.One of Italy’s best is pizza.My favorite color is same as Ana’s.

2) Possessive case of a singular noun that ends in s is formed by adding anapostrophe and s, or
an apostrophe only:
e.g.:Kris’s new bag is expensive. (or Kris’ new bag) The bus’s tires are flat. (or bus’ tires)
Dolores’s class is Biology. (or Dolores’ class)

30
3) Possessive case of a plural noun that does not end in s is formed by adding anapostrophe and s:
e.g.:The children’s favorite food is spaghetti.The men’s basketball team is ready.People’s choice is
you.

4) Possessive case of a plural noun that ends in s is formed by adding anapostrophe only:
e.g.:The boys’ average is slightly higher that the girls’.The managers’ meeting is
cancelled.The doctors’ symposium is on Friday.

5) Possessive case of multiple nouns showing individual possession is formed by adding

an apostrophe and s to each possessing noun:
e.g.:John’s, Ben’s and Kaye’s artworks are equally beautiful.
6) Possessive case of multiple nouns showing joint possession is formed by adding
an apostrophe and s to the last possessing noun:
e.g.:Ken and Mary’s joint savings account is with a rural bank.
The possessive case is also known as the genitive case.

3. Degrees of Comparison of Adjectives

Comparative
taller
younger
She is prettier her friend.
than her sister.
her brother,
more beautiful
tired

Superlative
the tallest
the oldest
the busiest
She is of all the students in her group.

the beautiful
most capable
active

31
Degrees of Comparison are used when we compare one person or one thing with another. There are
three Degrees of Comparison in English. They are:
1. Positive degree. 2. Comparative degree. 3. Superlative degree.
Let us see all of them one by one. 1. Positive degree. When we speak about only one person or
thing, We use the Positive degree.

e.g.:
• This house is big. In this sentence only one noun “The house” is talked about.
• He is a tall student.
• This flower is beautiful. He is an intelligent boy.
Each sentence mentioned above talks about only one noun.
The second one in the Degrees of Comparison is... 2. Comparative degree. When we compare two
persons or two things with each other, we use both the Positive degree and Comparative degree.
e.g.:
a. This house is bigger than that one. (Comparative degree). This house is not as big as that one.
(Positive degree). The term “bigger” is comparative version of the term “big”. Both these sentences
convey the same meaning.
b. This flower is more beautiful than that. (Comparative). This flower is not as beautiful as that.
(Positive). The term “more beautiful” is comparative version of the term “beautiful”. Both these
sentences convey the same meaning.
c. He is more intelligent than this boy. (Comparative). He is not as intelligent as this boy. (Positive)
The term “more intelligent” is comparative version of the term “intelligent”. Both these sentences
convey the same meaning.
d. He is taller than Mr. Hulas. (Comparative) He is not as tall as Mr. Hulas. (Positive)
The term “taller” is comparative version of the term “tall”. Both these sentences convey the same
meaning.
When we compare more than two persons or things with one another, we use all the three Positive,
Comparative and Superlative degrees.
e.g.:
a. This is the biggest house in this street. (Superlative)This house is bigger than any other house in
this street. (Comparative) No other house in this street is as big as this one. (Positive)
The term “biggest” is the superlative version of the term “big”. All the three sentences mean the
same meaning.
b. This flower is the most beautiful one in this garden. (Superlative) This flower is more beautiful
than any other flower in this garden. (Comparative)No other flower in this garden is as beautiful as
this one. (Comparative)
The term “most beautiful” is the superlative version of the term “beautiful”. All the three sentences
mean the same meaning.
c. He is the most intelligent in this class. (Superlative) He is more intelligent than other boys in the
class. (Comparative) No other boy is as intelligent as this boy. (Positive)
The term “most intelligent” is superlative version of the term “intelligent”. Both these sentences
convey the same meaning.
d. He is the tallest student in this class. (Superlative) He is taller than other students in this class.
(Comparative) No other student is as tall as this student. (Positive)
The term “tallest” is superlative version of the term “tall”.

32
 Adjectives of one syllable
Adjectives of one syllable add -er and -est.Adjectives ending on 'e' just add -r and -st.
Some adjectives double the final consonant.

Adjective Comparative Superlative

small smaller smallest
warm warmer warmest
old older oldest
nice nicer nicest
big bigger biggest

Adjectives of two syllables

Some adjectives of two syllables add -er and -est.Adjectives ending in 'y' use -ier and -iest.
Adjectives ending in -ful, -less, -ing, -ed use more and most.
Some other adjectives of two syllables use more and most (modern, famous, normal, correct, ...).

Adjective Comparative Superlative

narrow narrower narrowest
happy happier happiest
useful more useful most useful
boring more boring most boring
modern more modern most modern
Adjectives of three or more syllables
Adjectives of three or more syllables use more and most.

Adjective Comparative Superlative

beautiful More beautiful most beautiful
dangerous more dangerous most dangerous
exciting more exciting most exciting

Irregular adjectives
You will have to learn these by heart.

Adjective Comparative Superlative

good (well) better best
bad worse worst
little less least
much,many more most
far farther/further farthest/furthest
late later last, latest
old older, elder oldest, eldest

4. Present Simple

The simple present tense in English is used to describe an action that is regular, true or normal. We
33
use the present tense:
1. For repeated or regular actions in the present time period.
• I take the train to the office.
• The train to Berlin leaves every hour.
• John sleeps eight hours every night during the week.
2. For facts.
• The President of The USA lives in The White House.
• A dog has four legs.
• We come from Switzerland.
3. For habits.
• I get up early every day.
• Carol brushes her teeth twice a day.
• They travel to their country house every weekend.
4. For things that are always / generally true.
• It rains a lot in winter.
• The Queen of England lives in Buckingham Palace.
• They speak English at work.

Verb Conjugation & Spelling

We form the present tense using the base form of the infinitive (without the TO).
In general, in the third person we add 'S' in the third person.
Subject Verb The Rest of the sentence
I / you / we / they speak / learn English at home
he / she / it speaks / learns English at home

The spelling for the verb in the third person differs depending on the ending of that verb:
1. For verbs that end in -O, -CH, -SH, -SS, -X, or -Z we add -ES in the third person.
• go – goes
• catch – catches
• wash – washes
• kiss – kisses
• fix – fixes
• buzz – buzzes
2. For verbs that end in a consonant + Y, we remove the Y and add -IES.
• marry – marries
• study – studies
• carry – carries
• worry – worries
NOTE: For verbs that end in a vowel + Y, we just add -S.
• play – plays
• enjoy – enjoys
• say – says
Negative Sentences in the Simple Present Tense
To make a negative sentence in English we normally use Don't or Doesn't with all verbs
EXCEPT To Beand Modal verbs (can, might, should etc.).
• Affirmative: You speak French.
34
 Negative: You don't speak French.
You will see that we add don't between the subject and the verb. We use Don't when the subject
is I, you,we or they.
• Affirmative: He speaks German.
Negative: He doesn't speak German.
When the subject is he, she or it, we add doesn't between the subject and the verb to make a
negative sentence. Notice that the letter S at the end of the verb in the affirmative sentence (because
it is in third person) disappears in the negative sentence. We will see the reason why below.
Negative Contractions
Don't = Do not Doesn't = Does not
I don't like meat = I do not like meat.
There is no difference in meaning though we normally use contractions in spoken English.

Word Order of Negative Sentences

The following is the word order to construct a basic negative sentence in English in the Present
Tense using Don't or Doesn't.
Subject don't/doesn't Verb* The Rest of the sentence
I / you / we / they don't have / buy
cereal for breakfast
he / she / it doesn't eat / like etc.
* Verb: The verb that goes here is the base form of the infinitive = The infinitive without TO before
the verb. Instead of the infinitive To have it is just the have part.
Remember that the infinitive is the verb before it is conjugated (changed) and it begins with TO. For
example: to have, to eat, to go, to live, to speak etc.
Examples of Negative Sentences with Don't and Doesn't:
• You don't speak Arabic.
• John doesn't speak Italian.
• We don't have time for a rest.
• It doesn't move.
• They don't want to go to the party.
• She doesn't like fish.
Questions in the Simple Present Tense
To make a question in English we normally use Do or Does. It has no translation in Spanish though
it is essential to show we are making a question. It is normally put at the beginning of the question.
• Affirmative: You speak English.
Question: Do you speak English?
You will see that we add DO at the beginning of the affirmative sentence to make it a question. We
use Do when the subject is I, you, we or they.
• Affirmative: He speaks French.
Question: Does he speak French?
When the subject is he, she or it, we add DOES at the beginning to make the affirmative sentence a
question. Notice that the letter S at the end of the verb in the affirmative sentence (because it is in
third person) disappears in the question. We will see the reason why below.
We DON'T use Do or Does in questions that have the verb To Be or Modal Verbs (can, must,
might, should etc.)

35
 Word Order of Questions with Do and Does
The following is the word order to construct a basic question in English using Do or Does.
Do/Does Subject Verb* The Rest of the sentence
Do I / you / we / they have / need
a new bike?
Does he / she / it want etc.
*Verb: The verb that goes here is the base form of the infinitive = The infinitive without TO before
the verb. Instead of the infinitive To have it is just the have part.
Remember that the infinitive is the verb before it is conjugated (changed) and it begins with TO. For
example: to have, to eat, to go, to live, to speak etc.
Examples of Questions with Do and Does:
• Do you need a dictionary?
• Does Mary need a dictionary?
• Do we have a meeting now?
• Does it rain a lot in winter?
• Do they want to go to the party?
• Does he like pizza?
Short Answers with Do and Does
In questions that use do/does it is possible to give short answers to direct questions as follows:
Short Answer Short Answer
Sample Questions
(Affirmative) (Negative)
Do you like chocolate? Yes, I do. No, I don't.
Do I need a pencil? Yes, you do. No, you don't.
Do you both like chocolate? Yes, we do. No, we don't.
Do they like chocolate? Yes, they do. No, they don't.
Does he like chocolate? Yes, he does. No, he doesn't.
Does she like chocolate? Yes, she does. No, she doesn't.
Does it have four wheels? Yes, it does. No, it doesn't.
However, if a question word such as who, when, where, why, which or how is used in the question,
you can not use the short answers above to respond to the question.

Grammar Exercises:
Exercise 1. Fill in am, is, are:

1.I an English student. 2. His name George Brown. 3. Mr. and Mrs. Brown his father
and mother. 4. My brother's name Benny, and my sisters' names Betty and Rose. 5. We
members of one family. 6. Helen married? 7. they married? 8. Mr. Sandford Betty's brother-in-
law. 9. How old you? – I eighteen. 10. What you all? -We all students.
11. your girl-friends students? 12. Betty's school-mates kind and jolly? 13. His companions
well-bred. 14. Benny eager to have a dog? 15. She a naughty child. 16. I eager to
have a girl-friend. 17. I two years younger than my cousin. 18. He as young as his boy-
friend. 19. My niece eighteen months old.
36
Exercise 2. Fill the gaps with the possessive case of nouns: Decide whether you have to use 's or
an of phrase:

1.The boy has a toy. → It's the 2. Peter has a book. → It's 3. The magazine has my picture
on its cover. → My picture is on 4. Our friends live in this house. → It's 5. There is milk in
the glass. → It's 6. This house has a number. → What is ? 7. The walk lasts two hours. →
It's 8. John has a sister, Jane. → Jane is is 9. The film has a name, "Scream". → "Scream"
10. This school is for girls only. → It's a .
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
______________________________________
_____________________________________

37
 Exercise 3. Write in the possessive case form in the plural:
1. Steve has two brothers. Mother said Steve is not allowed to take his (brother) toys
without asking. 2. The (woman) national football team won a great victory on Saturday. 3.
The zoo keeper did his round and put food in all the (animal) cages. 4. The first day of
the summer holidays is the school (child) favourite day of the year. 5. Hannah has lots of
friends. Two of them have their birthday on the same day. Hannah is buying a dress for
her (friend) joint birthday party.
Exercise 4. Give the degrees of comparison of the following adjectives and transcribe them:

short, tall, large, nice, long, big, red, high, dirty, fast, easy, good, bad, few, busy, near, far, old,
late, thin, thick, comfortable, interesting, difficult, narrow.

Exercise 5. Rewrite the following sentences changing as ... as into not so… as or not as ... as:

1. She is as young as you are. 2. He is as clever as his father is. 3. I am as tired as you are. 4.
My mother is as old as yours. 5. This book is as interesting as that one. 6. These dictations are
as bad as those ones. 7. My father is as tall as yours. 8. His daughter is as beautiful as his wife.
9. My room is as light as yours. 10. This new house is as big as the old one. 11. This boy is as
clever as that one.

Exercise 6. Rewrite the following sentences changing not so ... as into less ... than:

1. She is not so tired as I am. 2. The child is not so sleepy as you are. 3. This task is
not so important as that one. 4. This book is not so interesting as that one. 5. Spanish is not so
difficult as Chinese. 6. There is not so much ink in my fountain-pen as in yours.

Exercise 7. Put the verbs into the correct form:

1.I (to like) lemonade very much. 2. The girls (to listen) to pop music. 3. Janet (not/to
wear) jeans. 4. Mr Smith (to teach) Spanish and French. 5. You (to do) your homework
after school.

Exercise 8. Simple present with 'have' and 'be'. Fill in the correct form of the verbs:

1.We (to have) a nice garden. 2. She (to be) six years old. 3. Simon (to have)
two rabbits and five goldfish. 4. I (to be) from Vienna,
Austria. 5. They (to be) Sandy's parents.

Exercise 9.Make the following sentences negative in Present Simple Tense:

1.My father makes breakfast. 2. They are eleven. 3. She writes a letter. 4. I speak Italian.
5. Danny phones his father on Sundays.

Exercise 10. Make the interrogative form of the following sentences:

1. you / to speak / English . 2. when / he / to go / home. 3. they / to clean / the bathroom. 4.
where / she / to ride / her bike. 5. Billy / to work / in the supermarket.
38
 MY FAMILY
Betty Smith
I am Betty Smith. My full name is Elizabeth Louise Smith. I am twenty-two. I am a
college graduate. I am a writer, just a beginner, you know. I have a lot of friends. Most of
them are my former school-mates. My best companions are two girl-friends. They are
very kind, jolly and well-bred.
My brother-in-law, Henry Sandford, is married to my elder sister Helen. I am a member of
her family. My brother-in-law is a doctor. He has a mother, but he has no father. My sister is
a house- wife. They have only one child, Benny. Benny is my nephew, he is four. Sometimes
he is naughty. He is fond of birds and animals. We have white mice, a hedgehog and a
parrot in the house. Now Benny is eager to have a rabbit. But his mother is against it, we
have no peace because of all Benny's animals and birds.

Text 1.
My name is Jack. This is my family. My mother’s name is Sarah and my father’s name is
Fred. I have a sister. Her name is Jenny. She is two years old. My father’s favourite foods are
oranges and cakes. He likes cats and goats. He can drive a car and play football. My mother’s
favourite foods are bananas and juice. She likes dogs and horses. She can cook a meal and
dance. My sister’s favourite foods are biscuits and milk. She likes rabbits and birds. She can
speak but she can’t write. We have got a cat and a dog. Daffy is our cat and Daisy is our dog.
We like them!

Text 2.
Martin is my grandfather. His hair is grey and he wears a moustache. His eyes are black.
Lorena is my grandmother. Her hair is grey too and she’s got blue eyes. Martin was a carpenter
but now he is retired. Lorena was a dressmaker but now she doesn’t sew. Sonia is Martin and
Lorena’s daughter. She is my mom and she is the best in the world. She’s got brown hair and
green eyes. My father’s name is Stephen. He’s got short blond hair and a moustache. He is
very funny. My parents own a sweet shop and our house is at the back. There is a small garden.
My name is Carol. I’m four years old. I’ve got long brown hair and green eyes. I’m wearing
pink top and blue trousers. I’ve got three brothers. Thomas is five years old and Alex and
Tommy are three. They are twin. We have got a big cat and a small hamster. We love animals.

Vocabulary
I am twenty-two.: How old are you? I am nineteen (years old).;a college graduate; I'm a
college graduate; just a beginner; former; school-mate; a fellow-student; companion; girl-
friend; boy- friend; jolly; well-bred; elder; older; Eg. My elder sister is 28. She is two years
older than I. I am two years younger than my sister.; house-wife; Naughty; to be fond of
smth; to like; to be eager; to be against; peace (piece).
Relations by Birth: parents, father, siblings, mother, sister, brother, son, daughter,
grandfather, grandmother, grandson, granddaughter, grandchildren, grandparents, great-
grandfather, great- grandmother, great-grandchildren, uncle, aunt, cousin, nephew, niece.
Relations by Marriage: husband, wife, father-in-law, mother-in-law, son-in-law, daughter-in-
law, brother-in-law, sister-in-law, stepmother, stepfather, stepchildren, stepbrother (sister, son,
daughter)
People's Age:
39
 What's your age? (How old are you?)
I am seventeen. I am seventeen years old. I am under
seventeen. I am over seventeen. I am nearly eighteen.
I am under age yet. = I am not yet
eighteen. In three months’ time I'll come
of age.
She is still in her teens (13-19). She is a teen-
ager. She is in her (early, mid, late) teens.
She is in her (early, late) thirties (i. e. between 29 and
40). She is a middle-aged person.
She is an elderly person.
Animals and birds (domestic): horse, cow, dog, cat, goat, pig, swine, ass, rabbit, hen, cock,
goose (geese), duck, turkey
Animals and birds (wild): lion, tiger, wolf (wolves), bear, fox, hare, elephant, mouse
(mice), monkey, hedgehog, eagle, swan, sparrow, swallow, parrot, pigeon, donkey

Conversational phrases
Agreement: Sure. Why, yes of course. By all means. That'd be lovely. I'd be glad to. How
nice of you. It (certainly) is.
Disagreement: By no means. Far from it. I'm afraid I don't agree. I think you're mistaken. Just
the other way round. I'd like to say yes, but... I'm awfully sorry but you see...

Exercise 1. Transcribe the following words and explain the reading rules:

five, tip, bed, pipe, land, fry, rule, ton, tone, pupil, love, cut, shade, brother, shall, bus, snack,
blame, poke, found, aloud, green, town, toy, farm, yellow, glove, warm, some, won, worse,
nothing, mild, world, month, worth, company, worship, none, find, wild, ought, above, brought.

Exercise 2. Find the correct answer for the following questions. Choose A,B,Cor D:

1.What are Fred’s favourite foods?

a. sandwiches and apples b. juice and bananas c. cakes and milk d. oranges and cakes 2.
2. What can Fred do?
a. He can ride a bike. b. He can drive a car. c. He can read. d. He can dance.
3. What are their cats’ and dog’s names?
a.cat-Fred, dog-Sam b.cat-Daisy, dog-Daffy c.cat-Daffy, dog Daisy d.cat-Santa, dog-
Sarahl 4.What does Sarah like?
a. She likes dogs. b. She likes rabbits. c. She likes cats. d. She likes
ducks. 5.What are Jenny’s favourite foods?
a. sandwiches and apples b. biscuits and milk c. bananas and juice d. apples and cakes
6. What can Sarah do?
a. She can swim. b. She can drive a car. c. She can speak. d. She can cook a meal.
7. What does Jenny like?
a. She likes rabbits b. She likes horses. c. She likes ducks. d. She likes goats.

Exercise 3. a)Complete the following general questions to make them

40
 alternative: Model : Is he busy? - —► Is he busy or free?
1. Are they in the garden...? 2. Is your sister at the Institute ...? 3. Is Doctor Sandford at
the hospital...? 4. Is his wife in the park ...? 5. Is the exercise easy...? 6. Is Betty nineteen ...?
7. Is the hall big...? 8. Are you free on Saturday ...? 9. Are these lessons difficult...? 10. Is this
sentence long
...?

Exercise 4. Let the members of the class ask and answer questions as in the model.
Use contracted forms:

Model 1 : Is she as tall as her friend?

She's much taller than her friend.
Model 2 : Is Nina active?
She's the most active of all.

Exercise 5. Build short conversations. Use the vocabulary of this lesson and the
conversational phrases.

Exercise 6. Write a composition “My Family”. Use the Unit 1 vocabulary and
the conversational phrases.

Exercise 7. Give answers to the following questions about your family members:

Father’s name:
Date of birth; Place of birth; Occupation; Place of work; Hobbies and interests; Sports he plays;
Instruments he practices; Favourite food;
Mother’s name:
Date of birth; Place of birth; Occupation; Hobbies and interests; Sports she plays; Favourite food;
Number of sisters and brothers:

Exercise 8. Complete these sentences:

1. My sister is my father's . 2. My brother is my mother's _ . 3. My is my mother's

sister. 4. My is my brother's daughter. 5.My is my brother's son. 6. My sister-in-law is my
brother's . 7. My brother-in-law is my sister's .

Exercise 9. Write a note of about 80 words:

You are going away for a few days, and your friend will visit your house to feed your pet.
Points to include in your note:
• thank your friend for help
• say where you keep the food
• what to do if there are any problems

41
Exercise 10. Here are some pets for you to choose. Working with your partner, arrange
them in the order that you would like to have them. Which one would you like most?
Which would you like least? Why?

Exercise 11. Listening activity (T 1.2):

a) Imagine you are a five-year-old girl, and your father asks you about your day. What
activities do little children (in this case, a little girl) do during the day at that age?
b) Listen to a conversation between the father and his daughter, after, answer the
following questions:
1. In addition to paper books, what did the little girl make with paper at school ?
A. an animal B. a person C. a building
2. What thing did she NOT talk about when making the object in Question 1?
A. paper B. glue C. scissors
3. What did the girl do after school?
A. She rode her bicycle B. She watched television C. She went to the store
4. Who did she meet and play with at the junior high school?
A. her teacher B. her cousins C. her father
5. Where does this conversation most probably take place?
A. at a house B. at school C. at a park
c) Listen again and repeat (T 1.2):
d) Talk about your family with a partner using some of these questions:
• How many people are in your family?
• What do your parents do?
• What kinds of activities does your family do together?
• What is one thing you like or dislike about your family?

Exercise 12. A) Listen to a conversation and find answers for the next questions (T 1.3):

42
1. Where is Pancho from? A. Paraguay B. Peru C. Portugal
2. How many brothers and sisters does Pancho have? A. 11 B. 12 C. 13
3. What is his father's job? A. taxi driver B. dentist C. police officer
4. What does his mother do? A. She owns a beauty salon B. She runs a small family store
C. She works at a bread shop
5. Which thing does Pancho NOT say? A. His brothers and sisters help his mom B. His
mom sells food like eggs and sugar
C. His mother enjoys her job very much
B) Listen again and repeat.

Exercise 14. a) Listen then, select the correct answer for each sentence, which may be
missing one or more words (T 1.4):
1. What's your ?
A. I'm Nancy B. I'm from England C. I'm a student
2. Where do you ?
A. I'm from Canada B. I live in Chicago C. I'm fine
3. How's ?
A. Okay B. I'm going to school C. No problem
4. does she ?
A. She likes to work B. She's a teacher C. She works at City Bank
5. they ?
A. They're from Mexico B. They are in school C. They live in Tokyo
6. ?
A. I'm getting married soon B My father is a doctor C. I have three brothers
7. ?
A. I'm fine B. Nothing much C. That's too bad
8. ?
A. He's Japanese B. He's from Italy C. He's an engineer
9. ?
A. I like to exercise B. I'm busy this weekend C. I don't like sports
10. ?
A. He lives in Hong Kong B. He works downtown C. He's a doctor
b) Listen again and repeat (T 1.4):

15. a) Listen and select the correct answer for each sentence or question, which may be
missing one or more words (T 1.5):

1. Hi. Haven't we before?

A. Yes. I believe we have B. Nice to meet you too C. Nothing special
2. Long time, .
A. I see you too. B. It has been a long time. C. How about you?
3. Hi, how's ?
A. Five people. B. Oh really? C. They're fine.
4. So, ?
A. Pretty good. B. That's too bad. C. Nothing much.
5. Did you hear ?
A. Oh, what a shame. B. Hey, that's fantastic. C. I like my job too.
43
6. Have you from Bill ?
A. Yes. He's still working downtown. B. No. Bill is not here now. C. Yes. Bill is twenty-three.
7. ?
A. I'm going skiing. B. Same to you. C. I like weekends a lot.
8. ?
A. And you? B. I'll tell him. C. You too.
9. ?
A. I will. B. Hello brother. C. Same to you.
10. ?
A. You too. B. I'll get home soon. C. I know the way home.
b) Listen again and repeat. (T 1.5)

44
Unit II
Lesson 1.

Grammar: 1. Adverbs of Frequency

• We often use adverbs of frequency with the present simple.

Always 100% Frequency adverbs usually occur in the middle

Usually 75 % of a sentence and have special positions as
Often 50 % shown in examples (a) through (e) below.
Sometimes 25% I sometimes get up at 6:30.
Rarely /seldom 10% Sometimss I get up at 6:30.
Never 0% I get up at 6:30 sometimes.
Positive : Always , Almost always,
Usually, Often , Frequently,
45
Generally, Sometimes, Occasionally.
Negative : Seldom , Rarely, Hardly
ever, Almost never, Not ever, never
SUBJECT + FREQ. ADV. + VERB Frequency adverbs usually come between the
a) Karen always tells the subject and the simple present verb (except
truth. main verb be).
SUBJECT + BE + FREQ. ADV. Frequency adverbs follow be in the simple
b) Karen is always on time. present (am, is, are) and simple past (was, were).
c) Do you always eat breakfast? In a question, frequency adverbs come directly
after the subject.
d) Ann usually doesn't eat breakfast. In a negative sentence, most frequency adverbs
come in front of a negative verb (except always
and ever).
e) Sue doesn't always s eat breakfast. Always follows a negative helping verb or
negative be.
f) CORRECT: Anna never eats meat. Negative adverbs (sekiom, rarely, hardy ever,
never) are NOT used with a negative verb.
g) INCORRECT: Anna doesn't never
ea t meat.
h) - Do you ever take the bus to work? Ever is used in questions about frequency, as in
-Yes, I do. I often take the bus. (h). It means "at any time."
Ever is also used with not, as in (i).
i) I don't ever walk to work. Ever is NOT used in statements.

j) INCORRECT: I ever walk to work.

2. Prepositions of Time

They decorate a tree at Christmas .

In the summer, they go to the beach.
My grandfather takes him to the park on Sunday mornings.

We use prepositions of time to say when something happens, happened or will

happen . The most common ones are at, in, and on.
e.g. He goes to school at eight o’clock in the morning.

AT IN ON
the time : at 7 o’clock months : in September, in May days : on Monday
etc. on New
holidays : at Christmas Year’s Day
at Easter seasons : in the winter/
spring/autumn, etc. dates: on May 6th

in the at the weekend years : in 1996, in 1998, etc. part of a particular

expressions : at the moment day : on Tuesday
at present centuries : in the 20th century evening
46
 at dawn
at noon in the expressions : in the
at night morning/afternoon/ evenings adjective +
at midnight in an hour day : on a
in a minute hot day.
in a week/ few days/ month/
year.

Note: We do not use prepositions of time:

a) With the words today, tomorrow, tonight , or yesterday.
e.g. Come to my house tomorrow morning.
b) Before the words this, last , next, every, all, some, each, one, or any.
this……(this morning / this week etc.,)
every …..(every day/ every week , etc., ) last
…….(last August/ last week, etc., ) next
…… ( next Monday/ next week, etc. )
e.g. They are going on holiday next Monday. ( not on next Monday. )

3. Prepositions of Place
We use prepositions of place to say where somebody or something is. These includes: on,
under, in front of, behind, beside/ next to, near, at, in , between and among. We use
between to say that somebody or something is in the middle of two other things or people. We
use among to say that somebody or something is in the middle of three or more things or
people.
e.g. The mouse is on the table. The
mouse is under the table.
The mouse is behind the sofa. The
mouse is near the TV – Set.
The mouse is in the Telephone Box.
The mouse is at the cinema.
The mouse is in front of the TV – Set.

We use at :
• In the expressions :
at school/ university/ college/ at work/ at home/ at the top of …, at the bottom
of…
• With addresses when we mention the house number :
At 20, Oxford Street, BUT in Oxford Sreet
We use in :
• In the expressions :
In the middle, in the air, in the sky, in bed, in hospital, in prison, in a
newspaper/ magazine, in a picture
• With names of cities, countries and continents :
In Athens, in England, in Europe, in Australia

We use on :
47
 • In the expressions :
On the left, on the right, on the first/ second , etc., floor

We say:
On a chair but in an armchair

4. Prepositions of Movement

We use the prepositions of movement to show the direction in which somebody or something is
moving. These includes : over, along, across, up, down, into, out of, round, onto, through and
from … to… .

e.g. The plane is flying over the city.

The car is going along the street.
The man is walking across the street.
The boy is going up the hill.
48
 The girl is going down the hill.
The man is getting into the taxi.
The woman is getting out of the taxi.
The policeman is coming round the corner. The
thief is jumping onto the truck.
The bus is going through a tunnel.
The bus is going from London to Oxford.

NOTE: When we talk about a means of transport, we use the preposition by.
e.g. by car/ bus/train/ taxi/ plane/ boat/ BUT:
on foot

Grammar exercises: Exercise

1. Put the words in the correct order to make sentences:

1. always / France/to/go/we/spring/in

2. stay/ hotel/a/usually/ we/in

3. plane/sometimes /by /go/we

4. sometimes/ Eurostar /go/we/ by

Exercise 2. Answer the questions about you. Use an adverb of frequency in your answer:

1. How do you come to school?

I usually walk.
2. What’s the first thing you do in the morning?

3. Do you have tea or coffee for breakfast?

4. What do you do in the evenings ?

5. What do you do on Sundays?

6. Where do you go on holiday ?

7. Do you have a winter holiday?

8. What does your family do at Christmas ?

We

Exercise 3. Directions: Answer the questions. Discuss the meaning of the frequency adverbs:

49
What is something that….
1. you seldom do? 2. you often do before you go to bed? 3. a polite person often does? 4. a polite
person never does? 5. I frequently do in class? 6. I usually don't do in class? 7. you rarely eat? 8. you
occasionally do after class? 9. drivers generally do? 10. people in your country always or usually do
to celebrate the NewYear?

Exercise 4. Fill in at, in, or on as in the example :

1. On Saturday. 8. Christmas.
2. July. 9. the evening.
3. 1984. 10. winter.
4. March 25th. 11. 9 o clock
5. Friday. 12. half past two.
6. summer. 13. noon.
7. the morning. 14. Monday.

Exercise 5. Complete the sentences with in , on, or at.

1. summer I play tennis Sundays. 2. The train leaves Paris 4 p.m. 3.

He likes playing football weekends. 4. My brother’s birthday is March. 5. They
often eat in a restaurant Friday. 6. Vancouver is very cold Winter.

Exercise 6. Write at/on/in.

1. Goodbye ! See you on Friday. 2. Where were you 28 February ? 3. I got up 8

o’clock this morning. 4. I like getting up early the morning. 5. My sister got married
May. 6. Diane and I first met 1979. 7. Did you go out Saturday? 8. I’m starting my
new job 3 June. 9. We often go to the beach summer. 10. George isn’t here
the moment. 11. Julia’s birthday is January. 12. Do you work Saturdays?
13. I will send you the money the end of this month. 14. autumn , the leaves fall
from the trees. 15. The company started 1969. 16. I often go away the week-end. 17. I
like looking at the stars in the sky night. 18. Let’s meet 7.30 tomorrow evening.

Exercise 7. Fill in prepositions:

1. Don't be late. Come nine o'clock. 2. What time is it now? It is half six. 3. We are going
to leave a quarter ten. 4. It is twelve o'clock now. Come here in ten minutes, ten minutes
twelve. 5. Is it a quarter three? In a quarter of an hour, three o'clock we must be
the University. 6. He must work seven eleven o'clock. 7. They live the
North our country.

Exercise 8. First, fill in the gaps with the correct preposition, then answer the questions:

1. What time do you get up in the morning? I usually get up at half past seven.
2. What do you like doing the week-end? 3. Where do you usually go
Easter? 4. What do you usually do Friday evenings? 5. What do you wear
a cold winter day?6. What are you doing the moment? 7. What time do you
50
 go to bed night? 8. Do you eat lunch noon? 9. What do you usually do
Christmas day?

Exercise 9. Underline the correct word(s) :

1. There is a nice picture of our town on/at/in this magazine. 2. The dog is hiding in/under/on
the chair. 3. Let’s go shopping in/at/opposite Oxford Street. 4. Read the note at/under/in the
bottom of the page. 5. The Jacksons live at/in/on the second floor. 6. John is in / near/ behind bed
at the moment. He’s not feeling very well. 7. The bakery is at/ opposite/ on the park. 8.
Grandmother loves sitting on/at/in her favourite armchair by the fire. 9. Sarah sits under / beside
/in me at school. 10. My house is between / on/ among the bank and the post office. 11. Let’s meet
at/ on/ between the theatres. 12. Look at the stars between / in/ at the sky.

Exercise 10. Fill in the gaps with at , on, in , behind or next to. Some of them can be used more
than once.

This is Mrs Jacobs. She’s a teacher. This is her classroom . There are some shelves (1) on the wall.
There are a lot of books (2) the shelves. There are some children, they are sitting
(4) a table. (5) the table there is a small basket. The
children keep their crayons and pencils (6) this basket. Mrs Jacobs is standing (7) the table,
(8) John . John is standing up, but the other children are sitting (9) their
chairs.

Exercise 11. Underline the correct preposition .

The two men are (1) on /over the floor. They have been fighting and they have just fallen (2) up /
down the stairs together. One of them is crawling (3) along / through the floor. He is trying to
escape. The other man , who is (4) between / behind him, is also (5)on / at the floor. They are both
quite (6) near / in the door. The first man wants to get (7) out of /through the room . (8) Near/
Over the two men there is a table which has a plant (9) onto / on it.

Exercise 12. Look at the picture and read the text. Then cover the text and try to answer the
questions that follow it:

51
Exercise 13. Look at the picture and fill in : “ in”, “ beside”, “behind”, “ into”, “ out of”, “ under, “in front of”, or
“on . ”

MY WORLD

„Daily Routines”
What are some of the daily activities that you do at home?
I wake up at 7am every morning. I press the snooze button five times every morning before I turn
off the alarm and get up.I have a cup of coffee and make breakfast. I usually read the
newspaper while I have breakfast. My children like to have a shower after they have breakfast but
I like to have a shower before I get dressed. My wife brushes her long hair, and I have short hair
so I comb my hair. How do you do your hair in the morning? It is important to brush your teeth,
and some women like to put make-up on.After I have finished work, I go home to cook dinner. In
my house I usually make dinner. The family eat dinner together at 7:30pm. After dinner I make
sure that my children do their homework, and then I chill out on the sofa and watch
television. On television I usually watch the News. My wife usually comes to tell me to take the
rubbish out, or wash the dishes. Our children feed the dog and the cat before they go to bed and I
tell them to go to the bathroom too. If I am sick I have to take my medication, but then I get into
my pyjamas and set the alarm so I wake up in the morning. The last things I do is lock the
door, turn off the lights, and go to bed.
What are some daily activities that you do at work?
I go to work at 8.45 am every morning. I usually drive to work. I always check my emails when I
get to work, but I don't always reply to them immediately. I take a taxi or a train if I have a lunch
meeting. I never take the bus because it is too slow. When I am at my desk I usually work on the
computer, even during morning tea. At 1 p.m. most days I have lunch. At 3pm we have
afternoon tea, and that is when we usually talk and eat cake. When you are in the office you
probably have a lot of papers. It is important for you to file your papers,and so that you can find
them again you need to organise your files. When I work I have to make telephone calls. If an
important issue happens I ask my secretary to organise a meeting. Once a month I report to my
boss, but may be you have to report to your boss more often. I usually write a document that my
boss can read.
52
Exercise 1. Describe your typical day:

Exercise 2. What do you do first in the day? What do you do next? Number the activities in
the correct order for you .
have lunch
have shower
go to work
have breakfast
start work
go home
get dressed
have dinner
watch television
get up
read a book
go to bed
leave home

What’s the Time in English ?

There are two common ways of telling time:

Formal but easier way
Say the hours first and then the minutes .
Example : 7: 45 – seven forty- five.
For minutes 01 through 09 , you can pronounce the „0” as oh.
Example : 11: 06 – eleven (oh) six.

More popular way

Say the minutes first and then the hours. Use past and the preceding hour for minutes 01 through 30.
Use to and the forth coming hour for minutes 31 through 59.
Example : 7.15 – fifteen minutes past seven.
Example : 7.45 – fifteen minutes to eight.
Another possibility of saying 15 minutes past is : a quarter past
Another possibility of saying 15 minutes to is : a quarter to
Another possibility of saying 30 minutes past is : half past
Example : 5:30 – half past five.

53
54
Exercise 1. Look at the clocks. Write the times. Practise saying them:

It's five It's half past five.

o'clock.

It's quarter It's quarter to six.

past five.

55
Exercise 2. Telling the time: Read the dialogues. Practice with a partner:

1. A. What time is it ?
B. It’s half past six. Go back to sleep.
A. Ok. Have a nice day.
B. You too.

2. A. Excuse me. What time is it ?

B. Sorry , I don’t know. I don’t have a watch.

3. A. Excuse me. What time is it ?

C. Just a moment. It’s quarter to seven.
A. Thanks.
C. You’re welcome.

Exercise 3. Practice saying the days of the week:

Days of the week

Sunday

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

Exercise 4. Memory work:

Lazy Bones Grundy

Lazy – Bones Grundy And Saturday comes,

Must do sums for Sunday But lazy-bones Grundy,
„And today is Tuesday”, Has no time to sums.
Says lazy-bones Grundy. „Never mind”, says Grundy,
„So I’ll do it on Wednesday „I’ll do it on Sunday”,
If not then on Thursday, So this is the time-table,
Or even on Friday” , Of lazy-bones Grundy.
Says lazy –bones Grundy.
Now very soon comes Friday
56
 Solomon Grundy
Born on Monday Worse on Friday,
Christened on Tuesday , Died on Saturday,
Married on Wednesday, Buried on Sunday.
Took ill on Thursday, This is the end of Solomon Grundy

Seumas McSporran – the man with thirteen jobs !

Seumas McSporran is a very busy man. He is 60 years old and he has thirteen jobs. He is a
postman, a policeman, a fireman, a taxi driver, a school-bus driver, a boatman, an ambulance man,
an accountant, a petrol attendant, a barman, and an undertaker. Also, he and his wife, Margaret,
have a shop and a small hotel.
Seumas lives and works on the island of Gigha in the west of Scotland. Only 120 people live on
Gigha but in summer 150 tourists come by boat every day.
Every weekday Seumas gets up at 6.00 and makes breakfast for the hotel guests. At 8.00 he
drives the island's children to school. At 9.00 he collects the post from the boat and delivers it to all
the houses on the island. He also delivers the beer to the island's only pub. Then he helps Margaret
in the shop.
He says: 'Margaret likes being busy, too. We never have holidays and we don't like watching
television. In the evenings Margaret makes supper and I do the accounts. At 10.00 we have a glass
of wine and then we go to bed. Perhaps our life isn't very exciting, but we like it.'
- undertaker n; deliver v; boatman n; island n; guest n; exciting adj;

Vocabulary
Accountant - a person that works with the money and accounts of a company.
Actor /Actress - a person that acts in a play or a movie
Architect - a person that designs buildings and houses.
Astronomer - a person who studies the stars and the universe
Author - They write books or novels.
Baker - They make bread and cakes and normally work in a bakery.
Bricklayer - a person that helps to build houses using bricks.
Bus driver - a person that drives buses.
Butcher - a person that works with meat. They cut the meat and sell it in their shop.
Carpenter - a person that makes things from wood including houses and furniture.
Chef/Cook - a person that prepared food for others, often in a restaurant or café.
Cleaner - a person that cleans/tidies an area or place (such as in an office)
Dentist - a person that can fix problems you have with your teeth.
Designer - a person who has the job of designing things.
Doctor - a person you go to see when you are ill or have some type of health problem.
Dustman/Refuse collector - a person that collects trash/rubbish from bins in the street.
Electrician - a person that works with electric circuits.
Engineer - a person who develops solutions to technical problems. They sometimes design, build,
or maintain engines, machines, structures or public works.
Factory worker - a person that works in a factory.
Farmer - a person that works on a farm, usually with animals.
Fireman/Fire fighter - a person that puts out fires.
Fisherman - a person that catches fish
Florist - a person that works with flowers.
57
Gardener - a person that keeps gardens clean and tidy. They take care of the plants in the garden.
Hairdresser - they cut your hair or give it a new style.
Journalist - a person that makes new reports in writing or through television.
Judge - a qualified person that decides cases in a law court.
Lawyer - a person that defends people in court and gives legal advice.
Lecturer - a person that gives lectures, usually in a university.
Librarian - a person that works in a library.
Lifeguard - a person that saves lives where people swim (at a beach or swimming pool).
Mechanic - a person that repairs machines, especially car motors.
Model - a (usually attractive) person that works in fashion, modeling clothes and accessories.
Newsreader - a person that reads the news, normally on television.
Nurse - a person trained to help a doctor look after the sick or injured.
Optician - a person that checks your eyes and try and correct any problems with your sight.
Painter - a person that paints pictures or the interior and exterior of buildings.
Pharmacist - a qualified person that works with and dispenses medicine.
Photographer - a person that takes photos.
Pilot - a person who flies a plane.
Plumber - a person that repairs your water systems or pipes.
Politician - a person who works in politics.
Policeman/Policewoman - a member of the police force. They (try and) prevent crime.
Postman - a person that delivers mail to your house.
Real estate agent - a person that makes money from selling land for development.
Receptionist - a person that is at the reception (entrance) of a company.
Scientist - a person that works in the science industry. They do many experiments.
Secretary - a person employed in an office who types letters, keeps records etc.
Shop assistant - a person that works in a shop or store selling products.
Soldier - a person who works for the army.
Tailor - a person that makes clothes for others, many times producing exclusive items of clothing.
Taxi driver - a person who drives a taxi.
Teacher - a person that passes knowledge to students, usually at school.
Translator - a person that translates from one language to another.
Traffic warden - a person that patrols areas to check that people do not park in the wrong place.
Travel agent - a person that organises and sells holidays and flights for others.
Veterinary doctor (Vet) - a qualified person that looks after sick animals.
Waiter/Waitress - a person that works in a food outlet, looking after customers and serving food.
Window cleaner - a person that cleans windows, normally the windows of big buildings.

Exercise 4. Read about Seumas. Answer the questions:

1 Where does Seumas live?
2 How old is he?
3 How many jobs does he have?
4 What's his wife's name?
5 What does she do?
6 How many people live on Gigha?
7 How many tourists visit Gigha in summer?
8 What does Seumas do in the morning?
9 What do he and Margaret do in the evening?
60
Exercise 2. Match the following definitions with the jobs:

1. They build the walls of houses.

2. They install and repair pipes.
3. They work with wood.
4. They repairs cars.
5. They install wiring and sockets.

a) mechanics
b) electricians
c) carpenters
d) plumbers
e) bricklayers.

Exercise 3. Use these words in the sentences below:

Firefighter, soldier, police officer, paramedic, pilot, sailor

1. John’s a in the Royal Navy. 2. He’s a in the fire brigade. 3.
He’s a in the ambulance service. 4. I’m joining the army to become a
. 5. My father was a in the air force. 6. He’s a senior
.

Exercise 4. Write the sentences in the correct columns:

She wears a uniform .

She works in a hospital.
He works outside.
He works in a hotel. She’s a doctor.
She travels a lot.
He walks a lot.
She helps sick people.
He answers the phone.
She speaks three languages.
She serves drinks. He’s a receptionist.
He speaks four languages.
She works with nurses.
He delivers letters.
He works with a computer.
He starts work at 5.00 a.m.
She wears a white coat. He’s a postman.

She’s a flight attendant.

61
Exercise 5. Use your dictionary and match the job with the activity:

A B
a. A pilot designs buildings.
b. An interpreter delivers letters.
c. A nurse looks after people in hospital.
d. A barman looks after money.
e. An accountant writes for a newspaper.
f. A journalist translates things.
g. A postman sells things.
h. An architect flies planes.
i. A shopkeeper serves drinks.

Exercise 6. Memorize the jobs. Close your books. Ask and answers questions with a partner.

e.g. What does a pilot do ? He / She flies planes.

Lesson 2.

Grammar: 1. There is / There are

Affirmative Negative Interrogative

Long form Short Long form Short form
form
Singular There is There’s There is not There isn’t Is there?
Plural There are There are not There aren’t Are there?

• We use there is / there are to say that something / someone exists. The short form of
there is is there’s . There are hasn’t got a short form.
e.g. There is (There’s ) a sofa in the room.
There are four children in the garden.
• The question form is : Is there ?/ Are there ?
e.g. Is there a restaurant in the town ?
Are there any apples in the basket ?
• The negative form is : There isn’t … . / There aren’t ….
e.g. There is not / isn’t a man in the room.
There are not / aren’t any cars in the street.

Short Answers :
In short answers we use Yes or No, there is/ isn’t or there are / aren’t . We do not repeat the
whole question.
Is there …. ? Yes, there is.
No, there isn’t .

62
Are there ….? Yes, there are.
No, there aren’t .

2. Some / Any / No

• We use some , any and no with uncountable nouns (e.g. sugar, bread, etc., ) and plural
countable nouns (e.g. pens, cars, etc., )
e.g. some bread some cherries
( a little bread) (a few cherries)

• Some means a little or a few. We use some in positive statements.

e.g. I’ve got some money . (= I’ve got a little money.)

• We use any in questions and not any in negations.

e.g. Have you got any money ?
No, I haven’t got any money.

• We can use no instead of not any in negations.

e.g. I haven’t got any money.
I have got no money.

NOTE: We use some in questions when we are making an offer or when we are asking for
something.
e.g. Would you like some coffee? (offer)
Can I have some coffee, please? (request)

• Somebody / Someone (a person) , something (a thing) and somewhere ( in /to/at a

place) are used in positive statements.
e.g. There is somebody at the door.
I want to go somewhere tonight.

• Anybody / anyone, anything and anywhere are used in questions and negations.
e.g. Is there anything on the table ?
There isn’t anything on the table.

• Nobody/ no one, nothing and nowhere can be used in negations instead of not
anybody/ not anything / not anywhere.

Compare : There isn’t anything on the table. = There is nothing on the table.
I can’t see anybody in the garden. = I can see nobody in the garden.

Who ? somebody/ anybody/ nobody

What ? something/ anything/ nothing
Where ? somewhere/ anywhere/ nowhere

63
 3. Have / Has got

Have got means the same as have to talk about possession, but the form is very different. We often
use have got in spoken English.

e.g. I have got blue eyes. (or I have blue eyes.)

Tom has got two sisters . (or Tom has two sisters.)
I’ve got a motor-bike but I haven’t got a car.
It’s a nice house but it hasn’t got a garden.

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Fill in the gaps with there is or there are in the correct form:

1. There are lots of rooms in the Royal Hotel . It is very big. 2. twenty-five children
in my class. 3. “ any biscuits left?” “No, I’m sorry . I ate them all. ” 4. It is winter now
any leaves on the tree. 5. two parks in the town.

64
Exercise 2. Look at the picture and write sentences as in the example:

1. Three children? Are.there three children in the picture?

No, there aren't. There are five children.
2. A birthday cake?
3. Three candles?
4. Two boys?
5. Two girls?
6. One bottle of Coca-Cola?
7. Five glasses?
8. One box?
9. One woman?
10. One man?

Exercise 3. Fill in there is or there are:

1. _a man at the door. 2. a box on the table. 3. three

flowers in the vase. 4. five trees in the garden. 5. zebras in the zoo.

Exercise 4. Compose as many sentences as you can as in the example. Let the members of the
class ask and answer questions as in the model. Give a short answer and add a sentence of
your own with the introductory there.

Model: Is there any clock on your desk?

Yes, there is. And there is also a lamp on it.

Exercise 5. Answer the following questions:

A. 1. Is this a classroom? 2. Are there many desks in it? How many? 3. Are there any chairs in
the room? How many? 4. Are there any lamps in the room? 5. Are they on the walls? 6. How many
lamps are there in it? 7. How many windows are there in the room? 8. What colour are the walls? 9.
What colour are the desks? 10. What colour are the chairs? 11. Is there a blackboard on the wall? 12.
65
What colour is the board? 13. Are there any sentences on it? 14. How many books are there on your
desk? 15. Are they English or M ol d o v an? 16. How many exercise-books are there in your bag?
17. Are they thick or thin? 18. Is this book thick or thin? 19. What is there on this table? 20.
What is there in that box?
B. 1. Is the box on the desk? 2. Are the pencils in the box? 3. Is the bag on the desk or under it?
4. Is the fountain-pen on the bag or in the bag? 5. Is the notebook in my hand or under it? 6. Are the
notebooks on the desk or under it? 7. Are the letters on the book or under it? 8. Where is the picture?
9. Where is the chair? 10. Where are the pens?

Exercise 6. a) Write sentences using there is, there are and the words given below:

1. bus, street; 2. lamp, room; 3. chalk, blackboard; 4. bread, table; 5. tea, tea-pot; 6. coffee,
coffee-pot; 7. money, bag; 8. paper, box; 9. soap, shelf; 10. water, jug.

b) Make up micro-dialogues with the same sentences.

Exercise 7. a) Write the interrogative and negative forms of the following sentences:

1. There is a telegram on the table. 2. There is a cinema near our house. 3. There are
many mistakes in his dictation. 4. There is much paper in his bag. 5. There are two
sofas in the room. 6. There are a lot of children in the park today.

b) Express your surprise asking questions as in the model. Note the distribution of sentence stress in the
replies.
Model: There is a dog in the room.
Is there a dog in the room ?
I say there is.

c) Respond to the same statement in the negative.

Model: There is a dog in the room.

Oh, no. There is \no dog there.
Are you sure?
Quite.

Exercise 8. Fill in “some” or “any” :

1. Are there any children in the park? 2. There are flowers in the garden. 3.
There isn’t bread in the cupboard.4. There is lemonade in the bottle. 5.
Are there eggs on the table? 6. There isn’t meat in the shop. 7. There are
apples on the tree. 8. There is milk in the bottle. 9. There isn’t
water in the glass. 10. There is tea in the teapot. 11. Are there
children in the room? 12. There aren’t cars in the street. 13. There are
potatoes on the table. 14. Is there chocolate in the fridge? 15. There is
cheese on the plate. 16. Are there cakes in the cupboard?

Exercise 9. Look at the picture and write sentences as in the example:

66
Exercise 10. Translate into English the words given in brackets:

There is (multă) paper on the desk. 2. There are (mulți) students in the classroom. 3. There is (puțin)
milk in the jug. 4. There are (multe) newspapers oh the shelf. 5. There is (mult) time left. 6. There is
(mult) butter on the plate. 7. There are (citeva) notebooks in the bag. 8. Give me (puțină) water,
please. 9. Can you give him (cîțiva) coloured pencils? 10. May I take (cîteva) sheets of paper? 11.
There are (multe) families in this house. 12. I have not got (mulți) money. I cannot buy this coat.
13. There are not (multe) sentences in this text. 14. Put (puțină) salt into your soup.

Exercise 11. Write questions using have / has got:

1. (you / a camera?) Have you got a camera ? 2. (you / a passport ?)

3. (your father / a car ?) 4. (Carol /
many friends ?) 5. (Mr and Mrs Lewis / any children ?)
6. ( how much money/ you ?) 6. (what kind
of car / John?)

Exercise 12. Put in have got (‘ ve got), has got (‘s got), haven’t got or hasn’t got:
1. They like animals. They’ve got three dogs and two cats.
2. Sarah hasn’t got a car. She goes everywhere by bicycle.
3. Everybody likes Tom. He a lot of friends.
4. Mr and Mrs Johnson two children ,a boy and a girl.
5. An insect six legs.
6. I can’t open the door. I a key.
7. Quick !Hurry ! We much time.
8. “What’s wrong ?” “I something in my eyes.”
9. Ben doesn’t read much. He many books.
10. It’s a nice town . It a very nice shopping centre.
11. Alice is going to the dentist. She toothache.
12. Julia wants to go on holiday but she any money.

67
Exercise 13. Fill in the blanks as in the example.

MY HOUSE

Doctor Sandford’s House

Doctor Sandford's house is not large, but it is comfortable and well-planned. It is a small two-
storeyed cottage.
In front of the house there is a green lawn and a lot of flowers. Behind it there is a little orchard
with a few fruit trees in it. On the ground floor there is a kitchen, a pantry, a dining-room, a cosy
sitting-room and Dr. Sandford's study. There are also several rooms upstairs on the first floor: the
Sandfords' bedrooms, Grandmother's room, which is also Benny's nursery, Betty's room and the
bathroom.
The furniture is modern and quite new. But Doctor Sandford says he must pay a lot of money for the
house and the furniture. He must pay the money for many years before he can call the house his
own.
Vocabulary
comfortable - (of clothes, furniture) making you feel physically relaxed, pleasant to wear, sit on.
E.g. It’s such a comfortable bed.
well-planned - carefully arranged or designed. E.g. the houses are well planned and easy to run
cottage - a small house, typically one in the country: a holiday cottage
in front of - in a position just ahead or at the front part of someone or something else:the lawn in
front of the house
lawn - an area of short, regularly mown grass in the garden of a house or park: she was sitting in a
deckchair on the lawn
orchard - a piece of enclosed land planted with fruit trees : an apple orchard
the ground floor - the floor of a building at ground level: a ground-floor flat
kitchen - a room or area where food is prepared and cooked.
pantry - a small room or cupboard in which food, crockery, and cutlery are kept.
68
dining-room - a room in a house or hotel in which meals are eaten: the main building has a dining
room, kitchen, and TV lounge
living-room - a room in a house for general and informal everyday use.
cosy - giving a feeling of comfort, warmth, and relaxation:the flickering lamp gave the room a cosy
lived-in air
sitting-room - a room in a house in which people can sit down and relax.
study - a room used or designed for reading, writing, or academic work: the third bedroom was used
as a study
several - more than two but not many: The author of several books
upstairs - an upper floor:she was cleaning the upstairs
bedroom - a room for sleeping in.
nursery - a room in a house for the special use of young children
bathroom - a room containing a bath and usually also a washbasin and a toilet.
furniture - the movable articles that are used to make a room or building suitable for living or
working in, such as tables, chairs, or desks.
modern - relating to the present or recent times as opposed to the remote past
own - used with a possessive to emphasize that someone or something belongs or relates to the
person mentione.
Vocabulary
Articles of furniture: bed, sofa, divan-bed, chair, armchair, dressing stool, table, bookcase,
cupboard, wardrobe, dressing-table, mirror, lamp, standard-lamp, stool, unit(s), cabinet, bedside
cabinet, wall-furniture, suite
Modern conveniences: electricity, gas, running-water, central heating, telephone, toilet, a rubbish
chute, tiled walls, lift
Electric and other equipment: lamp, standard-lamp, upper-lights, refrigerator (fridge), gas-stove,
electric stove, vacuum-cleaner, television-set, radio-set, music-centre.

Exercise 1. Answer the following questions:

A. 1. Is Doctor Sandford's house large? 2. What is there in front of the house and behind
it?3.What rooms are there in the house? 4. What kind of furniture is there in the house? 5. Is it
Doctor Sandford's own house?
B. 1. Is your flat large or small? 2. How many rooms are there in your flat? 3. What do you call a
room people sleep in? 4. What do you call a room people have meals in? 5. What do you call a room
where a person studies, reads, writes, etc.? 6. What do you call a room where children sleep, play
and have meals? 7. What do you call a room where people spend time after dinner or supper (where
guests are received)? 8. What do you call a room where food is cooked? 9. What do you call a room
where food is kept? 10. Is your flat comfortable and cosy? 11. There is a green lawn in front of your
house, isn't there? 12. Are there any fruit trees in your garden? 13. Is your house old or new? 14.
What colour are the walls in your flat? 15. What articles of furniture are there in your parents'
bedroom (the dining-room, your father's study, your own room)? 16. There are many new houses in
your street, aren't there? 17. Have you got a rubbish chute in you flat to carry rubbish down? 18.
Have you got built-in furniture in your flat? 19. Has she got a unit in her room?

Exercise 2. Match the words with the pictures:

69
Exercise 3. Write the words in the correct column.

an armchair a shelf a plant a stereo a lamp a cooker

a fridge a washing machine a telephone a cupboard
a television a cup a sofa a coffee table

The living room The kitchen Both

Exercise 4. Match a verb in A with a line in B.

A B
1. listen a. my hair
2. cook b. a shower
3. wash c. to music
4. clean d. dressed
5. go e. my teeth
6. have f. my homework
7. get g. to bed
8. do h. dinner

Where do you do this things from exercise 4? Write sentences.

70
 1. Listen to music in the living room.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Lesson 3.

Grammar : 1. Modal verb can

Expressing Ability : can and could

(a) Bob can play the piano. Can expresses ability in the present or future.
(b) You can buy a screwdriver at a hardware store.
(c) I can meet you at Ted's tomorrow afternoon.
(d) can’t The negative form of can may be written
I cannot understand that can't,
sentence. can not cannot, or can not.
(e) Our son could walk when he was one year old. The past form of can is could.
(f) He couldn't waIk when he was six months old. The negative of could: couldn't or could not.

71
 2. Modal verb may

EXPRESSING POSSIBILITY: MAY AND MIGHT

EXPRESSING PERMISSION: MAY AND CAN
(a) It may rain tomorrow. May and might express possibility in the
(b) It might rain tomorrow. present or
(c) A: Why isn't John in class? future. They have the same meaning. There
may is no
B: I don’t know . He be sick today. difference in meaning between (a) and (b).
might
(d) It may not rain tomorrow. Negative: may not and might not. (Do not
(e) It might not rain tomorrow. contract may and might with not.)

(f) Maybe it will rain tomorrow. In (f) and (g): maybe (spelled as one word)
Compare : is an
(g) Maybe John is sick. ( adverb ) adverb. It means "possibly!' It comes at the
(h) John may be sick. (verb) beginning of a sentence.
INCORRECT :It will maybe rain
tomorrow.
In (h): may be (two words) is a verb form:
the
auxiliary may + the main verb be.
INCORRECT : John maybe sick.
(i) Yes, children, you may have a cookie after May is also used to give permission, as in
dinner. (i).
(j) Okay, kids, you can have a cookie after Often can is used to give permission, too, as
dinner. in (j).
(i) and (j) have the same meaning, but may
is more
formal than can.
(k) You may not have a cookie. May not and cannot (can't) are used to deny
You can't have a cookie. permission (i.e., to say "no").

72
 3. Modal verb must

The verbs can, may and must are modal auxiliary verbs. They express certainty, possibility,
obligation, necessity, lack of necessity, etc.
The main characteristics of modal verbs are the following :
• They do not take an –s , -ing, - ed suffix. E.g. He can cook. (NOT : He cans cook.)
• They form quetions , negations and short answers without the auxiliary verb „do” : e.g.
May I go now ? (NOT : Do I may go now ?)
• They are followed by a bare infinitive . e.g. You must go to the doctor . (NOT : You must
to got o the doctor.)
Can expresses ability and can’t expresses lack of ability in the present.
e.g. Kate can speak a foreign language. Tim can’t play the piano.
Must and have to express obligation and necessity.
e.g. You must come home early.
I have to be at the office at nine o’çlock.
We also use must to give advice.
e.g. You must talk to your brother about it.
You mustn’t be late for school.
Must not / Mustn’t (you aren’t allowed to /is against the rules) expresses prohibition.
e.g. You mustn’t park here. ( It is against the rules.)

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Answer the following questions:

1. Can you speak English well? 2. Can you speak French well? 3. Can you understand Spanish? 4.
Can you count the chairs in this room? 5. Can we write without a pen or a pencil? 6. What can we
do with a fountain-pen? 7. May I take your textbook? 8. May Helen leave the classroom? 9. May we
go to the pictures? 10. Must we speak English now? 11. What must we have if we want to write a
letter? 12. What must we have if we want to buy something? 13. What must we use if we want to
wash our hands? 14. What must you do when you have flu? 15. What must you do to make your
reading distinct?

Exercise 2. Complete these sentences. Use can or can’t + one of these verbs:
73
 Come find hear see speak
1. I’m sorry, but we can’t come to your party next Saturday.
2. She got the job because she five languages.
3. You are speaking very quietly . I you.
4. Have you seen my bag? I it.
5. I like this hotel room. You the mountains from the window.

Exercise 3. Look at the table below, then ask and answer as in the example:

Exercise 4. Study Substitution Tables No. 1, 2, 3 and compose as many sentences as you can.
Let the members of the class ask and answer questions as in the model. Give a short answer
using contracted forms and add a sentence of your own:

Model: May I stay at home on Saturday?

No, you mustn't. You are to go to your classes.

Exercise 5. Complete the sentences . Use must + one of these verbs:

be buy go help hurry learn meet phone read wash win

1. We must go to the bank today. We haven’t got any money.
2. I I haven’t got much time.
3. She’s a very interesting person. You _her.
4. I forgot to phone Dave last night. I him today.
5. You to drive. It’s very useful.
6. This is an excellent book. You it.
7. We some food. We’ve got nothing for dinner.

74
8. My hair is dirty. I it.
9. I to the post office. I need some stamps.
10. I have a big problem. You me.
11. The game tomorrow is very important for us. We .
12. You can’t always have things immediately. You patient.

Exercise 6. Answer the following questions:

Can you speak English well? 2. Can you speak French well? 3. Can you understand Spanish? 4. Can
you count the chairs in this room? 5. Can we write without a pen or a pencil? 6. What can we do
with a fountain-pen? 7. May I take your textbook? 8. May Helen leave the classroom? 9. May we go
to the pictures? 10. Must we speak English now? 11. What must we have if we want to write a letter?
12. What must we have if we want to buy something? 13. What must we use if we want to wash our
hands? 14. What must you do when you have flu? 15. What must you do to make your reading
distinct?

Exercise 7. Ask someone if he or she can do these things:

swim ski play chess drive run ten kilometres ride a horse

Can you swim ? 1. you ?

you ? 2. you ?
you ? 3. you ?

Can you do these things ? Use can or can’t + one of these verbs :

I can’t swim .
I .
I .
I .

Exercise 8. Mr. Welsh has got a cold and is coughing a lot. The doctor is telling him what he
must or mustn’t do.

You 1) must stay in bed. You 2) go to work. You 3) take some medicine.
You 4) eat soup. You 5) drink cold drinks. You 6)
drink milk or hot tea. You 7) eat ice-cream. You 8) stop smoking.

Exercise 9. Mother is telling her son what he must or mustn’t do:

1. You must do your homework.

2. You be late for school.
3. You talk in class.
4. You tidy your room.
5. You go to bed late.
6. You get up early.

75
 OUR ENGLISH LESSON
T e a c h e r : Good morning, all! Sit down, please! I expect no one is away?
M o n i t o r : Nobody is. All are present. Oh, sorry, Ann is not here.
T e a c h e r : What's up? Is she ill?
M o n i t o r : It's flu with a high temperature.
T e a c h e r : That's too bad. Well now. Let's begin. We'll check our homework. Mike, will
you take your exercise-book and come to the board?
Mike: Shall I write the words in transcription?
T e a c h e r : Do. And you, Helen, read Text 7, will you? The others should write down the
mistakes if she has any. Do you follow me? Will you read a little louder, please. That'll do. Any
mistakes noticed?
Julia: I believe there's some palatalization in the nouns "family" and "Benny".
T e a c h e r : That's it. Please, Helen, pronounce the words. Now it's correct. You must
work more. Pronunciation is your weak point, I'm afraid.
Helen: Shall I read the text again for the next time?
T e a c h e r : Yes. Have another try and make your reading more distinct. Now everybody
look at the board!
Mike: Shall I read the exercise?
T e a c h e r : Of course. (Mike reads). Is everything correct, Pete?
Pete: I think it is.
T e a c h e r : Thank you, Mike. Clean the board, please, and go to your seat. (To the
monitor). Have we got the headphones ?
M o n i t o r : Here they are.
T e a c h e r : Fine. Let's listen to the new text. Open your books at page 81. Will you please
switch on the cassette-recorder? Thank you.

Vocabulary
To be present to check (go through) the homework
What's up? exercise-book n.
Temperature n. transcription n.
That's too bad.
Shall I...? To write (put) down
Shall I begin? to follow v.
Shall I read? louder adj.
Shall I open the window? Will you read louder?
Read Text 7. That'll do.
Write Exercise 3. Noticed
Find page 81.
to have classes, after classes, to stay away from classes
Do you have classes on Saturday?
Good morning! Good afternoon! Good-bye!
Sit down. Go to your place. Stand up! Take your seat.
Who is on duty today?
Is anybody absent today?
What's the pronunciation (spelling) of the word?
Is this right (correct, wrong)?
Go on reading (writing, retelling)
Don't go so fast!
What date is it today?
What's the date today?
May I come in?
palatalization n.
76
That's it.
To pronounce v. to write a test
Pronunciation n. to do homework orally (in written form, in
weak point n. writing)
have another try to give (to set, to check) homework
distinct adj. to collect (to hand in) exercise-books
headphones n. (homework)
Here they are. to give in (to give out, to hand out) papers
to switch on v. Come (up) to the blackboard!
to switch off v. to clean the blackboard
cassette-recorder (tape-recorder) n. Wipe the word (sentence) off,
Will you repeat it? Can you (could you) Let the others see the board,
repeat it? Don't stand in front of the board.
Will you pronounce (translate, spell) it? Speak up!
Will you say it again (once more)? Ask questions on (about) the text.
Please, pronounce (translate, spell) it. Put questions to the sentence,
That will do. May I ask you a guestion?
Stop talking. Silence, please. Keep silent. May I say it this way?
No helping (whispering), please. May I put it like this?
to make a report
to make a mistake, to correct mistakes
How long is it before the bell?
break, in break
at the Dean's office
group register; time-table; list of students
chalk; duster, to wet the duster
head(ear)phones
to switch on (switch off) the cassette-recorder (tape-recorder)
to wind back = to rewind the tape = to play (back) the tape
to plug in, to unplug, to switch on, to switch off
The lesson is over.
a (student's) record book
an examination card

Classroom Language

Asking for something Could/Can you write it on the board, please?

Can I borrow a pen, please?
Do you have a pen for me? Asking for help
May I come in ? I don’t understand
Can you help me , please?
Asking about words Is this right/ wrong?
What does “pencil ” mean? Can you step aside , please?
How do you say “casa” in English ? Can you turn on the lights, please?
How do you spell “(the word)” ? What exactly do we have to do ?
How do you pronounce “boy” ?
Where’s the stress in “ (the word) ” ? Apologizing
Excuse me, please.
Asking to repeat I’m sorry.
Could / Can you repeat that, please? Sorry about that.
Could / Can you say that again, please? Sorry I’m late.
Pardon me? Common sentences your teacher can tell you
77
Good morning! Take your seat! Work alone/ in pairs /in groups.
Open your book at page 25. Ask your partner for help.
Turn the page, please. Ask your partner these questions…
Tell us… Tell us about… Ask everyone in the class.
Repeat, please. Answer your partner’s questions…
Repeat after me. Listen and repeat … again…
One more time, please. Stand up and find another partner
Say it again. Make the questions.
Speak louder, please! Listen to the CD and answer these questions.
Mistake. Correct yourself. Copy this into your notebooks.
Retell the text. Retell the text in your own The homework is…. exercise 5, p.11
words. Well done!
Answer the questions. Expressing Opinions
Write the answers.
In my opinion….
In my view….
In my experience…
As far as I’m concerned…
Speaking for myself…
Personally, I think….
Personally , I believe (feel)….
I tend to think that…
I am sure /certain /convinced that…
I am not sure / certain, but ….
As far as I know…
As far as I understand / can see, …
As I see it…
I’d say that…
I’d suggest that…
I’d like to point out that….
I believe that…
What I mean is…
As for me , I think…
If you ask my opinion…
It seems to me …

Exercise 1. Make up a dialogue or situation about your English lesson using the words
from vocabulary notes and topical vocabulary.

Exercise 2. Practice the text Our English Lesson for test reading. Memorize the text and
dramatize it.

Exercise 3. Translate the following into English using classroom expressions:

1. Cine este astăzi de serviciu? – Elena. Cineva este absent astăzi? – Da. Trei studenţi sunt
absenţi. 2. Nimeni nu este absent astăzi? –Da, toţi nouă studenţi sunt prezenţi astăzi. 3. Victor
este prezent? – Nu, el este absent. 4. Ce dată este astăzi? – Astăzi este 15 octombrie. 5. Se poate
78
să vă întreb? – Poftim. – Unde se află camera nr. 48? –Nu pot răspunde la întrebarea
dumneavoastră. Întrebaţi, vă rog, secretarul. 6. Cum se spune în limba engleză ,,căşti de radio”
(,,masă de scris”)?7. Să conectez casetofonul? – Da, poftim. Să deconectez casetofonul? – Nu,
aşteptaţi puţin. Să încep să citesc? – Da. Să şterg tabla? – Poftim. Să deschid geamul? – Nu este
nevoie. Să citească această propoziţie din nou? – Da, poftim. 8. Citiţi mai tare, vă rog. Vorbiţi
mai tare, vă rog. Cântaţi mai tare vă rog. Este de ajuns. 9. Repetaţi propoziţia de două ori. Citiţi
textul de trei ori. 10. Hai să mergem la decanat în timpul întreruperii. Hai să corectăm greşelile
din dictare. 11. Nu vreţi să aduceţi registrul (cretă, cârpa, lista studenţilor, căştile)? 12. Puteţi
face acest exerciţiu astăzi? – Da. Puteţi să scrieţi textul astăzi. - Nu. Eu nu pot să scriu textul
astăzi. 13. Aceste exerciţii sunt dificile. Repetaţi-le vă, rog. Textele acestea sunt uşoare. Nu este
nevoie să le repetaţi. 14. Puteţi să vă aşezaţi (să plecaţi, să începeţi să citiţi).15. Continuaţi să
citiţi (să scrieţi, să vorbiţi, să lucraţi). 16. Linişte, vă rog. Lecţia încă nu s-a terminat. Cât timp a
rămas până la sunet? – Numai două minute. 17. Cum se pronunţă cuvântul ,,palatalizare”
(,,transcripţie”)? 18. Cum se scrie cuvântul ,,pronunţare”? (,,registrul”, este „de ajuns”, „a
răspunde”)? 19. Puneţi întrebări la text. 20. Nu şoptiţi, vă rog. 21. Transmiteţi caietele, vă rog.
22. Mai întâi instalaţi caseta şi apoi conectaţi casetofonul. 23. Acum, vă rog, rebobinaţi caseta.
24. Dumneavoastră aveţi lecţii vineri? – Da, am, dar ele se termină devreme. 25. Poate Bob să nu
meargă la lecţii astăzi? – Nu. El trebuie să plece la şcoală. 26. Încercaţi încă o dată şi citiţi mai
tare.

Exercise 4. a) Ask your fellow-student for permission...

to go out; to come in; to open the window; to take the newspaper; to read; to go home; to
begin reading; to close the door.
(The person you ask must give any of the following answers: Certainly. You may. Do, please.
I'm afraid not. You mustn't.)
Model: May I speak to the dean?
– You may.
May I leave now?
- I'm afraid not.
b) Give your permission to perform the actions given above.
Model: You may speak to the dean.
c) Ask your fellow-students to perform the actions given above. Don't forget to be polite.
Model: Speak to the dean, please. (Will you speak to the dean?)
b) Ask your fellow-students not to perform the actions given above.
M o d e l : Please, do not smoke here.

Exercise 5. Act as a teacher of English. Ask your pupils:

1. to clean the blackboard; to use the duster; to bring some chalk; 2. to tell you the date; to write
it on the board; not to stand in front of the board; 3. to come up to your desk; to read the text; not
to go so fast; to go to his place; 4. to check homework; to correct the pronunciation or spelling of
some word; 5. to collect the exercise-books and to hand them in; 6. to switch on the cassette-
recorder; to listen to the text; 7. to wind (play) it back; to switch off the cassette-recorder; 8. to
have another try and read distinctly.

Exercise 6. Stage a dialogue between a teacher and a student using classroom expressions:

1. beginning a lesson; 2. checking homework; 3. reading the text; 4. writing on the blackboard; 5.
listening to the cassette-recorder; 6. giving homework.

79
Unit III
Lesson 1.

Grammar: Present Continuous

Affirmative Negative
Long form Short form Long form Short form
I am working I'm working I am not working I 'm not working
You are working You're working You are not working You aren't working
He is working He's working He is not working He isn't working
She is working She's working She is not working She isn't working
It is working It's working It is not working It isn't working
We are working We're working We are not working We aren't working
You are working You're working You are not working You aren't working
They are working They're working They are not working They aren't working

Interrogative Questions Short answers

Am I working? Am I Working Yes, I am / No, I'm not.

Are you working? Are you working?
Is he working? Is he/she/it working?
Is she working? Are we working? Yes, he/she/it is./ No, he/she/it isn't.
Is it Working? Are you working?
Are we working? Are they working?
Are you working ?
Are they working? Yes, they are./No, they aren't.

Present Continuous is used:

• for temporary situations. • with a/ways to express annoyance or
He's looking for a new job these days. criticism. He's always telling lies!
• for actions happening at or around • for fixed arrangements in the near
the time of speaking. future. I'm flying to London tomorrow.
Chris is painting the garage at the moment. (It's all arranged. I've already bought the
tickets. The time of the action is always
stated or understood.)

Time expressions with the present continuous:

now, at the moment, at present, this week /month, these days, today, tonight, tomorrow, next
week, etc.
Spelling
work – working open - opening play - playing
BUT
Dance-dancing run-running lie-lying
Stative Verbs
Some verbs rarely appear in the continuous tenses. These verbs express a
permanent state and they are: appear (= seem), be, believe, belong, cost, feel,
forget, hate, have (= possess), know, like, love, mean, need, prefer, realise,
remember, see, seem, smell, sound, suppose, taste, think, understand, want, etc.
I understand it now. NOT I am understanding it now.
Some of these verbs can be used in continuous tenses but with a difference in meaning.
80
Present Simple Present Continuous
I think he's Italian. Tom is thinking of moving house.
(= believe) (= is considering)
Katie looks happy. They are looking at the paintings.
(= appears to be) (= are taking a look at)
You see the sea from my room. (= Sam is seeing his friends tonight.
it is visible) (= is meeting)
Derek has a new car. We are having dinner at 8 o'clock.
( = possesses) (= are eating)
This pie tastes really good. Paul is tasting the soup to see if it needs salt.
(= it has a really good flavour) (= is trying)
This new dress fits her perfectly. He is fitting a new lock on the door.
(= it is her size) (= is attaching)
He is so polite. He is being so rude today!
(= that's his character) (= he is behaving like that only today)
She appears to be tired. She is appearing in the new TV show.
(= seems)

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1.Write sentences with the present continuous:

e.g. It / rain. - It isn’t raining.

1 Hey! You / stand on my foot! +
2 they / play very well today –
3 what / you study at the moment ?
4 we / think of you +
5 she / wear make-up ?
6 they / make a big mistake +
7 your brother / work in London now ?
8 she / talk to her father at the moment –

Exercise 2. Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense or
present continuous tense:

1. Right now I (watch) a movie. I (watch) a lot of movies.

2. Rickie (be) my friend. We (like) to talk together. Right now we (talk)
about school.
3. The police officer (wear) a badge and a gun to work every day.
4. Jaime usually (eat) cold cereal for breakfast, but today he (eat)
oatmeal instead.
5. Alison and I (study) for the exam. We (not, want)
to fail it!
6. Jonas (sing) in the band on Saturdays, and Veda (play) the guitar.
7. My uncle (live) in Tennessee. I (live) in North Carolina.
8. My mom (cook) dinner tonight. (You, want)
to eat with us?
9. Tiffany and Mark (travel) to Spain. They will stay in Madrid.
10. We (read) the newspaper every morning.

81
Exercise 3. Complete the text with the correct form of the verb in simple present tense or
present continuous tense:

My favourite aunt, Monica, (teach) archeology at the university. Right now she
(give) a class on the art of ancient Egypt.
She (do) a lot of sports and (go) to the cinema regularly. This
month, she (learn) to hang glide. But she also (climb) mountains
every weekend and (do) scuba diving when she is on holidays.

Exercise 4. Use the Present Continuous or the Present Simple instead of the infinitives in brackets:

1. Wait for me, Alice. I (to come) too. 2. I (to be) afraid I (not to understand) you. 3. What you
(to think) about it? - - I (to think) you (to be) right. 4. What you (to think) about, Jim? -- I (not to
think) of anything, I just (to have) a rest. 5. Catherine (to be) in the garden. She (to pick) cherries.
6. I (to be) sorry, Jackson, but my friend (not to feel) very well, so drive us back, please. 7. Can
you hear what he (to say)? 8. The girl you (to talk) about (to be) the eldest daughter of my old
friend. 9. What you (to see) there? -- I can't see quite well, but it (to seem) to me Lucy (to come).
10. What you (to look) at? - I simply (to look) about. 11. You always (to smile) when you (to
see) him? 12. She always (to smile) when she (to talk) to him? 13. Mother (to say) Aunt Julia (to
leave) on Thursday and Ann (to leave) with her. 14. Appetite (to come) with eating. 15. My
sister (to practise) the piano; she usually (to practise) it about this time. 16. I (to hear) his voice
in the next room. 17. What you (to listen) to? - I (to listen) to music. 18. She often (to come) to
see you? - Not so often, she (to be) a student now and (to be) very busy. 19. Who else (to go)
with you to Bulgaria? 20. When he (to go) to Bulgaria he always (to take) some presents to his
Bulgarian friends.

Exercise 5. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form of the Present continuous or the
Present simple:

Hi Marvin,
I 1) 'm writing (write) this letter from Portugal. I 2)…………….. (be) on holiday here with my
family and we 3) …………….. (have) a great time.Right now, I 4) ……………..(lie) on the
beach. My little brother 5) . ………………. (play) on the sand with his toys and my
mother………………6) (watch) him. My dad 7)………………. (swim) in the sea.I just love it
here. We 8) …………………(get up) late every day and
9) …………………(spend) most of our time sunbathing.This afternoon we 10)…………………
(go) into town to do a little sightseeing.Then my parents 11)……………….. (take) us to a nice
restaurant. They12) ………………….(want) us to try the local cuisine. I hope it tastes
good!Well , that's all for now. See you when I get back!
Take care,Wendy
Exercise 6. Underline the correct item:

1. The children are having / have so much

fun at the circus!
2 Fiona is looking / looks at some photos.
3 This jacket is fitting / fits you perfectly.
You should buy it.
4 Ron is wanting / wants to become a pilot.
5 I am not understanding / don't
understand the meaning of that word.
6 He is loving / loves playing football.
7 I am thinking / think of buying a new CD.
82
Exercise 7. Writing Activity. Write a letter to your friend using Present Continuous:

Greetings from …………….... ! We're staying at…………………..

The weather is ……………………… There isn't a cloud in the sky.
Right now, I ….............................. My parents …………….. and
my…………………………..…. We………………….. late every day and
…………………………………………………………………………………
In the evening, we …………………………………………….
or…………………………………………… Tonight
we……………………………………………………….We love it here. There is so much to see
and do. See you in…………………………………
Yours,……………………………………

Possessive Pronouns (not followed by nouns)

mine
yours
his/hers/-
ours
yours
theirs

Exercise 8. Complete the sentences with the correct possessive pronoun:

1. Mike has got a computer. It's ..... his .

2 I have got a rabbit. It's ••..•.... .
3 Karen has got a new sweater. It's ........
4 We have got a new house. It's ........ .
5 You have got a brown coat. It's ......... .
6 They have got a big flat. It's ......... .

Exercise 9.Complete the sentences with possessive pronoun or possessive adjectives:

1.I'm Becky. This is …..my..... rabbit. 2 This is Juan and this is ......... sister. 3 The boys have got
comics. The comics are….. 4 We're in ........ garden today.5 Look at Nadia and Khalid . They're
in .......... car. 6 Lisa has got a bag. The bag is ........... 7 I'm Adam. That bike is ....... . 8 We're
hungry. These sandwiches are…. 9 You and Ben are brothers. Ben is ......... brother. 10 Isabel
hasn't got……….book today. That bird is funny. Look at .........

Exercise 10. Speaking Activity:

Think of a new cartoon character. Answer the questions. Talk with

your friend.
1 What's the name of your new cartoon character?
2 What's his I her favourite colour I food I music I sport?
3 Has he I she got a family? What are their names?
4 Has he I she got a good friend? What's his I her name?

Exercise 11. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form of the Present continuous or the
Present simple:

1. María (work) for a TV station. 2. At the moment she (travel) in

the Sahara Desert. 3. Dan (love) wild animals. 4. He (not visit)
83
Alaska at the moment. 5. Marta (not live) in Africa. 6. She (stay)
in Africa at the moment. 7. Dad usually (cook) dinner. 8. My parents
(go) to Italy every year. 9. My sister (walk) to school every day.
10. We (have) lunch now. 11. I never (stay in) on Saturday
evening. 12. I (go) to the cinema now. 13. My mum (not work)
today. 14. Peter (not like) rap music. 15. He (listen) to pop music
at the moment. 16. Donna usually (go) shopping on Saturdays. 17. Let´s go out.
It (not rain) now. 18. Hurry up! Everybody (wait) for you! 19.
The sun (rise) in the east.

Exercise 12. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form of the Present continuous or the
Present simple:

1. Who is that man? What he (want)? 2. Who is that man?

Why he (look) at us? 3. you
(believe) in God? 4. Gilbert says he is 80, but nobody (believe) him. 5. Every
Monday Maite (drive) her kids to football practice. 6. Be quiet. Arturo
(sleep). 7. Don´t forget to take your umbrella. It (rain). 8. I
don´t like living in England. It always (rain). 9. Look! It
(snow). We are going to have a white Christmas. 10. Maila (watch) TV every
morning. 11. I have to go now. It (get) dark 12. Right now I
(spend) time with my father. 13.We usually (go) to the gym on Mondays.

Exercise 13. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form of the Present continuous or the
Present simple:

1. I (play) cricket right now. 2. I (play) cricket on Saturdays. 3. Silvia

(cook) in the kitchen now. 4. Silvia (cook) for her father on Sundays.
5. Maila (like) Chinese food. 6. Keep silent, Manolo (read) a book. 7.
Erik (love) María. 8. Ann (jog) in the park today. 9. George
(want) to go outside. 10. Barbara (eat) chicken wings at the moment.
11. What you (do)? I´m sleeping. 12. How many languages
you (speak)? 13. I (not like) politics. 14. What
you (do) at the moment? 15. Where you
(live)? 16. I (want) to be a millionaire. 17. Nacho (not wear) a tie
today. 18. Jesus is in Amsterdam this week. He (stay) at the Hilton. 19. Look!
Miguel (jump) into the water. 20. Lili is rich, she (drive) a Mercedes.
21. Once a week, I (go) to my yoga lessons. 22. I (think) you´re
amazing. 23. Bea sometimes (read) comics. 24. We never (watch) TV
in the morning. 25. Listen! Blanca (sing) in the bathroom.

Exercise 14. Change the possessive adjective 1 to a possessive pronoun 2 and omit the noun:

EXAMPLE: She has my book. She has mine.

1.The car on the corner is my car.

2. Is this your house?

3. The invading soldiers searched their house.

4. Can Dee find her briefcase?

84
5. Our relatives live in Brazil.

6. His boss is fair with everyone.

7. These problems are entirely his problems.

8. I need your advice.

9. My landlord is going to raise the rent.

10.Their long conversations made no sense.

Exercise 15. Complete the sentences with the present simple or present continuous forms of
the verbs in brackets:

1. We to Chinese restaurants very often. (not go). 2. These days, most children
too many fizzy drinks. (have). 3. you any vitamins at the moment?
(take). 4. Don't eat that spinach if you it. (not like). 5. your boyfriend ___-
how to cook fish? (know). 6. We takeaway pizzas during the week. (not
get). 7. What _________your mother ? It smells great! (make). 8.You look
sad. What you about? (think). 9. The diet in my
country worse. (get). 10. How often
you seafood? (eat)

Exercise 16. Complete the following sentences with the “Possessive Adjective” or
“Possessive Pronoun”:

1. ......................... neighbour's house is bigger than. ................... (we). 2. Those are

not............................. children. ...... .... ... are in the cinema now. (we). 3. ..............................
teacher always confuses your name with ............................... (I). 4. My book is more interesting
than...... ..................... I think, (you). 5. Rose wears ear-rings, but........................ ear-rings are
more expensive than hers. (I).6. The dog is eating a bone. .... .......... . teeth are. very sharp, (it)
2. This pencil isn't............................; it is mine, (you). 7. I don't think that is ... .......... ....; ....
............. suitcase is green, (she).8.The boys are riding on ........... .... ... bicycles in the street,
(they). 9. We are listening to our teacher, not................................ (you). 10. Please pass these
books to your friends. They are.......... ...... .. (they). 11. I always buy .............................. sister
a box of chocolate at this supermarket. (I). 12. .. ...... .........umbrella is not black. It is blue. (I)
3. The man is going to the cinema with…………………. wife, (he). 13. These are Mr.
and Mrs. Brown. That is ............................ house, (they). 14. There are some books on the desk,
but they are not.......................... (we). 15. Is your brother a businessman? ............................
is a medical doctor. (I). 16. There is a car in front of the building. Is it ..... ..... ....? (you). 17.
Look at that dog over there! .... ..... ..... eyes are blue, (it). 18. Zeynep's bag is very heavy,
but............................ is very light. (I). 19. Our house is near the school, but ..... ..... ..... house
is not. (they). 20. He is my room-mate. ......... ....... name is Peter, (he). 21. My father is more
successful than ......... ..... .... father, (she). 22. Don't bother to bring a camera; you can use ....
..... .... . (I). 23. Helen’s dog is more playful than ........................ (you)

Exercise 17. Put the "Verbs" in brackets into "The Present Simple or Continuous Tenses":

Example: My sister (go) ................................................. to the cinema every week. My sister

goes to the cinema every week.
85
Be quiet! The baby (sleep).................................................in its cradle now. Be quiet! The
baby is sleeping in its cradle now.

1 Abbas (usually, study) .................................................... in the library on Saturdays. 2. At

present we (sit) ................................................... at the table and doing our homework. 3. He
(always, sing).........................................while he (have)...........................................................a
bath.. 4. Children (live) ...............................with their parents until they
(get)..................................married. 5. The children (have) ................................................... a good
time with their friends now. 6. Dogs (bark)........................................ when they (get)
.............................................. hungry. 7. Look! It (rain)................................again. It (always, rain)
................................when you clean your car. 8. I (think) ...................................... she
(be)............................................very happy. 9. He (usually, smoke).............................a pipe, but
he (smoke) .................................a cigar now. 10. He (usually, get) .......................up at seven, but
this morning he (get) ........................up at eight o'clock. 11. Listen! Somebody (sing)
.................................................. a beautiful Spanish song. 12. Listen! I
(think)........................................ someone (knock) ................................................. at the door. 13.
Table tennis (become) ..................................................... more and more popular these days. 14. I
(get)..............uncontrollable urges for junk food when I (watch) ....................the television at
home. 15. My watch (generally, keep) .......................perfect time, but these days it (not, work)
.......................properly. 16. I (imagine) ................................. that the teacher
(speak).................................................. Italian very well. 17. For the time being we (stay)
................................................. at this hotel by the sea. 18. Please go away! I (try)
................................................. to lull the baby to sleep. 19. My brother (not, have)
.................................................. a cold shower every morning. 20. What kind of music (you
love)...............................................I wonder? 21. (You/know) .......................................who
(come)...................................... to the party tonight? 22. My mother (always / take)
................................................. the dog for a walk after breakfast. 23. (Your mother / think)
.............................. that smoking hubble-bubble (be)............................. dangerous? 24. We (have)
..................................................... a lot of friends in Istanbul. 25. I (think)
....................................... that this book (be) ........................................ very interesting. 26. My
sister (make) ..................................................... a dress for herself these days. 27. My sister
(usually, play)..................................the piano until my father (get) ..........................angry. 28. My
father (work) .................................. in the garden while we (lay) ..................................... the table.
29. The referee (want) to stop......................... the match because it (rain) .........................................
now. 30. Your friendship (mean) ........................................... a great deal to me.

LOOKING GOOD !!!

Comment the following quotation: “Appearances often are deceiving”

Sandu’s cousin
This summer Sandu decides to spend his vacation at his cousin’s who lives in the North of
Moldova. It is at the beginning of July when he leaves for the village of Sofia.The weather is
fantastic and the surroundings are full of greenery. The beauty of the countryside impresses him
very much. When meeting his cousin Lucia at the railway station he gets surprised at her change.
This time he finds her rather attractive. Instead of a short and clumsy child, now there is quite a
different person in front of him: a tall, slim and graceful young girl.
He notices her big blue eyes with long and thick eyelashes and dark eyebrows. Most of all he
likes her long, curly and fair hair. She is the sort of person, who seems to attract everybody,
especially when she smiles.

86
 The aunt’s house isn’t far from the station, so it doesn’t take them too long to get
there. When they approach the house his aunt greets him. Sandu is happy to see her. He has
a good opportunity to learn a lot of things about the life on the farm and make new friends.

Exercise 1. Ask questions referring to Lucia’s appearance.

Exercise 2. Describe Lucia’s appearance.

Exercise 3. Answer the questions on the text:

a. Where does Sandu decide to spend his holiday?

b. What is the weather like?
c. Who meets him at the station?
d. Why is he surprised when meeting his cousin?

Exercise 4. Find in the text synonyms for the following words:

Holiday- start- glad- amazed-

Wonderful- pleasant- village- chance-
Make up a dialogue using the words above.

Exercise 5. Explain the proverbs and sayings:

a. Master’s eye sees more than ten of the servants.

b. To cry with one eye and laugh with the other.
c. Face is the index of the heart.
d. Face to face, the truth comes out.
e. He who has no head needs no hat.
f. Heart thinks what the tongue speaks.
g. Hearts may agree, though heads differ.

Exercise 6. Describe your mother’s, father’s, sister’s and friend’s appearance.

Exercise 7.Describe in writing the appearance of a famous singer from Moldova you like
best.

Exercise 8. Do the quiz with a partner. Answer with my / your / their + a part of the body:

WHICH PART(S) OF THE BODY ... ?

1. do you wear
a ring on
gloves on
socks on
a cap on
2. do ballet dancers stand on
3. do footballers often injure
4. do women put make-up on
5. do people brush
6. do people carry a rucksack on

Exercise 9. Look at the four pictures and 1isten(T.3.1). Which one is the thief? Describe the
four pictures with a partner:
87
Exercise 10. Talk to a partner:

l. Do you think people in your country tend to judge other people by their appearance? In what
way?
2. How important do you think appearance is for the following people?
• politicians
• TV presenters
• business people
• singers
• doctors
Do you think it is right that their appearance matters?
3. On what occasions might you judge someone by their appearance?

Vocabulary
People's Appearance
Figure: tall, short, middle-sized; stout, thin, slim; straight, stooping
Face: thin, plump, fat; oval, round, square; beautiful, handsome, good-looking; lovely, pretty,
attractive; common, plain, ugly
Complexion: rosy, pale; fresh, dark, fair
Eyes: blue, brown, hazel, dark, grey; deep-set, close-set, wide-set
(Eye-)lashes: long, short, curving, straight
(Eye-)brows: straight, arched, pencilled, bushy
Forehead: broad, narrow; low, high
Nose: straight, hooked, turned up, snub (bed) Mouth: large, small, tiny, red. Lips: thin, full, thick
Hair: long, short; curly, straight; red, brown, dark, fair, grey, chestnut, golden; thick; to wear
one's hair long, short; to wear a beard, a moustache
Arms and legs: long, short; shapely, small to gain (lose) weight; to keep fit

Lesson 2.

Grammar: Adjectives
Adjectives describe nouns.

An elephant is a wild animal. (What kind of an animal is it? Wild.)

Remember: Adjectives remain the same in the plural.

He is a clever boy. They are clever boys.

Adjectives can go before a noun or after the verb 'to be'.

John is a tall man. John is tall.

88
 -- Adjectives Positive Comparative Superlative
one syllable long long longer than the longest
two syllables happy happier than the happiest

more than two beautiful more beautiful than the most beautiful
syllables

We use comparative adjectives to compare two people, animals or things. We often

use the word than after the comparative adjective.
E.g. I'm taller than you. She is more beautiful than Wendy.

We use superlative adjectives to compare three or more people, animals or things.

We use the word the before the superlative adjective.

e.g. I'm the tallest student in class. She's the most beautiful girl in class.

Note: We use in for places after a superlative adjective.

e.g. She's the cleverest student of all. She's the cleverest student in class.

Spelling
tall - taller - tallest
large - larger – largest

Irregular form
good - better - best
small - smaller - smallest strong - stronger - strongest
BUT
heavy - heavier – heaviest big - bigger – biggest
much/many/a lot of - more – most
bad - worse – worst

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Write the comparative and the superlative forms of the adjectives below:

1. tall…………..
2. funny ....................
3. nice ....................
4. beautiful ....................
5. slim ....................
6. cold ....................
7. good...................
8. easy ....................
9. careful ...................
10. bad ....................
11. fat ...................
12. old…………….

Exercise 2. Read and write:

89
I usually live in a house or on a farm. I am 1) .. …..,. (small) than a rabbit but I'm 2).......... (big)
than a snail. I am 3) ......... (slow) than a cat but I'm 4)............... (clever) than a rabbit. I love
cheese! What am I? I'm a 5) ............

Exercise 3. Form the degrees of comparison of the following adjectives:

old, bad, cold, yellow, loud, clean, large, cosy, comfortable, green, modern, long, red, dark,
good, small, interesting, difficult, important, easy.

Exercise 4. Writing activity: Write about you and your friend:

Me and my friend…..

Exercise 5. Put the adjectives in brackets in the required degree of comparison:

1. Asia is (large) than Australia. 2. The Volga is (short) than the Mississippi. 3. Mary is a
(good) student than Lucy. 4. There are (few) mistakes in my dictation than in yours. 5. This
garden is the (beautiful) in our town. 6. The Arctic Ocean is (cold) than the Indian Ocean. 7.
Chinese is (difficult) than English. 8. Spanish is (easy) than German. 9. Let's go to the (far)
corner of the park. That is the (quiet) place here.

Exercise 6. Complete the sentences with a superlative:

a. This building is very old. It’s the oldest building in the town. b. It was a very happy day. It
was of my life. c. It’s a very good film. It’s I’ve seen. d. It was a very bad mistake. It was in my
life. e. It was a very cold day. It was of the year. f. She’s a popular singer. She’s in the country.
g. He’s a very boring person. He’s I know. h. This house is very big. It is I’ve lived in. i. My
cousin is very tall. He is I have. j. Laura is a very pretty girl. She is I know.

Exercise 7.Write the sentences in the correct order:

a. taller / than / Gary / Rick / is.

E.g. Gary is taller than Rick.
b. trousers / John / got / has / new / light.
c. Mary / clothes / likes / bigger
d. an / expensive / Rick / wearing / coat / is
e. the / Carol / has / scarf / got / shortest
f. the / student / he / tallest / is
g. actress / Mary / the / was / popular / most
h. He / the / was / footballer / best
i. plays / than / better / you / Mary
j. father / is / your / than / stronger / mine

Exercise 8. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the adjective in brackets:

a. Carol is as good (good) as you at sport.

b. We like wearing the (late) fashion.
c. These trousers are (comfortable) than those jeans.
d. She is (happy) now than he was last year.
e. You are the (pretty) girl in class.
f. My grandma is (old) than my grandpa.
g. The red dress is the (attractive) in the shop.
h. I always tell the (fun) jokes.
90
i. Your hair is (curly) than my hair.
j. My hair is (short) than yours.

Exercise 9. Complete the following sentences with the Comparative forms of "Adjectives"
in brackets:

Example : My sister is shorter than I /I am / me. (short)

I am heavier than she / she is / her. (heavy)
Peter looks much younger than he / he does / him. (young)
1. I am...... . ... .. .... .. ... my father (is), (tall). 2. The Taj Mahal is ......... ... .. ... ...
..... . the White House (is), (old). 3. This boxer is a bit.. .............................. ....... ......... the other
one. (fast). 4. The Sun is..... .. .... ... .. .. ...... the Earth (is), (big). 5. The North Pole is a bit
........... .... .. .. ..... the South Pole (is), (cold). 6. Those grapes are a lot....... ......................
..................... the others, (sweet). 7. Everest is ....... ... ..... .... .... .. .. any other mountain in the
world, (high). 8. Interest rates are .................................... in Britain ................. in France, (low).
9. The Mississippi is ........................................................ the Kızılırmak (is), (long). 10. Today is.
.......... .. .. .. .. .. ..it was yesterday, (hot). 11. The upstairs woman is
..................................... ... the downstairs woman, (young). 12. This place is .... ... .... ... .......
.......... that deserted island, (safe). 13. Silver is................. .. .... .. ... ...gold, (cheap). 14. The
sea today is much ................ ........................ it was yesterday, (calm). 15. The Pacific Ocean is
........ ...... .. ... .... ..... the Atlantic Ocean, (deep). 16. Your mother looks .. .. .. ... .... ....
... ...your father (does), I think, (old). 17. Olga is ............................................................ her
brother, (fat). 18. The apartment was ............................................. we had expected, (little). 19.
February is ..... .... .... ..... .... .... ... ...April, (cold). 20. A train is not..............................
.......................... a bus. (quick). 21. The United States of America is .. .... ... ..... .... .. ..
Canada, (large). 22. My brother is ........................................................... your brother (is),
(smart). 23. The Pound is ........................................................... the United States Dollar (is),
(strong). 24. Diana is ... ..... ... .. ... .. .. .... she was two years ago. (thin). 25. Today my
secretary seems to be ....... .................................... she was yesterday, (busy). 26. She is very
much ... .. .. ... .... ...... .... . she was last year, (happy). 27. Today I am ................
...................... I was yesterday, (angry). 28. Living in the country is ............................................
living in the city, (healthy). 29. The weather is Konya is .. ... ... .. .... .... .. .. the weather
in Antalya, (dry). 30. This street is ..... ........... ......................... the street in which the children are
playing, (noisy). 31. Silvana is much................. ........................ ... the other girls I know, (pretty).
32. I think Steven is ......................................................... David (is), (friendly)

Exercise 10. Complete the following sentences with the Comparative forms of "Adjectives"
in brackets:

Example: Kate is more intelligent than he / he is / him. (Intelligent)

Rose looks more cheerful than I /I do / me. (Cheerful)
We are more carefully than they / they are / them, (careful)
1. Istanbul is ................................................ Ankara (is), (crowded) 2. Imagination is
................................................ knowledge (is), (important) 3. The food in Turkey is
.............................................. the food in Germany, (delicious). 4. Dogs are .
.............................................. cats (are), (affectionate) 5. Mr Smith is
.............................................. his wife (is), (sensible) 6. The man's own life was much
.............................................. Mr Smith's, (interesting) 7. A cobra is ..............................................
a boa constrictor, (dangerous) 8. Spanish is .............................................. Italian, I think,
(popular) 9. The dome of the Blue Mosque is..............................................the dome of St. Sophia,
(elegant) 10. I think Chinese is ..............................................Turkish, (difficult) 11. My car is
..............................................my father's, (expensive) 12. This method is
91
.............................................. the one you are talking about, (effective) 13. Swiss watches
are.............................................. other watches, (reliable) 14. My brother's handwriting is
.............................................. mine, (legible) 15. A train is .............................................. a bus.
(comfortable) 16. Riding a mountain bike is ............................................... jogging, (tiring) 17.
Today the director is ..............................................he was yesterday, (furious) 18. She has a
.............................................. nature ..............................................her husband, (generous) 19.
British Airways is.............................................. Air France, (profitable) 20. This seems to be a
.................... murder....................... the one you are investigating, (mysterious) 21. Your mother
is ............................................... your father, I think, (extravagant) 22. This holiday seems to be
.............................................. the one we had last year, (exciting) 23. Susan is
............................................... the girl we met at the party, (beautiful) 24. Hepatitis is
..............................................a sore throat, (serious) 25. Dogs are ..............................................
cats, (playful) 26. Frankly speaking, Eileen is .............................................. my sister, (attractive)
27. Monkeys are .............................................. dogs, (obedient) 28. Living in a large city is
...............................................living in a small one. (stressful) 29. These parents are
............................................... those parents, (audacious) 30. My daughter is
.............................................. my son in solving problems, (successful) 31. I find
swimming..............................................most other games, (relaxing) 32. You look
..............................................your husband (does), Hilda! (energetic)

Exercise 11. Complete the following sentences with the Superlatives forms of "Adjectives"
in brackets:

Example : Diana is the most beautiful girl in our school, (beautiful)

Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world, (high)
1. Maths is one of.................................................. subjects at school, (interesting). 2. Asia is
................................................. of the seven continents in the world, (big). 3. Africa is
................................................. of the four continents that I have visited, (large) 4. This is
................................................. restaurant in the town, (expensive) 5. English is
..................................................... language in the world, (popular) 6. Mont Blanc is
.................................................. mountain in Europe, (high) 7. Frankly
speaking,................................................... city I stayed in was Paris, (lovely) 8. The elephant
is the animal that has ................................................... memory, (long) 9. The Sahara is
.................................................... desert in the world, (large) 10. He is
..................................................... person in the family, (obstinate) 11. The giraffe is
..................................................... of all animals, (tall)12. July and August are
.................................................... months of the year, (hot)13. Sandy was
................................................... girl in our school, (pretty)14. December and January are
.................................................. months of the year, (cold)15. I think I am
................................................. woman because I have got a lot of money, (happy) 16. The
teacher asked me .................................................. question during the exam, (difficult) 17. John is
................................................... of the five children, (old) 18. To my way of thinking, my
father is ............................................... man in the world, (handsome) 19. Carol has
.................................................... dimples in the world, (cute) 20. Once the Hilton hotel was
................................................. hotel in Istanbul, (luxurious) 21. My sister bought one
of........................................................ cars in the city, (cheap) 22. I think Nathalie Cardone is
one of....................................................singers in the world, (charming) 23. I think bungee
jumping is ............................................... sports of all. (dangerous) 24. Molly is
..................................................... student in our class, (intelligent) 25. The Beatles were
perhaps ............................................... group of the 1960's. (well-known) 26. The football
fans in Istanbul are ............................................... in the world, (enthusiastic) 27. Istanbul is
..................................................... city in Turkey, (crowded) 28. Sydney is probably
92
.............................................. city I have ever visited, (spectacular) 29. Pollution is
................................................... problem in most countries in the world, (serious) 30.
Unemployment is ...................................................... problem in Turkey, (important) 31.
According to .................................................... news, the government has imposed a new tax.
(late) 32. This is ...................................................... ice-cream I have ever eaten, (delicious)

Exercise 12. Rewrite the following sentences using the Comparative forms of "Much" or
"Little" without changing the meaning of the sentence:
MUCH MORE THE MOST
LITTLE LESS THE LEAST
Example : My book is more interesting than yours. Your book is less interesting than mine.
1 Martha is more polite than Sharon (is). 2. Her chair is less comfortable than mine. 3. My
father is more successful than yours. 4. My dog is less playful than hers.5. I am more forgetful
than Julia (is). 6. That snake is less dangerous than this snake. 7.Our teacher is more cheerful
than theirs. 8. Travelling by air is more exciting than travelling by sea. 9.Margaret is less
obedient than her sister.10. A thunderstorm is less terrible than a hurricane. 11. Fishing is more
relaxing than tennis. 12. A cold is less serious than flu. 13. Pamela is more helpful than Melissa
(is). 14. Fiona is less enthusiastic than Stella (is)

PHYSICAL APPEARANCE
Comment the following statement: “Judge not according to the appearance”

Exercise 1. a Who do you think knows you better, your mother (or father) or your best
friend? Why?
b Read the introduction and the first paragraph of the article.
1 What is the idea of the experiment?
2 Who i Charlotte?
3 Who are Alice and Katie?
4 What do Alice and Katie have to do? Then what happens?
c. Now read what Charlotte says. With a partner guess the meaning of the highlighted
words and phrase .
d. Cover the text. Can you remember?
1 What does Charlotte like doing?
2 What's she like?
3 What kind of men does f doesn't she like?
4 Who does she think is going to choose better? Why?

Charlotte’s choice

In our weekly experiment, single people who are looking for a partner ask their mother and their
best friend to help. This week's single person is Charlotte Ramirez, a 25-year-old web designer.
Her father is Spanish and her mother is English. She lives in Brighton and she doesn't have a
partner at the moment. Her mother, Alice, chooses a man she thinks is perfect for her daughter
and her best friend, Katie, chooses another. Then Charlotte goes on a date with each man. Which
one does she prefer?' I love going to the cinema, but I often feel like staying at home with a good
book,' says Charlotte. 'I'm quite friendly and sociable and I get on well with most people. I think
I have a good sense of humor.' 'What kind of men do I like? Well, I like interesting men who can
make me laugh. Physically, I prefer men with a really nice smile who are taller than me. And I
don't usually like men with beards! I like men who are into literature and art, and classical
music.' 'I'm not sure who is going to choose better for me. Both my mum and my best friend
93
know me very well. Perhaps Katie can find me a guy who is physically more compatible, but my
mother knows me for longer!

Exercise 2. 1. Which man do you think is better for Charlotte? Why?

Exercise 3. A. Listen to Charlotte talking about what happened when she met Alexander (T
3.1). What did she think of him? Does she want to see him again? B. Listen again and write
down any adjectives or expressions that Charlotte uses to describe his appearance and
personality. C. .Now repeat for Oliver. D. What does Charlotte decide in the end? Do you
agree with her?

Vocabulary
Brave, calm , careful ,clever, cold, energetic, friendly, funny, generous, happy, honest,
imaginative, intelligent, interesting , jealous, lazy, loyal, mean, nervous, nice ,optimistic, patient,
pessimistic, polite, quiet ,reliable ,rude ,sad, selfish, sensible, sensitive, serious, shy, sincere,
sociable, talkative, thoughtful , tidy , warm, warm-hearted

Exercise 4. Write an adjective to each definition:

A person who talks a lot is …

A person who likes giving presents is…
A person who never does any work is …
A person who makes people laugh is …
A person who is open and nice is …
A person who is nervous and uncomfortable meeting new people is …

Exercise 4. Work in pairs, A and B. Think of a person you know well, a family member or
a friend, who is single. You are going to tell your partner about him / her. Look at the chart
below and prepare what are going to say:

• Name?
• Age?
• Job/Studies?
• Lives in ?
• Physical appearance?
• Personality?
• Smokes ?
• Likes?
• Doesn’t like?

Exercise 5. Read the following dialogue and copy out all the adjectives used in the comparative
and the superlative degrees:

94
"Good evening, Mrs. Martin. Let me take your things. Put your bag on this table." "How is Mr.
Jones?" "Quite well, thank you. He is not in yet. And how is your husband?" "He is coming in a
moment. He is busier than ever." "My husband usually comes home about six. Sometimes a little
earlier. But he never comes later than half past six." "It is only a quarter past." "Let us go into the
sitting-room. Please, sit down in this armchair. It is the most comfortable." "I like your house
very much. It is the quietest I know." "There is very little traffic in our street." "Your garden is so
large. It is much larger than ours." "But yours is more beautiful. Your trees are older and you
have finer flowers."

Exercise 6. Complete the following sentences. Use them in conversational situations:

1. Well, you see, ............ . 2. You know ............3. In fact............4. Look here, ............ 5. Come,
............6. Why............7. I say, ............. . 8. Still............ 9. Now............10. Then, .............
11. Ofcourse............ 12. Perhaps, ............ 13. Luckily, ............ 14. Fortunately,
15.Unfortunately............16. However, ............ . 17. Anyhow, ............. 18. Besides,
19.Normally, . ............ . 20. Finally............ 21.Personally, ............ 22. Generally
23.Probably, .. ............ 24.Possibly............ 25. Perhaps, ............. 26. Maybe, ............. 27.
Surely,............. 28. No doubt............ 29. Upon my word............ 30. Not at all, ............ 31. As
far as I can see, ............ 32. To my regret............ 33. I am sorry to say............34. At any rate,
35.In short............ 36. After all............ 37. In any case, ............ 38. At least............ 39.
On the contrary, ............ 40. Above all............ 41. Strictly speaking, ............ 42. To tell you the
truth,............. 43. As far as ... is concerned, ............ 44. You see, ............ 45. As for me,
.............46. In my opinion............

Exercise 7. Complete the opposites:

1 talkative-
2 shy-
3 generous-
4 friendly-
5 hard-working-
6 kind-
7 serious-
8 stupid-

Exercise 8. Complete the definitions with the adjectives.

Affectionate; aggressive; ambitious; anxious; bossy; charming competitive; independent;
jealous; moody; rebellious; reliable; selfish; sensible; sensitive; sociable; spoilt; stubborn.

1 people think about themselves and not about other people.

2. A person always wants to win.
3 children behave badly because they are given everything they want.
4 An person gets angry quickly and likes fighting and arguing.
5 people have an attractive personality and make people like them.
6A person has common sense and is practical.
7A person is friendly and enjoys being with other people.
8 people are often worried or stressed.
9A person is happy one n1inute and sad the next, and is often bad tempered.
l0 people like doing things on their own, without help.
11 A person likes giving orders to other people.
12 An person shows that they love or like people very much.
95
13 A person thinks that someone loves another person more than them, or wants
what other people have.
14 A person can be easily hurt or offended.
15 An person wants to be successful in life.
16 A person is someone who you can trust or depend on.
17 A person doesn't like obeying rules.
18 A person never changes his (or her) opinion or attitude about something.

Lesson 3

Grammar: Order of Adjectives

1. Opinion adjectives (bad, good, etc.) go before fact adjectives (old, red, etc.).
She bought a beautiful red dress.
2. When there are two or more fact adjectives, they go in the following order:

Size age shape colour origin material noun

This is a large old rectangular brown French wooden bed.

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Put the adjectives in the right order:

1. a new / woolen / red / smart / hat

2. two / long / blue / beautiful/dresses
3. a gold / tiny / round / Russian / coin..
4. a plastic / blue / little / spoon

Exercise 2. Complete the following sentences using the correct adjective order. Use commas
between the adjectives if you have three or more:

• Maria has hair. black, beautiful, thick

• I saw the table this morning wooden, ugliest, round
• She looks so elegant in her coat. wool, Italian, long
• That is the sculpture in this museum. metal, most
unusual, modern
• They bought a lot of furniture on the trip. Indian, antique,
interesting

Exercise 3. Complete the following sentences using the correct adjective order:

1. At home there is a table in the dining room. (beautiful, wooden, square)

2. I was offered ring by my husband. (gold, a/n, unusual)3. My grandmother has
knitted sweater for me. (woolen, new, nice, a) 4. I saw movie
with friends at home. (a/n, American, old, interesting) 5. It may rain ! There
are clouds floating in the air. (black, big, rain, many) 6. It was

96
such day that we decided to go out for a walk. (sunny, lovely, cool, a) 7. My
daughter has hair. (black, long, beautiful) 8. Last week, I
visited village in a remote place. (little, charming, a/n, old) 9. The gallery
exhibited mainly paintings. (old, French, strange) 10. John was
given kitten by his sister. (little, a/n, adorable, black) 11. It started to rain so I
opened umbrella. (red and yellow, a/n, enormous) 12. I inherited
house built in 1860. (old, picturesque, a/n) 13. car was parked
opposite my house. (Italian, blue, sleek, a/n)

Exercise 4. Rewrite the following phrases using the correct adjective order. Use commas
between the adjectives if you have three or more adjectives:
1. warm beach a sandy beautiful 2. film handsome American a/an actor 3. a/an teacher
intelligent part-time likeable 4. balloon A plastic red hot-air huge 5. A basement
apartment fully-furnished lovely 6. A dog black pedigree friendly 7. strange small A
box square metal 8. bag. beautiful A travel leather old

Exercise 5. Rewrite the following phrases using the correct adjective order:
1. beautiful Japanese car a/an old 2. big wooden rectangular tables Some 3. small
cake A round delicious 4. strong rapper black French short the young 5. watch gold my
modern valuable 6. carpet new Chinese charming red their small 7. old black big one
Canadian box 8. small necklace silver charming a/an 9. proverb Chinese interesting short
a/an

CLOTHES

“Clothes make the man”

Exercise 1. a. Do you agree that clothes make the man? Why? Why do you think so? b. So,
we’ll try to find out why clothes make the man.

What is in fashion?
Fashion goes in cycles and those cycles can often be predicted. Fashion designers fool us
into buying clothes that our parents bought twenty years ago. The things are changing in fashion.
People wear many different styles. Trousers can be wide or tight. Jeans supposed to be
very fashionable and comfortable. This season low-waist jeans with wide legs are very popular.
Trainers are fashionable from well known companies, but so are shoes with high stiletto heels for
women. Teenage girls wear mini skirts one day and very long skirts the next day.
Fashionable colors are white, black and yellow. Make up is lighter this season. Sport
clothes like track suits and trainers are in fashion too.
It’s good taste to wear tightly waist clothes. It’s very fashionable to wear lace.
Many young people don’t like big department stores and they buy their clothes in small
shops and boutiques. The idea is that people dress to please themselves.

Vocabulary
Kinds of clothes: coat, shirt, blouse, cardigan, sweater, skirt, suit, trousers, shorts, a pull-over,
dressing-gown, jersey, jeans, corduroy trousers (corduroys).
Articles of clothing: socks, stockings, scarf, muffler, kerchief, gloves, mittens, tie, handkerchief,
tights, pyjamas, nightgown, underwear (undies).
Parts of clothes: collar, sleeve, belt.
Footwear: slippers, sandals, sport shoes, walking shoes, court shoes, rubber boots, training shoes
(trainers).
Textiles: silk, cotton (print), velvet, woollen cloth.
97
Jewellery: ring, bracelet, ear-rings, chain, brooch, necklace.
Notes on vocabulary:
What kind of words and expressions can be used with the word “clothes”?
E.g.: original, traditional, fashionable, suitable, warm, clean, dirty, neat, conservative, the
latest fashion, to be in fashion, to be out of fashion, a fashion designer, to design fashion, unisex
fashion, fashion for the young and for the adults, old-fashioned.
When we speak about clothes we should speak about styles of clothing. There are a lot of styles.
What kinds of styles do you know?
E.g.: classical, modern, extravagant, sport style, conservative.

Exercise 2. Learn about the purpose of clothing:

Clothing is used to cover the body, to make you feel more attractive, and to communicate with
others. People wear clothes for many different reasons. Some of these reasons are physical. You
wear clothes for comfort and protection. Others are for psychological and social reasons. Clothes
give you self-confidence and express your personality. Clothes also help you identify with other
people. All people have basic human needs. Meeting these needs provides satisfaction and
enjoyment in life. Clothing helps to meet some of these needs. Knowing something about the
role of clothing helps you to understand yourself and others better. Clothing is a complex but
fascinating part of everyone’s life. Therefore clothes are worn for:

1. Protection:
Our skin is uncovered and exposed. We can be easily affected by the elements-rain, snow, wind,
cold, and heat. We can be harmed or injured on the job or while participating in sports. In some
cases, we need to protect us with our clothing. Clothing aids to your comfort. It absorbs
perspiration, prevents sudden chills, and acts as a buffer between your body and accidental
burns, scratches, and rough surfaces. The right garments can insulate your body against
extremely hot or extremely cold temperatures. People who live in severely cold climates, such as
the Eskimos, keep warm by wearing pants and parkas with fur linings. The fur traps the warm air
from their bodies and creates a life-saving insulating layer of warmth. Desert nomads keep the
harmful hot sun from dehydrating their bodies by covering up with long flowing robes and
headdresses. Their clothing actually keeps them cooler
2. Safety:
Clothing also serves to protect your skin from harm or injury. Some sports and occupations
require protective clothing for safety reasons. Football players wear helmets and protective
padding to help prevent injury during rough play.Some people’s work requires them to be in
dangerous or hazardous conditions. Clothing can offer protection. Some items are even labeled
with the term “safety” to identify them from regular day-to-day clothes and accessories Fire-
fighters wear asbestos clothing in hazardous situations. Police officers wear bulletproof vests.
Road workers wear florescent orange vests so that drivers can see them easily and prevent
accidents.
3. Sanitation:
Special clothing and accessories are often worn for sanitation reasons. People who work in
factories that produce food and medical products wear sanitary clothing, face masks, and hair
covering. This precaution prevents contamination of the products by germs. In operating rooms,
doctors and nurses wear special disposable sanitary uniforms, gloves, and face masks.
4. Modesty:
Modesty refers to what people feel is the proper way for clothing to cover the body. Different
groups of people may have different standards of modesty. For example Clothes that a woman
might wear to a fancy party would probably be unacceptable at work the next.
5. Identification:

98
Clothing can also identify people as members of a group. Certain types of clothing, colors, and
accessories have become representative of certain groups, activities, and occupations. Or by
simply dressing alike, people can show that they belong to the same group. Eg. Air Crews, Air
hostess, Doctors, Pilots, etc.
6. Uniforms:
A uniform is one of the easiest ways to identify group members. Uniforms can provide instant
recognition or create a special image for the group. Members of the police force, fire department,
and military wear uniforms so that they can be recognized quickly and easily for public safety.
Athletic teams wear different colors to identify their team and to tell them apart from their
opponents. People who work in service occupations, such as restaurant workers, airline
personnel, and hotel staff also wear special uniform. These uniforms help to identify the worker
to their customers, as well as create an image for the company.
7. Styles and Colors:
Some occupations require a unique style of dress. Judges wear the traditional black robe.
Ministers, priests, and other clergy members may wear special clothing for conducting religious
services. The style of the clothing often dates back many centuries to show visually that what
they are doing is linked to the past. Many people wear special styles and colors of clothing for
special occasions in their lives. Graduates may wear ling robes and mortarboard hats with tassels
8. Decoration:
People decorate themselves to enhance their appearance. They wear clothes, jewelry, and
cosmetics in hopes of improving their looks and attracting favorable attention. Adornment, or
decoration, also helps people to express their uniqueness and creativity. Clothing and accessories
can be used to improve appearance in different ways. Clothing can also be decorated to make it
special and unique

Exercise 3. Ask and answer the questions with a partner:

What clothes do you usually wear ... ?

• at work / university/ school
• when you go out at night
• when you want to relax at the weekend

Exercise 4. Look at the painting by the British artist David Hackney (1937-):
In pairs, describe the man and the woman.
• What do they look like?
• What are they wearing?
• What a re they doing?

Exercise 5. With a partner, write down the names of three fashion designers:
What nationality are they? Do they design more for men or for women? What kind of things
does their company make?
99
Unit IV
Lesson 1.

Grammar: 1. Nouns: Countable and Uncountable

Countable nouns – are things that can be Uncountable nouns - are substances,
counted. They usually refer to things. Most concepts etc. that cannot be divided into
countable nouns become plural by adding separate elements, that cannot “be counted”
an ‘s’ at the end of the word Therefore, they only have a singular form.
They have no plural forms.

For example: “pen” - we can count pens - For example, we cannot count “milk” - we
one, two, three or more pens. can count “of milk” or “litres of milk”, but
we cannot count “milk” itself.

Countable nouns can be singular or plural. Uncountable nouns are usually treated as
singular.

Some countable nouns: dog, cat, animal, man, bottle, box, coin, dollar, cup, plate, fork, table,
chair, suitcase, bag, etc.

e.g. My dog is playing. My dogs are hungry.

Some more uncountable nouns: music, art, love, happiness, advice, information, news,
furniture, luggage, rice, sugar, butter, water, electricity, gas, power, money, currency, etc.

e.g. This news is very important. Your luggage looks heavy.

Some uncountable nouns can be “ made” countable by using the following words in
front of them: jar, bottle, piece, loaf, cup, bar, glass, kilo, carton, bowl, can, jug, slice,
tin, packet, etc.

e.g. a jar of marmalade, a bottle of beer, a loaf of bread, a cup of Coffee

Note: When using countable and uncountable nouns, pay attention to articles and adjectives!
Some articles and adjectives can be used with both countable and uncountable nouns. However,
others can be used with only countable or only uncountable nouns! (See appendix table 1.)

2. Many, Much, A lot of !

Many/few/ a lot of +noun (countable)

e.g. Do you get many telegrams? He doesn’t ask many questions. He usually asks me a lot of
questions.

Much/little/ a lot of + noun (uncountable)

e.g. How much time do you usually spend on this kind of work? He doesn’t eat much rice. They
usually buy a lot of bread.

We use a lot of/lots of with plural countable nouns (e.g. books, cars, etc.) and
100
uncountable nouns (e.g. sugar, milk, etc.) In positive statements.

e.g. She’s got a lot of/lots of books. There’s a lot of milk in the fridge

Note: We omit of when a lot is not followed b y a noun:

e.g. Are there many people in the room? - Yes, there are a lot.

We normally use much with uncountable nouns i n questions and negations.

e.g. How much money have you got? There is not much sugar in the bowl.

We normally use many with plural countable nouns in questions and negations.

e.g. Are there many books on the shelf? There are not many books on the shelf.

In questions we use how much to ask about the amount of something and how many to
ask about the number of things.

How much + uncountable noun

How many + countable noun

e.g. How much sugar do we need? A kilo. (We want to know the amount.) How many boys
are there in your class? Twenty. (We want to know the number.)

Countable nouns a lot (of) lots of (how) many, many / Uncountable Nouns a lot (of),(how)
much, much

3. Would like
Would is the same in all persons. We use would like in offers and requests.

Positive Yes/No que stions Short answers

I He/she/
You it Yes, please
He/she/it ’d like a drink Would we like No, thank you
We They you a
they drink?

Note: ’d = would

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Give the plural of the following nouns:

baby ; man ; mouse; fish ; knife; potato; roof; sheep; a child; city; ox; watch; wife; money.

Exercise 2. Use a/an or some:

101
1. biscuit 2. armchair 3. money 4. tea 5. plate 6. watches 7.
carrot 8.chair 9. salt 10. ring

Exercise 3. Which nouns are countable which are uncountable?

1. bread 2. cat 3. water 4. pepper 5. honey 6. meat 7. wife

8. money 9. flower 10. milk

Exercise 4. Supply with articles if necessary:

1. apples on other side of wall are sweetest. 2. Better small fish

than empty dish. 3. brevity is soul of wit. 4. One cannot blow and swallow at
same time.5. Please clean blackboard! 6. I must go to bank and post office.
7. Which is longer: Volga or Danube? 8. Is Everest _ highest mountain in
world? 9. They say sugar is bad for you. 10. Is Amsterdam in United
States or in Netherlands? 11. This school has quite large campus. 12. sun rises
in east and sets in west. 13. English are very proud of their history. 14. They are
looking for man with long dark hair. He is armed and dangerous.

Exercise 5. Are these usually count or uncount nouns?

1. rice 2. strawberry
3. mo n e y 4. biscuit
5. bread 6. fruit
7. stamp 8. sandwich
9. wine 10. cheese
11. apple 12. cup
13. cigarette 14. egg

Exercise 6. Complete the sentences with a, an, or some:

1. Would you like ______ rice? 2. Would you like ______ wine? 3. Can I have ______
stamps, please? 4. I would like ______ chicken sandwich and ______ cheese for lunch. 5. Do
you want ______ drink? 6. Would you like apple or ______ strawberries? 7. Can I have
______ bread? 8. Can you give me ______ money? 9. I usually have ______ biscuit and cup of
coffee at 11 a.m. 10. Could you buy______ fruit when you go to the shops? 11. He always has
______ egg for breakfast.

Exercise7. Correct the mistakes:

1. Sarah and I am sisters. 2. Ben and Tim is at school. 3. Horses and cows is animals. 4.
England are a country. 5. Tim are from America. 6. Jane is an painter.7. I have got an
uniform. 8. Helen isn't at the home. 9. The Pyramids are in the Egypt. 10. It is a
hourglass. 11. The Mark is a student. 12. I have got a milk. 13. It is an house. 14. An
earth is a planet. 15. They have got a old car.

Exercise 8. Make the following nouns countable:

1. some Coke - two bottles/cups of coke

102
2. some bread - three ____________________
3. some chocolate four ____________________
4. some water - five ____________________
5. some cheese - two ____________________
6. some meat ·three ____________________
7. some wine - eight ____________________
8. some salmon - four ____________________
9. some milk – ten ____________________
10. some soap - four ____________________

Exercise 9. Correct the mistakes:

1. There is a elephant in the garden. 2. That is Bill’s car. It’s him. 3. There are wolfs in
the forest. 4. There’s a bread on the table. 5. There’s a money in my pocket. 6. They go
to the school every day. 7. My bicycle has got two wheel. 8. She’s got an book.

Exercise 10. In pairs, ask and answer questions as in the example:

e.g. SA: How much honey is there? – SB: Not much.

SA: How many cassettes are there? – SB: Not many.

honey, cassettes ,teachers, eggs, water, students, tea meat, boys, milk, apples, sheep, women, salt,
paper, money, letters, books, records, pepper, wine, pens

Exercise 11. Fill in many, much or a lot of:

1. There is a l o t o f milk in the carton. 2. Are there people at the

cinema today? 3. He has got money. 4. There isn’t
sugar in this coffee. 5. Is there orange juice in
the jug? 6. She has got books in her bag. 7. Have you got
friends? 8. There aren’t biscuits in the packet. 9.
We haven’t got bread. 10. There are animals in
the zoo. 11. Are there shops in this street? 12. There isn’t
pepper in the soup. 13. The children have got
toys. 14. Is there tea in the cup? 15. She has got
rings.

Exercise 12. In pairs, ask and answer questions as in the example:

e.g. Would you like an apple? - Yes, please. / Would you like some tea? - No, thank you.

Exercise 13. Match the questions with the answers:

1. Do you eat many hamburgers? ...b...
2. Have you got many computer games?
3. How many pets have you got?
4. How much is this T-shirt?
5. How much time do you spend doing your homework?
a . Two; a dog and a cat.
b. No. Not many.
c. Not much, about two hours every day.
d. No, I haven't got any.
e. £15.
103
Exercise 14. Answer the questions with a lot, much or many:

1. Have you got any stamps? Yes, a lot. . 2. Is there any bread in the cupboard? No, not
3. Have you got any biscuits? No, not
4. Have you got any video tapes? Yes
5. How many apples do we need for the cake? Not
6. How much money do you need for the weekend? Not
.

Exercise 15. Fill in much, many, or a lot of :

1. There weren’t people at the party. 2. It cost me money to furnish the

house. 3. We don’t have time. 4. Tom drinks milk. 5. We didn’t take
Photos. 6. I put salt in the soup.

Exercise 16. Complete the questions with How much or How many…? and answer them:

1. homework do you get?

2. English books do you have?
3. does a cup of coffee cost?
4. languages do you speak?
5. people are there in our class?
6. weeks holiday do you have in summer?
7. coffee do you drink a day?

Exercise 17. a. Complete the questions using much or many:

1. How people are there in the room?

2. Ho money do you have in your pocket?
w cigarettes do you smoke?
3. How petrol is there in the car?
4. How apples do you want?
5. How wine is there in the fridge?
6. How

b. Choose an answer for each question:

a. a kilo.
b. There are two bottles.
c. Ten a day.
d. Just fifty pence.
e. Twenty. Nine men and eleven women.
f. It’s full.

Exercise 18. Correct the sentences:

1. How much apples do you want? 2. I don’t like an ice-cream. 3. Can I have a bread,
please? 4. I’m hungry. I like a sandwich. 5. I don’t have many milk left. 6. I’d like some
fruits, please. 7. How many money do you have? 8. We have lot of homework today.

104
 THE WORLD OF FOOD

Proverb: “Appetite comes with eating.”

Exercise 1. Which food and drink comes from your country? Which foreign food and
drink is popular in your country?

Exercise 2. Can you identify any places or nationalities and their peculiarities in
meals?

Exercise 3. Read the text. Write the correct question heading for each paragraph.

WHERE DOES OUR FOOD COME FROM?

WHAT DO WE EAT?
HOW DO WE EAT?

FOOD AROUND WORLD.

For 99% of human history, people took their food from the world around them. They ate all that they
could find, and then moved on.Then about 10,000 years ago,or for 1% of human history,people learned to
farm the land and control their environment.

The kind of food we eat depends on which part of the world we live in, or which part of our
country we live in. For example, in the south of China they eat rice, but in the north they eat
noodles. In Scandinavia, they eat a lot of herrings, and the Portuguese love sardines. But in
central Europe, away from the sea, people don't eat so much fish; they eat more meat and
sausages. In Germany and Poland there a r e hundreds of different kinds of sausages.

In North America, Australia, and Europe there are two or more courses to every meal and
people eat with knives and forks. In China there is only one course, all the food is together
o n the table, and they eat with chopsticks. In parts of India and the Middle East people
use their fingers and bread to pick up the food.

Nowadays it is possible to transport food easily from one part of the world to the other. We
can eat what we like, when we like, at any time of the year. Our b a n a n a s - come from
the Caribbean or Africa; our rice comes from India or the USA; our strawberries c ome
from Chile or Spain. Food is very big business. But people in poor countries are still hungry,
and people in rich countries eat too much.

Vocabulary
to farm the land; environment n.;noodles n.; herrings n.; sausages n.; knife (knives) n.; fork n.;
chopsticks n.; finger n.; to pick up phv.; hungry adj.

105
Exercise 4. Answer the questions:

1. When did human history start? Was it about 10,000 years ago or was it about 1 million
years ago? 2. Do they eat much rice in the south of China? 3. W h y do the Scandinavians
and the Portuguese eat a lot of fish? 4. Why don’t the Germans eat much fish? 5. W h i c h
countries have many kinds of sausages? 6. H o w many courses are there in China? 7. How
do people eat in the Middle East? 8. W h y can we eat strawberries at any time of the year?

Exercise 5. Write a paragraph about food in your country.

Exercise 6. Tick the food you like and say which nouns are countable and which are
uncountable, add something you like but what is not listed:

A B
tea apples
coffee oranges
wine
beer bananas
juice strawberries
apple peas
spaghetti carrots
yoghurt tomatoes
pizza hamburgers
cheese chips
chocolate biscuits

Exercise 7. Listen to Daisy and Tom talking about what they like and don’t like. Tick the
food and drink in the lists ex. 6 that they both like. ( T 4 . 1 )

Exercise 8. Who says these things? Write D or T:

I don’t like wine but I like beer.

I really like apple juice. It’s delicious.
I quite like peas.
I don’t like tomatoes very much.
I don’t like cheese at all.

Exercise 9. Talk about the list of food and d rink with a partner. What do you like? What
do you quite like? What don’t you like? What would you like?

I like… and … I’d like …

Exercise 10. What is your favourite food? Is it from your country or from another
country?

Exercise 11. Listen to different people (Sam, John, David, Sandra, Mary) speak about
their favourite food. ( T 4 . 2 )

Exercise 12. Answer these questions about the people:

106
Who …. ?
• travels a lot • prefers vegetables
• likes sweet things • likes food from his own country
• had her favourite food on
holiday

Exercise 13. Read and listen to the conversation ( T 4 . 3 ):

A Would you like some tea or coffee?

B. I’d like a cold drink, please, if that’s OK.
A Of course Would you like some orange juice?
B. Yes, please. I’d love some.
A. And would you like a biscuit?
B. No, thanks. Just orange juice is fine.

Exercise 14. Match the questions and the responses. Listen and check (T 4.4):

1. Would you like some more carrots? a. Black, no sugar, please.

2. Could you pass the salt, please? b. Yes, of course. I’m glad you like it.
3. Could I have a glass of water, please? c. Do you want fizzy or still?
4. Does anybody want more dessert? d. Yes, please. They’re delicious.
5. How would you like your c o f f e e? e. Yes, of course. Here you are.
6. This is delicious! Can you give me the recipe? f. Yes, please. I’d love some. It’s delicious.
7. Do you want h e l p w i t h t h e washing-up? g. No, of course not. We have a
dishwasher.

Lesson 2.

Grammar: 1. The Imperative

Write your name on the paper. Don't talk, please! Give that piece of paper to me, Ann.

The imperative is formed with the verb e.g. Sit down.

without a subject.

The negative imperative is formed with e.g. Do not/ Don't talk to him.
Do not/ Don't and the verb.

The Imperative refers to the second person e.g. Take your books.
singular and plural.

We use the imperative to:

a) give orders: e.g. Stop that noise!
b) give instructions: e.g. Cut the paper in two pieces.
c) offer something: e.g. Have some cake.
d) make a request. We usually add the word please at the beginning or at the end of the
sentence: e.g. Be quiet, please. or Please, be quiet.
e) We use let’s + verb to make suggestions: e.g. Let's help her.
107
 2. Verb Patterns

VERB + -ing VERB + to + VERB + VERB + -ing / VERB +

infinitive object + to to inf object + inf.
+inf.
avoid agree advise begin help
enjoy arrange allow continue let
fancy ask ask start make
finish dare expect
suggest decide order
can´t stand expect permit
help tell
want want
Enjoy smiling! She decided to She told me to It started to Let me show
give up her job. come on time. rain / raining you

3. Neither … nor

Neither is paired with nor.

Do not forget that this pairing plays a negative role in the sentence, so take care to avoid an
unintended double negative. The pairing neither/nor plays a negative role in the sentence. Be
careful not to use a double negative

e.g. I could neither laugh nor cry.

'Neither … nor' is used in sentences in a negative sense meaning "not this one nor the other, not
this nor that, not he nor she, etc.". Verb conjugation depends on the subject (singular or plural)
closest to the conjugated verb.

e.g. Neither Frank nor Lilly lives in Eugene. Neither Axel nor my other friends care about their
future.

Either is paired with or. Sometimes, the word either is omitted.

e.g. Either the clerk or the secretary has the keys to the Rover.

'Either … or' is used in sentences in a positive sense meaning "one or the other, this or that, he
or she, etc." Verb conjugation depends on the subject (singular or plural) closest to the
conjugated verb.
e.g. Either Peter or the girls need to attend the course. Either Jane or Matt is going to visit next
weekend.

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Fill in the gaps with one of the verbs from the list. Use each verb only once.
Which sentences need Don’t? Which needs Let’s? Which only need the verb?

Wake, break, w a s h , turn on, play, move, open, close, be, have
1. I'm bored. Let’s play a game. 2. Always your hands before you sit at the
table. 3. The baby is sleeping her. 4. It’s our anniversary next week
108
 a party. 5. late! Your father will be angry. 6.
! There’s a spider on your head. 7. That vase is expensive it.
8. the oven door and put the meat inside. 9. It’s getting dark.
the light, please. 10.I’m cold. the windows, please.

Exercise 2. Rewrite the sentences in the negative, replacing the words in bold with object
pronouns, as in the example:

1. Give John the ball! Don’t give him the ball!

2. Look at Julie!
3. Eat the ice cream!
4. Tell Susan the news!
5. Look at the cat!
6. Listen to Anna and Mark!
7. Give the money to Helen and me!
8. Open the window!
9. Look at the children!
10. Make a sandwich for Sam!

Exercise 3. Complete the sentences with the correct verb from the list. You can use one verb
twice: take, light, put, cut, make, don’t throw.

How to make a Halloween pumpkin lamp!

1. a piece from the top of the pumpkin.
2. the piece away.
3. out the inside with a spoon.
4. eyes, a nose and a mouth with a knife.
5. a candle inside the pumpkin.
6. the candle.
7. the top back on.
Now you’ve got a beautiful pumpkin lamp. Happy Halloween!!!

Exercise 4. Put the verbs in brackets into correct infinitive form:

1. You must ...pay... (pay) the phone bill. 2. He asked her ........................... (marry) him.
3. He couldn’t ........................... (do) the exercises at school yesterday.4. I decided
........................... (go) to the cinema. 5. Dad makes me ........................... (wash) the car
every Sunday. 6. My parents always let me ......................... (watch) the late film on
Saturdays.7. I hope ...................... (study) English at university. 8. He wanted
........................... (take) a photograph. 9. He won’t ...................... (move) to Italy next year.
10. She offered ........................... (make) the coffee.

Exercise 5. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct infinitive form or the -ing form:
1. Juliet enjoys ...playing... (play) the guitar.2. He started ........................................ (drive)
when he was 17 years old. 3. I wanted ........................................ (take) my dog to the park
yesterday. 4. I can’t ......................... (travel) to Australia alone. 5. He likes ...............................
(do) jigsaw puzzles. 6. Philip agreed ............... (paint) the garden fence. 7. I finished
.................. (eat) breakfast an hour ago. 8. Fiona hopes ..................... (buy) a new car soon. 9.
Can Sam ........................... (do) a jigsaw puzzle? 10. I put the shopping away before
........................... (cook) dinner.

109
Exercise 6. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct infinitive form or the -ing form:

A: Where are you going? It’s too cold 1) ...to go...(go) out today.
B: I must 2) ............... (buy) some stamps because I want 3) ........................ (post) some
letters. I’ll wear my coat so I’ll be warm enough.
A: I will 4) ...................................... (come) with you.
B: All right. I also want 5) ....................... (visit) Aunt Milly this morning, but I won’t 6)
......................... (stay) too long.
A: Good. I like 7) .................... (talk) to her and she enjoys 8) ........................... (tell) us
stories about her past.
B: Oh no, I forgot! Aunt Milly goes 9) ...................... (shop) every Saturday morning.
A: It doesn’t matter. We like 10) ..................... (buy) things too, so we can 11) ............. (go)
with her.
B: That’s a good idea. I would like 12) .................... (do) that. I’ve got enough time before I
start work this afternoon.

Exercise7. Fill in the gaps with one of the verbs from the list in the correct infinitive form
or the -ing form: wear, help, buy, become, be, play, go, take, say, watch, cook, speak.

1. I love animals. I am thinking of becoming a vet. 2. Sieve likes

sunglasses, even in winter. 3. Would you like television? 4. Pamela
asked me her with her homework. 5. You must
the dog for a walk every day. 6. Paul left without goodbye last night.
7. I went to the butcher’s some meat for dinner. 8. Fred enjoys
He wants to be a chef. 9. What shall we do today? I would love
for a walk. 10. I want an astronaut when I grow
up. 11. “Why do you want to go to the park?” “I want with my
friends.” 12. James is very clever. He can four languages.

Exercise 8. Underline the correct word:

1. She came in without to knock/knock/knocking on the door. 2. I don’t know what

do/doing/to do with that old washing machine. 3. I hate to live/live/living in the city. 4. My
brother is good at to mend/mend/mending cars. 5. She managed to find/finding/find a job.
6. I decided to wash/wash/washing the car yesterday. 7. My parents don’t let me to
stay/stay/staying out late at night. 8. We will to help/help/helping you with the house­work.
9. I told her to finish/finish/finishing the letter. 10. Maria would like go/going/to go to the
theatre tonight. 11. They agreed come/to come/coming to my party. 12. Sam prefers
reading/read/to read to watching TV. 13. Helen tried open/opening/to open the door but she
couldn’t. 14. Peter hasn’tdecided where going/to go/go for his holidays yet.

Exercise 9. Correcting the mistakes:

1. I would like going to America next year.2. He enjoys to dance. 3. “Why did you go to the
library?” “Borrowing a book.” 4. I must to wash my hair tonight. 5. Do you know how skiing?
6. She goes to run every Thursday evening. 7. Have you got too time to come shopping with
me? 8. I am too tall to reach the top cupboard. 9. You are short enough to touch the ceiling.
10.He will leaving school when he's eighteen.

Exercise 10. Fill in the gaps with both, all, neither, or none and of where necessary:

110
1. “Are Peggy and Sue studying for their exams?” - “Yes. Both of... them are studying really
hard”. 2. “What are Eric, Tom and Peter doing?” – “Yes……………them are watching TV.”
3. “Do Sylvia and Rea like fish?” – “No, .............................................them likes fish.” 4. “Have
Paul, Bob and Roy done their homework?” – “Yes. they have ................................. finished
it.” 5. “Will Tom, Sam and Keith come to the zoo with us?” – “No, ............................. them
wants to come.” 6. “Are your parents going out tonight?” – “Yes. Actually, they are
......................... going to” 7. “Grandma’s birthday party.” 8. “Where are Linda and Lucy?” –
“They are ........................... at the hairdresser’s.”

Exercise 11. Choose the correct answer:

1. Brian and Gary are brothers B of them enjoy swimming. .

A All B Both C None
2. I have got two aunts of them lives near
me. A Neither B All C Both
3. Diana baked three cakes of them was a chocolate cake.
A All B Neither C None
4. Kim, Samantha and Alice are friends of them are English.
A Both B Neither C All
5. Claire and Dan went on holiday of them had fun.
A None B All C Both
6. Dave has got lots of pets of them is a dog.
A None B All C Neither
7. Jill has got three suitcases of them are big.
A Both B Neither C All
8. Cathy has got two sisters of them is older than her.
A Neither B None C Both
9. I watched three films last week. of them was a comedy.
A All B None C Both
10. I had four hats but I lost of them.
A None B both C All

Exercise 12. Choose the most meaningful option (neither …nor/either…or):

1. Who wrote you this love letter? – I’m not sure. I think it was Michael _ Paul. 2.
Linda Helen called to say sorry. I’m very sad and frustrated. 3. Ryan Susie have
disappointed me. They didn’t come to my birthday party. 4. Paul has been neglecting us. He
calls hangs out with us anymore. 5. He hurt her feelings her dignity. This is
unforgivable. 6. loyalty honesty are essential in a friendship. 7. You should
disrespect deceive your friends. 8. I will take you to the cinema to the theatre.
That’s a promise.

Exercise 13. Respond to the following statements. Express your denial of the both. Work in
pairs:
Model: I like both apples and pears. I like neither apples nor pears.

1. They have both a son and a daughter. 2. She can do both sing and dance. 3. I use both pepper
and mustard. 4. He speaks both English and French. 5. I like both football and hockey. 6. She
knows both my cousin and brother. 7. I am going to buy both cabbage and potatoes. 8. I am
going to have both coffee and cake. 9. My cousin likes both autumn and winter. 10. We need
both cucumbers and tomatoes. 11. She knows both physics and mathematics. 12. We see both the
111
child and his mother. 13. You’ve got both grammar and pronunciation mistakes. 14. Both my
schoolmates and my fellow-students are to come to my birthday party.

Exercise 14. Compose 10 sentences according to the following model:

Model: My mother speaks neither German nor Italian, but she reads English

Exercise 15. Correct the mistakes:

1. I have got lots of friends. Neither of them has got blonde hair. 2. Steven has got two cars.
All of them are red. 3. My sister and I are short. Both of us is tall. 4. There are twelve people
in the room. Both of them are girls. 5. Look at those babies! Neither of them aren’t
crying. 6. I have got two brothers. None of them are firemen. 7. Lucy has got two cats. All of
them is black. 8. The three boys are happy. Neither of them is sad.

Exercise 16. Make rejoinders to the following statements:

Model: I go to the Institute by bus. So do I . I can’t translate this sentence. Neither can my
friend.

1. My sister speaks English. 2. The students of Group 102 are working at the laboratory
now. 3. My mother is a doctor. 4. Her father is a teacher. 5. I prefer apples to bananas. 6. I don’t
take mustard. 7. He lives in Soroca. 8. He doesn’t live with his parents. 9. I don’t know this old
man. 10.I can’t come at four. 11. Father likes to work in the garden. 12. He doesn’t work much.
13. My little sister can’t swim. 14. We have breakfast at half past eight. 15. Mr. Jamison is
leaving for Chicago tomorrow morning. 16. My aunt is leaving for the Urals. 17. My nephew is a
naughty child. 18. Those young men are not very well bred. 19. My schoolmate’s father is a
journalist.

Exercise 17. Correct the mistakes:

1. I want nothing nice to eat. 2. I am going swimming every week. 3. The bus stops
anywhere near the park. 4. Let’s to go shopping! 5. How much oranges are there in the bowl?
6. He washes the dog at the moment. 7. He’s got very few bread. 8. Can I have a little
strawberries, please? 9. They are very clevers girls. 10. We has got a new car. 11. There are a
few lion in the zoo. 12. Peter always do his homework.

COOKING
Exercise 1. Memory work, remember:

How many cookies could a good cook cook,

If a good cook could cook cookies?
A good cook could cook as much cookies
As a good cook who could cook cookies…

Exercise 2. What are the main meals of the day? What do you usually have in the
morning?

Exercise 3. Read the text. Write 10 questions:

112
 Meals

The Smiths are in their dining-room. There are five of them: Mr. Smith, the head of the family,
Mrs. Smith, his wife, and their children: John, Ann and Kitty. They are having breakfast. Mrs.
Smith is putting some cornflakes on the boy's plate. The elder daughter is passing the sugar to
her father.
Mrs. Smith: Will you have sugar on your cornflakes, John?
John: Oh, no, Mum, thank you. I’d like some more milk instead.
Mr. Smith: Why aren’t you eating anything, Kitty? You are so slow. Look, Ann is already
finishing her cornflakes.
Kitty: I don’t like cornflakes. I’m just thirsty. Give me some tea and cakes, Mum.
Mrs. Smith: Now, be a good girl, Kitty. Have some more cornflakes. We’re going to have bacon
and eggs, and then you’ll get your tea with toast and marmalade.
Mr. Smith: Could you give me a little more cornflakes, dear?
Mrs. Smith: Just a moment. (Mrs. Smith passes him his plate.) What about bacon and eggs?
Will you have some?
Mr. Smith: Sure. And then a nice strong cup of tea. I’m afraid I must leave in a quarter of an
hour or so.
The father is already having his cup of tea while the children are still talking over their cornflakes.

Vocabulary
meal n. ; to have a meal e. g. We usually have four meals a day: breakfast, lunch, dinner and
supper.; breakfast n.; to have breakfast (dinner, supper) (no article!) e.g. Dinner is ready.
Have dinner with us.; cornflakes n. ; Mum = Mummy; Cf. Dad = Daddy; I’d (should) like (to
do smth.); more, another, still - The pronouns more and another are used with nouns. More
is used both with countable in the plural and uncountable: more books, more sugar; another is
used only with countable in the singular: another book, another student. Cf. more tea, but
another cup of tea. Still is used with verbs. e. g. It is still raining. He is still at home.; slow adj. e.
g. You are very slow.; Slowly adv. e. g. You speak very slowly. ; to be going to ; toast n. ; What
about ...? ; leave (for) (left, left) vt 1. e. g. Не is leaving Chisinau for Bucarest. He is leaving for
Brasov. He is leaving in half an hour. Ant. stay vi e. g. The children stay at home as it is raining.
2. e. g. Don’t leave your exercise-book at home. Cf. Don’t forget my address. Don’t forget to
open the window.

Meals
breakfast, lunch, dinner, supper; first course, second course, dessert; for the first (second) course, a
plate, a glass, a cup, a saucer, a tea-pot, a kettle, a fork, a spoon, a knife, bread, meat, fish,
butter, eggs, cheese, sugar, sausage, bacon, herring, potatoes, tomatoes, carrots, cabbage,
cucumbers, beets, peas, salt, mustard, pepper, water, milk, tea, coffee, cocoa, beer, wine, fruit-
juice, honey; soup (clear soup, cabbage soup, pea soup), porridge, macaroni, salad (mixed
salad), mashed potatoes, fried potatoes, chops, cutlets, beefsteak, chicken, goose, pudding, cake,
sweets, pie, ice- cream, jam, jelly, stewed fruit, apples, pears, plums, oranges, tangerines, grapes,
bananas, berries, cherries, peaches, nuts, to have (to eat, to drink), to dine, to cook, to fry, to
boil, to taste, to prefer to lay the table, to sit down to table, to be (to sit) at table, to clear the
table (to take away the dirty dishes); Help yourself to (smth., some food); Have some more; No
more, thank you!

113
Exercise 4. Answer the following questions:

A. 1. What do you see in the picture? 2. Who is in the dining-room? 3. What are they doing in
the room? 4. What is Mrs. Smith doing? 5. What is the elder daughter passing to her father? 6.
Does John like sugar on his cornflakes? 7. What does he prefer on his cornflakes? 8. Who is
already finishing his cornflakes? 9. Who doesn’t like cornflakes? 10. What does Kitty, the little
girl, want? 11. What does Mr. Smith ask his wife to give him? 12. What does Mrs. Smith ask her
elder daughter to do? 13. What are the children doing while their father is having his tea?
B. 1. What time do you have breakfast? 2. What do you have for breakfast? 3. Will you
describe your breakfast? 4. Where do you usually have dinner? 5. Why do you have dinner at
home? 6. What do you usually have for the first course (for the second course, for dessert)? 7.
What time do you usually have dinner? 8. Who cooks meals in your family? 9. Can you cook?
10. What time do you have dinner on Sunday? 11. Will you describe your Sunday dinner? 12.
Do you have supper late? 13. Why don’t you have supper late? 14. Do you like vegetables? 15.
What vegetables do you like? 16. What soup do you like best? 17. What kind of salad do you
like? 18. What kind of fruit do you buy in summer (in winter) in your city? 19. How do you lay
the table?

Exercise 5. Write the interrogative and negative forms of the following sentences:

A. 1. They are having breakfast. 2. Mrs. Smith is putting some cornflakes on the boy’s plate.
3. Ann is finishing her cornflakes. 4. Mrs. Smith is passing a plate to her husband. 5. The children
are talking over their cornflakes. 6. We are having an English lesson. 7. The girl is coming into
the room.

114
B. 1. I am finishing this article. 2. I prefer a glass of soda-water. 3. The waitress is already
bringing in our tea. 4. The boy is writing a letter to his parents. 5. My cousin is leaving
tomorrow.

Exercise 6. a) Write all the possible questions to which the following sentences are the answers, b)
Each sentence describes a certain situation in a concise way. Some points of the situation are
already known to you. Find out some more details about the situation by asking questions. Work
in pairs. Use conversational phrases:

A. 1. The elder daughter is passing the salt to her father. 2. I am thirsty now. 3. The father is
having his cup of tea. 4. I must leave in a quarter of an hour. 5. The children are working in the
garden. 6. The students are reading the text. 7. The girl is going to write a letter.
B. 1. I’m ready to go down to the canteen. 2. I am finishing this article. 3. I prefer a glass of
soda-water. 4. The waitress is already bringing in our tea. 5. You forget about the meeting of our
club. We must leave at once to be in time for the beginning of the discussion.

Exercise 7. Read and write in words:

a) 4, 14, 44, 9, 19, 90, 12, 38, 157, 673, 821, 1239. 1955, 2018, 3687, 271, 299, 945, 9212, 322;
b) 23/I 1964; 7/XI 1945, 22/VI 1941; 5/XII 1982.

Exercise 8. Choose the right word:

to leave - to stay
1. He ... home in summer. 2. He ... at home in summer. 3. We ... in Cuisinau, while our father is
in the North. 4. He is ... the Urals very soon. 5. They never ... town for the vacation. 6. When
will you ...? 7.I don’t think I'll ... at the Ignats’ more than a fortnight. 8. I can’t... here any longer,
the lectures begin at 9 o’clock, I must ... at once. 9. Our cousin is ... for Boston, he is going to ...
and work there. 10. Why are you ...? We are going to have a meeting. 11. He is ... with us for
another week, isn’t he? - No, he is ... tomorrow morning, I am afraid. 12. When they ... I shall...
quite alone in the room.
to come - to go
1. He usually ... home in time. 2. Our father ... to his office at a quarter to 9, as a rule. 3. The
dean ... to the University at a quarter to 9. 4. If they ... to the Crimea in August I shall miss them.
5. Look, daddy is already ... home. 6. Where are you ...? I am ... to the University. Our studies
begin at 9 o'clock.
still - more - another
1. It is already October but it is ... rather warm. 2. Give me ... pencil, this one is too small. 3.
Give me ... glass of water, I am ... thirsty. 4. Give me some ... water, please. 5. We need ... time
for the translation, I am afraid. 6. “I don't want to get up,” says little Kitty, “it is ... very early.” 7.
Will you give me some ... milk? 8. He asks for ... apple. 9. Let me have some ... pudding, it is
very tasty. 10. Help yourself to some ... pie. 11. Help yourself to ... piece of pie. 12. I can’t eat
the porridge, it is ... very hot. 13. It is ... early, you needn’t hurry. 14. I should like to have some
... salad. 15. Nick is not at home. He is ... at the Institute. 16. It is ... snowing. 17. The students
need ... practice in these words. 18. She is going to buy some ... milk. 19. Try to get ... books on
English literature. 20. May I have ... ticket to the Bolshoi Theatre? 21. Will you please give me
some ... porridge? 22. They are ...talking.

Exercise 9. Fill in prepositions if necessary:

A. 1. Pass ... me the salt, please. 2. Pass the salt ... me. 3. Give the bread ... me. 4. Show this
text ... the teacher. 5. Show... the teacher this book. 6. He is going to come ... half an hour. 7.
Look ... the boy. How dirty he is! 8. I see a new wall-newspaper ... the corridor. 9. The children
115
are playing... the garden. 10. Are you going ... home? - - No, I am going ... the library. 11. They
have breakfast... 8 o’clock ... the morning. 12. I dine ... 3 o’clock ... the afternoon. 13. What do
you see ... this picture? 14. Excuse me, may I go ...? 15. Please, come ... . We are just beginning
our lesson. 16. The bell is ringing, the students are coming ... the room. The teacher is entering ...
the room. 17. The bell is ringing and the students are leaving ... the room. 18. He is
leaving...Boston, you know.
B. 1. Will you wait ... me, I’ll come ... a minute. 2. Are you ready ... the answer? 3. Have
some fruit ... pleasure. 4. Help yourself ... some fruit, please. 5. I prefer an apple ... ice-cream. 6.
The children are ready ... breakfast. They are waiting ... their father. 7. Let’s have some herring
to begin ... . 8. What do you say ... an ice-cream? 9. As ... me I prefer a piece of cake ... sweets.
10. A waitress is coming ... our table. What shall we order? 11. The pudding is ... your taste, I
hope. 12. Going to the river is the question, it’s too cold to bathe today. 13. Father
usually comes ... home ... time. 14. We must pay the waitress ... the dinner. 15. I’m fond…
vegetables and meat.

Exercise 10. Ask one another questions on the following sentences and answer them in the
negative:

Model: I have breakfast at 9.

- Do you have breakfast at 7?
- No, I don’t have breakfast so early. I have it only at 9.

1. They have supper at 8. 2. We usually have dinner at home. 3. Father has lunch at his
office. 4. My cousin's family has dinner at 5 o’clock, as a rule. 5. He has dinner in the canteen. 6.
I always have breakfast at home. 7. They usually have lunch together. 8. My brother has lunch at
the plant. 9. I often have dinner at my aunt’s.

Exercise 11. Respond to the following sentences. Express your wish in the response as in the
model:

Model: I like fruit. I should like some fruit now.

1. I like cucumbers. 2. I like chops and mashed potatoes. 3. I like sausage. 4. I like jam. 5. I
like sugar. 6. I like bacon and eggs. 7. I like marmalade. 8. I like coffee. 9. I like ice-cream. 10. I
like chicken. 11. I like bananas.

Exercise 12. Respond to the following sentences:

Model 1: Begin reading. - Shall I begin reading?

1. Speak English. 2. Open the window. 3. Read the exercise. 4. Do it at once. 5. Repeat this
poem. 6. Learn it by heart. 7. Clear the table. 8. Answer my question. 9. Lay the table. 10. Make
tea for us.

Model 2: I don’t see what’s wrong here. - Shall I show you?

1. I don’t know this expression. 2. I can’t see what is written on the blackboard. 3. I can’t
swim. 4. I can’t hear you. 5. I don’t remember this word. 6. I don’t know Chisinau well. 7. I
can’t find the newspaper. 8. I don’t know where my ball-pen is.

Exercise 13. Give your own examples according to the given model:

116
Model: He prefers fruit to ice-cream.

soda-water - beer; cheese - sausage; meat - fish; English - French; coffee - cocoa: milk - water;
tomatoes -cucumbers; mashed potatoes - macaroni; porridge - bacon and eggs; clear soup -
cabbage soup; apples - plums; oranges – tangerines

Exercise 14. a) Change the direct speech in Text (Meals) into indirect:

Model: Mr. Smith: “Will you please give me a little more cornflakes, dear?” Mr. Smith asks his
wife to give him a little more cornflakes.
c) Retell the text in indirect speech (make use of the picture on page 116). c) Describe the
breakfast as if you were the mother (the father, Kitty, Ann).

Exercise 15. Complete the following sentences:

A. 1. I should like ... .2. Let me ... . 3. Be a good girl and ... . 4. Why don’t you ...? 5. Will you
give me ...? 6.1 am afraid ... . 7.1 don’t think he .... 8. What about...?
B.I. I think, it’s high time to ... . 2. Well, I see you are ready ... . 3. Would you like ...? 4. What
do you say to ...? 5. Will you pass me ...? 6. As for me ... .7. Let us ....

Exercise 16. Translate the following sentences into English:

A. 1. Ei iau prânzul. 2. Când dumneavoastră luaţi de obicei prânzul? 3. Ce avem astăzi la cină?
4. Luaţi prânzul acum? Atunci o să vă telefonez peste un sfert de oră. Bine? 5. Scoateţi paltonul
şi intră. Noi tocmai luăm masa.6. La ce oră familia d-voastră ia prânzul de obicei? 7. Nina este
acasă? – Da. Ea ia prânzul. 8. La ce te uiţi? – Mă uit la casa aceea nouă. Este o clădire frumoasă.
O vezi? 9. Bună, George! Unde te duci? – Mă duc la universitate, vreau să audiez la laborator
încă o dată lecţia a 12-a. 10. Ce faci, Bob? – Scriu o scrisoare, chiar nu vezi? 11. Te duci la
bibliotecă? – Nu, mă duc la cabinetul de limbă engleză. (The English study-room) 12. De ce
fumaţi aici? În cameră doarme un copil.13. De ce vorbiţi ruseşte? Doar sunteţi la lecţia de limbă
engleză, nu-i aşa? 14. Nu te grăbi! Lecţia va începe doar peste o jumătate de oră. 15. Mă auziţi,
prieteni? 16. Ascultaţi, Gutu? 17. Auziţi bine? 18. De ce nu răspundeţi la întrebarea mea? 19. Nu
striga aşa de tare, surioara ta doarme. 20. De ce plângi, piciule? – Nu plâng. 21. Ce fac studenţii?
– Răspund la întrebările profesorului (ascultă textul 12). 22. La ce te gândeşti? Este timpul să-ţi
faci temele (e timpul să te scoli, e timpul să mergi la şcoală, e timpul să mergi la culcare). 23. De
ce pui aşa de puţine farfurii pe masă? Astăzi suntem cinci. Bunelul vine, tu ştii? 24. Aşează-te la
masă, mama aduce supa. 25. Să vă citesc acest proverb? 26. Să pregătesc prânzul către ora patru?
27. Să scriu acest cuvânt pe tablă? 28. Să sărez supa? (to salt) 29. Să aduc cretă? 30. Să şterg
tabla? 31. Să cumpăr legume? 32. Luaţi prânzul acasă? 33. El nu ia prânzul acasă, îl ia de obicei
la cantină. 34. Când serviţi micul dejun? 35. De ce luaţi micul dejun atât de târziu? 36. El
serveşte întotdeauna cina acasă? 37. De ce nu ia prânzul acasă? 38. Aş vrea încă o ceaşcă de ceai
(lapte, apă, cafea). 39. Aş mai vrea puţin lapte (terci, pâine, peşte). 40. El este încă acasă (la
laborator, la spital). 41. Mi-e sete. Hai să luăm o sticlă de apă gazoasă.
B. 1. Este timpul să luăm prânzul (micul dejun, cina). 2. Demult este timpul să cunoşti acest
material. 3. Hai să servim bulion la felul întâi. 4. Pe cine aştepţi? – O aştept pe prietena mea,
mergem împreună la teatru. (Îl aştept pe profesorul meu, el este la decanat). 5. Cantina este sus
sau jos? 6. Mergeţi jos la bibliotecă şi luaţi cartea aceasta, vă rog. 7. Prefer mai mult fructele
decât îngheţata (piperul iute decât muştarul, frigul decât căldura). 8. Ce zici de o ceaşcă de ceai
(o sticlă de apă gazoasă)? 9. Nici vorbă nu poate fi despre filmul acesta, nu este pentru copii. 10.
Transmiteţi-mi sarea, vă rog. – Mulţumesc. – Pentru puţin.11. Unde este creta? Daţi-mi o bucată
de cretă. Mulţumesc! – Cu plăcere! 12. Nu-mi pot găsi nimic pe plac astăzi. – Chiar aşa? Astăzi
sunt atâtea bucate gustoase. Priveşte, salată din roşii şi castraveţi, şuncă, salam. 13. Este deja ora
117
6. – Nu mai spuneţi! Este timpul să mergem acasă. 14. Pe cine aştepţi aici? Este deja ora 8. 15.
Să mergem! – O clipă. Nina merge cu noi. O aştept. – Mă tem că vom întârzia. Este timpul să
fim deja la universitate. – Ai dreptate. Priveşte, ea vine deja. Să fugim. Nu trebuie să întârziem. –
Grăbeşte-te, Nina!

Exercise 17. Read the recipe and guess what we are going to have for dinner today:

Pour water into a sauce-pan, put some meat into it. While it boils, peel and cut beetroot, carrots,
parsley and onions. Heat 2 spoonful of butter in the frying pan. Fry vegetables in it, add sliced
tomato or tomato puree and cover the lid on. Stir the vegetables, add some water if necessary, let
them simmer. Remove them into the sauce-pan. After 15-20 minutes add some cut cabbage, salt,
vinegar and sugar to your taste. Put potatoes either whole or cut up. Boil it until it is quite ready.
Serve with sour cream.
Ingredients: 500 gr. Meat; 300gr. Beetroot; 200 gr. Fresh cabbage; 100 gr. Onion; 100 gr. Fresh
tomatoes or one spoonful of tomato puree; vinegar; sugar; salt.

Lesson 3.

Grammar: 1. Few, little and a few, a little!

a little/little a few/few
We use a little/little with uncountable We use a few/few with plural countable
nouns (e.g. water, money, rice, etc.) nouns. (e.g. tomatoes, books, cups,
etc.)
a little means “ not much but enough”. a few means “not many but enough”.

e.g. I’ve got a little money. I can buy e.g. There are a few tomatoes. We can
some bread. make a salad.

little means “hardly any, almost nothing” few means “hardly any, almost none” and
and can go with very for emphasis. can go with very for emphasis.

e.g. They’ve got (very) little money. They e.g. There are (very) few people in the
can't buy any bread. cinema it is almost empty.

2. Question Words

Special questions begin with a question word. We put the auxiliary verb before the subject.

People Things Place Time Quantity/ Manner Reason Age

number
Who What Where When How How Why How
much old
Whose Which How How
long many
(ago)
How
often

118
 3. Types of Questions?

a) Questions with Yes/No answers - these kinds of questions begin with an auxiliary
verb (e.g. is, are, have, has, will, can, do, does, did, etc.) and then the subject. We usually
answer these questions with Yes/No answers.

e.g. Are you watching TV? Yes, I am. Have you finished yet? No, I haven’t. Can you type? No,
I can’t.

When the main verb is in the present simple (play, works, etc.) we form the question
with the auxiliary verb do/does.

e.g. Do you play golf every Saturday? Yes, I do. Does he work hard? No, he doesn’t.

When the main verb is in the past simple (arrived, sent, etc.) we form the question with the
auxiliary verb did .

e.g. Did she arrive early last night? Yes, she did. Did they send you a letter? No, they didn’t.

b) Wh – questions - Wh - questions begin with a question word. We put the auxiliary verb
before the subject.

e.g. Who is that man? His her father.

Whose is that coat? It’s Jane’s.
What is it? It’s a pen.
Where are my glasses? They’re in your bag.
When did he arrive? Yesterday.
Why are you sad? Because I’ve lost my purse.
Which book is yours? The blue one.
How are you? Fine thanks.
How often do you go out? Twice a week. How much is it? £10.
How many sisters have you got? Two.
How long have you known her? For three years
How long ago did you leave school? Four years ago. How old are you? I’m sixteen.

c) Question tags are short questions at the end of a statement. We mainly use them in
speech when we want to confirm something or when we want to find out if something is true
or not. We form a question tag with the auxiliary verb and the appropriate personal
pronoun.

e.g. Rita can speak French, can’t she?

You have spent a lot of money, haven’t you?

When the verb of the sentence is in the present simple, we form the question tag with the
auxiliary verb do, does and the personal pronoun. When the verb is in the past simple, we form
the question tag with the auxiliary verb did and the personal pronoun.

e.g. He likes golf, doesn’t he? Kevin went to Rome last year, didn’t he?

When the statement is positive, the question tag is negative.

119
e.g. She was at home, wasn’t she? He lives in a flat, doesn’t he?
When the statement is negative, the question tag is positive.

e.g. They haven’t finished yet, have they? She won’t come to the party, will she?

When the sentence contains a word with a negative meaning like never, hardly, seldom or
rarely, the question tag is positive.

e.g. He is never late, is he? They seldom go to the theatre, do they?

Some verbs/expressions form question tags differently. Study the following examples:

I am – aren’t I? / Imperative will/won’t you? / Let’s – shall we? / Don’t – will you? / I have
(got) – haven’t I ? (= possess) I have – don’t I ?

e.g. I am strong, aren’t I? Let’s go out, shall we? Don’t shout, will you? She’s got a sister, hasn’t
she? You have a shower every day, don’t you?

d) Subject questions are the questions we ask when we want to find out who or what did
something; that is when we want to know the subject. These questions usually begin with the
word who or what. In subject questions, the verb is in the affirmative form.

e.g. Who wrote the letter?

e) Object questions are the questions we ask when we want to know the object. These
questions usually begin with the word who or what in object questions the verb is in the
Interrogative form.

e.g. Who did you go with ?

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Fill in little/few:

1. Hurry! We have … time .2. I saw him … days ago. 3. Tom had … money. 4. He knows
just … English words. 5. Her father died … years ago.

Exercise 2. Use a few or a little for each of the nouns in the list:

e.g. a few chairs a little water

chairs, water, tea, books, chocolate, bread, men, deer, jam, glasses, honey, knives, children, Coke,
butter, lemonade, salt, desks, hats, pepper.

Exercise3. Fill in very few, a few, very little or a little:

e.g. We’ve got very few eggs. We can’t make an omelette. 1. Sue’s got
money. She can buy a new dress. 2. I’ve got apples. I can make an apple pie.
3. There are people in the park today because it’s raining. 4. There’s
milk in the fridge. Go to the supermarket and buy some, please. 5. There’s
lemonade in the jug. Would you like some?

120
Exercise 4. Answer the questions with a little or a few as in the example:

e.g. “Do you want some biscuits?” “Yes, a few.”

1. “Have you got any toothpaste?” “Yes, “ 2. “ Where there any people at the
meeting?” “ Yes, ” 3. “Do you want some cake?” “Yes,
.”4. “Are there any car parks near here?” “Yes, ” 5.
“Have you got any bread?” “Yes, ”

Exercise 5. Choose the correct answer:

e.g. I eat C meat. I prefer fish.

A very few B a few C very little

1. “Has he got many friends?” “Yes, ”

A a little B a lot C much
2. I’ve got free time now!
A very little B very few C few
3. Very people can speak Welsh
A few B little C a lot
4. She doesn’t eat sweets because she is on a diet.
A a lot B many C much
5. There are pencils in the drawer. Take one.
A a lot B a few C a little
6. You haven’t got flowers in your garden this year.
A much B a lot C many
7. Put chocolate in the cake.
A a little B a few C few
8. Jack has got comics. He buys one every week.
A a lot of B a lot C few
9. There is shampoo. Can you buy some at the supermarket?
A very few B a lot of C very little
10. He hasn’t got money.
A many B much C a lot
11. He’s got sweets in his pocket.
A little B a few C a little

Exercise6. Correct the mistakes:

1. There is very few soup in the bowl.

2. How much carrots are there in the fridge?
3. Rita has got many money.
4. There are a little people i n t he shop.
5. Mike hasn’t got much friends.
6. There is few snow on the mountains.
7. How much deer can you see in the picture?
8. I have got little CDs but a lot of cassettes.
9. There are much animals in the zoo.
10. How many sugar is there in the bowl?

Exercise 7. Fill in (very) little, a little, (very) few or a few.

121
e.g. I’m going shopping. I need to buy a few things for tonight’s party.
1. people swim in the sea in the winter. 2. I can’t wait for you. I’ve got
time. 3. There is snow on the ground. The children can’t make a
snowman. 4. He knows people. They can help him find a job. 5. We need
milk and eggs to make the cake. 6. I have free time for hobbies because I
work a lot.

Exercise 8. Underline the correct word(s):

Dear Alice,
Thanks 1) many/a lot/, much for your letter. I am very happy to be your pen-pal. I have 2)
a little/a few things to tell you about myself. I live with my parents and my dog,
Scottie. I haven't got any brothers or sisters. I go to a big school. There are 3) a lotof/a
little students in my class and I have 4) very little/a lot of friends. I haven't got very 5)
much/little free time so I have 6) a lot of/few hobbies. On Saturdays I go to the cinema
with my friends. I also like to go shopping. There are 7) little/a lot of shops in my town. I
have 8) little/vary few money to spend, but I like looking at the things in the shops!
Please write to me soon and tell me 9) a little/little about yourself.
Best wishes,
Sophie.
Exercise 9. Make questions as in the examples:

e.g. I have got a dog. (You) Have you got a dog too? I live in the country (Sally) Does Sally live
in the country, too?
1. I went out last night. (You) ? 2. I can drive. (David) . 3. I
like pizza. (You) . 4. I have got long hair. (She) . 5. I am
wearing a hat. (Donna) .

Exercise 10. Fill in the gaps with one of the question words from the list:
who, what, which, where, how long, when, what, how often, how, whose

1. Whose is the bag? My sister’s.

2. are the children? At school.
3. is Paul coming back? Tomorrow.
4. does he drive? Very dangerously.
5. is that woman? Mary Smith.
6. time do you finish work? At four o'clock.
7. do they buy a newspaper? Every day.
8. is her name? Catherine.
9. city do you like best? Rome or Milan?
10. have you been a teacher? Since 1991

Exercise 11. Fill in what, which, who, when, where, whose or why:

1. “ What is your name?” “John.”

2. “ shirt do you want?” “The blue one, please.”
3. “ is your favourite colour?” “Red.”
4. “ are you from?” “Poland.”
5. “ time do you usually go to bed?” “At ten.”
6. “ are you crying?” “Because I’ve hurt my finger.”
7. “ are those books over there?” “Paul’s.”
8. “ is your best friend?” “Mary.”
122
9. “ did you go on holiday last year?” “Mexico.”
10. “ are you leaving?” “Tomorrow.”
11. “ is that man over there?” “My dad.”
12. “ are you going to cook for dinner?” “Roast beef”
13. “ do you want to leave?” “Because I’m bored.”
14. “ is Mr. Smith?” “Our science teacher.”

Exercise 12. First fill in the gaps in the questions with how old, how often, how much, how
many, how long or how long ago:

1. How much. does this jacket cost? 2. do you go to the theatre? 3.

is your sister? 4. people are coming to your party? 5.
have you been a teacher? 6. did you visit Poland?

Exercise 13. Fill in the gaps with the correct question words:

A: 1) What are you doing?

B: I’m making a salad for the party.
A: 2) people are coming?
B: About thirty.
A: 3) time are they arriving?
B: Seven o’clock. 4) is Steve coming?
A: At eight o’clock. 5) are you going to put all the food?
B: On the table in the living room.
A: 6) are the curtains in there closed?
B: Because I don’t want Steve to see everyone when he arrives.
A: 7) is going to open the door when Steve comes?
B: I’ll do that.

Exercise 14. Fill in the question tag, find the answer:

1. You haven’t been to Europe, have you? 2. You’ll be at home tonight, ? 3.

She hasn’t got any brothers, ? 4. You went to London last year,
? 5. Jane has got a new house, ? 6. You’re twenty now,
? 7. You aren’t a doctor, ?

a.) No, but she’s got two sisters. b.) Yes, it’s beautiful. c.) No, but I’ve been to Australia.
d.) No, but I’m a dentist. e.) Yes, it was my birthday yesterday. f.) Yes, after six o’clock. g.)
Yes, for tow weeks.

Exercise 15. Write questions using the words in brackets:

1. Do you know this man? (you/know/this man) – Yes, his name is John Smith. 2.
(he/live/here) – Yes, he lives across the road. 3.
(house/be/his) – Number 6. The house with the red front door. 4.
(you/see/him/today) – Yes, I have. 5.
(time/be/it) – 10 o’clock this morning. 6. (he/do) – He got into his
car and drove away. 7. (you/ever/speak/him) – Yes, but only a few
times. – Thank you very much, madam.

Exercise 16. Choose the correct answer:

123
1. “ C is that man?” “My father.”
A Whose B Why C Who
2. “ have you lived in England?” “Five years.”
A How long B How often C How much
3. “ bicycle is red and black?” “Tim’s.”
A Whose B Which C What
4. “ do you exercise?” “Three times a week.”
A How many B How often C How much
5. “ did you travel to Manchester?” “By train.”
A What B Why C How
6. “ pens have you got?” “Ten.”
A How many B How long C How much
7. “ do you get up in the morning?” “At seven.”
A How B What time C Where
8. “ pullover do you like best? The red or the blue one?”
A Which B What C Where
9. “ are you going for your summer holiday?” “To Italy.”
A How B Where C When
10. “ do you like doing in your free time?” “Watching TV.”
A Where B When C What

Exercise 17. Complete the reporter’s questions:

A: 1) What is your name?

B: My name is Michael Simmons.
A: 2)
B: I live in Los Angeles.
A: 3)
B: I was born in New York.
A: 4)
B: I am twenty-nine years old.
A: 5)
B: I was eleven years old when I started playing.
A: 6)
B: I enjoy reading books and going to the cinema.
A: 7)
B: I am having a holiday.
A: 8)
B: I’m going to stay here for ten days.
A: Thanks for your time.

IN THE CANTEEN
Exercise 1. Read. Remember and Role-play:

In the canteen

Ann: I think, it’s high time to have a bite. I am hungry.

Bob: So am I. I see you are ready to go down to the canteen, I am just finishing this article. Will
you wait a minute, please.
Ann: Yes, hurry up, then.
124
Вob: I wonder if there is anything to your taste on the menu.
Ann: Oh, yes, all kinds of things. Let’s have some soup, clear soup, perhaps?
Bob: I don’t think I’ll have any soup today. I’d like some salad to begin with.
Ann: Will you have mixed salad, chops and mashed potatoes?
Bob: Why, yes of course. What do you say to a bottle of beer?
Ann: No beer, thanks. I prefer a glass of soda-water or just a cup of tea.
Bob: All right. Tea then. Will you pass me the mustard, please?
Ann: Here you are. As for me, I never take mustard or pepper.
Bob: You don’t say so!
Ann: Look! The waitress is already bringing our tea.
Bob: We want neither ham nor sausage, do we?
Ann: No, ham as well as sausage is out of the question. I’d like some fruit, apples or oranges.
Bob: Yes, but I’m afraid you forget about the meeting of our English club. We must leave at once
to be in time for the beginning of the discussion.
Ann: Right you are. Let’s pay for the dinner and be off.

Vocabulary
It is high time (to do smth.);to have a bite; hungry adj. as a hungry dog, a hungry child: to be
hungry , e. g. I am hungry. I am going to the canteen. hunger n. - I am hungry. So am I. The
word combination So am (do, can...) I is used as a reply to an affirmative sentence. Neither am
(do, can...) I is used after negative sentences, e. g. I am reading. So am I. I prefer a cup of tea.
So do I. I can do it. So can I. I am not writing. Neither am I. I don’t like this salad. Neither does
my sister. He can’t translate this sentence. Neither can I. The subject is at the end of the phrase
and is stressed: So do I.; wait vi.; to wait for (smb., smth.) e. g. We are waiting for a taxi.
waiter (waitress) n. Syn. to expect; hurry vi e. g. We are hurrying to the laboratory. Hurry up!
e. g. Hurry up, it’s already 8 o’clock. ; taste n. e. g. You must know her taste if you want to buy
her a present., to one’s taste Proverb: Tastes differ.; taste vt 1. e. g. Will you taste my
porridge? 2. e. g. The pie tastes very sweet. tasty adj.; to begin with; What do you say to ... ;
You don't say so!; neither ... nor : In sentences with neither ... nor the verb is used in the
affirmative form and agrees with the second noun in number and person, e. g. Neither Morcov
nor Lungu knows the answer to my question. We have neither bread nor meat in the house.
Please go and buy some.; It is out of the question. , е. g. Going to the forest now is out of the
question, it’s too dark.; discussion n.; discuss vt., e. g. They are discussing a book by Mark
Twain.

1. Where do the two friends go? 2. What do they take for dinner? 3. Why do they go to the
canteen? 4. Do they always take soup for dinner? 5. Where do the friends hurry? 6. Why must
they leave at once?

Exercise 2. Fill in prepositions if necessary and retell the text:

Tom and Nick are going ... the canteen to have dinner. It is only half ... one but there are many
people ... the canteen already. Some ... them are reading newspapers, others are eating their
dinner. The friends always enjoy ... their meals there.
They go ... a small round table ... the window, take a menu-card ... the next table and begin to
read it. Tom does not want to have any soup today. He is going to take some roast beef and
vegetables. Nick takes some cabbage soup ... himself, some fried fish and potatoes. He goes over
... the buffet and soon comes back ... some tomato and cucumber salad. Then a waitress comes…
their table and brings them the soup, meat and fish. She also brings some mustard, pepper and
salt and puts a knife, fork, spoon ... the table ... front... each person.
Nick wants to have some ice-cream ... dessert but as it is not ready yet, he takes a piece ... cake
125
and a glass ... tea. Tom orders some fruit as he always prefers fruit... cakes and ice-cream.
The boys are usually satisfied ... their meals ... this canteen. So they finish their dessert and pay
the waitress ... the dinner. Then they put... their coats and go the street.

Exercise 3. Translate the following sentences into English:

1. Adu puţină apă. Adu apă. 2. Nu lua hârtia. Dă-mi o foaie de hârtie. Dă-mi nişte hârtie.3.
Aş vrea puţină dulceaţă. Îmi place dulceaţa, este foarte gustoasă. 4. Bea un pahar de lapte. Bea
puţin lapte. Bea lapte. (to have milk). 5. Pune varza pe masă, am de gând să pregătesc
prânzul. Cumpără nişte varză, am de gând să pregătesc astăzi o supă din varză. 6. Mai
mănâncă puţin terci. Nu-mi place terciul. Este prea sărat. 7. Supa este la bucătărie. Ad-o,
te rog. Mi-e tare foame. Dă-mi puţină supă. 8. Nu cumpăra aceşti castraveţi, nu-mi plac. Nu
cumpăra castraveţi.
9. Vreau cafea. Aş vrea încă o ceaşcă de cafea. 10. Nu uita să cumperi pâine. Nu lăsa pâinea
pe masă, pune-o în bufet. 11. Aduceţi vă rog o bucată de cretă. Dă-mi nişte cretă, te rog.

Exercise 4. a) Make up a dialogue on the following situation:

You ask your friend if he is hungry and when he is going to the canteen. You are very busy
and you can't leave the office earlier than 3 o'clock. You ask him to buy a cake and two
apples for you.
b) Get ready with a situation for your fellow-students to give it in the form of a
dialogue.

Exercise 5. Respond using the conversational phrases and add a phrase or two of your
own:
1. Will you bring a piece of chalk, please? 2. I can’t tell you anything about the book. I
don’t remember it. 3. Shall I repeat the sentence? 4. Please come another time. 5. You
don’t remember this extract, do you? 6. May I open the window? 7. Shall I have a bite? 8.
I can’t swim, you know. 9. Will you pass me the sugar, please? 10. Shall I wait for you? 11.
Will you give me a cigarette? 12. I don’t eat ice-cream. 13. Shall I give you more porridge? 14.
You don’t take beer, do you? 15. You help me so much, thank you. 16. You can’t speak
German yet, can you? 17. Shall I pass you the cake? 18. May I bring my younger sister with
me? 19. Thank you for your warm greetings. 20. He never remembers his duties. 21. Will you
play back the tape and repeat the text?

Exercise 6. Find a picture on the topic “Meals” for your discussion in class. Prepare 8-
10 questions which would help your fellow-students to describe the picture. Get ready to
speak on the topic, "Meals". Use pictures, slides for illustration.

Exercise 7. Insert the missing words, using those from the box:

1.David usually has two … …cereal for breakfast. This morning he got up late and had a … of
… . 2. Mr. Nelson has two … of… with his dinner. Yesterday he visited his Japanese
neighbours and had a … … … . 3. Lois usually has a … … yogurt for lunch. Yesterday he was
very hungry, and he had two … … French fries. 4. Nancy usually has a … of … for dessert. 5.
Open the … … cereal, please. 6. Here is your … … jam, Nick. 7. Will you pass me a … …
bread, please. 8. Yesterday he bought a … … eggs and made a big … . 8. Let’s drop in
somewhere … … … . 9. “… …” is food that tastes great but offers little body-building
nutrition.

126
 Box : junk food, for a snack, box of, jar of, dozen of, loaf of, bowls of,
glass, milk, cups, coffee, cup of tea, dish of, piece,
Orders of, cake, omelette.

Exercise 8. Find English proverbs concerning meals. Provide them with equivalents
in your mother tongue, ask your fellow-students to illustrate them.

Exercise 9. Marion has visited ASDA supermarket and the market next to it this morning.
Help her arrange the things she has bought:

1. two … of semi-skimmed milk pots

2. four … of fruit-floured yogurt packs
3. two … of cheese slices tin
4. one … of whole meal bread pints
5. one … of bananas jar
6. two … of potatoes bags
7. a … of strawberry jam bunch
8. one … of canned rice pudding loaf
9. one … of salad dressing tube

Exercise 10. Describe:

a) your Sunday breakfast;

b) your dinner at home;
c) the procedure of laying the table for dinner.

Exercise 11.

A. Match the two halves of each proverb correctly:

a. Appetite … … in an old pot.

b. An apple a day … … in one basket.
c. Good broth may be made … … over spilt milk.
d. The proof of the pudding is … … comes with eating.
e. Don’t put all your eggs … … keeps the doctor away.
f. You can’t have your cake … … without breaking of eggs.
g. Eating an apple going to bed … … another man’s poison.
h. Too many cooks spoil … … doesn’t make a garland.
i. Omelettes are not made … … in the eating.
j. Half a loaf is … … the broth.
k. One flower … … better than none.
l. It’s no use crying … … and eat it.
m. One man’s meat is … … makes the doctor beg his
bread.

B. One of the proverbs does not belong here. Which one is it?

C. Find two pairs of proverbs having the same meaning.

D. Explain the meaning of each proverb.

127
 Exercise 12.
A. Select and arrange the dishes according to the courses they belong to: first,
second, course; dessert; starter/Hors d’oeuvre; soft and strong drinks.

Cabbage-soup, fried potatoes, dry/semi-dry wine, oxtail soup, herring salad,

eggs and bacon, ice-cream, chicken soup, red wine, roast meat, Scotch broth, cutlets,
noodle soup, chops, beet-root soup, buckwheat porridge, white wine, stewed fruit,
black/ red caviar, rice porridge, vegetable caviar, cakes, pancakes, meat/fish jelly,
mushroom soup, sweet pudding, mashed potatoes with fish, jelly, crab salad,
salted/smoked fish, hamburger, macaroni, jam, toasts, honey pie, chocolate cake, fish in
marinade, brandy, beer, port, punch.

B. Project your own menu.

C. Make up a situation “At the Restaurant/ Bar/Cafe”, a customer and a

waiter.

Exercise 13. Add the missing expressions to help Betty cook her stew.

{expressions: to put smth., to cut up smth., to slice smth., to chop up smth., to add
smth., to pour in smth., a cup of smth., to cook smth., the stew, little/few/some}

Betty’s Recipe for Stew.

1. butter into a pan.

2. onions and garlic.
3. some chicken.
4. salt and pepper.
5. tomatoes.
6. mushrooms.
7. wine and chicken
soup. 8. for an hour.

Exercise 14. Crossword Puzzle.

Across: 1. First meal of the day; 5. To take the skin off (fruit, etc.), skin of fruit,
vegetables; 7. Spice used in cooking, its colour yellowish brown; 9. Pearl-white grain used as the
staple food in many Eastern countries.

Down: 2. Cook, be cooked, on a gridiron, or over great heat; 3. Cooked, be cooked in

boiling fat; 4. Light, usu. Hurriedly eaten meal; 10. Round vessel of earthenware, metal, or glass,
for holding liquids or solids, for cooking thing in, etc.; 6. Mixture of flour and water or flour and
eggs prepared in long, narrow strips, dried and used in soup, etc.; 8. Eggs beaten together, fried
and folded, often floured with cheese or containing herbs, etc.; 11. Large, fierce, fresh water fish

128
129
Unit V
Lesson 1.

Grammar: Past Simple

Regular Verbs:

Affirmative Negative Interrogative

Long form Short form
I stayed I did not stay I didn’t stay Did I stay?
You stayed You did not stay You didn’t stay Did you stay?
He/She/It stayed She/He/It did not stay He/She/It didn’t stay Did he/she/it stay?
We stayed We did not stay We didn’t stay Did we stay?
You stayed You did not stay You didn’t stay Did you stay?
They stayed They did not stay They didn’t stay Did they stay?

Spelling rules of regular verbs:

Infinitive Past Spelling

work Worked add -ed
stay Stayed
like liked add -d if verb fin ishes in e
study studied y > ied after a consonant
stop stopped if verb finishes in consonant
vowel consonant, double the
final consonant

play played y +-ed after a vowel

prefer preferred In tow-syllable verbs the
second syllable stressed and
finishes in consonant vowel
consonant double the final
consonant

The pronunciation of the suffix –ed:

Pronunciation Rule Examples

/ed/ When the verb ends in a /t/ or /d/ posted, succeeded
/t/ When the verb ends in a voiceless cooked, kissed, touched,
consonant sound. wished, laughed, stepped.
/d/ When the verb ends in a voiced consonant arrived, prepared,
sound or a vowel sound. showed, robbed.

Irregular Verbs:

Affirmative We went to Brazil on holiday.

Negative We didn't go to Sao Paolo.
Interrogative/ General questions Did you go to Rio?
Short answers No, we didn't.
Wh questions Why did you go there?
130
Past Simple of the verb “to be”:

Affirmative Negative Interrogative

Long form Short form
I was I was not I wasn’t Was I?
You were You were not You weren’t Were you?
He/She/It was He/She/It was not He/She/It wasn’t Was he/she/it?
We were We were not We weren’t Were you?
You were You were not You weren’t Were we?
They were They were not They weren’t Were they?

Wh questions General questions Short answers

Where were you last night? Were you at the party? Yes, I was. No, I wasn’t.
When were they there? Were they at the party? Yes, they were. No, they
weren’t.

• Use the past simple to talk about finished actions in the past.
• The form of the past simple is the same for all persons.
• To make the past simple of regular verbs add -ed. See the spelling rules in the chart.
• Use the infinitive after didn 't for negatives and Did ... ? for questions.
• Use ASI and QUASI to remember word order in questions.
Time expressions used with Past Simple: yesterday, last night/week/month/year/Monday, etc.,
two days/weeks/months/years/ ago, then, when, in 1992, etc.

Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Write the past Simple of the following verbs:

Exercise 2. Fill in the blanks:

131
Exercise 3. Complete the sentences with was, were, wasn’t, or weren’t:

A. Who's that?
B. It's William Shakespeare.
A. Why he famous?
B. He a writer.
A. he Scottish?
B. No.he He English. He born
in Stratford-upon-Avon.
A. And he married?
B. Yes, he . His wife's name
Annę.
A. And they happy?
B. I don't know.

Exercise 4. Write questions and answers:

1. Mozart / from / Germany? (yes) 2. Columbus and Magellan / explorers? (yes) 3. Virginia
Woolf / writer? (yes) 4. the Bee Gees / from the USA? (no) 5. John McEnroe / footballer? (no) 6.
Matisse / composer? no) 7. Picasso / born / Spain? (yes) 8. Greta Garbo / actress? (no)
9. Tolstoy and Cervantes / painters? (no) 10. Nelson Mandela / born / Britain? (no)

Exercise 5. Complete with present or past forms of be:

1. Today Monday, so yesterday Sunday.2. A. Hi.

your sister at home? B. No, she . She here this morning,
but now she at work. 3. My books here on my desk this morning.
Where they now? 4. James born in England, but his parents
born in Singapore. 5. My boss angry today because I
very late for work yesterday, and this morning too.

Exercise 6. Complete the sentences with a verb, first in the positive and then in the
negative: book show help walk play paint study work.

1. Yesterday Sam to work, but he home. 2. I

French at school, but I German and Spanish. 3. The teacher
me with the exercise, but she my friend. 4. Bill
basketball when he was young, but he football.
5. The secretary a table for lunch, but she a taxi.
6. We the living room, but we the bedroom. 7. The shop
assistant last Saturday, but she on Sunday. 8. I
the photos to my sister, but I them to my brother.

Exercise 7. Order the words to make questions:

1. after / Peter / match / tired / Was / the A. Was Peter tired after the match? B. Yes, he was.
2. you / night / Where / last / were A. ? B.
I was at home.
3. they / concert / late / the / Were / for A. ? B.
No, they weren't.
4. did / land / the / Where / they / plane A. ?B
At the airport.
132
5. did / university / your / at / brother / What / study A. ? B.
Modern Languages.
6. Was / tall / boyfriend / very / your / first A. ?
B. No, not very.
7. didn't / the / you / wait / Why / for / bus A. ? B. Because
it was too cold.
8. time / work / did / What / arrive / Sandra / yesterday / at A. ? B.
At ten o'clock.

Exercise 8. Complete the questions and answers:

1975 1985 1929 2001 1969 1925 1945

1. when / Wall Street Crash / happen? It happened in
2. when / the Second World War / finish ? It finished in
3. when / Neil Armstrong / land / on the moon? He landed on the moon in
4. when / mobile phones / first / appear ? They first appeared in
5. when / John Logie Baird / invent the television ? He invented the television in
6. when / George Harrison / die? He died in
7. when / Bill Gates / start Microsoft ? He started Microsoft in

Exercise 9. Circle the correct answer:

1. She wasn't in last night/ yesterday night. 2. My son was born ago two years / two years ago. 3.
They travelled to the USA last month / the last month. 4. Did you phone me last morning /
yesterday morning? 5. The plane landed two hours ago / two ago hours. 6. Marc arrived in
England the last July / last July. 7. I stayed with him before two weeks / two weeks ago. 8.
Isabella booked the tickets yesterday afternoon / last afternoon.

Exercise 10. Complete the spaces in the story with went, had, or got:

Last month Jill, a journalist from London,1. went to Brighton for the weekend. She booked a
hotel on the Internet, and on Friday she 2. the train to the coast. It was quite late when
she arrived, so she just 3. a ham and cheese sandwich and 4. to bed. The
next morning she 5. up early and looked out of the window – it was raining! She 6.
a shower and 7. dressed, and then she 8. out to
buy some postcards. Another hotel guest9. an umbrella and asked her if she needed
it. They 10. to the shop together and after that they breakfast in a cafe. From
that moment, Jill didn't think about the rain – she 11. a very good time in Brighton!

Exercise 11. Write sentences in the past:

1. Robert wears a tie to work, (yesterday) Robert wore a tie to work yesterday. 2. They do their
homework together. (last night) 3. Helen doesn't go to the shops. (last week) 4. We meet in the
bar.(last night) 5. We don't have dinner at home. (last night) 6. Jane gets up early. (yesterday
morning) 7. He buys a newspaper at the station. (yesterday) 8. I leave home at 7.00. (yesterday)
9. She sees her friends after work. (last night) 10. Bob can't come to dinner. (last week)

Exercise 12. Complete the sentences with the past simple form of the verbs: buy can't
find hear go lose make get meet think not take:

1. He got up in the middle of the night because he heard a noise. 2. I Sally at a

party last week.
133
3. They a new car two days ago. 4. We to bed very late
last night. 5. Karen the dinner yesterday. It was pasta, as usual. 6. She was ill, so she
her dog for a walk this morning. 7. When we arrived in Paris, we
a cheap hotel near the station.
8. The match was a disaster. Our team 9. I she was Italian,
but she was Spanish. 10. I looked everywhere but I find my glasses.

Exercise 13. Complete the questions with the correct form of the verbs in brackets:

POLICE OFFICER. Where 1. were you at about 9.30 yesterday evening? (be)
STEVEN POTTER. I was at the cinema. The film started at 9.00.
PO. What film 2. ?
(see) SP. I can't remember. It wasn't very good.
PO. Hmm. Very interesting. And who 3. to the cinema with? (go)
SP. With my girlfriend.
PO. 4. the film? (like)
SP. Yes, she thought it was very good.
PO. What time 5. the film ?
(finish) SP. At about 10.30.
PO. And what6. after you left the cinema?
(do) SP. We went to a restaurant - La Dolce Vita, on the High
Street.
PO. La Dolce Vita. I know it. Very good spaghetti. What time 7.
th
e restaurant? (leave)
SP. At about 12.00.
PO. That's very late.8. home after that? (go)
SP. No, we went to a nightclub - Flanagan's. Then we went home.
PO. How? 9. a taxi?
(get) SP. No, we got a bus.
PO And what time 10. to bed? (go)
SP. At about 4.00 a.m. Can I go home now? I'm tired.
PO. No, I'd like to ask you some more questions...

Exercise 14. Put the verbs in brackets in the past simple:

Two summers ago we 1. (have) a holiday in Scotland. We 2. (drive)

there from London, but our car 3. (break) down on the motorway and we 4. (spend)
the first night in Birmingham. When we 5. (get) to
Edinburg we 6. (not/can) find a good hotel - they 7. (be) all full.
We 8. (not know) what to do, but in the end we 9.
(find) a Bed and Breakfast and we 10. (stay) there for the week. We
11 (see) the castle, 12 (go) to the Arts Festival, and we 13._
(buy) a lot of souvenirs. We 14. (want) to go to Loch Ness, but we 15._
(not have) much time and it 16. (be)
quite far away. The weather 17._ (not be) very good, and it 18._
(start) raining the day we 19. (leave).

Exercise 15. Complete the questions in the past simple:

1. on holiday last year? We went to
Vancouver. 2. _ _ with? I went with my family
3. a good time? Yes, we had a great
134
time. 4. ? We stayed in a hotel
5. the weather like? It was hot and
sunny. 6. the plane ticket ? It cost $500.
7. at night? We went to bars and restaurants

Exercise 16. Express the idea in the past (change the adverbials if necessary):

1. My sister works hard at her English this year. 2. They must write many exercises at home. 3.
The students speak only English at the lesson. 4. Our lessons begin at 12 on Thursday. 5. Our
family gets up at 8 o'clock on Sunday. 6. I usually prepare my homework in the morning. 7.
Before going to bed I can rest for half an hour and listen to the news. 8. We often have to work
together.
9. We gather at the club every Saturday. 10. The girl reads about 20 pages every day. 11. In the
morning she takes a cold shower, dries herself on the towel and cleans her teeth before she puts
on her clothes. 12. We don't understand these words. 13. The boys do morning exercises every
day. 14. Why don't you turn off the cassette-recorder when you leave the room? 15. How long
does it take you to get to the theatre? - It takes me half an hour to get there.

Exercise 17. Read the following sentences a) in the interrogative, b) in the negative:
1. Bob came home late. 2. She gave them her dictionary. 3. He took a shower. 4. The students
went to the lab. 5. They got up early. 6. Ann brought me a new magazine. 7. He left for London
on Monday. 8. They wrote to me every month. 9. He read the letter out loud. 10. You did it all by
yourself. 11. She spoke English fluently. 12. They sat down quietly. 13. Jim saw them together.
14. They all heard the song. 15. He paid the money yesterday. 16. Benny found his ball. 17. She
remembered every word. 18. Ann made good progress in English. 19. The boys knew where to
go. 20. They celebrated New Year. 21. She got an excellent mark. 22. My parents met me at the
station. 23. You thought he was right. 24. We discussed it at the meeting, 25. It troubled me very
much. 26. Robert repaired Ann's iron. 27. They began on time. 28. You told John about it. 29. He
spent a lot of time on his English. 30. They admired her singing very much.

HOLIDAYS

Holiday activities with ‘go’:

go abroad go away for the weekend go by bus/car/plane/train go camping go for a walk go
on holiday go out at night go sightseeing go skiing/ walking / cycling
go swimming/sailing/surfing
Other holiday activities:
Complete the verb phrases with book buy have hire rent spend stay sunbathe take pack:
stay in a hotel/ at a campsite/with friends
photos
souvenirs
on the beach
a good time
money/ time
an apartment
a bicycle/skis
flights/hotels online
suitcases
Types of holidays
activity holiday
135
a holiday on which you spend your time doing a particular activity such as walking, canoeing, ro
ck-climbing, painting, or cooking
adventure holiday
a type of organized holiday in which people do new and exciting things, for example a trek or a s
afari
break a short holiday
daycation a very short holiday in which you go to a place and come back on the same
day
escape an occasion when you go away on holiday
excursion
a short visit to an interesting place arranged by a tourist organization, often as part of a holiday
farmstay a stay on a farm as a paying guest, giving you experience of life in the country
fly-drive including a flight on a plane and hire of a car when you arrive somewhere
gap year
a year, usually between finishing school and starting university or college, when you travel or
work
getaway a short holiday
holiday an occasion when you go and stay in another place for pleasure
hols holidays
honeymoon a holiday that two people take after they get married
house swap an arrangement where two families exchange houses for a holiday
jeep safari
an organized journey with a group of other people in a fourwheel drive vehicle, for example to
look at wild animals
lecture tour
a journey that includes lectures on the places or buildings that you visit and the paintings or other
objects that you see
package holiday
a holiday arranged by a travel company for a fixed price that includes the cost of your hotel and
transport, and sometimes meals and entertainment
summer camp
a place where children can go to stay in the summer holiday and do various activities
vacation a holiday
walking tour
a trip on which you walk from one place to another, spend the night, and then continue walking
the next day
working holiday
a holiday during which you work, for example doing unpaid work to benefit the community in
which you are staying
Other useful vocabulary to know during a holiday:
Travel agent, bead-and-breakfast, peak season, accommodation, traveler’s insurance, connecting
flight, lost –and- found office, customs, layover, tour guide, first class, ticket office, a locker,
check in, check out.
rent or hire?
Rent and hire mean the same but we normally use rent for a longer period of time, e.g. you rent a
flat or apartment, and hire for a short time, e.g. you hire skis, a bike, a boat, etc. With a car you
can use hire or rent.
Adjectives:
Match the questions and answers.
1. What was the weather like? It was ...
2. What was the hotel like? It was .. .
3. What was the town like? It was .. .
136
4. What were the people like? They were ...
5. What was the food like? It was ...
+comfortable, luxurious
-basic, dirty, uncomfortable
+friendly, helpful -unfriendly, unhelpful
+beautiful, lovely -noisy, crowded
+delicious -nothing special, disgusting
+ warm, sunny - very windy, foggy, cloudy
General positive and negative adjectives
+ lovely, wonderful, fantastic, great , OK, not bad, alright
-awful, horrible, terrible
Reading
a. In one minute, write down five things you like doing when you're on holiday, e.g. relaxing,
going to museums. Then compare with a partner.
b. In pairs interview your partner with the holiday questionnaire. Ask Why?
My perfect summer holiday
Which do you prefer ... ?
going abroad or going on holiday in your country
going by car, bus, plane or train
going to the beach or going to a city
staying in a hotel (or apartment) or going camping
sunbathing, going sightseeing or going for walks
hot, sunny weather or cool, cloudy weather
going with friends or going with your family

Exercise 1. a. Work in pairs. A read about Joe's holiday. B read about Laura's holiday.
Find the answers to questions 1- 5:

1. Where d id he/she go on holiday?

2. Who did he/she go with?
3. Where did he/she stay?
4. What was the weather like?
5. Why didn't he/she enjoy the holiday?

b. Now tell your partner about the holiday you read. Use question 1-5 to help you.
c. Read your partner's text. In pairs, guess the meaning of the highlighted words and
phrases. Whose holiday do you think was worse? Why?
d. Have you ever had a holiday that you didn't enjoy very much? What happened?

The place is perfect, the weather is wonderful, but if you're with the wrong person, a
holiday can be a disaster ...
Joe 28, a flight attendant
Last October I went on holiday to Thailand for two weeks with my girlfriend, Mia.
The holiday began well. We spent two days in Bangkok and saw the Floating Market and the
Royal Palace. But things went wrong when we left Bangkok. I wanted to stay in hostels, which
were basic but clean, but Mia said they were too uncomfortable and so we stayed in quite
expensive hotels. I wanted to experience the local atmosphere but Mia just wanted to go
shopping. I thought I knew Mia very well, but you don't know a person until you travel with t
hem. It was awful! We argued about everything.
For our last f our days we went to Ko Chang, a beautiful island. It was like being in paradise.
The weather was lovely and the beaches were wonderful, but we just sunbathed without
speaking. We spent our last night back in Bangkok and we went for a drink with some
137
Australians. They were really friendly and Mia started flirting with one of the boys. That was
the end. When we arrived at Heathrow airport the next day we decided to break up.
I took hundreds of photos, but when I got home I didn't show them to anyone.
‘You don't know a person until you travel with them.'
Laura 26, a nurse
I'd love to go back to Venice one day ... but without Linda.
'Last spring my best friend Isabelle and I booked a holiday in Venice. We rented a
small apartment for a week with a fantastic view of the canals. At the last moment another
friend, Linda, asked if she could come too. We felt sorry for her because she had problems
with her boyfriend, so we said yes.
Venice was magical and the weather was perfect, but the holiday was a disaster for one
simple reason: Linda was so mean! She has a good job so she's not poor, but she just didn't
want to pay for anything. When we went sightseeing she didn't want to go to any museums or
galleries that cost money. When we went on a gondola she complained that it was very
expensive. When we went to have lunch or dinner she always wanted to go to cheap
restaurants or she bought pizzas and ate them in the flat. But the night I invited her and Isabelle
out on my birthday she chose the most expensive things on the menu! The worst thing was that
although Isabelle and I paid for the apartment, Linda never once bought us a coffee or a drink.
I'd love to go back to Venice one day ... but without Linda.

Exercise 2. a. You are going to listen to Mia and Linda talking about the holidays.
First listen to Mia. Does she agree with Joe about the holiday?(T.5.1)
b. Listen again. What does Mia say about ... ?(T.5.1)

1. her relationship with Joe before they went

2. the places where they stayed
3. talking to other travellers
4. photos
5. going on holiday with a boyfriend

c. Now listen to Linda.(T.5.2) What's her opinion of the holiday? Then listen again.
What does she say about 1.Venice 2. what they did there 3. the cost of her holiday 4. her next
holiday
d. Who do you sympathize with most, Joe or Mia? Laura or Linda?
e. Listen to five speakers talking about holidays they didn’t enjoy. Which speaker...?(T.5.3)
a. didn't have a very exciting weekend
b. wasn't with the people he / she wanted to be with
c. chose a holiday destination because of the weather there
d. went on holiday after a relationship ended
e. didn't feel well when he / she was on holiday
Learn these words and phrases: atmosphere disaster hostels complain enjoy flirt
view break up feel sorry for (sb) go wrong

Exercise 3. Write the expressions in the correct column: on holiday, the sights, in a
hotel, shopping, to the beach, at a campsite, in a bed and breakfast, a show, the Statue of
Liberty.

Stay Go See

138
Exercise 4. a. Read the adverts:

This is a once-in-a-lifetime holiday in the snow and ice of the Antarctic. You visit the
isolated places the great explorers discovered and you can see animals and birds you only
normally see on TV or in zoos. The trip starts in South Africa and finishes in Western
Australia. You travel on a Russian ship, Kapitan Khlebnikov, and the holiday lasts for just
under a month.
Go on safari
This holiday is a safari with a difference. You travel by helicopter over parts of Kenya, listening
to classical music as you fly, and then you sleep under the African stars in a luxury bed. There's
another trip, this time in a hot-air balloon for two people, which gives you a second chance to see
wild animals in their natural habitat. The best moment is the Elephant Watch in Samburu, where
your experienced guide can tell you all about these amazing animals.
Fly high
This is probably the most expensive holiday in the world. You can go on a flight into space and
orbit the Earth in a spaceship - if you have the money! The only problem with this holiday is the
six-day training course before you take the trip. You travel BO miles above the Earth for
between 30 and 90 minutes and you get a beautiful view of our green and blue planet.
Live like Robinson Crusoe
If you dream of life on a desert island, then this is the holiday for you. The island of Quilalea is
off the coast of Mozambique and the only inhabitants are turtles and a few tourists. You can live
like Robinson Crusoe: watch the turtles, go fishing, or sail to another island to have a picnic.

b. Read the text again and match the tourists to a holiday:

1. A millionaire looking for something to tell his friends. 2. A rich couple who like animals and
hot weather. 3. A strong young scientist who enjoys cold weather. 4. A group of friends who
want to forget about their stressful jobs.

Exercise 5. Complete the sentences with an adjective:

1. We loved our room. It was very 2. The weather was warm and
s every day. 3. There were a lot o f people everywhere. It was very
cr_ . 4. We ate very well. The food was d 5.
The staff in the hotel were horrible. They were very unh , and sometimes quite rude.
6. There wasn't much in the apartment. It was very b . It didn't even have a fridge.
7. The other people on the trip were very fr .We hope to meet some of
them again in the future. 8. The town was l . All the houses had flowers on
the balcony and were painted different colours. 9. It was cl and
we didn't see the sun at all. 10. Our first meal was d , so we
didn't eat at the hotel again.

Exercise 6. a. Complete the text with the past simple form of the verbs:
arrive ask book cannot decide go(x2) look take want:

The holiday that wasn't

Four years ago, we1. to go away for the weekend. We 2. to go
to Portugal, so we 3. ; a beautiful apartment online. A week later, we
4. a taxi to the airport.We5. at the airport at two o'clock, and we
6. to check in. The woman at the desk 7. us for our passports. We 8. in our
bags, but we 9. find them. So we 10. home!

139
c. Read the text in a again. Complete the questions.
1.When to go away for the weekend? Four years ago.
2.Where to go? Portugal.
3.How the apartment? They booked it online.
4 When at the airport? At two o'clock.
5 What ask for? She asked for their passports.
6 Where in the end? They went back home

Exercise 7. Choose the most appropriate word:

Planning a trip/
travel
1. We still have to (book/make) a hotel and to buy our plane tickets. 2. I'm leaving tomorrow
and I still haven't (packed/stacked) my suitcases. 3. I always get great deals on hotels
because my friend is a (trip/travel) agent. 4. A "bed and " (breakfast/food) is a private home
which takes in guests. 5. It is often very expensive to travel during (peak/expensive)
season. 6. Arranging (acclimations/ accommodations) means arranging a place to stay (like
a hotel, guest house,etc.)
7. Travel agents often ask you whether or not you would like to buy
traveler's (insurance/policy). 8. A (package/combined) tour/holiday is one that includes air,
hotel, and often food. 9. A (connecting/connect) flight requires a passenger to change from
one plane to another. 10. If you lose something at an airport, you should check at the
airport's lost-and- (find/found) office. 11. When you arrive in a new country, you often
have to go through (customs/custom) at the airport. 12. A (lay around/layover) is the time you
have to wait at an airport for your connecting flight. 13. Our tour (guide/conductor) was
amazing! He knew so much about the city! 14. Traveling first- (level/class) is very expensive.
15. I wanted to buy train tickets, but the ticket (office/bureau) was closed. 16. Q: Are you
here on vacation? A: No. I'm here on (affairs/business). 17. We plan to do some
(sightseeing/see-sights) while we're in Chicago.
18. I left my bag in a (locker/lock) at the train station. 19. You have to check (in/on) at the airport
three hours before your flight. 210. Is the room air- (cold/conditioned)?

Lesson 2.

Grammar: be going to+verb

Positive(+) I’m going to work in a restaurant. She’s going to meet me at the airport.

Negative(-) We aren’t going to stay very long. He isn’t going to like the weather there

Question(?) Are you going to find a job? When is your brother going to visit you?

1. Use be going to+ infinitive to talk about future plans or intentions.

2. We use be going to + infinitive to make a prediction when we know or can see that
something is going to happen.
It's winter there so it’s going to be cold. Look at that car! It's going to crash.

140
 Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Order the words to make sentences:

1. going / She / holiday / enjoy / 's / the / to She's going to enjoy the holiday. 2. to / aren't / We / a
/ going / stay / in / hotel 3. going / They / to / go / 're / swimming 4. 'm /1 / go / camping /
going / to 5. you / to / Are / trip / for / going / pay / the? 6. isn't / see / the / He / to / going /
pyramids

Exercise 2. Complete the dialogue. Use going to:

A. So, where 1. (go) on holiday?

B. We 2. (travel) round Europe by train.
A. That sounds great. Which countries 3. (visit)?
B. Italy first, and then Croatia, Greece, and Turkey.
A. Where 4. (sleep)?
B. Well, we 5. (not / stay) in hotels! We don't have much money. We can
sleep on the train. The only problem is that it 6. (be) very hot.
A. And where 7. (go) after Italy?
B. After Italy we 8. (get) the train to Zagreb. Then Makiko 9. (come)
(spend) a week on a Greek island before I go to Turkey. I 12.
(not / get) home until the end of August.

Exercise 3. Complete the dialogue with going to + the verbs:

Jenny: 1. (you/have) a holiday this summer?

Philip: Yes, but 2. we / not / go) to the Mediterranean.3. (we
/ go) to Scotland!
Jenny: When (you / travel)?
Philip: In August. 5 (we / be) there for two weeks.
Jenny: What6 - (you / do) while you're there?
Philip: 7_ (we / stay) in Edinburgh for a week, and then 8 (we
/ rent) a car and visit the Scottish Highlands.
Jenny: 9 (it / be) sunny in Scotland in August?
Philip: I don't know. But I hope10 (it / not / rain) too much!

Exercise 4. Look at these verbs and complete the sentences using Going to Future: play,
do, take, set, ride, visit, buy, swim

1. Emma her English exam next week. 2. It is very hot

today. I in the lake. 3.We our grandparents this weekend.
We haven't seen them for a long time. 4.John and his brother their bikes.
5. I the table. It's time for lunch. 6. David
his homework after school. 7. It's Paul's birthday next week. We him
a present. 8. His sister the violin at the concert.

Exercise 5.Write in the verbs in the future using be going to:

1. Mr Potts (sell) his house. 2. Our neighbours (spend)

their next holidays in the Caribbean. 3. I (move) to another
town. 4. My husband (build) a tree house for
the kids. 5. His friends (learn) English. 6. I (tell/not) you the
141
secret.
7. She (ring/not) me. 8. We (invite/not) him to
our party. 9. Greg (work/not) abroad. 10. Her
parents (lend/not) her any more money.

Exercise 7. Write questions in the future I (going to):

1. (you/help/me) ? 2. (she/study/in Glasgow) ? 3. (they/paint/the room) ? 4. (he/apply/for that
job) ? 5. (what/you/do) about this?

Exercise 8. Put the verbs into the correct form. Use going to:

1. It (rain) . 2. They (eat) stew. 3. I (wear) blue

shoes tonight.4. We (not / help) you. 5. Jack (not / walk) ho
holiday abroad this year.

TRANSPORT AND TRAVEL

Airport vocabulary: arrivals, baggage, drop-off, baggage reclaim, check-in, customs,

departures, gates, lifts, passport control, terminal, toilets, trolley.

Exercise 1. a. What is your nearest airport? What's it like? What can you do there
while you're waiting for a flight?
b. Read an article about the top airports in the world. Which is the best airport(s) if you . .?
1.have a medical problem
2. would like to see a film
3. want to do some port or exercise
4. need to leave your dog for the weekend
5. are worried about getting lost
6. want to sleep between flights
7. would like to see the city between flights

Top Airports in the World

For many people airports are a nightmare - long queues when you check in and go
through security and an even longer wait if your flight is delayed. But there are some airports
where you can actually enjoy yourself. All good airports have excellent facilities for business
people and children, free Wi-fi, restaurants, cafes, and shops. But the best airports have much
more ...
SINGAPORE AIRPORT is paradise for flower lovers, as it has an indoor orchid garden! It
also has a rooftop swimming pool and a free sight-seeing tour for people who have at least five
hours to wait for their connecting flight.
If you like computer games, you'll never be bored at HONG KONG INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT - there are dozens of free Play stations all over the terminals! It's also good for
people with no sense of direction - there are 'Airport Ambassadors' in red coats, who help
you to get from one place to another.
SEOUL AIRPORT is the place to relax. You can go to the hairdresser and have beauty
treatments or a massage. Sports fans can also play golf at their 72-hole golf course!
MUNICH AIRPORT helps to keep passengers entertained with a 60-seat cinema and non-stop
films. There is also free coffee and tea near all the seating areas, and lots of free magazines and
newspapers.
142
If you worry about your health and like to be near medical services at all times,
OSAKA AIRPORT in Japan is the perfect place to wait, as it has a dentist and doctor's
surgery. And for people with animals, there is even a pet hotel!
If you have a long wait between flights at ZURICH AIRPORT in Switzerland, you can rent
day rooms with their own bathroom and kitchen and wake-up call service. So you can have a
shower and then sleep peacefully until you have to board your flight.
c. Look at the highlighted words and phrases related to airports and guess their meaning.
d. Role-play with a partner.
A imagine you are at one of these airports and your flight is delayed for three hours. B calls
you on your mobile. Tell B where you are and what you are going to do. Then swap role.
Do the same with other airports.

Exercise 2.Complete the text with vocabulary airports:

Last summer, I flew to New York with my boyfriend to visit some friends. The flight left from
1. 1, so my brother dropped us outside the building. We went inside and
looked for the 2.. l to take us upstairs to 3D . We picked up
our boarding passes at the 4.ch . Then we did some shopping. After that,
we made our way to the 5.g to board our plane. We had a good flight, but
we were very tired when we landed at JFK Airport. There was a long queue at
6..p and they asked us a lot of questions at Immigration. Finally, we went to
7.B R to pick up our bags. We needed a 8. tr

Exercise 3. a. Listen to five conversations at the airport. Match the speakers with
the places: Arrivals, Baggage reclaim, Check-in, Customs, Immigration (T.5.4)

Dialogue 1_ Dialogue 2_ Dialogue 3_ Dialogue 4_ Dialogue

b. Listen again and answer the questions:

1. What did the man eat on the plane?

2. What's the Gate number?
3. What's the friend's phone number?
4. What colour is the suitcase?
5. What did the woman buy?

Public transport and vehicles

Carriage coach lorry (AmE truck) motorway platform scooter the underground(AmE subway)
tram van
On the road
Compound nouns
Compound nouns are two nouns together where the first noun describes the second, e.g. a
child seat= a seat for a child, a bus stop= a place for buses to stop, etc. In compound nouns
the first noun is stressed more strongly than the second. There are many compound nouns
related to road travel.
Complete the compound nouns:
belt camera crash crossing fine hour jam lane lights limit rank station works zone
1. car 2. cycle 3. parking 4. pedestrian
5. petrol 6. road 7. rush 8. seat 9 speed _
10. speed 11. taxi 12. traffic 13. traffic 14. zebra

143
How long does it take?

It takes about an hour to get from London to Oxford by train.

It took (me) more than an hour to get to work yesterday.
How long does it take (you) to get to school?
Use take(+ person)+ time {+ to get to) to talk about the duration of a journey, etc. Read
the information above. Then ask and answer with a partner.
1. How do you get to work/ school? How long does it take?
2. How long does it take to get from your house to the town centre?
Phrasal verbs. Learn these phrasal verbs connected with transport and travel.
We set off at 7.00 in the morning to try to avoid the traffic. (= leave on a journey)
I arrive at 8.15. Do you think you could pick me up at the station?(= collect sb, in a car, etc.)
I got on the wrong bus, and I ended up on the opposite side of town. ( find yourself in a
place/situation that you did not expect)
We're running out of petrol. Let's stop at the next petrol station. (= finish your supply of sth)
Watch out!/ Look out! You're going to crash! (= be careful or pay attention to sth dangerous)

Exercise 4. You are going to read about a race which the BBC car programme Top Gear
organized across London.

a. Read the introduction and answer the questions.

1. Where do they have to go from? Where to?

2. What are t he four methods of transport?
3. Which one do you think will be the fastest? Why?
4. In what order do you think the other three will arrive? Why?

TopGear Challenge
What is the fastest way to get across
London?
On Top Gear, a very popular BBC TV series about cars and driving, they decided to organize
a race across London, to find the quickest way to cross a busy city. The idea was to start from
Kew Bridge, in the south-west of London, and to finish the race at the check-in desk at
London City Airport, in the east, a journey of approximately 15 miles. Four possible forms of
transport were chosen, a bike, a car, a motorboat, and public transport. The show's presenter,
Jeremy Clarkson, took the boat and his colleague James May went by car (a large
Mercedes). Richard Hammond went by bike, and The Stig took public transport. He
had an Oyster card. His journey involved getting a bus, then the Tube, and then the
Docklands Light Railway, an over ground train which connects east and west London. They
set off on a Monday morning in the rush hour.
Jeremy in the motorboat
His journey was along the River Thames. For the first few miles there was a speed limit of
nine miles an hour, because there are so many ducks and other birds in that part of the river.
The river was confusing, and at one point he realized that he was going in the wrong
direction. But he turned round and got back onto the right route. Soon he was going
past Fulham football ground. He phoned Richard and asked him where he was – just past
Trafalgar Square. This was good news for Jeremy. He was ahead of the bike! He reached
Wandsworth Bridge. The speed limit finished there, and he could now go as fast as he liked.
Jeremy felt like the fastest moving man in all of London. He was flying, coming close to 50
miles an hour! How could he lose now?
He could see Tower Bridge ahead. His journey was seven miles longer than the others', but
he was now going at 70 miles an hour. Not far to the airport now!
144
Richard on the bike
Richard could use bus lanes, which was great, but of course he had to be careful not to crash
into the buses! He hated buses! Horrible things! When the traffic lights turned red he thought of
cycling through them, but then he remembered that he was on TV, so he had to stop! When he
got to Piccadilly he was delighted to see that there was a terrible traffic jam - he could go
through the traffic, but James, in his Mercedes, would get stuck. He got to Trafalgar Square, and
then went into a cycle lane. From now on it was going to be easier ...
James in the car
He started off OK. He wasn't going fast but at a steady speed - until he was stopped by the
police! They only wanted to check the permit for the cameraman in the back of the car, but it
meant that he lost three or four valuable minutes! The traffic was getting worse. Now he was
going really slowly. 25 miles an hour, 23, 20 .. . 18 ... It was so frustrating

b. Now read about the journeys by boat, bike, and car. Do you still think your predictions
in a. 3 and 4 are right?

c. Read the three journeys again and answer the questions with Je (Jeren1y), R (Richard),
or Ja (James).
Who ... ?
1. was asked to show a piece of paper
2. went n1uch faster in the later part of his journey
3. nearly did something illegal
4. went n1ore slowly in the later part of his journey
5. was happy to cc that there was a lot of traffic
6. got slightly lost
7. had the 1nost exciting journey

d. Look at the highlighted verbs and verb phrases. With a partner, work out their meaning
from context.

Exercise 5. a. Now listen to what happened to The Stig.(T.5.5)

b. Listen again. What information or warning do you hear when you are travelling on the
Tube?(T.5.5)
c. With a partner, write down the order in which you now think the four people arrived.
Then listen to what happened. What order did they arrive in? Why do you think that
Jeremy Clarkson was annoyed?(T.5.6)
d. Think of your nearest big city. What kind of public transport is there? If a race was
organized there between a bike, a car, and public transport, what order do you think they
would arrive in?

Glossary
1 mile the unit of distance used in the UK and the USA(= 1.6 kilometers):15 miles=approx25 km
The Stig nickname given to one of the members of the Top Gear ream
Oyster card a kind of travel card which you use to travel on public transport in London
the Tube nickname for the London Underground

Exercise 6. Look at the statements below and decide whether you agree or disagree. Tick
the ones you agree with and put a cross next to the ones you disagree with. Think about
your reasons:

1. Slow drivers cause more accidents than fast drivers. 2. People who drink and drive should lose
their driving license for life. 3. Speed cameras do not stop accidents. 4. Drivers who are over 70
145
are as dangerous as young drivers. 5. Cyclists should have to wear helmets. 6. The minimum age
for riding a motorbike should be 25.

Exercise 7. a. Look at the four forms of public transport in London: the Tube, double-
decker bus, Boris bike, black taxi. Which one do you think is probably ... ?

• the most expensive • the healthiest • the best if you want to see the sights of London • the safest
to use late at night

b. Read an article from an online magazine for foreign students about public transport in
London and check your answers to a. Then answer these questions from memory.

1. What can you use an Oyster card for? 2.Why are the bikes you can hire called 'Boris Bikes'?
3. What's the difference between a black taxi and a mini-cab?

c. Read the article again and complete the gaps with a preposition from the list: around,
at, in, next to, off, on (x2, on the top of, with.

Transport in London

London Underground (The Tube)

This is the quickest way to get 1.around the city and here are many underground stations all over
London. The cheapest way to use the underground is to get an Oyster card. This is like a phone
card. You put money on it , and then top it up when you need to, and then you use it every time
you get 2._ or 3. the Tube. You can buy Oyster cards at tube
stations and in newsagents.
Buses
They can be quicker than the underground if there isn't too much traffic. The easiest way to use
the buses, like the underground, is to just use your Oyster card. You can also buy tickets from
machines 4. bus stops. On some buses you can buy a ticket with cash when you get
5. the bus. Some of the buses operate 24 hours a day, so you can also use them
late at night travelling 6. a double-decker bus is also a good way to see
London.
Bikes
Bikes are now more popular than ever in London, especially 7. tourists and
people who want to be fit. There are quite a lot o f cycle lanes, and bikes that you can hire,
nicknamed 'Boris Bikes' after Boris Johnson, the mayor of London. You can use your credit card
to hire a bike, and the first 30 minutes are free.
Taxis and Mini-cabs
London's black taxis are expensive, but they are comfortable and the taxi drivers know London
very well. You normally tell the driver where you want to go before you 8. the
taxi. Mini-cabs are normal cars which work for a company, and which you have to phone. They
are much cheaper, but make sure you use a licensed company. Taxis or mini- cabs are probably
the safest way to travel late 9. night.
d. Write an article about transport in your nearest town or city for foreign students.
Plan what headings you're going to use, and what to say about each forn1 of transport.

e. Check your article for mistakes (grammar, vocabulary, punctuation, and spelling).

Exercise 8. Complete the compound nouns with one word:

1 Don't forget to put your belt on.

146
2 You'll get a fine if you leave your car there.
3 Sorry we're late. We were stuck in a - jam in the city centre.
4 We got held up by the works on the motorway.
5 I wish cyclists would use the lane instead of the pavement.
6 We need to fill up at the station before we set off.
7 The traffic is always worse during the hour.
8 There aren't any cabs waiting at the rank.
9 Slow down! There are cameras on this road.
10 We stopped at the lights and waited for them to turn green.

Exercise 9. Guess the word:

1 It's where you wait for a train in the station.

2 It's bigger than a car but smaller than a lorry.
3 It's like a motorbike but less powerful.
4 It's used for transporting large quantities of things by road.
5 It's a type of bus that drives by electricity along special rails in the road.
6 It's one section of a train.
7 It's a type of railway system, called the Tube in London or Metro in other cities.
8 It's a fast road where traffic can travel long distances between large towns.
9 It's a comfortable bus that's used for long journeys.

Exercise 10. a. Read the article once. Which is the oldest form of transport?

Bamboo trains
This is the best way to see rural Cambodia. A bamboo train, or nori as the locals call it, is a
bamboo platform on wheels which travels along tracks. It's powered by an engine, and it can
reach a speed of 40 kilometres per hour. Passengers sit on a grass mat on the nori. Noris may
not be as comfortable as conventional trains, but they're certainly a lot cheaper. Pick up a nori
from Battambang Station, but remember to agree on a price before you get on.
Totora reed boats
These boats have been around for centuries. They are made from the reeds that grow on the
banks of Lake Titicaca, one of the largest lakes in South America. As well as making boats from
totora reeds, the local people use them to make their houses, which they build on floating islands.
Totora reed boats are still used for hunting and fishing, but today some of the local people
transport people across the lake in them. Travelling on a reed boat among the floating islands of
the lake is a must for visitors to Peru.
Jeepney
A jeepney is the most common form of public transport in the Philippines. They are made out of
the jeeps left on the islands by the American army at the end of the Second World War. The
people gave the jeeps a roof, put in two long seats on either side and painted them, turning them
into small buses. Jeepneys have open windows instead of air conditioning. They're often packed
with passengers and there are no bus stops - the driver just slows down to let the passengers
jump on and off.
Dog sleds
Dog sledding is a unique experience as it's something you can't do in many other parts of the
world. It was once the only way to get around in the snow of Alaska in the US, but now its use is
limited to winter sports and tourism. The best time to try it is from January to March-in the
summer there isn't enough snow so the dogs pull sleds on wheels. The ride can be a bit bumpy

147
as the sled sometimes goes over stones and the dogs bark a lot. All the same, it's an opportunity
not to be missed.

b. Read the article again. Mark the sentences T (true) or F (false).

1. Noris are a good way of seeing Cambodian cities.
2. The train fare is not always the same.
3. Totora reed boars are made from special planes.
4. Today the boats are only used to carry tourists.
5. Jeepneys have been used in the Philippines for about twenty years.
6. There are usually a lot of people in jeepneys.
7. Most people in Alaska don't travel by dog sled any more.
8. Dog sleds are a very relaxing way co travel.

c. Look at the highlighted words and phrases. What do you think they mean? Use your
dictionary to look up their meaning and pronunciation.

Exercise 11. a. Listen to the experiences of five speakers who were doing dangerous things
while they were driving. Match the speakers with the things they were doing. (T.5.7)

Speaker 1 _ A. Putting on make-up

Speaker 2 _ B. Listening to his/her favourite music
Speaker 3 _ C. Writing a text message
Speaker 4 _ D. Setting or adjusting a satnav
Speaker 5 _ E. Talking on a mobile

b. Listen again and answer the questions.(T.5.7)

l. What did Speaker l's car crash into? 2. How far had Speaker 2 driven past Exeter before she
realized her mistake? 3. Where did Speaker 3 end up? 4. Who did Speaker 4 nearly hit? 5. What
colour were the traffic lights when the accident happened to Speaker 5?

c. Learn these words and phrases: adjust (satnav) reach be a head of crash (into)
get stuck in a traffic jam get worse turn red turn round do your hair put on make-up

Exercise 12. Read the text. Mark the sentences T (true) or F (false):

1. New York taxis are all the same model of car.

2. A medallion number has four numbers and one letter.
3. An off-duty cab won't pick you up.
4. You should stand in the street until a taxi stops for you.
5. When you get in a taxi, the price starts at 40 cents.
6. You pay per minute if there are problems with traffic.
7. Taxi drivers like to be paid in cash.

New York Taxis

New York taxis provide an essential service to New Yorkers and tourists for getting around
the city. There are over 12,000 yellow medallion taxicabs so it doesn't take long to see one.

What does a New York taxi look like?

New York taxis come in many different shapes and sizes, but to be official taxis they must be
yellow. They must also have a special code called a medallion number: one number, then one
letter, and two more numbers. A bronze badge with the same code should also be displayed on
148
the hood. Only taxis with the above are legally licensed to pick you up!
How will I know when a New York taxi is available?
It's all in t he lights! When just the centre light illuminates the medallion number, the taxi is
available to be hailed. When the centre light is off and both sidelights are on (illuminating the
words 'Off Duty'), the taxi is off duty and won't stop for you.

How to hail a New York taxi.

First, try to hail a taxi in the direction you are already going; it saves time and money. When you
see an available taxi, make sure it's safe and step off the pavement whilst holding your hand up
high. If for any reason you don't get the driver's attention, step back onto the pavement and wait
for the next available taxi and repeat the process. It's as simple as that.

New York taxi fares.

Once you step into the cab the meter will be turned on. This is called the 'flag-drop fare' and is
$2.50. After that it will cost you 40 cents for every 400 metres, or 40 cents per minute if you are
stuck in traffic. There is a flat-rate charge of $45 from Manhattan to JFK Airport. If you're happy
with the journey, you should tip your driver between 15% and 20% of the total fare. Paying by
cash is preferred, however all taxis now accept credit cards.

b. Underline five words or phrases you don't know. Use your dictionary to look up their
n1eaning and pronunciation.

Lesson 3.

Grammar: Expressing movement

under (the bridge) along (the street) round / around (the lake) through (the tunnel) into (the
shop) across (the road) over (the bridge) up (the steps) past (the church) towards (the lake)
down (the steps) out of (the shop)

in ( to) and out (of)

After a verb of movement we use either in/out or into/out of+ place, e.g. Come in. Come into my
office. He ran out. He ran out of the room.

Away, off, and back

We use away to express movement to another place. e.g. Go away! I don't want to speak to you.
The man ran away when he saw the policeman.
We use back to express movement to the place where something or somebody was before.
e.g. After dinner we went back to our hotel. Their dog ran away and never came back.
We use off to express movement down or away, e.g. Get off the bus at the railway station. The
man ran off when he saw the policeman.

The man went up the steps and into the church.

He drove out of the garage and along the street.
I ran over the bridge and across the park.
To express movement use a verb of movement, e.g. go, come, run, walk , etc. and a preposition
(or adverb) of movement e.g. up, down, away, etc.

150
 Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Choose the correct preposition:

1. I lost my mobile phone signal when we went across/through a tunnel. 2. We ran to/down the
sea, and jumped into/out of the water. 3. If you go over/past the bank, you'll see the supermarket
on the right. 4. He walked along/ across the street until he got to the park. 5. The plane flew on/
over the town and then landed. 6. The dog ran towards/to me, but then it stopped. 7. We cycled
over/out of the bridge and in/into the city centre. 8. The racing cars went round/under the track
12 times. 9. The little boy suddenly ran across/through the road.

Exercise 2. Complete the sentences with the correct preposition:

1. He jumped his car and drove away. 2. As I cycled under the bridge, a train went
it. 3. Come . The door’s open. 4. This is the 3rd floor. Go those stairs and
you'll come to the 2nd floor. 5. He walked the bar and ordered a drink. 6. I like going
on a Saturday night. 7. He took his passport his bag. 8. I'm exhausted. I've just
cycled a huge hill.

Exercise 3. Read the story, and complete it with the prepositions:

across, into, out of, past, round, through, to, towards, under, along (x 2):

Last day at school for boy with dirty shoes!

Last Wednesday started as normal for 15-year-old Michael Brewster at Hove Park School.
At 10.30 a.m., Michael's class were jogging 1. the gym. But when Charles Duff, the
sports teacher, told Michael to clean his dirty trainers, he got really angry. He ran 2. the
gym, and back to the changing rooms where he found M r Duff ' s keys. From there, he went
3. the car park, got 4. Mr. Duff 's Ford Mondeo, and started the car. Then he
drove 5. the road , 6. the bridge , 7. _ the security guard, and 8 the school gates.
Then he turned left and drove 9. the road for about 100 metres 10. the maths
teacher's house. That was when he lost control. He tried to stop, but instead went 11. a field
and crashed into a tree. Michael has now left Hove Park School.

Exercise 4. Complete the sentences with a verb from the list: hit kick run throw

1. In basketball you have to the ball through a ring with a basket. 2. In football you have to
the ball into a goal. 3. In tennis you have to the ball over a net. 4. In the 800 metre you
have to twice round the track.

Exercise 5. Look at the sentence below. Try to think of three different verbs you could put
in the gap, e.g. walked.
The man along the street until he got to the corner.

TOWNS AND CITIES

Read the description of Reading and choose the correct words or phrases:
Reading is a town in the south/north of England, on the River Thames/the South coast. It is about
40 miles east/west of London. It is a small/medium sized/large town and it has a population of
about 250,000. It is famous for its music festival, which is one of the biggest in the UK.
What is it like? Adjectives to describe a town or city
a. Match the adjectives and sentences 1- 6.
150
boring crowded dangerous modern noisy polluted
1. There are a lot of bars and clubs with loud music.
2. The air is very dirty.
3. There are too many people.
4. The buildings were all built quite recently.
5. T here's nothing to do.
6. You have to be careful, especially at night.
b. Match these adjectives with their opposites in a. clean empty exciting interesting

old quiet safe

What is there to see?
Put the words in the right column.
Castle cathedral department store museum palace statue temple church
market mosque shopping centre town hall

Religious buildings Places where you can buy Historic buildings and
things monuments

Exercise 1. a. Read the information about getting around London and fill in the gaps
with the words: the tube, uncomfortable, rush hour, sights, journey, underground,
expensive, to park.
Getting around
London By
underground
The London Underground, usually called1. , is enormous and can take you
everywhere quickly. However, it is hot and 2. in the summer, and can be
confusing for tourists, who often get on the wrong train. It can also be very crowded in the
3. (7.00-9.00 in the morning and 5.00-7.00 in the evening).
By bus
The buses give you a good view of the 4. , especially if you travel upstairs, but
if the traffic is bad, your5. can take a long time. Special tickets, called
travelcards, can be used on both buses and the underground and are quite economical.
By taxi or car
Taxis are excellent, but very 6. . Never take a car into central London - it's
nearly impossible 7. , and you also have to pay a congestion charge (currently £ 5)
every time you drive into the centre.

b. Answer the questions.

1. What's another name for the London Underground? 2. When is the underground usually
very busy? 3. Where is a good place to sit to see the sights? 4. Where can you use travelcards?
5. What's the problem with taking a taxi? 6. How much do you have to pay if you take your
car into the centre of London?

c. Match the highlighted adjectives to their meanings.

very big full of people very

151
 good
difficult to_ quite
cheap_
understand
Exercise 2. a. Which European countries are the cities in? What do you know about them?
Have you been to any of them? Barcelona Copenhagen Dublin Paris Venice
b. Read the article and complete it with the cities in a.

Travel survey gives its verdict on European cities

London is the dirtiest city in Europe says a new survey by travel website TripAdvisor, but it has
the best public parks and the best nightlife. According to the survey of almost 2,400 travellers ...
1. is the most romantic city.
2. is the cleanest city.
3. has the best-dressed people.
4. has the best architecture.
5. is the friendliest city.
Europe's big cities all have their highs and lows, but they offer travelers a huge variety of culture
and sights within very short distances, ' said a TripAdvisor spokesman.

c. Look at l- 5 in the survey in b. Think about your country or continent. Which cities
would you choose?

Exercise 3. a. Read the article. In pairs, answer the questions:

1. What are the three tests? 2. Do you think they are good ones? 3. Which city do you think will
be the friendliest/ most unfriendly?

All capital cities are unfriendly or are they?

Big cities often have a reputation for being rude, unfriendly places for tourists. Sunday
Times journalist Tim Moore went to four cities, London, Rome, Paris, and New York, to find out
if this is true. He went dressed as a foreign tourist and did three (not very scientific!) tests to see
which city had the friendliest and most polite inhabitants.
The three tests were:
1. The photo test
Tim asked people in the street to take his photo (not just one photo, but several - with his hat,
without his hat, etc.). Did he find someone to do it?
2. The shopping test
Tim bought something in a shop and gave the shop assistant too much money. Did the shop
assistant give back the extra money?
3. The accident test
Tim pretended to fall over in the street. Did anybody come and help him?

Exercise 4. a. Read about what happened in New York, Paris, and Rome:

152
 Paris
The photo test
I was standing in front of the Eiffel Tower and I asked some gardeners to take some photos of
me. They couldn't stop laughing when they saw my hat, but they took the photos.
The shopping test
I went to a greengrocer's and I bought some fruit. I gave the man a lot of euro coins and he
carefully took the exact amount.
The accident test
I fell over in the Champs Elysees. The street was very busy, but after a minute someone stopped
and said to me, 'Are you OK?' He was Scottish!

Rome
The photo test
I asked a very chic woman who was wearing sunglasses to take some photos. She took a photo of
me with my hat on, then without my hat. Then another photo with my sunglasses. Then she
asked me to take a photo of her!
The shopping test
I bought a copy of The Times newspaper from a newspaper seller near the railway station. It was
three euros. I gave the man four euros and he didn't give me any change.
The accident test
I went to a busy street near the station. When I fell over about eight people immediately hurried
to help me.
b. Together decide which of the cities is the friendliest so far.

Exercise 5. a. Now listen to Tim Moore talking about what happened in London. How well
does London do in each test?(T.5.8)

b. Listen again and answer the questions. (T.5.8)

The photo test

1. Who did he ask first? 2. What did the person say? 3. Who did he ask next? What happened?
The shopping test
4. Where was the tourist shop? 5. How much did the bus and key ring cost? 6. How much did he
give the man? 7. Did he get the right change?
The accident test
8. Where did he do the accident test? 9. Did anyone help him? 10. What did the man say?

Exercise 6. Think about the nearest big city to where you live. Imagine you did the three
tests there. What do you think would happen? Is it a friendly city?

Exercise 7. Think about how to answer these questions about where you live. Compare
with a partner.
• Do you live in a village, a town, or a city? • Where is it? • How big is it? • What's the
population?

Exercise 8. a. Read the text and complete it with these words: area city food historic
modern nature population rivers weather.
b. Match the questions with paragraphs 1- 5.

What's it famous for?

What's the weather like?
What's the best thing about it? Do you like living there?
153
What's your home town like? What is there to see there?
Where do you live? Where is it? How big is it?

1. I live in Kayseri, which is an important 1. in Central Anatolia in Turkey. It has a

2. of over 1,000,000 people. It's near the famous Cappadocia 3. , so there
are a lot of tourists in the summer.
2. Kayseri is one of the richest cities in Turkey because it has a Lot of industry. It is a university
town, and there are also many 4. buildings, for example Kayseri Castle. Hunat
Hatun Mosque, and the Grand Bazaar around Cumhuriyet Square, with its famous statue of
Ataturk. But Kayseri also has 5. residential areas full of Luxury blocks of flats,
shopping centres, and stylish restaurants.
3. The 6. in Kayseri is typical of the Middle Anatolia Region. Winters are cold and
snowy - great for skiing – and summers are hot and dry. It sometimes rains in the spring and
autumn.
4. Kayseri is famous for its mountains. Mount Erciyes is the symbol of the city and it has a well
-known ski resort, and on Mount Ali there are national and international paragliding
championships. It's also famous for its 7. and has many Local specialities like
postirmo, which is dried beef with spices and manti, which is a kind of Turkish ravioli. They're
delicious!
5. What I Like best about Kayseri is that we are so close to 8. . When I'm tired of city
Life, I can easily get out and enjoy the mountains, 9. waterfalls, and thermal spas,
which are only a short distance away.

Exercise 9. a. Write a description of the place where you live. Write five paragraphs.
Answer the questions in bin the right order. First, make notes on the questions in 9 b.

b. Check your email for mistake (grammar, punctuation, and spelling). Show your
description to other students in your class. Which place that you read about would you
most like to visit?

154
Unit VI
Lesson 1.

Grammar : Reported Speech (Present Simple)

• Direct Speech is the exact words someone said. We use quotation marks (“ ”) in
direct speech.
e.g. “I’m very tired ”, Mary said.
• Reported speech is the exact meaning of what someone said, but not the exact
words. We do not use quotation marks in reported speech. We can either use the
word that after the introductory verb or we can omit it.
e.g. Mary said (that) she was very tired.

We use a 'reporting verb' like 'say' or 'tell' . If this verb is in the present tense, it's easy. We just
put 'she says' and then the sentence:

e.g. Direct speech: “I like ice cream”

Reported speech: She says she likes ice cream

We don't need to change the tense, though probably we do need to change the 'person' from 'I' to
'she', for example. We also may need to change words like 'my' and 'your'.
But, if the reporting verb is in the past tense, then usually we change the tenses in the reported
speech:

e.g. Direct speech: “I like ice cream”

Reported speech: She said she liked ice cream.

Tense Direct Speech Reported Speech

present simple “I like ice cream” She said (that) she liked ice cream.

Say – Tell
We use the verb say :
• Both in direct and reported speech without the preposition to when it is not followed
by the person being spoken to.
e.g. Jerry said , „I need some money”. Jerry said (that) he needed some money.

• Both in direct and reported speech with the preposition to when it is followed by
the person being spoken to.
e.g. Jerry said to me , „I need some money”. Jerrry said to me (that) he needed some
money.
• In expressions such as : say good morning/ afternoon, etc., say something, say
one’s prayers , say so, etc.
We use the verb tell without the preposition to :
• Both in direct and reported speech when it is followed by the person we are talking
to.
e.g. Jerry told me , „ I need some money”. Jerry told me (that) he needed some money

155
 • In expressions such as : tell the truth, tell a lie, tell a secret, tell a story, tell the time, tell
the diffrence , tell sb one’s name, tell sb the way, tell one from another, etc.
In general , the present form in direct speech changes to the past form in reported speech :
am/is – was do/does – did will - would
are – were have/ has – had can – could
want/ like/ know / go etc. – wanted/ liked/ knew / went etc.
Compare direct speech and reported speech:
You met Jenny. Here are some of the things Later you tell somebody what Jenny said.
she said in direct speech : You use reported speech:
„My parents are very well”. Jenny said that her parents were
very well.
She said that she was going to
„I’m going to learn to drive”. learn to drive.
She said that she wanted to buy a
new car.
„I want to buy a car. ” She said that John had a new job.
She said that she couldn’t come to
the party on Saturday.
„John has a new job”. She said that she didn’t have much
free time.
„I can’t come to the party on Saturday”. She said that she was going away
for a few days and would phone
me when she got back.
„I don’t have much free time”.

„ I’m going away for a few days , I’ll phone

you when I get back”.

General Question in Indirect Speech

Grammar exercises:
Exercise 1. Change the direct speech into reported speech. Use 'she said' at the beginning of
each answer. It's the same day, so you don't need to change the time expressions.
1) “I live in New York” …………………………………………………………
156
2) “He works in a bank” . ………………………………………………………
3) “Julie doesn’t like going out much” . ………………......................................
4) “I don’t have a computer” . ………………………………………………….
5) “They never arrive on time” . ……………………………………………….
6) “We often meet friends in London at the weekend” . ………. ……………...
7) “David doesn’t have any children” . …………………….................................
8) “I don’t go to the gym very often” . ……………………………………………
9) “Lucy owns three flats in the city” . ……………………………………………
10) “I never get up early on Sundays” . ……………………………………………

Exercise 2. Complete the sentences with say or tell (in the correct form). Use only
one word each time.

1. Ann said goodbye to me and left.

2. ……………….us about your holiday. Did you have a nice time ?
3. Don’t just stand here ! ………… something!
4. I wonder where Sue is. She ………….she would be here at 8 o’çlock .
5. Dan………………..me that he was bored with his job.
6. The doctor ………….that I should rest for at least a week.
7. Don’t …………….anybody what I ……………. . It’s a secret just between us.
8. Did she …………………you what happened? No, she didn’t …………..anything
to me.
9. Gary couldn’t help me. He ………….me to ask Caroline.
10. Gary couldn’t help me . He ………….to ask Caroline.

Exercise 3. Use the following questions in indirect speech according to the given model. Make all
the necessary changes:
Model: The teacher asks: "Do you know any English words?" The teacher asks if we know any
English words.

1. Tom asks: "Do you know English well?" 2. She asks: "Do you like to skate?" 3. My
friends ask: "Are you free on Sunday?" 4. The student asks: "Do you h a v e any English
books at home?" 5. She asks: "Do you want to read this book?" 6. The teacher asks: "Are
there any mistakes in spelling on the blackboard?" 7. The student asks: "Are there any
mistakes in my pronunciation?" 8. The teacher asks me: "Do you know any poem by heart?"
9. Mary asks me: "Do you know many English words?" 10. Betty asks Tom: "Must you go to
the Institute today?" The teacher asks the boy: "Is May a spring month?" 12. The students ask
me: "Do you like our University?" 13. Mr. White asks Betty: "Is Doctor Sandford in?" 14. The
children ask Betty: "Do you play the piano?" 15. The teacher asks the boy: "Do you have any
brothers or sisters?" 16. The teacher asks the girls: "Can you spell the word 'white'?" 17. The
boy asks his sister: "Do you see anything on the table?"

Exercise 4. Make up short dialogues according to the given model. Use the following questions.
Model: A: Do you know Helen?
B: What do you ask me?
A: I ask you if you know Helen.
157
 C: What does A. ask you?
B: A. asks me if I know Helen.

1. Are you busy? 2. Are the lessons over? 3. Is he already twenty? 4. Are there any new
words in Lesson Four? 5. Do you know the pronunciation of all the new words? 6. Is this
translation difficult? 7. Do the students of your group work much at their English? 8. Who is the
monitor of your group? 9. Can you swim? 10. Must we finish this work today? 11. Are you fond
of animals?
Exercise 5. Write a composition. Choose one of the following topics:

1. Write a fable from your country in which animals speak. Use quotation marks.

2. Write a children's story that you learned when you were young. When the characters in
your story speak, use quotation marks.

3. Make up a children's story. When the characters in your story speak, use quotation marks.

4. Make up any kind of story. When the characters in your story speak, use quotation marks.

5. Write a joke in which at least two people are talking to each other. Use quotation marks
when the people are speaking.

6. Make up an interview you would like to have with a famous person. Use your
imagination. Write the imaginary interview using quotation marks.

DESCRIBING FEELINGS
Under the High Trees

It was six o'clock when Ben Smith, dreadfully tired, arrived home from the school where he was
a teacher. He had had a lot of work and trouble that day. He dreamed of a quiet evening at home.
June, his wife, met him at the door smiling radiantly. She asked Ben to be quick with his supper
and change after that. She said she had got everything arranged and they would go to the
theatre.
Only then did Ben remember it was the very night that had been settled for their going out. So
June was realizing her dream. He envied his daughter Penny, a sixteen-year old girl, who said
she would stay indoors and watch television. But suddenly he was sorry for June who got too
little entertainment even at week-ends.
It was already past seven when they started for the theatre. The weather was unusually nasty.
Ben's nose and feet were cold. After 20 minutes a number 64 bus stopped. They got on, but the
seats were full. Unfortunately the bus conductor told Ben to get off as only seven people could
stand in the bus. Ben did so forgetting that his wife had got the tickets.
It was pouring now. The road was wet and there was a hole in his shoe. Luckily he got on the
next number 64 bus soon enough and found a seat. Ben shut his eyes. When he opened them
again, the bus was past the theatre. It was still raining as he walked back to it feeling unhappy.
Over the doors were the words, "Under the High Trees".
The man at the door said he could not let him in without a ticket. Ben was about to leave when a
girl behind the ticket-office window said: "Are you Mr. Smith? Your wife left your ticket with
me."

158
Ben squeezed to his seat in the dark, stepping on people's feet. He asked June what the play was
about. She whispered she could not understand much as one actor, an old man, spoke very
quietly, and the other, a young man, spoke very quickly.
As soon as the play was over, they ran out. There were no buses and it was raining. They waited
and waited and their clothes got wetter. At last Ben lost his patience and shouted: "Taxi!"
A passing taxi stopped. Ben pushed his wife in.
"Two pounds," said the driver when they arrived.
"What?"
"After ten o'clock in the evening the fare is higher."
Unwillingly Ben paid the driver. Besides all the trouble it turned out to be too expensive for
them.
"Did you watch television, Penny?" Ben asked his daughter.
"Yes," she said. "You can't imagine how brilliant the play was."
"What was the name of it?" asked Ben as he picked up his cup of coffee.
"Under the High Trees" was the answer. Ben Smith put his cup of coffee on the kitchen table and
went slowly upstairs to bed.

Vocabulary
be tired after e. g. They were tired after having practice in hearing and pronunciation. If you
are tired of London, go down to the sea. be tired (of) ; be sick and tired e. g. I am sick and tired
of this noise.; a lot (of) The following word combinations are all translated into Romanian with
the word «multe». Mind their usage and the way prepositions are used: a great deal (of), a good
deal (of) are used with uncountable nouns, e. g. He spends a good (great) deal of time at the
language laboratory. She plays the piano a good (great) deal, a great number of, a great many
are used with countable nouns, e. g. There is a great number of old newspapers in the desk. I saw
a great many needles in the working-basket, a lot of, plenty of are used both with countable and
uncountable nouns, e. g. There is a lot (plenty) of fruit in the shop today. There are a lot (plenty)
of tooth-brushes on the shelf. He knows a lot.; Mind the way of strengthening the meaning of the
given word combinations: He knows a lot more than you think. I can tell you a great deal more
on the subject.; get everything arranged e. g. Robert and Tom got everything arranged for their
excursion.; very adj e. g. At that very moment Mrs. Hilton told them that it was high time for
everybody to go to bed. He is the very person we want to see. ;settle vt е. g. It was not difficult
to settle the question. Syn. decide vt/i решать, e. g. She decided to leave Nick at home.; realize
vt 1. Syn. understand (understood, understood) vt, e. g. The man was very quiet. He didn't
realize the danger. 2. e. g. The plan was hard to realize (fulfil). But: It's necessary to understand
the rale before doing this exercise. I don't understand why he has left.; indoors adv acasă; out-
of-doors afară; indoor games: chess, draughts, lotto, dominoes, etc.; outdoor games: football,
golf, cricket, hockey, etc.; Mind the stresses in the following word combinations: 'indoor
'games, but to 'stay in' doors;' out-of-' doors.; watch television (TV) e. g. The Leonovs
bought a TV-set and invited the neighbours to watch TV. to see (watch) the TV programme e.
g. I'm sorry you didn't see the TV programme on Sunday evening. It was really interesting.;
week-end n Sunday, with parts of Saturday and sometimes of Monday, as a period of rest or as a
holiday. Mind the use of prepositions: to do something at the week-end, to go somewhere for the
week-end.; start (for some place) vt/i 1. е. g. The family started for the railway station. 2. e. g.
The machine started working.; unusually adv e. g. He thought that Jane looked unusually pretty
that day. Ant. usually обычно, e. g. He usually takes a cold shower at 8 o'clock, as usual e. g.
He took off his coat and hung it on the hook as usual.; to feel (look) unhappy (happy, bad,
chilly) , but to feel (look) well е. g. Не always feels happy when he comes to his native town.
She felt chilly and swam ashore. Ann looked surprisingly beautiful in her black dress. John
looked well in spite of his illness.; to be about to e. g. They were about to leave the house when
the telephone bell rang.; besides adv; beside prp e. g. X. is a wonderful singer and a good pianist
besides. There was a house beside the river.; expensive adj e. g. The hat is too expensive, I can't
159
buy it. Syn. dear (разг.), e. g. Isn't the toy dear? Ant. cheap e. g. The cheapest things cannot be
very good.

Exercise 1. Answer the following questions:

1. Why was Ben Smith so dreadfully tired when he carne home? 2. Why was June smiling
radiantly? 3. What kind of dream was June realizing? 4. What was Penny's idea of spending that
evening? 5. Why did Ben envy his daughter? 6. What do you think of Ben's attitude towards
June? 7. What can be said about the weather? 8. Why did Ben have to get off the bus? 9. How did
it happen that Ben went past the theatre? 10. Why didn't the man at the door let Ben in? 11. Who
saved the situation at that moment? 12. Was it easy for Ben to find his seat? Why? 13. Why did
Ben and June find it difficult to understand the plot of the play? 14. Why did Ben decide to take
a taxi on their way back? 15. Why did the journey turn out to be rather expensive? 16. What
struck Ben when he talked to his daughter about watching TV?

Exercise 2. Fill in the right word out of those in brackets (to hear, to listen; to leave, to stay;
tall, high; short, low):

1. She said she did not like the idea of ... the children all by themselves. 2. When Tom ... the
old man's words he trembled with fear. 3. He said he had spent his childhood far away in ...
mountains. 4. When the teacher made sure that all his pupils were ... to him he began explaining
the new material. 5. Peter the First was an unusually ... man. 6. The girl said that she would
never ... a moment in the house where nobody liked her. 7. He was so ... that his wife was ... than
he. 8. Pay attention to that... building.

Exercise 3.
a) Retell Text I in the words of the author, Ben Smith, June, Penny, one of the spectators at
the theatre.
b) Think of another way for the Smiths to spend their week-end.
c) Sum up the content of the text in a few sentences.

Exercise 4. Fill in articles wherever necessary. Retell the stones:

1. ... young lady entered ... crowded bus with ... pair of ... skates for ... figure skating over
her arm. ... gentleman stood up to give her his seat. "Thank you very much, sir," ... lady said, "but
I've been skating all ... afternoon and I'm tired of sitting down." 2. ... young man and his girl-
friend once decided to see ... football match. It was very difficult to get ... tickets and they had to
wait outside for ... long time. ... young people got there only thirty minutes after ... beginning of
... first half. "What's the score?" Peter asked ... fan sitting next to him. "Nothing to nothing." ...
fan replied. "You see," said ... girl with ... smile, "we haven't missed anything."

Exercise 5. Make up dialogues:

between Ben and June; b) June and Penny; c) Ben and Penny; d) Ben and June, looking out of
the windows of a taxi; e) Ben and his neighbour after the visit to the theatre; f) two friends who
have come to Moscow for their vacation; g) two friends going on a visit.
Exercise 6. Respond to the following sentences. Work in pairs:

1. Excuse me, I haven't looked through this paper yet. 2. Oh, it's you! 3. Give me that pencil,
please. 4. May I take your newspaper? 5. What about going to the country today? 6. How are
you? 7. I'm afraid, I'm very short of time. 8. Well, if it isn't old Jack!

160
Exercise 7. Think of stimulating phrases to which those below could be replies. Work in pairs:

1. Here you are. 2. Oh, no, I didn't. 3. I am afraid not. 4. It's nonsense. 5. Really? 6. I think so. 7.
Certainly. 8. Oh, it's too bad. 9. Right you are. 10. Don't worry. 11. See you tomorrow, then.

Describing Feelings

Exercise 8. Match the feelings to the pictures:

bored tired worried excited annoyed interested

Exercise 9. Complete each sentence with the correct adjective:

1. excited, exciting
Life in New York is very ... ………….
The football fans were very………….

161
2. tired, tiring
The marathon runners were very ............
That game of tennis was very .................

3. annoyed, annoying
The child's behaviour was really ..................
The teacher was ............... when nobody did the homework.

4. worried, worrying
The news is very ……………….
Everybody was very ................... when they heard the news.

Exercise 10. Match the feelings and reasons to make sentences:

Feelings Reasons
bored I'm going on holiday tomorrow.
tired we have a good teacher.
I am worried because 1 worked very hard today.
excited 1 can't find my keys.
annoyed 1 have nothing to do.
interested 1 want to go to the party but 1

NOTE : Some adjectives can end in both -ed and -ing.

The book was interesting.
I was interested in the book
The lesson was boring.
The students were bored.

Lesson 2.

Grammar: 1. Adverbs

• An adverb can be one word (carefully) or a phrase ( in the park). Adverbs show
manner (how), place ( where) , time ( when), frequency (how often), etc.
e.g. He drives carefully. ( How does he drive ? Carefully – adverb of manner)
Your coat is here. ( Where is it ? Here – adverb of place)
He left for Italy yesterday. ( When did he leave? Yesterday – adverb of time)
He usually eats out. ( How often does he eat out? Usually – adverb of frequency)

• Adverbs usually go after verbs . e.g. He walks slowly.

• Adverbs of frequency go after auxiliary verbs and the verb to be , but before main
verb.
e.g. He is always on time for appointments.
He has never visited Paris.
He always comes to work on time.

Formation of adverbs
• We usually form an adverb by adding –ly to the adjective.
e.g. dangerous – dangerously

162
 • Adverbs ending in –le drop the –e and take –y.
e.g. gentle – gently.
• Adverbs ending in consonant +y drop the –y and take –ily.
e.g. easy – easily.
• Adverbs ending in –l take –ly.
e.g. wonderful – wonderfully.
• Some adverbs are not formed according to these rules. They have either a totally
different form or the same form as the adjective.

Adjective Adverb
good well
fast fast
hard hard
early early
late late

Order of Adverbs
• When there are two or more adverbs in the same sentence , they usually come in the
following order :

He was studying hard in his room last night.

( how) (where) (when)
manner - place - time
• If there is a verb of movement (go, come, leave, etc. ) in the sentence , then the
adverbs come in the following order :

She came home by bus yesterday.

( where) (how) ( when)
place - manner – time

2. Comparative and Superlative Forms of Adverbs

Adverbs form their comparatives and superlatives in the same form as adjectives.
• Adverbs which have the same form as the adjective take –er in the comparative and –est in
the superlative.
e.g. hard – harder – hardest , early – earlier – earliest.
• Adverbs formed by adding –ly to the adjective take more in the comparative and most in
the superlative.
e.g. carefully – more carefully – most carefully.

Irregular Adverbs well better the best

badly worse the worst
far farther/ further the farthest/furthest

163
 Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Adverb or adjective? Choose the correct word:

1 The children played happy/happily in the garden.

2 Your children are always very happy/happily.
3 She sings very good/well.
4 Yes, she's a very good /well singer.
5 'How are you?' 'Very good/well, thank you. And you?'
6 I just want a quick/quickly snack. Just a sandwich, please.
7 I had breakfast quick/quickly because I was late for work.
8 You're speaking very quiet/quietly. I can't hear you.
9 He's a very slow/slowly reader.

Exercise 2. Position of adverbs. Put the adverbs in brackets in the correct place in each
sentence. Sometimes more than one place is possible.

1. I went to the beach. It rained all the time, (yesterday/unfortunately)

Yesterday I went to the beach. II went to the beach yesterday. Unfortunately, it rained all the
time.
2. Listen. I want you to come home, (carefully/ immediately)

3. I work and at night I sleep, (hard/well)

4. I know Peter because we play tennis, (well / together)

5. 'I love you.' 'I love you.' (very much/too)

6. Please speak and explain, (slowly/clearly)

Exercise 3. Once upon a time - a fairy story. Complete the story with the adjectives and
adverbs from the box. Use each word once only:

Adjectives Adverbs
beautiful carefully
green happily
hot quickly
angry suddenly
deep immediately
handsome unfortunately
unhappy quietly

The Princess and the Frog

ONCE UPON A TIME there was a (1) beautiful princess who had a golden ball. She lived in a palace
with her father, the King, and her seven sisters. Every day she played with her ball in the garden
of the palace.
At the end of the garden there was a (2) , dark lake. When the weather was
(3) , the princess liked playing near the lake. (4) , one day she
dropped her golden ball into the water. She was very (5)………………… and she sat on the
164
 grass and started to cry. (6) she heard a voice: 'Don't cry, princess.' She opened
her eyes and saw a large (7) frog. 'Oh, please help me!' she said, 'I can't get my
ball.' 'I'll help you,' said the frog, 'if I can come and live with you in the palace!' 'Yes, yes, of
course. I promise,' said the princess.
So the frog jumped into the water and came back with the ball. The princess laughed and took
the ball. She ran (8) back to the palace and forgot all about the frog. The frog
was very (9) . He followed the princess into the palace and told his story to the
King. 'A promise is a promise,' said the frog.
'Yes,' said the King and called his daughter. 'A promise is a promise, my daughter. Take this frog
to your room and look after him (10) .
The princess cried again, but she took the frog and put him on her bed. The frog looked at
her and said (11) .'Please kiss me, princess.' She closed her eyes and
kissed him. (12) ,the frog turned into a (13) prince .
Of course, he and the princess fell in love. One week later they married and they lived (14)
ever after.

Exercise 4. Write another fairy story that you know. Write about 200 words. Remember to
use adjectives and adverbs:

Begin Once upon a time ... End ... and they lived happily ever after.

Exercise 5. Give the comparative and superlative forms of the following adjectives and
adverbs:

1. High …………………….. 7. Dangerous ………………………

2. Good……………………. 8. Slowly …………………………..
3. Lazy…………………….. 9. Friendly ………………………..
4. Hot ……………………… 10. Careful ……………………….
5. Late …………………….. 11. Bad ………………………….
6. Happy…………………… 12. Far……………………………

Exercise 6. Underline the correct item:

1 My bedroom is tidy/tidily.
2 It is snowing heavy/heavily.
3 Cross the road careful/carefully.
4 My teacher was very angry/angrily yesterday.
5 Get ready for school quick/quickly.
6 The test was very easy/easily.

Exercise 7. Fill in the comparative form as In the example:

1. My motorbike goes ...faster than... (fast) yours,

2. ............................................I work (hard) Paul.
3. .....................................Today it is (cold) yesterday.
4. ...............................................I'm (old) you.
5. ..........................................English is (little) difficult…………. Japanese.
6. ............................................................ The last bus was (crowded) the first bus.
7. ..........................I need a ................. (big) bag this.
8. ..............................................................Travelling by train is (expensive) travelling by bus.
9. ...................................... A coat costs (much) a jacket.
165
10............................... Vegetables are (good) for your health………….. crisps.

Exercise 8. Choose the correct answer:

1 He is ...C... man in the world.

A tall В taller С the tallest
2 I am .................. than my sister.
A old В older С the oldest
3 This picture is ...............of all.
A good В better С the best
4 My car was ................than yours.
A expensive В more expensive С the most expensive
5 This is ............... film I've ever seen.
A boring В more boring С the most boring
6 I think History is a(n) ............subject.
A interesting В more interesting
С the most interesting
7 England is very ............. in winter.
A cold В colder С the coldest
8 Trains are ..................than bicycles.
A fast В faster С the fastest

TYPES OF CHARACTERS
A Train Journey
The people on the train were hot and tired. A tall young man sat next to three small children and
their aunt. The aunt and the children talked. When the aunt spoke she always began with 'Don't
.When the children spoke they always began with 'Why ... ?' The young man said nothing.
The small boy whistled loudly. 'Don't do that, Cyril,' said his aunt. Cyril stood up and looked out
of the window at the countryside.
'Why is that man taking those sheep out of that field?' he asked.
'Perhaps he's taking them to another field where there's more grass,' said the aunt.
'But there's lots of grass in that field. Why can't the sheep stay there?' 'Perhaps the grass in the
other field is better.' 'Why is it better?' The young man looked annoyed. 'Oh dear,' thought the
aunt, 'he doesn't like children.' 'Sit down quietly, Cyril. Now, listen, I'm going to tell you all a
story.'
The children looked bored but they listened. The story was very boring indeed. It was about a
very beautiful little girl, who worked hard and behaved beautifully. Everybody loved her. One
day she fell into a lake and everyone in the village ran to save her.
Why did they save her?' asked the bigger girl. 'Because she was so good,' said the aunt. 'But
that's stupid,' said the girl. When people fall into lakes, it doesn't matter if they're good or bad,
you run to save them.' 'You're right,' said the young man, speaking for the first time. 'That's a
ridiculous story.' 'Well, perhaps you would like to tell a story,' said the aunt coldly. 'OK,' said
the man. The children looked interested and he began.
Vocabulary
Tired (adj.)- feeling that you would like to sleep or rest; needing rest. to be/look/feel tired . e.g.
I'm too tired even to think.
Whistle (v.)- the sound that you make by forcing your breath out when your lips are closed.
Countryside (n.)- land outside towns and cities, with fields, woods, etc.
Perhaps (adv.)- possibly, e.g. ‘Are you going to come?’ ‘Perhaps. I'll see how I feel.’
Annoy(v.) - to make somebody slightly angry
166
Quiet (adj.)- making very little noise.
Bored (adj.) - feeling tired and impatient because you have lost interest in somebody/something
or because you have nothing to do. E.g. There was a bored expression on her face.
Ridiculous (adj. ) - very silly or unreasonable. E.g. I look ridiculous in this hat.

Exercise 1. Think about when you were a small child. Did your parents tell you stories?
Which was your favourite story? Tell the class.

Exercise 2. Answer the questions:

1 Who are the people on the train?

2 What does Cyril ask questions about?
3 Why does the aunt tell the children a story?
4 What is the story about?
5 Do the children like the story?
6 Why does the young man start speaking?
7 Which of these adjectives best describe the people? Write them in the correct column.

Exercise 3. Which of these adjectives best describe the people. Write them in the correct
column.

quiet noisy badly-behaved tired worried bored boring annoyed annoying

The aunt

The children

The young man

Exercise 4. The young man tells the story of a little girl called Bertha. Look at the pictures.
What do you think happened to Bertha?

167
Exercise 5. Read to part two.

The tale of horribly good Bertha

'Once upon a time, a long time ago there was a little girl called Bertha. She was always well
behaved and worked hard at school to please her parents and her teachers. She was never late,
never dirty or untidy, never rude, and she never told lies.'
The children on the train began to look, bored. 'Was she pretty?' asked the smaller girl.
'No,' said the young man. 'She wasn't pretty at all. She was just horribly good. Bertha was so
good that she won three gold medals. One said Never late, one said Always polite, and the third
said Best Child in the World.'
'Yuk!' said the three children.
'Anyway,' said the young man, 'Bertha was so good that the king invited her to his palace. So
she put on her best clean white dress and she pinned her three medals to the front and she
walked through the woods to the king's palace. But in the woods there lived a big hungry wolf.
He saw Bertha's lovely white dress through the trees and he heard the medals clinking together
as she walked.
Aha!' thought the wolf. 'Lunch!' And he started to move quickly but quietly through the trees
towards Bertha.'
'Oh, no!' cried the children. 'Is he going to eat Bertha?'
'Yes, of course,' answered the young man. 'Bertha tried to run away but she couldn't run fast
because the medals were so heavy. The wolf caught her easily and he ate everything, every bit of
Bertha, except her three medals.'
„That’s a terrible story”, said the aunt.
'No it isn't,' shouted the children. 'It's the best story ever!' Ah,' said the young man, 'the train's
stopping. It's my station.'

Exercise 6. Put some adjectives and adverbs from the story of Bertha into the correct box:

Adjectives Adverbs

Exercise 7. Answer the questions:

1 What is the same and what is different in the aunt's story and the young man's story?
2 Does the aunt like the young man's story? Why/Why not?
3 Do the children like the story? Why/Why not?
4 Which of these do you think is the moral of Bertha's story?
It pays to be good.
168
It never pays to be good.
It doesn't always pay to be good.

Types of Characters

Words used to describe someone's personality

Adaptive -changing in order to deal with new situations
addictive - someone who has an addictive personality becomes addicted to things very easily
babyish - like a baby
badass - ready to behave in an unpleasant way when necessary
classy -
someone who is classy has the natural ability to choose the best thing or behave in a suitable way
in every situation
clingy - wanting to be with another person all the time in a way that is annoying
constitutionally - in a way that is related to your general character
flawed - a flawed person has some faults in their character
flexible - able to make changes or deal with a situation that is changing
great - used about someone who is nice and a pleasure to be with
larger-than-life someone who is larger-than
life has a very strong or lively personality that impresses people very much
native - native abilities or qualities are those that you have had since birth
natural - existing in someone from an early age
natural-born - showing a particular ability or tendency from an early age
needysomeone who is needy has emotional problems that make it difficult for them to form good
relationships
out-and-out - showing all the qualities of a particular type of person that you do not approve of
outward used about the feelings or qualities that someone seems to have but may not really have
overweening
used for describing a bad quality that someone has which makes them very unpleasant
perfect - used for emphasizing how much someone has of a particular quality
personally
used for emphasizing that you do not dislike someone, just something that they do or the
group they belong to
predisposed - likely to think, feel, or behave in a particular way
prone - likely to do something or be affected by something, especially something bad
reactive - reacting to things that happen, rather than making things happen yourself
169
sad - used about people’s behaviour or appearance
self-aware - understanding what your own true thoughts, feelings, and abilities are
self-confessed
admitting to being a particular bad type of person or to having a particular negative quality
snivelling - often complaining or crying, in a way that is annoying
sporty - a sporty person likes playing sport and plays regularly
temperamental - relating to temperament
temperate - not extreme in behaviour or language
territorial
territorial animals or people do not like other animals or people entering an area that they
believe belongs to them
thick-skinned - not easily upset or offended by what other people say about you
tidy - a tidy person always puts their things away in the correct place
WalterMitty
someone who imagines that unusual or exciting things happen to them, but whose life is in
fact very ordinary
wayward - a wayward child or someone with wayward behaviour is difficult to control and does
unexpected things
well-endowed
having a lot of something that people admire or want, for example money, beauty, or
intelligence
a leopard can’t change its spots
used for saying that someone will never change their behaviour or character
a man of something - a man with a particular quality or ability
as a person -
used for talking about someone in relation to their character rather than their professional
position
at heart - used for saying what someone’s basic character is
be a bundle of something - used for emphasizing that someone has a lot of a particular quality
be a good/bad etc judge of something -
to be someone whose opinions about something are usually right, wrong, intelligent etc
be made of sterner stuff - to be stronger in your character than people expect
be nothing if not -
used for emphasizing that someone or something has a lot of a particular quality
deep down -
if you have a particular quality deep down, you have that quality, although you try to keep it
hidden from other people
given to something - having the tendency to do something
in your own right -
as a result of your own ability, achievements, qualifications etc and not because of anyone
else
not be one to do something - to not be the type of person who would do a particular thing
not have a bad/jealous etc. bone in your body -
used for emphasizing that someone is not bad/jealous etc in any way
on the outside -
used for talking about the way that someone or something seems to people, when this does not show
what they are really like
say this/that for someone -
used for admitting that someone who you do not approve of has a good quality
do/is/can etc someone ever -
used for emphasizing that someone does something or has a particular quality
someone’s bark is worse than their bite -
170
used for saying that someone is not as unpleasant or rude as they seem to be when they talk to you
the complete... - someone who has all the qualities needed for a particular activity
through and through -
used for saying that someone has all the qualities of a particular type of person
too clever/nice/generous etc for your own good -
so clever/nice/generous etc that it is a disadvantage instead of an advantage
to the core
used for emphasizing that an aspect of someone’s character is very strong and will not change
to your fingertips
if you are a particular type of person to your fingertips, you are a perfect example of that type of
person, in every detail
true to form/type -
used for saying that someone is doing exactly what you expected because this is what they usuall
y do
your old self - the way that you normally were in the past, before something happened

Exercise 8. Classify these words that describe the types of character into positive or
negative qualities .

Exercise 9. Describe your friend, members of your family.

Lesson 3.

Grammar: 1. Past Continuous

We form the past continuous with was/were (past simple of the verb to be) and the main verb
with the -ing suffix. We form questions by putting was/ were before the subject. We form
negations by putting the word not after was/were.

We use the past continuous:

◆ for an action which was in progress at a stated time in the past. We do not know when the action
started or finished.
e.g. At three o'clock yesterday afternoon Mike and his son were washing the dog. (We do not
know when they started or finished washing the dog.)

◆ for a past action which was in progress when another action interrupted it. We use the past
continuous for the action in progress (longer action) and the past simple for the action which
interrupted it (shorter action).
e.g. He was reading a newspaper when his wife came, (was reading = longer action; came =
shorter action)

171
◆ for two or more actions which were happening at the same time in the past (simultaneous
actions).
e.g. The people were watching while the cowboy was riding the bull.
◆ to give the background information in a story.
The sun was shining and the birds were singing . Tom was driving his old truck through the
forest.
Time expressions used with the past continuous include:
while, when, as, all day/night/morning, etc.
when/while/as + past continuous (longer action)
when + past simple (shorter action)

2. Connecting Ideas
and - tells you more , e.g. We went home and went straight to bed.
but - makes a contrast , e.g. They are rich but they aren't happy.
because - answers the question Why …? , e.g. We went home because we were tired.
so - tells you a result , e.g. We went home early, so we missed the end of the concert.
when - answers the question When …? e.g. We went home when Jane wanted to.
before/after - answers the question What happened first…? e.g. We went home before the
concert ended. We went home after Max Jones had sung his first song.
Although/ though - tells you something surprising e.g. We went home although / though we
did not really want to.
If - makes a condition e.g. We will go home if we are tired.
Other connecting words
The words in this table are useful for making connections between words and phrases.
only - says something is not very big or not very much, e.g. . He sleeps only 3 hours every night.
even - says something is surprising or unusual, e.g. Even their 10-year-old son works in the
shop.
like - makes a comparison, e.g. She looks like her dad.
than - used after a comparative adjective or adverb, e.g. She works harder than he does.
also, too, as, well - says something is extra, e.g. He works in the shop and she does also / too / as
well.

Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Put the verbs in brackets into the past simple or past continuous. Which is the
longer action in each sentence?

1. As I ...was doing... (do) the washing-up, I ...broke... (break) a glass. "Doing the washing-up
is the longer action."2. We (walk) in the woods when the storm (begin).3. John
(repair) his motor bike when his mother (arrive). 4. I (eat) my lunch when the
phone (ring). 5 He (ride) his bicycle to school when he (drop) his bag. 6
We (see) a bad accident as we (drive) to the airport. 7 Tom (watch) the match
when the TV (break down). 8 We (talk) when she (come) into the room.

Exercise 2. Put the verbs in brackets into the past continuous:

Yesterday. I went for a walk in the park. While I was there, I saw lots of children who 1) ...were
playing... (play). There was a man who 2)………….. (walk) his dogs.
He 3) ……………(throw) sticks and the dogs 4)…………………….(run) to catch them. A
gardener 5)……………….. (plant) some flowers and some old ladies 6)…………………….(sit)
172
on a park bench enjoying the warm sunshine. It was lovely.

Exercise 3. In pairs, ask and answer questions, as in the example:

1 at six о clock yesterday evening?

SA: What were you doing at six o'clock yesterday
evening?
SB: I was doing my English homework.
2 at two o'clock this morning?
3 at half past nine last Sunday evening?
4 an hour ago?
5 at noon last Saturday?

Exercise 4. Put the verbs in brackets into the past continuous or the past simple:

1. We ...went... (go) swimming every week when we were young.

2. Simon ....................................................... (dance) when he fell and hurt his leg.
3. ..................................................................................... Why (you/laugh) all through your
history lesson yesterday?
4. .............................................................. I (drink) a glass of milk every day when I was
a child.
5. ......................................................................Todd often (ride) horses when he was a
boy.
6. .................................................................. Bill (write) a letter when his mother came home.
7. It ......................... (rain) while I was waiting for the bus.
8. I ................................(play) the guitar when I was young, but I don't any more.
9. .....................................................................Debbie (sing) in the school choir many years
ago.
10.............................. Liz (clean) the windows when I saw her.

Exercise 5. Put the verbs in brackets into the past continuous or the past simple. Then, put
the pictures in the right order:

1) It...was... (be) a beautiful spring morning when Emma and her father 2) ………….
(decide) to visit Seaton Castle. The sun 3)……… (shine) and the birds 4)…………(sing).
Emma 5)…………. (feel) very excited. The castle 6)……….. (be) very old and made of
stone. They 7)…………… (climb) the steps to the top of the tower.
While they 8)………….. (admire) the view, they 9) ……….. (hear) some noises. They 10)
…………..(look) around but they 11)………….. (not/see) anybody. 'That's funny.' said
Emma. 'I 12)……………… (think) I 13)………………. (see) someone standing over there.'
After a while they 14)……………. (decide) to visit the cellar of the castle.

173
Emma 15)…………. (examine) an old barrel when she 16)………….. (hear) the door of the
cellar close behind them. 'Dad,' she 17)…………… (say), 'don't close the door!' 'But. I
18)…………(not/close) it. dear,' her father said. Emma 19)……….. (turn) around and
20)…………. (see) a shadow on the wall. . She 21) …………… (know) then that the ghost of
Seaton Castle 22)……….. (watch) them!
Exercise 6. Make past continuous 'wh' or 'yes / no' questions:

1) When you arrived at the party (Alan/dance)? .

2) When you arrived at the party (Susie/drink gin)? .

3) When you arrived at the party (John and Ann/sing)? .

4) When you arrived at the party (Luke/talk to the girls)? .

5) When you arrived at the party (Jodie/put on make up)? .

6) When you arrived at the party (we/cook)? .

7) When you arrived at the party (Jane/play the guitar)? .

8) When you arrived at the party (David/read a book)? .

9) When you arrived at the party (Francis/sit in the corner)? .

10) When you arrived at the party (everybody/have fun)? .

11) When I saw you and Lucy last night, where (you/go)? .

12) When I saw you and Lucy last night, what (you/do)? .

13) When I saw you and Lucy last night, who (you/meet)? .

14) When I saw you and Lucy last night, what (Lucy/wear)?

15) When I saw you and Lucy last night, what (you/eat)? .

16) When I saw you and Lucy last night, what (you/drink)? .

17) When I saw you and Lucy last night, why (Lucy/smoke)? .

18) When I saw you and Lucy last night, who (you/talk to)? .

174
 19) When I saw you and Lucy last night, what (you/carry)? .

20) When I saw you and Lucy last night, how (Lucy/feel)? .

Exercise 7. Past Simple vs. Past Continuous - Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the
verb in brackets:

1. He (ride) his skateboard when he (fall). 2. He

(crash) into a tree while he (drive) his car. 3. The wheels (fall) off as
he (ride) his quad. 4. While he (breakdance), he (hit) his
head. 5. He (trip) while he (walk) down the stairs. 6. While she
(eat), she (fall) asleep. 7. He (run) when he
(trip). 8. He (be) kicked in the face when he (play football). 9. As she
(play) volleyball, the ball (hit) her face.

Exercise 8. Choose one of the underlined words to complete the sentence:

1 Sam liked school because/although/if he had many friends there.

2 Sam left school so/but/and he joined the navy.
3 He hadn't travelled much but/before/after he joined the navy.
4 Sam was seasick when/if/so he left the navy.
5 He got a job in a bank because/although/and he had no qualifications.
6 He will stay at the bank when/if/though he likes it there.

Exercise 9. Think about your family and your habits. Write sentences using only, even,
than, like, also, too and as well about your habits.

Exercise 10. Complete these sentences for yourself:

1 I am learning English because

2 I'll learn more English if

3 I am learning English and

4 I am learning English although

5 I started learning English when

6 I can speak some English, so

7 I'll learn more English but

Exercise 11. Complete the sentences with and, so, but, or because:

1.In my bedroom there’s a bed and a wardrobe. 2. We live in a flat on the top floor,
we don’t have a garden. 3. Our flat’s small , it’s comfortable. 4. I
like living here it’s near the shops. 5. I like Chinese food, my
husband doesn’t like it at all. 6. We both like sailing, we live near the sea. 7. I’m
always tired on Friday evenings I like to stay at home and relax. 8. New York is
expensive, I like it.

175
 THE RAIN

A small boy and his father were having a walk in the country when it suddenly began to rain very
hard. They did not have their umbrellas with them, and there was nowhere to hide from the rain, so
they were soon very wet, and the small boy did not feel very happy.
For a long time while they were walking home through the rain, the boy was thinking. Then at last he
turned to his father and said to him, ‘Why does it rain, Father? It isn’t very nice, is it?’
‘No, it isn’t very nice, but it’s very useful, Tom,’ answered his father. ‘It rains to make the fruit and the
vegetables grow for us, and to make the grass grow for the cows and sheep.’
Tom thought about this for a few seconds, and then he said, ‘Then, why does it rain on the road
too, Father?’

Exercise 1. Answer these questions:

1. Where were the small boy and his father when it began to rain?
2. Why did they get wet?
3. Why didn’t the small boy feel happy?
4. How is rain useful?
5. Was Tom happy with his father’s answer?
6.
Exercise 2. Opposites. Write these sentences. Put one word in each empty place:

1. The small boy did not like being wet: he preferred to be . . . .

2. The boy did not think for a . . . time: he thought for a long time.
3. He thought, ‘Rain isn’t nice. It’s . . . .’
4. But rain isn’t . . . : it’s very useful.
5. The boy was not . . . : he was clever.

Exercise 3. Write this story. Put one word in each empty place. You will find all the correct
words in the story:

A lady and a . . . girl were getting very wet, because they were walking in the . . . and they were not
wearing coats or carrying . . . . The girl did not like being . . . , so she did not feel . . . . Then they
saw a star between two clouds. ‘Do you know,’ the lady . . . , ‘that star’s much bigger than our
world.’ The small girl . . . about that for a few . . . , and then she . . . to the lady and answered, ‘Well,
why doesn’t it keep the rain off us then?’

176
Unit VII
Lesson 1.

Grammar: 1. The Future Indefinite Tense

Structure of sentence
Subject + will/shall + verb
[questions] will/shall + subject + verb

In English, the future simple tense is used for spontaneous decisions, an assumption/promise or
an action in the future that cannot be influenced.

Examples of future simple in use:

1. “Wait, I will help you” (a spontaneous decision)

2. He will probably come back tomorrow (an opinion, hope, uncertainty or assumption)
3. “I will not watch TV tonight” (a promise)
4. “It will rain tomorrow” (an action in the future that cannot be influenced)

I
We (shan't)
He (She)
You
They
My pa- will (won't)
rents
next Saturday. (?)
Shall we tomorrow. (?)
go to the theatre
on Sunday. (?)
Will he (she)
next week.(?)
you

Question – Positive: Will you help me?

Negative: Will she not speak tonight?
Answer – Positive: Yes, she will.
Negative: No he will not.

Signal words for future simple

in a year, next ..., tomorrow I think, probably, perhaps

2. The Future Continuous Tense

Structure
Subject + will + be + verb + ing
[questions] Will +subject + be + verb + ing

177
 Affirmative Negative Interrogative

I will be working I will not (won't) be working Will I be working?

You will be working You will not (won't) be working Will you be working?
He will be working He will not (won't) be working Will he be working?
She will be working She will not (won't) be working Will she be working?
It will be working It will not (won't) be working Will it be working?
We will be working We will not (won't) be working Will we be working?
You will be working You will not (won't) be working Will you be working?
They will be working They will not (won't) be working Will they be working?

In English, the future continuous is used for actions in progress at a certain time in the future.
For planned actions and for asking questions about people’s plans.

Examples of future continuous in use:

1. I’ll be flying to London exactly this time tomorrow. (certain point in the future)
2. I’ll be talking to John in the evening, can you remind him please? (planned action)
3. Will you be using the computer tonight? (someone’s future plan)

Students vocally complete each sentence and write down different examples on their time
tense log form.

Statement – Positive: He will be shopping….

Negative: She will not be running….(won’t)

Question – Positive: Will they be eating...?

Negative: Will she not be gardening….?

Answer – Positive: Yes, she will...

Negative: No he will not…

Signal words for future simple

in a year, next ..., tomorrow, I think, probably, perhaps

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Put the verbs into the correct form (future simple):

Jim asked a fortune teller about his future. Here is what she told him:
1. You (earn) a lot of money. 2. You (travel) around the world.
3. You (meet) lots of interesting people. 4. Everybody (adore)
you. 5. You (not / have any problems. 6. Many people (serve)
you. 7. They (anticipate) your wishes. 8. There (not / be)
178
anything left to wish for. 9. Everything (be) perfect. 10. But all these things (happen /
only) if you marry me.

Exercise 2. Write some sentences down about which of these activities you think people will or won’t do
in the future? In how many years? Finish off with 2 ideas of your own:

1. Learn by computer at home instead of going to school

2. Eat food pills
3. Produce babies in a laboratory
4. Fly to Mars
5. Live on the Moon

I think that people………………………………..

Exercise 3. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets (future continuous):

1. Hopefully tomorrow, we (lie) on the beach all day. 2. What

(you do) in a year from now? 3. At this level you
(speak) Spanish fluently in a few months. 4. Before long, he
(ask) you for more money again. 5. Just wait. She (not telephone) you
every night. 6. This time tomorrow, (they sit) on a train to Barcelona 7. I
(not use) my
computer in the evening so you can play on it. 8. (you study) for your test tonight? I’d like
to study with you. 9. He (not work) on this project next week. He’ll be off. 10. What
class (she teach) at 8 o’clock tomorrow?

Exercise 4. Think of and write down 4 questions to ask your partner about what they will actually be
doing in the future. Use the given time frames and use future continuous tense within your questions:

a. Some possible questions: “What will you be doing at 7pm tonight?” “Tonight, will you be watching
T.V?”
“What will you be planning….?” “Do you think you will be …….ing tonight?”

1. (tonight)
2. (tomorrow)
3. (next week)
4. (next month)

b. Next, write down your partners answers using future continuous.

Example: “Mark said that he will be washing his car at 7pm tonight.”

Exercise 5. Change each of these sentences using the Future Continuous:

1. At 10 o’clock he was still working at the laboratory. 2. My friend was preparing for her
written test when I came. 3. Were you waiting for me at the station at 8 o'clock in the morning?
4. Was his friend giving a lesson at 5 o'clock? 5. My nephew was repairing our vacuum-cleaner
at 7. 6. My uncle was listening to the news when I went to bed. 7. My aunt was knitting the
whole morning.

Exercise 6. Write questions to the parts of the sentences in bold type:

179
1. He will begin his lectures next month. 2. My brother will go to India for six months. 3.
My sister will go to the South because of her child's illness. 4. It will take me 20 minutes to get
to her house. 5. I shall be waiting for you at the station. 6. It will take two years to build this
theatre. 7. It was snowing hard when I got up this morning. 8. I shall be able to translate this
article next week. 9. He will see her at 9 o'clock tomorrow. 10. I shall get up tomorrow at 6
o'clock. 11. He will stay in the country for two months. 12. I shall be able to go to the canteen
after the lesson. 13. I shall have to repair my aunt's iron tomorrow. 14. I shall be having dinner
soon.

Exercise 7.Use the verbs in brackets in the correct future tenses. Use will-future, going to-
future, Simple Present or Present Progressive:

1) The train .................at 11:45. (to leave). 2) We ................. dinner at a nice restaurant on
Saturday. (to have). 3) It .................. in the mountains tomorrow evening. (to snow). 4) On
Sunday .................. at 8 o'clock I my friend. (to meet). 5) They .................... to London on Friday
evening. (to fly). 6) Wait! I .................. you to the station. (to drive). 7) The English lesson
................... at 8:45. (to start). 8) I ................... my sister in April. (to see). 9) Look at the clouds
–it ................... in a few minutes. (to rain). 10) Listen! There's someone at the door. I ..................
the door for you. (to open)

Exercise 8. Complete the text with the most appropriate form of the verbs; using will, be
going to or the present simple:

I was standing at the bus stop reading my horoscope in the newspaper. It said “You
good moments and bad moments today.” I looked up and saw the bus
coming. Then I realized it because it was already full. “Oh, no”, I thought. “If I
walking fast, I late for my first class!” I had just started
walking when a car pulled up beside me and one of my classmates leaned out. “Hey, Jean, get in,
we you a lift.” It’s amazing how the bad moments the
good moments feel so much better.

Exercise 9. Some of the sentences are correct and some have a word which shouldn’t be
there. If it’s correct, put a tick. If it’s incorrect, cross the unnecessary word out of the
sentence and write it in the space:

1.They’re probably going to knock the building down. √

2.We are be going to get a dog soon. be
3.The bus is leaves at eight twenty.
4.The doors of the theatre are about to open.
5.The meeting will be start at half past seven.
6.The festival is for to take place in June.
7. My friend will be calling here tomorrow morning.

Exercise 10. Complete the following sentences using the Present Indefinite or the Future Indefinite:

1. If you travel by car to the Crimea .... 2. I should like to accompany you in case ... . 3. If
the weather remains fine .... 4. We shall wait till ... . 5. I should like to know when ... . 6. Don't
go away before .... 7. Tell me when ... . 8. The rain will soak us to the skin unless ... . 9. He is
clever enough to understand what you want if .... 10. If it looks like rain ... . 11. I am not quite
sure if .... 12. I understand you are going to stay at home till ... . 13. Please, ring me up as soon as
... . 14. We'd better stay at home if ... . 15. You may go skating after .... 16. Don't forget to remind
him tomorrow in case ... . 17. We'll remain here and wait for you until... 18. He must join us
189
tomorrow; ask him when .... 19. I'm afraid I shan't be able to join you before ... . 20. She
promised to come tonight. Please try to find out if....

Exercise 11. Give the four forms of the following verbs:

come, blow, drive, fall, prefer, freeze, ski, put, sweep, hang, show, sew, awake, sleep, build,
stop, sit, read, write, play, leave, begin, become.

Exercise 12. Give the degrees of comparison of the following adjectives and transcribe them:

dark, heavy, hard, large, old, severe, pleasant, bad, good, strong, weak, little, far, near, late,
clear, hot, warm, beautiful.

Exercise 13. Check what you know. Put the verb in brackets it the right future form (will/
shall+ infinitive, going to or present continuous). Sometimes more than one form is
possible:
Future forms
1. A It’s freezing in here!
B I the window? (close)
2. The sky is really clear! I’m sure it a lovely day tomorrow. (be)
3. A Do you think while we’re in London? (rain)
B I don’t know, but I my umbrella just in case.
I ‘very already put it in my case. (take)
4. A we lunch in the garden ? (have)
B I’m not sure if it’s warm enough. What do you think?
A I think it’s fine. I the table outside. (lay)
5. A What time you ? (leave)
B Soon, in about ten minutes. It’s very foggy, but don’t worry. I (drive)
really slowly, I promise. And I’m sure there too much traffic. (not be)

14. Write questions for the bold typed words in the following sentences:

Example: A: Where will you live?

B: I will probably live on the island of Heybeliada.
1. A: .................................. ............. .. ................................. .................. ........ ...
........?
B: Lolita will be a very good swimmer in the future.
2. A:........................................- ............... .................... ................... ............. ?
B: I will speak with George about this matter later on.
3. A: .. ............... ................................................................ .............. .......?
B: Tony will give me his telephone number in the afternoon.
4. A:... ....................................................... ............... .................. ..................?
B: The train will arrive at the station at ten o'clock.
5. A:..... .... ................ .................... .. ................. .... .. ............ .. ... ?
B: 1 will wait in front, of the cinema until my friends come.
6. A: ................... .... ...................... .................. .. .. .. ......... ... .. ......?
B: They will not go to the circus because they don't have any money.
7. A: .......... .. ................. .... ............... ..... ....................... .... ... ......... ... ?
B: Helen will go to the cinema as soon as she finishes her homework.
8. A.............. .. ................. ............... ........?
B: I will accompany the lady while she is singing.

181
 9. A:.............. ......................... ......................... ........... .. .. .............. ....................
................?
B: There will be twenty soldiers in the castle tomorrow.
10. A:... ........................................................................... ....... ............ .........................?
B: There will be a quarrel between the two families.
11. A: ...................................................................................................................................... 7
B: No, she won't get up at seven o'clock tomorrow morning.
12. A: ..................... .. .................. .. ................ .. ................... .. ................ .... .....?
B: As soon as I find enough money, I will buy that house.
13. A:... ........................ ............... .... ..... .......... ... .... .. ................ .. .. ............ .... ...
................. .. ?
B: We will visit the Topkapi Palace when we go to Istanbul.
14. A:............................................................. .. ... .............. .. ............... .. .. ...........
.. .... ?
B: We will have a lot of time to play tennis in the afternoon.
15. A: ....... .................. ...... ............. .. .... .............. ... ............ ... ?
B: Stella will do the exercises very carefully.
16. A:............ .................. ................. .. ............... ...................... .......... ?
B: The journey from Ankara to Istanbul will take two hours in the future.
17. A:..... ........................ ........................... .................... ... ... ............ ........................ ...
........... .... ?
B: The network will extend from Edirne to Ardahan.

SEASONS
Seasons and weather
When two Englishmen meet, their first words will he "How do you do?" or "How are you?" And
after the reply "Very well, thank you: how are you?" the next remark is almost certain to be
about the weather. "It's a lovely morning, isn't it?" or "Isn't it hot today?" and the other person
will reply "Yes, it's wonderful weather we are having. I hope it will keep fine, it seems almost
too good to last."
Or perhaps the day is dull, it is raining a little, the sky is grey, and everyone is wearing a
mackintosh or carrying an umbrella. As the cars and buses go along the street, they splash the
water and mud on the passers-by.
Gradually it gets darker: a thick fog is spreading over London. The lamps are lit in the streets
and in the shops and offices; cars and buses put on their lights and can only crawl along. As one
friend bumps into another, he says, "Isn't it a beastly day?" - "Yes," replies the other, you can
hardly see a yard in front of you."
Then comes winter. There has been a good fall of snow and a hard frost. It is just the day for
a good country walk; let us have a tramp down the country lanes. The ground is like iron and
rings under our feet, the frost sparkles on the branches, and icicles hang from the houses.
It is still freezing hard and the ponds are frozen over. There are crowds of people on them
sliding and skating, and here is a merry group of schoolboys having a fight with snowballs. It is
very pleasant while the frost lasts; the unpleasant time comes when the thaw begins.
A few months have passed and it is a beautiful spring day. The rain fell heavily last night, but
now the soft white clouds are floating across the blue sky, and the sun is shining brightly.
Raindrops and dewdrops shine on every small green leaf and every blade of young grass.
The farmer has ploughed his fields and the new corn is just beginning to appear above the
ground. In a few months autumn and harvest time will come. When the corn has turned ripe and
golden the farmer will reap it and put it in his barn.
182
 (Abridged from "Modern English Course for Foreign Students" by Eckerseley)

Vocabulary
Seasons: winter, spring, summer, fall/autumn. to shine brightly; to be out-of-doors; to be in
blossom (to be in bloom); flower-bed; to cycle; to boat; to fish; to go cycling (boating, fishing); to
bathe, to swim; to lie in the sun; to play with a ball; to play tennis (football); to play a game of
chess (tennis); to pick flowers, to pick (gather) berries and mushrooms; to travel by car; at the
seaside; on the beach; on the bank of the river; to blow; to go skating; skating-rink; to toboggan;
flakes of snow; sleet; sledge; slush; to get wet through; melt
Conversational phrases
Weather remarks: What a marvelous (shocking) day! It seems to be getting more settled
(clearing up), doesn't it? It's very windy (mild, wet, stormy) today. I'll be glad when the rain's
over (the fog's cleared), won't you? It's nice (cold, warm, chilly, hot), isn't it?
Hesitation devices: um, er, well, actually, in fact, you see, you know, the thing is, it's like this,
how shall I put it, I think..., I believe ..., I suppose.

Exercise 1. Look at the picture and answer the following questions:

1. Which of the four seasons is it? 2. Is the sky overcast with heavy clouds or is it clear and
bright? 3. Has the sun gone in or is it shining brightly? 4. What is the ground covered with? 5.
Are the fruit trees in blossom? 6. Do you see any flower-beds in the picture? 7. Who do you see
in the picture? 8. What are the grown-up people doing? 9. What are the children doing? 10. Do
people stay at home in spring or do they prefer to go out into the garden? 11. How do you like to
spend your time in spring?

Exercise 2. Look at the right-hand picture and ask one another questions using the words
and word combinations given below:

season; summer; hot, cold; the sun; to shine brightly; on the bank of the river; to bathe, to swim;
to boat, to fish (to go boating, to go fishing); to lie in the sun (on the sand); to pick flowers; to
pick (to gather) berries and mushrooms; in the woods; to spend one's vacation (holiday) at the
seaside; to travel by car; to go cycling; in a rest-home; on the shore.

Exercise 3. Describe the picture using the following words and word combinations:

autumn; weather; nasty; the sky; to be overcast; cold, wind, to blow; low clouds, to drive across
the sky; to rain heavily (hard); to hurry along the streets; to wear raincoats; to carry an umbrella;
to get wet through; cars, trolley-buses, buses; to go (run) along the streets; to splash; mud;
passers-by

Exercise 4. Look at the right-hand picture and make up a dialogue. Use the Topical
Vocabulary, Conversational Phrases and Hesitation Devices:

183
Exercise 5. a) Read the following dialogue and copy out all the adjectives and adverbs used in the
comparative and the superlative degrees. b) Retell the dialogue in indirect speech:

"Good evening, Mrs. Martin. Let me take your things. Put your bag on this table." "How is Mr.
Jones?"
"Quite well, thank you. He is not in yet. And how is your husband?" "He is coming in a
moment. He is busier than ever."
"My husband usually comes home about six. Sometimes a little earlier. But he never comes
later than half past six."
"It is only a quarter past."
"Let us go into the sitting-room. Please, sit down in this armchair. It is the most comfortable."
"I like your house very much. It is the quietest I know."
"There is very little traffic in our street."
"Your garden is so large. It is much larger than ours."
"But yours is more beautiful. Your trees are older and you have finer flowers."

Exercise 6. Fill in prepositions or adverbs:

A. 1. Be careful! Don't splash mud ... passers-by. 2. A thick fog is spreading ... the city and
though cars and buses have put ... their lights they can only crawl ... .3. It is pleasant to look ...
the trees when the frost sparkles... the branches. 4. There is a bridge ... the river. 5. The rivers
and lakes freeze … winter. 6. I don't like to be out-of-doors ... such bad weather. I prefer to stay
... home. 7. Let us have a tramp ... the country lanes. 8. The new corn is just beginning to appear
... the ground. 9. The ground is usually covered ... snow ... winter.

Exercise 7. a) Respond to the following sentences. Develop them into dialogues. Use
conversational phrases and hesitation devices:

1. It looks like rain. 2. It's pouring, what shall we do? 3. What nasty weather we are having
today! 4. It's a lovely morning, isn't it? 5. Isn't it a hot day? 6. It's wonderful weather we are
having. I hope it will keep fine. 7. What a tremendous clap of thunder! 8. Look! It's clearing up.

Exercise 8. Find a picture on the topic "Season and Weather" for your discussion in class.
Prepare 8-10 questions which would help your fellow-students to describe the picture:

Exercise 9. Complete the weather forecast these adjectives:

bright changeable clear heavy icy settled strong sunny thick

In the north of England and Scotland it will be very cold, with winds and rain.
There will also be fog in the hills and near the coast, though is should clear by midday.
Driving will be dangerous as the roads will be . However , the south of England and the
Midlands will have skies and sunshine, though the temperature will still be quite
low. Over the next few day the weather will be , with some showers but occasional
periods. It should become more over the weekend.

Exercise 10.Match the sentences. Can you guess the meaning of the words in bold?

1. Be careful! The pavement’s A Come and sit in the shade

very slippery.
2. You’re shivering. B It will all be gone by tonight.
3. I’m sweating . C You might fall over.
184
4. I got soaked this morning. D It’s hot and damp and there’s no air
5. It’s very humid today. E Can we turn the air conditioning on?
6. The snow is starting to melt. F Do you want to borrow my jacket?
7. Don’t get sunburnt! G It poured with rain and I didn’t have an umbrella.

Exercise 11. Make up a dialogue with the following words:

below zero breeze chilly cool damp drizzling

freezing gale-force mild pouring ( with rain)
scorching showers warm

Exercise 12. Complete the text with fog, mist, and, smog:

When the weather is foggy or misty, or there is smog, it is difficult to see.

is not usually very thick, and often occurs in the mountains or near the sea.
is thicker, and can be found in towns and in the country.
is caused by pollution and usually occurs in big cities.

Lesson 2.

Grammar: The Future Perfect Tense

Subject + will + have + verb + ed (or) Past Participle form of the verb [questions]

Will + subject + have + verb + ed (or) Past Participle form of the verb

The future perfect tense is used for an action that will be finished before a stated future time. In
other words; it is used when you talk about the past in the future.

Examples of present perfect in use:

I will have finished by 10am.
I will have sung by this time tomorrow.

Statement –Positive:They will have run...(they’ll)

Negative: He will not have worked... (he’ll)

Question–Positive:Will she have seen...?

Negative:Will I not have watched....? (won’t...?)

Answer–Positive:Yes, he will have....

Negative:No,I will not have... (won’t...)

Signal words for future perfect

By Monday, in a week etc.

185
 Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Put the verbs into the correct form (future perfect):

1. By 9 o'clock we (cook) dinner.

2. They (eat) by then.
3. In one week he (cross) the Atlantic by boat.
4. She (go) home.
5. Jane (not / finish) her work.
6. The sun (not / rise) by 4 o'clock.
7. (do / you) the washing up by six o'clock?
8. Our boss (not / leave) the office yet.

Exercise 2. Read the short story about Fred and underline all of the future perfect tenses in it:

By the end of this year Fred will have been a dentist for two years. He will have had two thousand
patients and he will have earned $25 000. He will probably have bought another car. He won’t have
moved to another house and he won’t have got married. Will he have met an interesting girl? Will
she have fallen in love with him?

Exercise 3. Form the questions by using future perfect and ask them to your partner:

1. How many new words you / learn by the end of the week?
2. How many crossroads you / pass before you get home?
3. you / read any books by the end of the month?
4. What places you / visit by this time next year?
5. How many new buildings / be built in your city by 2021?
6. you / do any computer lessons / by next

Mary is 18 now. Read how she sees her future.

As a class, answer the questions

1. This year I will go to university.

2. In 5 years I will finish my studies and find a good job.
3. In 7 years I will get married.
4. In 10 years I will have my first baby and I will be on maternity leave to take care of him / her
5. In 11 years I will have my second baby.
6. In 13 years I will go back to work.
7. In 20 years I will start my own company.
8. In 30 -31 years my children will start studying.
9. In 35 years I will retire and move with my husband to the country and my children will have
their own families.
10. In 38 years my first grandchild will be born.

What will have happened to Mary:

1. by the end of this year ?

2. by the time she is 27 ?
3. by the time she is 35 ?
4. by the time she is 50 ?
5. by the time she is 60

186
Exercise 4. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form (future perfect continuous):

1) By the end of the week I (work) here for four months.

2) By the end of this month we (live) together for six years.
3) By the end of the term she (study) for nine years.
4) By midnight we (play) this computer game for 48 hours.
5) She (talk) on the phone for the last couple of hours.
6) They (look for) me all night long.
7) He (play) soccer all day long.
8) You (watch) TV all the time.
9) He (not / sleep) all morning.
10) (wait / they) for 2 hours?

Exercise 5. Put the adjectives and adverbs in brackets in the required degree of comparison:

1. Today the frost is (severe) than it was yesterday. 2. This book is (interesting) of all I have
read this year. 3. It snows (hard) this winter than it did last winter. 4. January is (cold) month of
the year. 5. My sister speaks English (bad) than I do. 6. Which is (hot) month of the year? 7.
Which is (beautiful) place in this part of the country? 8. This nice-looking girl is (good) student
in our group. 9. Does this sportsman run (fast) than you? -Oh, yes, he is (fast) in our group. 10.
The students of our group will have (little) spare time this term and I (little) of all as I've got
(much) work at the scientific society.

Exercise 6.
a) Make the following sentences interrogative and negative:
1. It is as chilly today as it was yesterday. 2. The frost will be as hard tomorrow as it is today.
3. She is as fond of frosty weather as her brother is. 4. It has stopped raining. 5. She will be
working when you come. 6. Pressure will remain high.
b) Ask one another questions on the following sentences and answer them in the negative. Add
a sentence or two to develop a situation. Use conversational phrases:
1. It's coming on to pour. 2. There was a good fall of snow yesterday. 3. It's still freezing hard.
4. The rain fell heavily last night. 5. It was foggy yesterday morning. 6. It's clearing up. 7. The
clouds are lifting. 8. I've got my folding umbrella with me. 9. A thunderstorm is coming. 10. I've
just read the weather-forecast.

Exercise 7.Complete the dialogue with verbs in the future continuous or future perfect:

A Well, it looks like the weather’s going to be different in have

the 22nd century.
B What do you mean?
A Well, they say we ‘ll be having much higher not lie
temperatures here in London, as high as 30 degrees. work
And remember, we on the beach, we in 30 degrees, disappear
which is quite different. And islands like the Maldives by 2150 because of the rise in
the level . They say the number of storms and tsunamis by the middle of the
century too, so even more double
peo chart.ple to the cities looking for work. Big cities even
move bigger by then. Can you imagine the traffic? grow
B I don’t think there will be a problem with the traffic.
Petrol by then anyway, so nobody will have a car. run out
Someone a new method of transport, so we invent
around in solar powered cars or something. Drive
187
Exercise 8. Put the verbs in brackets into either "The Present Simple" or "The Future
Perfect Simple”:

1. Don't worry. 1 (repair)..................... the car by the time your father (get back).. .... ...
........ .... .... 2. The rain (stop) .................. ..... before we (reach).................................... home. 3.
Within five years, I (hope)..........I (get)......................... a big promotion at work. 4. If you (not,
hurry up) ................. the bus (go)... .... . before we(get to)................ ...... the bus-stop. 5. The
film (already, start) ....................................... by the time we (get) ..................................... there.
6. I (run out of) .................................................. money by the end of the month. 7. In two years,
you (forget) .. .... .... ..... all about this event. 8. By next June, 1 (work)
........................................................... for this Firm for seven years. 9. In six months' time, the
election (certainly, hold)........................... We may have a new government. 10. It
(be)........................ ....... five o'clock; they (arrive)............................................................ home by
now. 11. By the end of the month I (finish)... ..... .................. my job if everything (go).............
..... all right. 12. You (get)... . ................... the result of the exam before the teacher (arrive)
……………here. 13. Miranda speaks English very well. She (take).... ..... ..... ..... .... .... .....
private lessons. 14. It is already midnight. The children (go)
............................................................ to bed by now. 15. Next year, 1 (be) ..... ... ....................
........ married to Patricia for twenty years. 16. .They (complete) ............. the building by the time
we (receive).............financial aid from the government. 17. We (play).......................tennis for
four hours if we (not, stop) ......before it(get)............................ dark. 18. We (have).........
.................................. dinner by the time the programme (begin) ......................... .... ... 19. The
train (arrive).............and all the passengers (leave) ................the station if we (not, hurry)
................. 20. I (learn).................................................. English within two years, I think. 21. .
Monica (forget)............................................. you before she (reach)................................... her
destination. 22. They (return) ......................................................... by the time Angela (get) ....
.... ...... .... .. ........... home. 23. The ship (leave).... .... ..... ..... ... the harbour within fifteen
minutes. 24. The dance (start)................................ by the time we (arrive) ........................ there.
25. I will be able to buy your car next June. I am afraid I can't wait that long. By then I
(sell)............ the car to someone else.

WEATHER AND CLIMATE

Exercise 1. Memory Work:

When the weather is wet

We must not fret, -
When the weather is cold
We must not scold.
When the weather is warm
We must not storm,
-But be thankful together
Whatever the weather.

Exercise 2. Weather discussion:

Leon: Lovely day today, isn't it?

G e o r g e : It is. There's hardly a cloud in the sky in fact.
Leon: We'll have a heat wave, I fear. It must be 25 degrees in the shade.
G e o r g e : It is very close today. Not a leaf is stirring.
Leon: There's hardly a breath of air.

188
G e o r g e : By the way, I've just read the weather-forecast in my newspaper here.
Leon: What does it say?
G e o r g e : (reading) "Pressure will remain high to the southwest of the British Isles. There
will be occasional rain or drizzle, but bright weather with a few scattered showers will spread to
England and Wales."
Leon: I fear a thunderstorm is coming.
G e o r g e : The sky i s overcast and the sun is going in.
Leon: It looks like rain. Actually it's beginning to rain. And I have left my umbrella at home.
It never rains but it pours!
G e o r g e : Fortunately enough, I've got my folding umbrella with me. Let me put it up.
Leon: What a tremendous clap of thunder!
G e o r g e : And what a flash of lightning!
Leon: But the English have a saying about the weather: If you don't like it now, just wait a bit.
G e o r g e : Look! It's clearing up. The clouds are lifting.
Leon: It has stopped raining. Look at this wonderful rainbow!
G e o r g e : Bright sunshine again. Now I know why English weather is something worth
talking about.

Exercise 3. Give a title to the story. Retell the story using the vocabulary of the lesson:
The weather in England can change very quickly. One day last week I went for a walk in the
country. When I started early in the morning the weather was beautiful. The sun was shining, the
sky was blue and there were no clouds at all. In the middle of the morning a sudden change came.
A cool wind started to blow, black clouds covered the sun and in a very short time it started to
rain heavily. There were no houses in sight and I had no coat with me. So I got very wet indeed
and very cold too. After about an hour I managed to catch a bus which took me home. But when
I arrived I was shivering and sneezing and I've had a cold ever since. We sometimes say that
England is the only country where you can have four seasons in one day.

Exercise 4. Retell the text:

George got hold of the paper, and read us the weather forecast "rain, cold, wet to fine,
occasional local thunderstorms, east wind with general depression over the 'Midland Counties'."
I do think that, of all the silly, irritating foolishness by which we are plagued, this "weather
forecast" fraud is about the most aggravating. It "forecasts" precisely what happened yesterday
or the day before, and precisely the opposite of what is going to happen today.
I remember a holiday of mine being completely ruined one late autumn by our paying
attention to the weather report of the local newspaper. "Heavy showers, with thunderstorms, may
be expected today," it would say, and so we would give up our picnic, and stop indoors all day,
waiting for the rain. And people would pass the house, going off in coaches as jolly and merry as
could be, the sun shining out, and not a cloud to be seen.
"Ah," we said, as we stood looking out at them through the window, "won't they come home soaked!"
And we chuckled to think how wet they were going to get. By twelve o'clock, with the sun pouring
into the room, the heat became quite oppressive, and we wondered when those heavy showers and
occasional thunderstorms were going to begin. At one o'clock the landlady would come in to ask if we
weren't going out, as it seemed such a lovely day.
"No, no," we replied, with a knowing chuckle, "not we. We don't mean to get wet - no, no." But not a
drop ever fell, and it finished a grand day, and a lovely night after it.
The next morning we would read that it was going to be a "warm fine to set-fair day, much heat," and
we would dress ourselves in flimsy things, and go out, and, half-an-hour after we had started, it would
commence to rain hard, and a bitterly cold wind would spring up, and both would keep on steadily for the
whole day, and we could come home with cools and rheumatism all over us, and go to bed.
The weather is a thing that is beyond me altogether. I never can understand it.
(Abridged from "Three Men in a Boat" by Jerome K. Jerome)
189
 Lesson 3.

Grammar: Adverbial Clauses of Time and Condition

When the adverb-clause indicates time. The adverb can be termed as Adverb Clause of Time.
Use The Present Simple Tense after the following conjunctions to speak about a future action.
1. Whenever
2. While
3. After
4. Before
5. Since
6. When
7. As
8. As soon as
9. Till
10. If
Examples:
• I will study for my school while I am on holiday.
• You are going to do your exercise before you eat dinner.
• Wait by the bus stop until I come back.

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Use the correct form of the verb in the adverbial clauses of time and condition:

1. If you (to translate) this article into Russian, I shall use it in my report. 2. If she (to be) in
Moscow now, she will meet you. 3. If you don't (to hurry), you will miss the train. 4. If it (to
rain), we shan't go to the country. 5. When my friend (to come) to Moscow we shall go to the
Bolshoi Theatre. 6. What will you be doing when he (to come) to your place? 7. Don't forget to
pay for your dinner before you (to leave) the canteen. 8. I shall be able to translate this article if
you (to give) me a dictionary. 9. You will have to work hard at the laboratory if you (to miss) the
lesson. 10. Where will you go when you (to come) to Moscow? 11. You will lay the table as
soon as Mary (to wash) the dishes. 12. I shan't have dinner before mother (to come) home.

Exercise 2. Use the following sentences in indirect speech. Make other necessary changes:

1. He says: "I am sure she will come in time." 2. She says: "I shall be able to read English
newspapers without a dictionary in a year." 3. They say: "We shan't go to the Institute on
Sunday." 4. Mr. Sandford says: "I shall have to pay much money for the house." 5. Peter says:
"I'll be waiting for you at the station." 6. Mary says: "I'll be back soon." 7. She says: "What are
you going to do when you come home?" 8. She says: "I hope I'll soon speak English as well as
you do." 9. He says: "I am sure it will rain tomorrow." 10. They say: "We'll go for a walk if it is
hot tomorrow." 11. She says: "I am busy today but I'll be much busier tomorrow." 12. Jane says:
"I shall come earlier tomorrow." 13. John says: "I shan't be able to meet them tomorrow." 14. He
says: "I'll come if I am free." 15. She says: "I'll go to the cinema in the evening if I am not very
tired." 16. My mother says: "You'll be sleepy tomorrow if you don't go to bed at once." 17. My
aunt says: "I shan't be thirsty if I have some grapes." 18. My mother says: "Don't serve dessert
before I clear the table."

Exercise 3. Insert the missing conjunctions and comment on the use of tenses in the following
sentences. (Conjunctions to be used: when, till, before, after, as soon as, while, if):
190
1. I shall believe it ... I see it. 2. You must wait ... the light changes to green. 3. I shall be ready ...
you count ten. 4. He will ring up for the taxi ... you finish packing. 5. I shall tell you a secret... my
brother goes out. 6. We shall be starting immediately ... you finish your dinner. 7. I don't think he
will write ... he arrives. 8. I shall always remember you ... I live. 9. I shall be preparing
breakfast... you are taking a shower. 10. I shall put on my raincoat ... it starts to rain. 11. He'll tell
you ... you ask him. 12. ... you stay in the reading-hall I'll be working in the laboratory. 13. He
will stay here ... you come. 14. ... they show me their homework, I will correct it.

Exercise 4. Use the correct form of the verb in the adverbial clauses of time .

1. We (go)……………………..……………….……….on an excursion tomorrow.

(Lend)……………………….………………….. me your camera?
2. I(lend) ……………………..…………….…. you my camera as long as you
(promise)…………………………….…….. to bring it back tomorrow evening.
3. By the time the train (arrive)…………………………………..……………, we (wait)
………………………… here for more than half an hour.
4. Sorry, she can’t come to the telephone right now. She (be about) ……………………
to leave for her dancing lesson. It (start) ……………….. at 7 p.m.
5. By dinner time I (write) ………………………………………..……………………….
all the letters.
6. I guess Robert (stop) ……………………………………..……………working by the
time we (arrive)…………………………………………………..….
7. Kathy (not/come) …………………………………..……….with us on Sunday morning.
She (have) ……………………………..… a French lesson.
8. Please Mum, let me go to the disco. I (not/come) …………………………………….
home late, I promise.
9. Look out! You (hit) ……………………………………………………………. the car in
front!
10. Whatever you (decide) …………………………….………………………. to do, I (support)
………………………………….…………………………. you.

Exercise 5. Complete the following sentences using the Present Indefinite or the Future Indefinite:

1. If you travel by car to the Crimea .... 2. I should like to accompany you in case ... . 3. If the
weather remains fine .... 4. We shall wait till ... . 5. I should like to know when ... . 6. Don't go
away before .... 7. Tell me when ... . 8. The rain will soak us to the skin unless ... . 9. He is clever
enough to understand what you want if .... 10. If it looks like rain ... . 11. I am not quite sure if
.... 12. I understand you are going to stay at home till ... . 13. Please, ring me up as soon as ... .
14. We'd better stay at home if ... . 15. You may go skating after .... 16. Don't forget to remind
him tomorrow in case ... . 17. We'll remain here and wait for you until... 18. He must join us
tomorrow; ask him when .... 19. I'm afraid I shan't be able to join you before ... . 20. She
promised to come tonight. Please try to find out if....

Exercise 6. Fill in prepositions or adverbs:

A. 1. Be careful! Don't splash mud ... passers-by. 2. A thick fog is spreading ... the city and
though cars and buses have put ... their lights they can only crawl ... .3. It is pleasant to look
...the trees when the frost sparkles... the branches. 4. There is a bridge ... the river. 5. The rivers
and lakes freeze …winter.6.Idon't like to be out-of-doors ... such bad weather. I prefer to stay ...
home. 7. Let us have a tramp ... the country lanes. 8. The new corn is just beginning to appear ... the
ground. 9. The ground is usually covered ... snow ... winter.

191
B. 1. The temperature is 25° ... zero ... the shade today. 2. Look ... the sky. There is hardly a cloud ... it. 3.
A heat wave will spread ... the south-west ... Moscow. 4. It's beginning to rain. Put ... your umbrella. 5.
The rain is ... and it's clearing ... . 6. The weather is getting worse. The sun is going ... . 7. Look ... picture
... page 25. What do you see ... the picture? 8. It's pouring. We shall be wet ... . 9. My aunt will stay ... our
place ... two months.

Exercise 7. Complete the following sentences using the words in brackets:

1. The sky will be clear if the wind ... (to stop). 2. I shall go to the country if the weather ... (to be
fine). 3. We shall go to the skating-rink if the frost ... (to be not severe). 4. The snow will melt if the sun
... (to be hot). 5. You will feel warm if you (to put on) a warm coat. 6. He will ring you up when he (to
come) home. 7. The days will be longer when summer (to come). 8. I shall go home if it (to rain). 9. We
look forward to the time when spring (to come).

Exercise 8. Think of stimulating phrases to which those below could be replies. Work in pairs:

1. Very well indeed, thank you. 2. I don't know exactly. 3. Sometimes I do. 4. I think so. 5. I've no
idea, I'm afraid. 6. No, I don't think I'll ... . 7. Yes, I'll have to change my clothes. 8. I think that's a very
good idea. 9. I don't think so. 10. I've lost my umbrella. 11. Fancy that!

Exercise 9. Complete the following sentences and add something to develop a situation:

1. I shall go skiing if ... . 2. The pond will be frozen over when ... . 3. The farmers will reap the corn
when ... . 4. The unpleasant time comes when ... . 5. We shall go for a walk as soon as ... . 6. I'll stay out-
of-doors till ... . 7. She'll be able to help you if she ... . 8. He'll make good progress if ... . 9. I shall put up
my umbrella when ... . 10. Don't go out before ... .

Exercise 10. Put the verbs in brackets into either "The Present Simple" or "The Future
Simple":

Example: We (eat) ................................ dinner as soon as my father (come) ...... ....... home
We will eat dinner as soon as my father comes home.
1. If it (rain).... ...................... ....tomorrow, I (stay) .... ... ................. .at home. 2. They
(finish) .................................the job after we (give)............................................... them the
money. 3. We (wait)................................................ here until she (make) ..... ..... ............ .... a
phone call. 4. When the children (get) ......................................... here, they
(be)................................................ hungry. 5. If you (give) ............................... me the letter, 1
(take)............................................. it to the post. 6. I (go) ................................................ there
when 1 (feel) ....... „................................... a bit better. 7. I (give) ........................................... him
your message as a soon as I (see)..................... .... ....him. 8. I (call for) .............................. an
ambulance if your friend (get) .................................... an electric shock. 9. We (have)
................................................ lunch before the train (get to) .... .......... ... .... .....Paris. 10. She
(have) ......................................... a cup of tea before she (go)................................................ to
school. 11. The race (start) ................................... as soon as I (drop) .................................... my
handkerchief. 12. I (never, go) . ... .... ................. to that restaurant as long as I (live) ...........
.......... ..... ..here. 13. Once/when we (arrive) .... ... ..... ..... .... .... home, we (have)... .... .....
..... ... ..... dinner. 14. When he (come back) ..... ... ... ................. I (tell) ........... ...................
him what we will do. 15. We (not, start)............................ the meeting until everybody
(arrive)............................. 16. If she (find) .... .... .......... a better job, I (think) ...... ...... that
she (leave)................ Istanbul for Paris. 17. I (paint)............................................. the kitchen if I
(have)... ..... .... ........... ... some free time. 18. I (not, forgive)..............................................
him until he (apologize) ...................... ................... to me. 19. By the time we (come back)
.............................. from our holiday, they (get)................................. married. 20. When 1
192
(go)..........................home after work, I (take).................................. a rest for a while. 21. Dinner
(be over)....... .... ...... .... .... ... by the time they (come) ..... .............. ......... .... home. 22. If I
(earn) .......................................... enough money, I (buy) ................................................. a car for
you. 23. I am sure that the shop (be)……....closed by the time you (get) ......... ................ there.
24. He (not, take)................................ the job unless we (offer)..................................... him a
higher salary. 25. You (stay)........................................ here until it
(stop)................................................. raining. 26. I (be)................................................. sure that
you (like)................................. your new teacher. 27. I(give).............................. you everything as
long as you (remain) .............................loyal to me. 28. The moment the film (finish) .... .....
........ ..... ..... , we (leave) ..................................... .....the cinema. 29. I
(phone).................................. him as soon as I (finish) ...... ..........................my job.30. I (never,
speak).................................. to her as long as 1 (stay)....................................... in London.

Exercise 11. Answer the following questions using the necessary "Conjunctions" and the
"Prompts" on the list below:
* I work in a bank.
* She watches television. * The bull goes away.
* They play football. * I find a better job.
* The train passes. * He takes me to the cinema.
* 1 have breakfast. * School is over.
* 1 get married. * I join the navy.
* I go to the United States. * I buy a villa.
Example: A: What will you do when you graduate from this school?
B: I will work in a bank when I graduate from this school.
1. A: Where will you go when you finish this course?
B: ..........................................................................................................................
2. A: What will you do if you win a lot of money in the lottery?
B: .............................. .............. ... ... ..... ..... ... ..... .............................................................
3. A: What will you do if you cannot find a job in Istanbul?
B: ......... ..... .......... ....................................................................................................................
4. A: How long will you stay in Istanbul?
B: ....................................................................................................................................................
5. A: What will your mother do after she has dinner?
B:... ............ ... .....................................................................................................................
6. A: What will you do if you become rich?
B: .................................................................................................................... .... ..... .... ......
7. A: What will the students do as soon as they get out of the school?
B: ...................................................................................................................... .... ...
8. A: What will your father do when he comes home?
B: ..... .... ........ ..........................................................................................................
9. A: When will your classmates go for their summer holiday?
B: .................................. ........................ ... .. .... ..... ..... ..... ......... .... ..............................
10. A: When will you go for a walk?
B: ............ ..... ... ..... ............. ... ........ .... ....... .............................................................
11. A: How long will you stay up in this tree?
B: ...................................................................................................................................... ...
12. A: How long will the gates remain closed?
B:....................................................................................................................................

Exercise 12. a) Read the following dialogue and copy out all the adjectives and adverbs used in
the comparative and the superlative degrees. b) Retell the dialogue in indirect speech:

193
"Good evening, Mrs. Martin. Let me take your things. Put your bag on
this table." "How is Mr. Jones?"
"Quite well, thank you. He is not in yet. And how is your
husband?" "He is coming in a moment. He is busier than
ever."
"My husband usually comes home about six. Sometimes a little earlier. But he never comes
later than half past six."
"It is only a quarter past."
"Let us go into the sitting-room. Please, sit down in this armchair. It is the most comfortable."
"I like your house very much. It is the quietest I know."
"There is very little traffic in our street."
"Your garden is so large. It is much larger than ours."
"But yours is more beautiful. Your trees are older and you have finer flowers."

INTRODUCTION TO NATURAL DISASTERS

Natural disasters occur all around the world and can have a devastating effect on the natural
environment and on human beings. There are lots of different types of natural disaster, for
example, hurricane, tropical cyclone, typhoon, tornado, drought, flood, volcano, landslide,
tsunami, heat wave, wildfire, insect plague, famine, health epidemic, avalanche and earthquake.
It is very important that we have an understanding of natural disasters. The effect of a natural
disaster can sometimes be minimized with careful preparation, awareness of warning signs (if
appropriate) and knowledge of what to do once the disaster occurs. We need to be prepared to
respond to them when they happen to us and to be able to provide support when they happen to
others.
Hurricane Approaching
Instructions
Read through the following story about how a hurricane affects a family.
The story is not complete. At each gap in the story there is a question to help your group think
about how to decide what happens next.
B). Make the story into a short play to show the rest of the group.
The story
Your family live in a house on a hill overlooking the ocean, near the equator. You have your
own power supply from a wind generator and solar panels. You live in an area that receives
hurricanes and when the hurricane season is upon you, you know to be prepared. Your family
has an emergency kit ready permanently and you keep an eye on the weather forecasts. For the
last few days, your family has been watching reports on the evening news of a low pressure
system that has deepened considerably, turned into a tropical cyclone and is travelling across the
ocean heading your way! The latest prediction is that it will hit the coast tomorrow morning.
Everyone is warned to be on high alert and prepare for hurricane damage immediately. The
hurricane is expected to bring severe wind for around 12 hours.
Question
What do you and your family do to prepare for the hurricane?
Its 6.30 am on the day of the predicted hurricane. The winds are starting to pick up and rain is
falling heavily. There are new warnings of a major storm surge/ Ocean levels could rise as much
as 5 meters due to the upward sucking of the cyclone system.
Question
Does this change any of the plans your family made?
It is now 7.30 pm. The winds were terribly strong this morning and coming from the east– pieces
of buildings and tree branches was flying everywhere, trees were being flattened and the rain
kept coming down. Just after lunch, the eye of the storm crossed over you – it was strangely
194
calm and the sun was shining. Then Bam!! The winds came howling again, this time from the
west, and more rain fell. More flying materials, and the storm surge came in. Everything within
1 km of the coast flooded– there were fish in the streets. Now the winds are dying down, but the
rain is still falling.
Question
What damage did your home suffer?
It is one week later and the hurricane has totally gone but the damage to your neighborhood and
the environment hasn’t.
Question
How did you help after the hurricane?

Vocabulary
Translate the following words and check the pronunciation:
air snow
barometer snowstorm
blizzard snowy
Celsius storm
chill sun
cirrus sunny
cloud temperature
clouds thermometer
cloudy thunder
cold thunderstorm
cyclone tornado
degree tsunami
dew typhoon
drizzle warm
dry weather
dry season wind
flood windy
fog
forecast
freeze
frost
hail
heat
hot
humidity
hurricane
ice
lightning
meteorology
moon
precipitation
pressure
rain
rainstorm
rainbow
rainy
rainy season
sky
sleet
195
Exercise 1.Talk to a partner:

1 What kind of weather do you 2 What cities or countries

think is good or bad for …? do you associate with…?
a camping a fog
b going for a walk in the mountains b smog
c running a marathon c heavy snow
d sailing d floods
e sightseeing e hurricanes

Exercise 2. Pronounce the words and translate them:

1 blow snow showers below

2 weather sweat heavy heat
3 drizzle blizzard chilly mild
4 hard warm yard farm
5 flood cool monsoon loose
6 fought ought drought brought
7 muggy sunny hurricane humid
8 scorching tornado world storm

Exercise 3. In small group, talk about a time when you were somewhere when…:

• There was a flood.

• It was very foggy or there was bad smog
• It was unbearably cold
• It was pouring with rain for days on end
• There was a gale or hurricane
• There was a terrible heatwave
• You were caught outside in a thunderstorm.
What were you doing at the time?
What did you do to protect yourself from the weather?
Did you ever feel scared or in danger?

Exercise 4. Write a short blog ( like the ones in I) describing what the weather has been like
recently. Talk about how it has made you feel and how it has affected what you have been
doing.

Exercise 5. Listening (T 7.1):

a) You’re going to listen to Martin Cinert from Prague talking about the night the River Vltava
flooded. Mark the sentences T (true) or F (false).
 His office wasn’t at risk, but his flat was.
 He took his wife and child to his parent’s house.
 He went back to the flat because he was excited by the situation
 Martin went to a place near his flat to watch the water level rising
 He looked out of the window and saw that his car park was starting to flood
 He was the last person to leave his block of flats
 All of the roads he tried were flooded now
 He decided to follow another car through the water
 Martin’s car broke down as he drove through the water

196
  All the flats in his building were seriously damaged
b) Listen again. Then in pairs, correct the false sentences.
c) What do you think you would have done in Martin’s situation?

Exercise 6. Match the words and definitions:

blizzard drought flood

hailstorm heatwave hurricane
lightning monsoon thunder tornado

1. (n) a period of unusually hot weather. 2. (n) a long, usually

hot, dry period when there is little or no rain. 3. (n) a storm with small balls of
ice that fall like rain. 4. (n) a flash of very bright light in the sky caused by
electricity. 5. (n and v) the loud noise that you hear during a storm.
6. (n) a snowstorm with very strong winds. 7. (v and n) when
everything becomes filled and covered with water. 8. (n) a violent storm with
very strong winds especially in the western Atlantic Ocean.9. (n) a violent
storm with very strong winds which move in a circle. 10. (n) the season when
it rains a lot in southern Asia.

Exercise 7. With a partner, think of three things that could go wrong when you a re o n
holiday:
Match t he words to t heir definitions.
1. a monsoon
2. an earthquake
3. a tsunami
4. a cyclone '
5. a blizzard
6. a flood
7. a forest fire
A. a very bad storm with snow and strong winds
B. a very strong wind that moves in a circle
C. a big fire that can destroy many trees and houses
D. a very large wave in the ea
E. when it rains very heavily for three months or more
F .when there is too much water in a river and it comes onto the streets or fields
G .when the ground suddenly shakes very strongly

Exercise 8. Listen to what happened to Mr and Mrs Svanstrom.(T. 7.1) Mark their route
on the map. What natural disaster happened in each place?

197
Exercise 9. Listen again and answer the questions.

1. How long did they have to wait at Munich airport?

2. What weather were they expecting in Bali?
3. Where were the streets full of smoke?
4 .Where did they sleep in Cairns?
5. Why did they fly to Auckland and not to Christchurch in New Zealand?
6. What were they doing when the Japanese earthquake struck?
7 .Where did they go for the last part of their holiday?
8. Did anything happen to them there?
9. Do you think they were lucky or unlucky? Why?

Exercise 10.Listen to a radio programme about natural disasters ( T. 7.2.). How many tips
does the expert give?

1 Can you avoid natural disasters?

2 At what time o f year should you not go to the Caribbean?
3 What will travel insurance probably pay for?
4 Why is it important not to panic?
5 Who should you contact as soon as possible?
6 What should you ask your airline when you book

198
Unit VIII
Lesson 1.

Grammar: Verb Patterns II

Uses of the infinitive with to

1. I need to buy some new clothes.

Try not to talk about politics.
2. It’ll be nice to meet your parents.
It's important not to be late.
3. I don’t know where to go or what to do.
4. A. Why did you go to the party?
B. To meet new people.
I went to the party to meet new people

• The infinitive is the base form of the verb. It is often used with to. It can be positive (e.g. to be)
or negative (e.g. not to be).
• Use the infinitive with to:

1. after some verbs, e.g. want, need, would like, etc. See Verb forms below.
Common verbs which take the infinitive include: (can't) afford, agree, decide, expect, forget,
help, hope, learn, need, offer, plan, pretend, promise, refuse, ren1ember, seem, try, want, would
like.
Complete the to+ verb column with to+ a verb from the list.
Be bring buy catch drive find get married go (x2) help pay rain see turn off
1. I decide We've decided to France for our holiday.
2. forget Don't forget all the lights.
3. hope We hope you again soon.
4. learn I'm learning . My test's next month.
5. need I need to the supermarket. We don't have any milk.
6. offer He offered me with my CV.
7. plan They're planning soon.
8. pretend He pretended ill, but he wasn't really.
9. promise He's promised me back when he gets a job
10. remember Remember your dictionaries to class tomorrow.
11. start It was very cloudy and it started .
12. try I'm trying a job, but it's very hard.
13. want I want - the six o'clock train
14. would like I'd like a new car next month.

2. after adjectives.

3. after question words, e.g. what, where, when, etc.

4. to say why you do something.

1 came to this school to learn English. NOT for learn English.
Infinitive without to
Remember that we use the infinitive without to after auxiliary verbs (do/ does I didn't) and after
most modal verbs (can, could, will, would, etc.), e.g. Do you live near here? Can you help me? I
won't forget. What would you do?
199
 Uses of the gerund (verb + -ing)

1. Eating outside in the summer makes me feel good.

My idea of happiness is getting up late and
2. I love reading in bed.
I hate not getting to the airport early.
3. I'm thinking of buying a new car
He left without saying goodbye.
• The gerund is the base form of the verb+ ing. It can be positive (e.g. going) or negative (e.g.
not going)
• Use the gerund:
l. as the subject or object of a sentence. not going to work.

2. after some verbs, e.g. like, love, hate, enjoy, etc. See Verb forms below
Complete the gerund column with a verb from the list in the gerund:
be cook do have make rain read talk tidy wake up work
1. enjoy I enjoy in bed.
2. finish Have you finished your room?
3. go on (= continue) I want to go on until I'm 60.
4. hate I hate late when I'm meeting someone.
5 like I like breakfast in a cafe.
6 love I love on a sunny morning.
7. (don't) mind I don't mind the ironing. It's quite relaxing.
8. spend (time) She spends hours on the phone.
9. start* It starred at 5.30 in the morning.
10. stop Please stop such a noise. I can't think.
11. feel like I don't feel like today. Let's go out for lunch.
• start can be used with a gerund or infinitive, e.g. It started raining. It started to rain.

3. after prepositions.
• Remember the spelling rules for the -ing form.

Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Complete the sentences with the infinitive ( with to) of a verb from the list:
not do find not finish rent see not tell wash up

1. John's very polite. He offered after the meal.

2. Thanks for coming. We hope you again soon.
3. She wasn't enjoying the lasagne, so she decided it .
4. My boyfriend is unemployed. He needs a job.
5. I'll tell you what she said, but please promise anybody.
6. I'm sorry I shouted at you. I'll try it again.
7. They want to live together. They're planning a flat.

Exercise 2. Write sentences using the adjective and the correct form of the verb:

1. nice / meet
Hello! How you.
2. difficult / talk
Do you find it to my mum?
200
3. easy / buy
It's presents for my girlfriend
4. important / not say
It's the wrong thing.
5. great / hear
Thanks for calling. It was from you.
6. fun / be
It's with your family.
7. kind / invite
Her parents were very him.

Exercise 3. Complete the sentences with to and a verb.

1. He gave them some chocolates thank you

2. They're going to evening classes Chinese
3. We called the restaurant a table
4. He told us a joke us laugh.
5. I went to a cash machine some money.
6. Do you use your phone photos?

Exercise 4. Complete the sentences with a question word from the list, and to + the verb in
brackets:

How how many how much what when where

1. She gave me her address, but I don't know there. (get)
2. My brother is always busy so I don't know him. (call)
3. My mum asked me to get some eggs, but she didn't say . (buy)
4. We'd like to travel around the world, but we don't know first. (go)
5. She wants to go to university, but she doesn't know . (study)
6. Who's going to be here for lunch? I have pasta, but I need to know . (make)

Exercise 5. Complete the text with a verb from the list in the past tense:

Forget try not want promise pretend learn offer plan start need not remember

Charlie wasn't happy at his work so he1. to apply for a new job. Soon, one
company called him and2. to give him in an interview. Charlie3. to tell
his boss, so he 4. to be ill. He told his boss that he had a stomach ache, and he
5. to go to the doctor's. His boss 6. to call him later to ask him
how he was. Charlie was really hoping to get the job, so he was a bit nervous.
He7. to drive to the interview, but there was a lot of traffic. In the end, he took
the underground and was very late, and he 8. to turn his mobile phone off.
Unfortunately, it rang while he was in the interview, but Charlie didn't answer it. However, when
his boss called later he9. to act ill. The next morning, his boss said, 'I'd like
to see you in my office'. Charlie10. to apologize, but his boss was very
angry and Charlie nearly lost his job. But he11._ an important lesson: not
to lie to his boss again.

Exercise 6. Read the article and complete the gap with t he verb in the list:

to answer not to be to do (x2) to have to know to make to say to show not to talk

201
How to ... Survive Meeting Your Girlfriend's Parents for the First Time
It's stressful, but these top tips can help you to get it right ...

Tips
1. You need some ' homework' before you go. Ask your girlfriend about her parents.
Where does her mother work? Does her father like football? Do you have any common interests?
Lf you do this, it will be easy a conversation with them.
2. Make sure you dress the right impression. Don't wear a suit, but don't just
wear your old jeans and the Che Guevara T -shirt you bought in the market.
3. Be punctual. It's very important late at a first meeting.
4. When they greet you at the door shake the father's hand firmly (no father likes a weak
handshake!). Ask your girlfriend what kind of greeting her mum will prefer.
5. Call her parents Mr and Mrs (Smith) until they ask you to call them 'Dave' and 'Sharon'.
6. Be ready questions about yourself! Her parents will want
everything about you and your ambitions. Make a good impression!
7. If you are invited for a meal, eat everything they give you and say something positive about
the meal, like 'This is absolutely delicious!' Offer the washing-up after the meal
( them that you are a 'new man').
8. Be yourself, and don't be a 'yes' man. If they ask you for your opinion, be honest. However,
try about controversial subjects – this isn't the moment to give your views on
religion and politics!
9. If the conversation is dying and you can't think what , ask them what your
partner was like as a child. This is a brilliant tactic! All parents love talking about their children
and it shows you have a deep interest in their daughter.
Adapted from wikiHow

Exercise 7. Complete the sentences with a verb in the list in the -ing form:

Be do practise remember study swim teach text travel

1. One thing that always makes me happy is in the sea.

2. You can't learn to play a musical instrument well without regularly.
3. My mother's very bad at names.
4. teenagers is very hard work.
5. My sister spends hours on the phone her friends.
6. I hate the first to arrive at parties.
7. by train is usually cheaper than by plane.
8. I’ll go on for as long as I can - I love being a student!
9. I really enjoy exercise. It makes me feel great!

Exercise 8. Put the verbs in the -ing form or infinitive:

1. Pilates is good for your health. (do)

2. We've decided a holiday this year. (not have)
3. We won't take the car. It's impossible . (park)
4. I'm not very good at map . (read)
5. You can borrow the car if you promise slowly. (drive)
6. Has it stopped ? (rain)
7. I don't mind , but I don't like the washing-up. (cook, do)
8. I hate early in the morning. (get up)
9. I like to the radio in the mornings. (listen)

202
Exercise 9. Complete the sentences with the -ing form of the verbs in brackets:

1. I hate - (be) cold. I find it really depressing.

2. You spend too long (play)video games.
3. We stopped (study) French because we didn't like the classes.
4. He's celebrating because he's finished (write) his book.
5. It started (snow) during the night while we were asleep.
6. I'm bored. I feel like (go) for a walk.
7. My parents have bought a house by a beach, because they love (swim).
8. I don't mind (get) up early in the morning.
9. Kathy really enjoys (listen)to her iPod.
10. The best thing about (use)the bus is (not drive) in busy traffic.

Exercise 10. Match the sentence beginnings and endings:

1. Do you ever dream of

2. Are you interested in
3. Please don't leave without
4. She isn't very good at
5. We ended the evening by
6. I'm really looking forward to
a. doing some part-time work?
b. seeing you tonight.
c. stopping work and retiring?
d. thanking everybody for coming.
e. saying goodbye to me.
f. parking her boyfriend's car.

Exercise 11. Complete the text with the -ing form o f these verbs:
Drive exercise get up go have imagine leave listen read send stay take turn write

What makes you feel good?

1. 1 and then 2 a funny email or text message to my friends.
And of course,3 their faces when they read it.
2. I really like4 at night when there's no traffic,5 to my
favourite music. I feel completely free.
3. 6 in bed on Sunday morning and7_ the
newspaper. Then very late and 9 my dog for a long walk.
4. I enjoy10 to the gym and really11 hard,
then 12 a long hot shower followed by a nice cold drink. There's
nothing better.
5. 13 off my computer at the end of the day and 14
work! It's the best moment of the day. I love it!

Exercise 12. Complete the text with the correct form of the verbs in brackets (-ing form or
infinitive):

Reading the digital way

Many of us who love 1. (read) are changing our habits. Today, a lot of us have
decided 2. (use) e-readers, and so we've stopped 3. (buy) traditional books.

203
E-readers have a number of advantages. They are very easy4. (carry), so they are
ideal for people who like 5. (travel). I f you're abroad, and you don't have anything 6.
(read), you don't need 7. (look for) a bookshop
that has books in your language - you can download it as a digital book.
In addition to this, e-readers are very private, so you don't need8. (show) people what
you are reading. Finally, when you finish 9. (read) a book, you no longer have to
find room for it on a bookshelf.
However, there are some disadvantages. Some people say their eyes hurt if they spend a long
time 10. (look) at the screen. Also, you have to be careful 11. (not
lose) your e-reader or you'll lose all your books. As well as this, if a friend would like
12. (borrow) a book you've read, you can't offer 13. (lend) it to them.
With an e-reader, you can only go on 14. (read) as long as the battery lasts, so you
have to remember 15. (take) your charger with you and you mustn't forget 16.
(charge) the battery.

Exercise 13. Choose five things to talk about from the list below:

Something ...
• you don't mind doing in the house
• you like doing with your family
• you love doing in the summer
• you don't feel like doing at weekends
• you spend too much time doing
• you dream of doing
• you hate doing at work I school
• you don't like doing alone
• you are thinking of doing this weekend
• you think you are very good (or very bad) at doing

SHOPPING I
Vocabulary
department store n ready-made clothes/clothes department ; footwear, millinery, knitted
goods, leather goods, textiles hosiery, haberdashery, cosmetics (departments)
pretty adj Syn. good-looking, beautiful; handsome (usually about men]
cut n. e. g. The saleswoman assured Eliza that the cut of the coat was fashionable, cut (cut, cut)
vt; proverb: Cut your coat according to your cloth.
fashion n ; Syn. style, e. g. Take this coat. It's the latest fashion (style). in fashion e. g. Such
shoes are in fashion now. out of fashion e. g. This cut is out of fashion now, fashionable adj
e. g.Alice has gone shopping and is sure to buy a fashionable hat. old-fashioned adj, e. g. I don't
like old-fashioned furniture.
to help smb. on with smth..; to help smb. off with smth.
become (became, become) vt/i,e. g. I don't think it's very becoming. Compare the use of
the verbs to become, to fit, to match, to go with, to suit.
fit vt, e. g. The dress fits her like a glove. match vt , e. g. She is going to buy a hat to match her
new coat, go with vi, e. g. That cardigan does not go with a silk skirt, suit vt (is the most general
term), e. g. The costume suits her. She looks smart in it.
size.e. g. What size shoe(s) do you wear? What size glove(s) do you wear? What size clothes do
you wear?
loose; to be loose on smb., e. g. The frock's a bit loose on me. Ant. tight: to be tight on smb.,
e. g. The coat is tight on him. The shoes are tight on me.
204
How much is it? What is the price of...? What does it cost? The expressions are used
only in the process of shopping. Compare the use of tenses in the following situation: "I bought a
new hat yesterday." "Really? How much was it?" ("What was the price?")
cashier n cash-desk n. box-office at the theatre; booking-office at a railway station
to try on smth.
wear (wore, worn) vt 1.Sue always wears a grey hat. Kitty was wearing, a lovely pink dress that
night. Syn. to be dressed in smth.; to have smth. on, e. g. She was dressed in a light summer
frock. She had a light summer frock on. 2. vi.e. g. Does that material wear well?
advise vt, e. g. The teacher strongly advised him to work more at the language laboratory,
advice n; Pay attention to the use of the noun advice which is uncountable, e. g. We got so much
good advice from him.
knowledge, money, weather, hair, work, information, news.
made of ... ..., as made of leather, wood, etc.
to run out of smth. e. g. We've run out of sugar..
to have hardly any, e. g. We've hardly any bread in the house..
turn; in turn. g. Speak in turn, please. I can't understand you when you are talking together. « -
to stand in a queue (line) for something.
the greengrocer's,the baker's, e. g. I met her at the baker's yesterday, the grocer's the
butcher's Note also the names of some other shops: provision shop fishmonger's; fruit-shop;
confectionery dairy; supermarket; shopping centre
Oh, bother!!
It was ... who (that), e. g. It was Nelly who did all the shopping.. The word combination it is
(was)... who (that) is used to emphasize the subject.
to do shopping, to go shopping. g. Boys don't like to do shopping. Mary likes to go shopping in
the morning, when there are fewer people.
as well adv; Syn. too, also, e. g. Everybody was eager to go sightseeing. Ann wanted to see the
town as well.
Model e.g. Tom Sawyer hated the model boy because he was so good, model n,e. g. Sentences
must be formed according to this model.
sigh vi; sigh expect vt. g. I expect a letter any day now. Everybody expects
he will come tomorrow, Syn. to wait Whom are you Waiting for? I am waiting for a friend of
mine.
Note that wait refers to physical activities (e. g. to sit and wait) while expect denotes
supposition, looking forward to smth.

Kinds of clothes: coat, shirt, blouse, cardigan, sweater, skirt, suit, trousers, shorts, a pull-over,
dressing gown, jersey, jeans, corduroy trousers (corduroys).
Articles of clothing: socks, stockings, scarf, muffler, kerchief, gloves, mittens, tie, handkerchief,
tights, pajamas, nightgown, underwear (undies).
Parts of clothes: collar, sleeve, belt.
Footwear: slippers, sandals, sport shoes, walking shoes, court shoes, rubber boots, training shoes
(trainers).
Textiles: silk, cotton (print), velvet, woollen cloth.
Jewellery: ring, bracelet, ear-rings, chain, brooch, necklace.
Cereals: buckwheat, rice.
Meat: beef, pork, mutton, chicken, goose, duck, tinned meat.
Fish: herring, sprats, smoked fish, tinned fish.
Dairy products: cream, sour cream, cottage cheese.
Confectionery: biscuits, cakes, chocolate, pastry.
Vegetables: onions, turnips, melon, water-melon, cauliflower, lettuce, radish, parsley, celery.

205
Exercise 1. Read, translate and retell the text:

Carrie goes to a department store.

The extract is taken from "Sister Carrie" by Th. Dreiser, a well-known American writer (1871-
1945). Carrie, a young provincial girl, comes to Chicago and is greatly attracted by the pleasures
the big city offers. Shopping is one of them. Drouet,* her friend, is to meet her at the ready-
made clothes department.
Carrie reached Dearborn Street. Here was the great Fair store with its crowds of shoppers. She
thought she would go in and see. She would look at the jackets.
She paused at each article of clothing. How pretty she would look in this, how charming that
would make her! Carrie stopped at the jewellery department. She saw the ear-rings, the bracelets,
the pins, the chains. But the jackets were the greatest attraction. When she entered the store, she
already had her heart fixed on a jacket with large mother-of-pearl buttons. The cut was all the
fashion that fall*. She said to herself there was nothing she would like better.
Here she saw Drouet who was coming up to her smiling.
"Let's go and look at the jackets," he said as if he had read her thoughts.
When Carrie got the jacket in her hand, it seemed so much nicer. The saleswoman helped her on
with it. It fitted perfectly. It was just her size, not a bit loose. She looked guite smart.
Carrie turned before the glass. She could not help feeling pleased as she looked at herself. It was
so becoming.
"That's the thing," said Drouet. "Now pay for it."
"It's nine dollars," said Carrie, after she had asked the saleswoman how much it was. She took
out one of the bills and gave it to the cashier.
From there they went to a shoe department where Carrie tried on some shoes. Drouet stood by
and when he saw how nice they looked, said: "Wear them."
Then Drouet advised her to buy a purse made of leather, a pair of gloves and Stockings.
Carrie thought that she would come the next day and buy herself a skirt to match the new jacket.

* fall: autumn in the American Variant of English.

* Drouet [dru:'ei].
(After "Sister Carrie" by Th. Dreiser)
Exercise 2. Read, translate, role-play:
Shopping

M o t h e r: Pete, we've run out of vegetables and we've hardly any bread in the house. You
know, now it's your turn to go to the greengrocer's and to the baker's.
P e t e: Oh, bother? Why do we have to go shopping so often?
M o t h e r: The day before yesterday it was Nelly who did all the shopping. She went to the
grocer's and to the butcher's.
P e t e: Did she? But, Mother, girls are so fond of shopping. Let Nelly do it today as well.
M o t h e r: Oh, you've been a lazy-bones ever since you were born! It's so difficult to make you
go anywhere.
P e t e: Do you want to make me a model boy, Mum?
M o t h e r: I'd like to. Take that bag and don't grumble. Buy a cabbage, a pound of onions, half a
pound of carrots and a loaf of bread. Here is the money and don't forget the change.
P e t e: Did I ever forget it?
M o t h e r: I don't say you did. But you are so absent-minded.
P e t e: (sighing): My teacher says the same.
M o t h e r : I expect you to be back in half an hour.
P e t e: All right. I'll do my best.

206
Exercise 3. Each sentence describes a certain situation in a concise way. Some points of the
situation are already known to you. Find out some more details about the situation by
asking questions. Work in pairs:
1. My wife has spent a lot of money on fashionable furniture. 2. Ann wore a black velvet dress
that night. 3. Jack wants Pete to give him a piece of good advice. 4. Alice's bag is made of silk. 5.
Mrs. Brown will go shopping in the morning.

Exercise 4. Fill in prepositions or adverbs wherever necessary:

A. 1. What size of ... gloves does your daughter wear? 2. Is your blouse made of ... silk or ... nylon? 3.
into
This frock suits ... her and she looks so well today. 4. Go ... the fitting-room and try ... on the green
to
frock. 5. Go ... the mirror and have a look ... yourself. 6. I'm afraid the shirt is a bit loose on
at ... you.
with
7. You must choose another belt. This one does not go ... your light dress. 8. I'm sure they will
in
soon make ... their quarrel. 9. The woman was made to believe that such shoes were not ...
fashion ... that time.
B. 1. We've run out......ofmeat. Let's go and buy somefrom ... the butcher's. 2. Please weigh half ... a pound
of sweets. 3. Will you give me a quarter ... a pound of
... ... sausage? 4. Whom are you waiting for ...? --
from in for
I'm waiting ... my friends. They are ... the greengrocer's. 5. She paid ... a cabbage and went 6.
The salesmen will finish their work in... half ... an hour. 7. There is no cottage cheese in... the dairy
in
today. 8. I'm not going to stand ... a queue for of
... a tin ... sprats.

Exercise 5. Change the following direct questions into indirect and answer them. Begin the
sentences with the words I wonder ... or Tell me ... or I'd like to know:

1. At what shop did you buy this hat? 2. What colour scarf would you like to buy to match your
new coat? 3. Are those gloves old or new? 4. How old is your father? 5. Does Ann do shopping
every day? 6. When will you go to the State Department Store? 7. Were any new films on last
week? 8. How much is this material? 9. Has anything gone wrong with the iron? 10. Why didn't
you come to the dining-hall yesterday? 11. Is it snowing hard? 12. Has John given you good
advice? 13. Why is it so stuffy in the room? 14. When did they get everything arranged? 15.
Have you managed to knit a pull-over for your father? 16. When are you going to the dairy? 17.
When was he made to write that letter?

Exercise 6. Choose the right verb:

(to expect - to wait)

1. Don't ... for him. He is going to return very late. 2. Nobody ... such an answer from him. 3. ... a
minute. Your brother is sure to come soon. 4. Do you ... her to be late? 5. Nobody ... him to
repair that broken radio-set. 6. Let's ... for some other students. They are sure to help us to put the
tape-recorder right. 7. Everybody ... him to hurry out, but he remained proudly in his seat. 8.
Nobody ... the weather to become so nasty. 9. The children ... impatiently for the beginning of
the performance. 10. They ... the river to freeze over in a few days. 11. We... the box-office to be
opened on Sunday.

Exercise 7. Make up your own sentences with the phrases: How much is it? What is the
price? What does it cost? And use them in micro-dialogues.

Exercise 8. Translate the following sentences into English:

1. Ce mărime purtaţi la mănuşi (pantofi, palton)? 2.Vă stă bine această rochie. Vă stă bine cu
această pălărie. Nu probaţi această rochie. Nu vi se potriveşte culoarea. Îmi stă bine cu această

207
bluză? 3. Aş vrea să-mi cumpăr pantofi în ton cu noul meu costum. 4. Acest costum nu mi se
potriveşte. Această rochie vi se potriveşte de minune. Irinei îi stă foarte bine în această rochie. 5.
Aceste mănuşi nu se combină cu costumul tău. Pantofi acesta nu se potrivesc cu rochia ta
elegantă. Această fundă nu se potriveşte cu bluza ta lila. 6. Această bluză îţi este largă. Este larg
acest costum pentru dumneavoastră? Această rochie mi-i strâmtă. Aceşti pantofi îmi sunt mici.
Această jachetă vi-i strâmtă. 7.Aceşti pantofi sunt foarte frumoşi. Încercaţi-i. Acest palton este
foarte elegant. Încercaţi-l. 8. Acest palton este prea scump pentru mine. Această umbrelă nu este
atât de scumpă. 9. Am nevoie de pantofi mai ieftini pentru plimbări. Eu prefer să port
lucruri ieftine. 10. După părerea mea, el e deştept. După părerea mea, aceasta este
interesantă. După părerea mea, trebuie să-l aşteptăm.
We've run out of meet. We've run out of onion We've run out of potato
B. 1. Nu mai avem carne. Nu mai avem ceapă. Nu mai avem cartofi. 2. Trebuie să merg la
I have to go to grocery store (at the bakery, at the fruit and vegetable shop, at the fish shop, at the confectionery, at the dairy)
băcănie (la brutărie, la magazinulItde fructe şi legume, la pescărie, la cofetărie, la lăptărie). 3.
was mother who washed the dishes
It was Nelly who helped us. It was Nicolae who was uor guide
Nina a fost cea care ne-a ajutat. Mama a fost cea care a spălat toată vesela. Anume Nicolae a fost
It is my turn to read
ghidul nostru. 4. E rândul meu să citesc. Este rândul tău să mergi la cumpărături. E rândul ei să
It is your turn to go for shopping. It's her turn to wash the dishes
.Let Peter procure onions. Let Ann by the cabbage Let Nicolae buy cucumbers
spele vesela. 5. Lasă Petru să procure ceapă. Lasă Ana să cumpere o varză. Lasă Nicolaie să
Don't wait for him, he won't come Who is waiting for me? -It is Roger Wait us on station near the house
cumpere castraveţi. 6. Nu-l aşteptaţi, el n-o să vină. Cine mă aşteaptă? - Roger. Te rog, aşteaptă-
ne la staţie lângă casă.

Exercise 9. Fill in articles wherever necessary. Retell the text:

... train stopped at ... small station. ... passenger looked out of ... window and saw ... woman
who was selling ... cakes. ... man wanted to buy ... cake. ... woman was standing rather far from ...
carriage. ... man called ... boy, who was walking on ... platform near ... carriage and asked him:
"How much does ... cake cost?"
"Three pence, sir," answered ... boy. ... man gave him ... sixpence and said to him: "Bring me
... cake, and with ... other three pence buy one for yourself."
Some minutes later ... boy returned. He was eating ... cake. He gave ... man threepence
change and said: "There was only one cake, sir."

Exercise 10. Translate the following sentences into English:

A. 1.Când Nina s-a apropiat de camera de probă, ea a văzut-o pe prietena ei probând o rochie
elegantă. 2. Ai auzit cum Oleg a citit textul? L-a citit foarte bine. Acum e rândul tău să citești.
3. N-o sfătui să cumpere această bluză. Nu i se potriveşte. 4. Lasă Elena să cumpere cartofi,
ceapă şi roşii. 5. Doriţi ca ea să cumpere aceşti pantofi scumpi? – Da, păi ei sunt atât de frumoşi.
6. Mama vrea ca Nina să meargă la brutărie. 7. Zilele trecute m-am întâlnit cu prietena mea. Ea
ieşea din magazinul central din Moscova. 8. Nina nu dormea şi a auzit cum sora ei a intrat în
cameră. Ea a simţit că Ana i-a atins mâna ei. 9. Obligă-l pe copil să-şi strângă lucrurile. 10.
Nimeni nu-l poate obliga să vă urmeze sfaturile.
B. 1. Ieri am cumpărat de la magazinul universal o pereche de mănuşi de catifea. Îmi sunt mici.
Dacă vreţi, pot să vi le dau dumneavoastră. – Mulţumesc. Le voi lua cu plăcere, dacă vor fi
mărimea mea. – Mărimea e 6 jumate. – Ce bine! Este tocmai mărimea mea. – Cât costă
mănuşile? – €80. – Poftim, banii dumneavoastră. 2. Am primit bursa şi va trebui să fac unele
cumpărături. Trebuie să cumpăr ştrampi, ciorapi şi o curea roşie din piele pentru rochia mea
nouă. 3. Vara eu prefer să port rochii din pânză albă. Aceste rochii nu sunt atât de călduroase ca
cele de mătase. 4. Vi se potriveşte foarte bine acest costum, dar jacheta, după părerea mea, este
prea lungă. 5. În acest magazin nu se vând rochii. Aici se vând doar costume pentru bărbaţi,
pantaloni, jachete şi cămăşi pentru bărbaţi. 6. Ajută- mă să-mi aleg pantofi. – Încearcă-i pe cei
cafenii. Mi se pare, că ei se potrivesc cu costumul tău verde. 7. Ascultă-mă sfatul, nu cumpăra
acest palton. El nu mai este la modă. Acel gri, este mult

208
mai bine. Sunt sigură, că vi se va potrivi mult mai bine. Treceţi în camera de probă. Pe aici, vă
rog. – Vai, paltonul este într-adevăr minunat! Cât costă? – € 820. Să vă eliberez un cec? Da, vă
rog, vă sunt foarte recunoscătoare. 8. Nu mai avem zahăr şi ulei. În drum de la serviciu nu uita să
intri în băcănie şi să cumperi toate cele necesare. 9. Nu ne-a rămas pâine. Intră în brutărie şi
cumpără o franzelă şi două brioşe 10. Noi trebuie să procurăm salam, caşcaval, o cutie de
şprote, legume pentru salată, bomboane şi prăjituri. 11. Nina va trebui să meargă la
magazinul de legume şi să cumpere varză şi morcovi. 12.Robert a fost silit să meargă la
magazinul alimentar.

Exercise 11. Use the following story as material for rapid reading. Retell it and give a title
to it:

The other day my friend George came to see me and brought a small book with him. It was a
guide to English conversation for the use of foreign travellers. George said: "My idea is to go to
London early on Wednesday morning and spend an hour or two going about and shopping with
the help of this book. I want one or two little things - a hat and a pair of bedroom slippers."
On Wednesday we arrived at Waterloo station and went to a small boot shop. Boxes of boots
filled the shelves. Black and brown boots hung about its doors and windows. The man, when we
entered, was opening with a hammer a new case full of boots.
George raised his hat, and said "Good morning."
The man did not even turn round. He said something which was perhaps "Good morning" and
went on with his work.
George said: "I have been recommended to your shop by my friend, Mr. X."
The answer to this in the book was "Mr. X. is a worthy gentleman; it will give me the greatest
pleasure to serve a friend of his."
What the man said was: "Don't know him; never heard of him."
This was not the answer we expected. The book gave three or four methods of buying boots;
George had selected the most polite of them centred round "Mr. X." You talked with the
shopkeeper about this "Mr. X." and then you began to speak about your desire to buy boots,
"cheap and good." But it was necessary to come to business with brutal directness. George left
"Mr. X," and turning back to a previous page, took another sentence. It was not a good selection;
it was useless to make such a speech to any bootmaker, and especially in a boot-shop full of
boots.
George said: "One has told me that you have here boots for sale."
For the first time the man put down his hammer, and looked at us. He spoke slowly. He said:
"What do you think I keep boots for - to smell them?"
He was one of those men that begin quietly and get more angry as they go on.
"What do you think I am," he continued, "a boot collector? What do you think I'm keeping this
shop for – my health? Do you think I love the boots, and can't part with a pair? Do you think I
hang them about here to look at them? Where do you think you are - in an international
exhibition of boots? What do you think these boots are - a historical collection? Did you ever
hear of a man keeping a boot shop and not selling boots? Do you think I decorate the shop with
them? What do you think I am - a prize idiot?"
I have always said that these conversation books are practically useless. We could not find the
right answer in the book from beginning to end. I must say that George chose the best sentence
that was there and used it. He said: "I shall come again, when, perhaps, you have more boots to
show me. Till then, good-bye."
With that we went out. George wanted to stop at another boot shop and try the experiment once
more; he said he really wanted a pair of bedroom slippers. But we advised him to buy them
another time.

Exercise 12. Match a famous shopping street with a town, a store, and a product:
209
 Street Store Town Product

Oxford Street Guerlain Milan underwear and

Champs-Elysees Marks and Spencer New York jumpers
Fifth Avenue Gucci London leather goods
Via Montenapoleone Tiffany's Paris jewellery
perfume

Exercise 13. Read the headline and the introduction of the newspaper article. Does
anything surprise you? What do you want to find out when you read the article? Write
some questions.
The Best Shopping Street in the World.

No it isn’t Oxford Street, the Shamp-Elysees or even Fifth Avenue.A new rent survey has
shown that the most popular shopping street in the world is… Nowy Swiat. Where is it? In
Warsaw, Poland, of course.
A recent survey has shown that the busiest shopping street in the world is not in London, New
York, or Paris, but in Warsaw. It's called Nowy Swiat, which means New World. An incredible
14,000 Poles walk down this main street every hour.
It is a lovely place to shop. The pavements are very wide. There are statues, palaces, attractive
town houses, exclusive cafes, and high class restaurants. The buildings aren't too tall. They look
old, but in fact the whole city was rebuilt after World War II. There aren't any billboards or neon
lights. There isn't any loud music, and there aren't many tourists. People think that Polish shops
have nothing to sell, so nobody comes shopping here. The world doesn't know' about this
paradise for shoppers yet.
It is now possible to buy almost everything in Warsaw. There are a lot of shops from the West,
but the interesting thing is that Polish manufacturers are now producing high quality goods. They
are good because they are not mass produced for world consumption.
Nowy Swiat has a lot of small shops, specialist shops, and chic shops. It hasn't got the huge
department stores that sell the same things everywhere.
If you want an exquisite handmade suit, Nowy Swiat is the place to go. It isn't cheap. You will
pay up to $1,000. For beautiful French baby clothes, go to Petit Bateau. You will pay $50 for a
pair of blue jeans for a baby. A dress for a baby girl is about $90. At Desa, a famous antique
shop, a desk costs $5,000, and a 19th century Russian icon is $200.
Not everything is expensive. At the shop Pantera you can buy leather goods - handbags, purses,
coats, and belts. Cepelia specializes in folk art. There are also book shops and record shops. And
there are a lot of small boutiques that sell men's and women's clothes that aren't too expensive.
If you're tired, stop at Café Blikle. This is a fashionable place to meet. You'll find a lively
atmosphere, and a lot of well-known Poles. The frozen yoghurt and ice-creams are excellent, and
its famous doughnuts are delicious.
It is possible to travel the world and find the same things for sale in every country. But Warsaw
is different because its shops are unique - and they're in Nowy Swiat.

Exercise 14. Read the article quickly and answer the questions you have written:

What is the best summary of the article?

Nowy Swiat is the best shopping street in the world because...
... so many Polish people go walking there.
... it is a pleasant place to shop and the shops are small.
... everything is very expensive and very exclusive.
... the shops sell quality goods that you can't buy anywhere else.
210
Exercise 15. Read the article again and answer the questions:

1. How do we know that Nowy Swiat is the most popular shopping street?
2. Why is it such a nice place to go shopping?
3. What can you see in the photos that are described in the article?
4. Why don't many foreign people go to Nowy Swiat?
5. Why are the things produced by Polish manufacturers so good?
6. What can you buy here? What can't you buy?
7. What is expensive? What isn't expensive?
8. What's good about Cafe Blikle?
9. What is special about the shops in Nowy Swiat?

Exercise16. Language work. Complete the sentences with different ideas from the article:

In Nowy Swiat, there are a lot o f . . . There isn't any ...

There aren't any/many ... There are some ...

Exercise 17. What do you think?

• What are some of the famous brands and products that you can buy in many countries of the
world? Think of clothes, food, cars .... Make a list. Work in groups and choose the most famous
three. Compare your list with the class.
• What is the main shopping street in your town? What can you buy there that's special?
• Do you enjoy shopping? What do you like shopping for? What don't you like shopping for?

Exercise 18. What can you buy or do in these places? Write two things for each place.
Compare your ideas with the class.:

a clothes shop a chemist's a cafe a bank a newsagent's

Exercise 19. Listen to the conversations. Answer the questions (T.8.1):

1. Where are the conversations taking place? Choose from the places in exercise 1.
2. What does the customer want?
3. Can the shop assistant/cashier help?
4. How much docs the customer pay?

Exercise 20. Complete these lines from the conversations. Look at the tape script and check
your answers:

1. A. Hello. Can I help you?

B. I , thanks.
B. I'm looking for a jumper . Have you got ?
A. I'll just have a look. are you?
B. Medium.
A. Here you are.
B. That's great. ?
A. Of course. The changing rooms are over there.
B. I like it.
A. It .
211
B. How much is it?
A. $39.99.
B. OK. I .
A. How would you like to pay?
B. .
2. A. help me? I'm looking for this month's
edition of Vogue. Can you tell me ?
B. Over there. Middle shelf. Next to She.
3. A. Hello. I help me. I've got a bad cold and a sore throat. Can you
?
B. OK. You can take these three times a day.
A. Thank you. some tissues , please?
B. Sure. ?
A No, that's all, thanks.
4. A. Good morning. Can I have a , please?
B. Espresso?
A. Yes, please. Oh, and a doughnut, please.
B. there aren't . We've got some
delicious carrot cake, and chocolate cake.
A. OK. Carrot cake, then.
B. Certainly. Is ?
A Yes, thanks.
B. , please.
A. Thank you.

Lesson 2.

Grammar: Modal verbs

can, could, be able to (ability and possibility)

can/ could
I can speak three languages fluently.
Jenny can't come tonight. She's ill.
My cousin could play the violin when she was three.
They couldn't wait because they were in a hurry.
Could you open the door for me, please?

1. Can is a modal verb. It only has a present form (which can be used with future meaning)
and a past or conditional form (could).
2. For all other tenses and forms, we use be able to+ infinitive.

be able to+ infinitive

1. Luke has been able to swim since he was three.

I 'd like to be able to ski.
I love being able to stay in bed late on Sunday morning.
You'll be able to practise your English in London.
2. Fortunately, I am able to accept your invitation.
My colleagues weren't able to come to yesterday's meeting.
212
Use:
l. We use be able to+ infinitive for ability and possibility, especially where there is no form
of can, e.g. future, present perfect, infinitive and gerund, etc.

2. We sometimes use be able to in the present and past (instead of can / could), usually if we
want to be more formal.

have to, must, should

have to/ must(+ infinitive)

1. You have to wear a seatbelt in a car.

Do you have to work on Saturdays?
I had to wear a uniform at primary school.
I'll have to get up early tomorrow. My interview is at 9.00.
2. You must be on time tomorrow because there's a test.
You must remember to phone Emily - it's her birthday.
3. I love the Louvre! You have to go when you're in Paris.
You must see this film - it's amazing!

• have to and must are normally used to talk about obligation or something that it is necessary to
do.
1. have to is a normal verb and it exists in all tenses and forms, e.g. also as a gerund or infinitive.
2. must is a modal verb. It only exists in the present, but it can be used with a future meaning.
3. You can also use have to or must for strong recommendations.

have to or must?

Have to and must have a very similar meaning, and you can usually use either form.
Have to is more common for general, external obligations, for example rules and laws.
Must is more common for specific (i.e. on one occasion) or personal obligations. Compare:
I have to wear a shirt and tie at work. (= It's the rule in this company.)
I must buy a new shirt - this one is too old now. (= It's my own decision.)

have got to

Have got to is often used instead of have to or must in spoken English, e.g. I've got to go now.
It's very late.

don't have to

You don't have to pay- this museum is free.

You don't have to go to the party if you don't want to.

mustn't

You mustn't park here.

You mustn't eat that cake – it’s for the party.

• We use don't have to when there is no obligation to do something, and mustn’t when something
is prohibited.
• don't have to and mustn't are completely different. Compare:
213
You don't have to drive - we can get a train. (=You can drive if you want to, but it's not
necessary/ obligatory.)
You mustn't drive along this street.(= It's prohibited, against the law, NOT You don't have to
drive along-this street.)
• You can often use can't or not allowed to instead of mustn't.
You mustn't / can't/ are not allowed to park here.

should I shouldn't(+ infinitive)

You should take warm clothes with you to Dublin. It might be cold at night.
You shouldn't drink so much coffee. It isn't good for you.
I think the government should do something about unemployment.

• should is not as strong as must / have to. We use it to give advice or an opinion - to say if we
think something is the right or wrong thing to do.
• should is a modal verb. The only forms are should/ shouldn't.
• You can use ought to/ought not to instead of should/ shouldn't.
You ought to take warm clothes with you to Dublin. You ought not to drink so much coffee.

Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Complete with the correct form of have to:

1. Passengers switch off their laptops during take-off. (+)

2. you do a lot of homework when you were at school? (?)
3. My sister is a nurse so some weeks she work nights. (+)
4. you ever have an operation? (?)
5. Saturdays are the best day of the week. I love get up early. (-)
6. I a message because she wasn’t in. (+)
7. In the future, people go to school; they'll all study at home. (-)
8. With old mobile phones, you used to charge the battery more often. (+)
9. your boyfriend answer his work emails at weekends? (?)
10. The exhibition was free , so I pay. (-)

Exercise 2. Circle the correct form. Tick if both are possible:

1. Do you think we should/ought to text dad to tell him we’ll be late?

2. You don’t have to/mustn’t send text messages when you are driving.
3. A pilot has to/ must wear a uniform when he is at work.
4. You shouldn’t/ mustn’t talk on your mobile when you are filling up with petrol.
5. I have to/ must speak to phone company. My last bill was wrong.
6. We don’t have to/ mustn’t hurry. We have plenty of time.

Exercise 3. Complete with the correct form of be able to:

1. Her mobile has been switched off all morning, so I _ talk to her yet.
2. I don't like noisy bars. I like have a conversation without shouting.
3. I leave home when I get a job.
4. We're having a parry next Saturday. you come?
5. You need swim before you can go in a canoe.

214
6. I'm going to France next week. but I don't speak French. I hate communicate
with people.
7. Fortunately, firefighters rescue all of the people trapped inside the burning
house.
8. I’m very sorry, but we go to your wedding next month. We'll be on holiday.
9. I’m feeling a bit worse. you contact the doctor yet?
10. The manager _ see you right now because he's in a meeting.

Exercise 4. Write what Ann “has to do” or “doesn t have todo”in the office. Then write
about yourself:

Exercise 5. Tick the correct form. Tick if both are correct:

1. She can / is able to swim really well because she used to live by the sea.
2. You need to can/ be able to drive to live in the country.
3. Luke could / was able to read when he was only three years old.
4. If it doesn't rain tomorrow, we can /we'll be able to go for a long walk.
5. Sorry, I've been so busy that I haven't could / haven't been able to call until now.
6. If Millie had a less demanding job, she could/ would be able to enjoy life more.
7. I've never could/ been able to dance well, but I'd love to learn.
8. We're really sorry we couldn't / weren't able to come to your wedding.
9. I used to can / used to be able to speak a bit of Polish, but I've forgotten most of it now.
10. Can you / Will you be able to make the dinner tonight?
11. To work for this company, you must can /must be able to speak at least three languages.
12. I hate not can / not being able to communicate with the local people when I'm travelling..

Exercise 6. Choose the correct form. Tick if both are possible:

1. I've always wanted to can /be able to dance salsa.

2. My little boy couldn't /wasn’t able to speak until he was nearly two years old.
3. She's much better after her operation. She'll can / be able to walk again in a few months.
4. He hasn't could / been able to mend my bike yet. I'll do it tomorrow.
5. It's the weekend at last! I love can / being able to go out with my friends.
6. When we lived on the coast, we used co can / be able to go to the beach every day.

215
7. I can't / 'm not able to send any emails at the moment. My con1purer isn't working.
8. I could /was able to read before I started school.
9. We won't ca11/ be able to go on holiday this year because we need to spend a lot of money on
the house.
10. Linda's really pleased because she's finally could / /been able to find a part-tin1c job.
11. Alex can /is able to speak Portuguese fluently after living in Lisbon for ten years.

Exercise 7. Fill with have to, has to, doesn’t/don t have to, didn’t t have to, had to or won t
have to:

Exercise 8. Read Matthew Banks' CV. Then complete the sentences with the correct form
of can, could or be able to:

1. Matthew sail.
2. He speak a little Chinese when he started working in Hong Kong.
3. He speak German.
4. He design websites since 1999 .
5. He'd like speak Russian.
6. He finish his PhD before he left the USA.
7. He speak a little Russian soon.
Name: Matthew Banks
Date of Birth: 22/09/1980
Qualifications
Degree in French with Marketing (2003)
Master's in Business Administration (2006)
Started PhD in Business (2009)- incomplete
Work Experience
1998-2000: Trainer and Operator with Texas Instruments, London
2003-2009: Assistant then Marketing Manager, Texas Instruments,
Dallas, USA
216
2009-present: Managing Director, AHH Marketing Services Ltd, Hong Kong
Other Skills
IT skills - advanced. Course in web design 1999.
Full driving license.
Languages
French (fluent) Chinese (basic) certificate 2008
I hope to start Russian classes next January.
Hobbies and Interests
Watersports, especially sailing and windsurfing.

Exercise 9. Correct any mistakes in use or form in the highlighted phrases. Tick the correct
sentences:

1. People mustn't use their mobile phones when they're talking to you.
2. I must go to work by bus yesterday. My car was being repaired.
3. Do you have to wear a suit and tie at work?
4. You don't have to play football here. It says 'no ball gan1es'.
5. My father is a taxi driver and he should work nights.
6. I didn't have to cook last night because we went out for dinner.
7. In the future, perhaps everyone must speak English and Chinese.
8. You don't look well. You should to go home.

Exercise 10. Circle the correct form. Tick if both are possible:

What you need to know before you visit the USA

1. You have to / must have a visa to enter the country.
2. You mustn't/don't have to drive on the left! Here we drive on the right!
3. You mustn't/ don't have to pay to visit most museums and art galleries. Entrance is usually
free.
4. You have to / should go on a ferry to visit the Statue of Liberty. You can't go by bus.
5. You have to/ must wear a seat belt at all times in a car.
6. You must/ should always try to arrive on time for an appointment or meeting. Americans are
very punctual!
7. If you are sightseeing in New York, you must I should buy a MetroCard which gives you
cheaper travel on the subway and buses.
8. You mustn't/ don't have to smoke in any public building. It is prohibited by law.
9. When talking to American people, you shouldn't I don't have to ask them about their salary.
Some people might think this is rude.
10. You must/ have to answer some questions when you go through immigration.

SHOPPING II

Verbs and phrases

Match the sentences:
1.I often buy books online.
2.This shop sells books.
3. We are going to buy the dishwasher on credit.
4.I went back to the shop to complain.
5.I had to queue /kju:/ for ages in the bank.
6.I want to try on this dress.
7.I’m just looking.
217
8. I had to pay 16% VAT

a. I had to wait behind lots of other people,

b. I don’t need any help at the moment,
c. I buy books on the Internet.
d. I’m going to pay for it over 12 months.
e. I want to see what I look like in it.
f. I had to pay tax on it.
g. You can buy books in this shop,
h. I went there to tell them I wasn’t happy

In a shop or store.
a. Write the transcription and the translation of the words:
changing rooms
checkout
customer
receipt
shop assistant
I take sth back
trolley / basket
try sth on

fit or suit?
If clothes don't fit you, it means they are the wrong size (e.g. too big, too small, too tight, too
loose). If clothes don't suit you, it means they don't look good on you.
Online
b. Read the text about shopping online. Then complete it with words from the list.
Account, auction, basket, checkout, delivery, item, payment, size, webs.
Shopping online
When you are shopping online, first you go to the1. . The first time you use a site you
usually have to create an2. , where you give your personal details. You then choose
what you want to buy, and click on each 3. . If you are buying clothes, make sure
you get the right 4. ! Everything you buy goes into your
shopping bag or 5. , usually at the top right of the page. When you are ready to
pay you click on 'proceed to 6. '.You then have to give your
7. address where you want them to send your things, and give your 8.
details, for example your credit card number and expiry date. Many people
today also buy and sell things online at 9. sites like eBay.

Exercise 1. Complete the text:

SHOPPING IN A SHOP OR STORE

I usually go shopping in my lunch break, so I don't have time to 1. t on clothes. There's
always a long queue for the 2 ch r , so I just take them straight to
the 3. ch to pay. I keep the 4. r them if they don't 5.
s so I can change me. Sometimes I get the wrong 6. s and the
clothes don't 7. f .I often 8. t things b to shops, but
the 9 sh a don't seem to mind at all.

Exercise 2. Complete the sentences using “shopping online” vocabulary:

218
1. When you shop online, you normally have to create an which has your personal
details.
2. Something you want to buy is called an it .
3. eBay is an online au site, which sells things to the person who offers the
most money.
4. Amazon is a popular w where you can buy things such as books, computers, and
clothes.
5. When you find something you want to buy on a website, you put it in your shopping
b .
6. You can make a p in different ways, e.g. using your credit card or Paypal.
7. When you are ready to buy something, you go to the ch .
8. You have to enter your d address so they can send your things to the
correct place.

Exercise 3. In pairs, say if you think these are the same or different. Then check with your
teacher:

l. buy something on line and buy something on the internet

2. a chemist's and a pharmacy
3. an outlet store and a department store
4. a shopping centre and a shopping mall
5. a library and a bookshop
6. put on a shirt and try on a shirt
7. It fits you and it suits you
8. a sale and the sales

Exercise 4. With your partner, explain the meaning of the words in the list:
a bargain a discount a price tag a receipt a refund take sth back

Exercise 5. Work with a different partner. Interview him / her with the questionnaire
below. Ask for and give as many details as you can:

Shopping - in town or online?

1. What's your favourite shop or website to buy ... ?
a. clothes
b. shoes
c. books and music
d. presents
e. food
2. Do you ever shop ... ? What do you buy?
a. in street markets
b. in supermarkets
c. in shopping centres or malls
d. on line
3. What do you ... ?
a. enjoy buying
b. hate buying
4. Do you prefer shopping for clothes ... ?
a. by yourself or with somebody
b. at the beginning of the season or in the sales
5. What do you think are the advantages and disadvantages of buying clothes on line?

219
Exercise 6. In your country, if people have a problem with something they've bought, or
with the service in a shop or restaurant, do they usually complain? If not, why not?

Exercise 7. a. Read the article The King of Complainers. Which of these adjectives (or any
others) would you use to describe Clive? Why?
Admirable clever crazy eccentric mean obsessive
b. What does Clive think is the best way to complain? What did he get as a result of
complaining about . . . ?
1. the smell of biscuits
2. a friend's faulty car
3. his wife's fall during a holiday
4. some old strawberries

The King of Complainers

Clive Zietman loves complaining - but not shouting in hotel lobbies, or angrily telling a shop
assistant to call the manager, or making a waitress cry. He loves complaining properly and in
writing. Over the Last twenty years he has written over 5,000 letters of complaint. His successes
include refunded holidays, countless free meals, and complimentary theatre tickets.
So how has he achieved this? 'Screaming and shouting is a complete waste of time and is usually
directed at a person who is not in a position to do anything,' he says. 'I like to write a polite letter
to the company. People won't want to help you if you are aggressive, they respond much better to
good manners.'
It all started many years ago, on a boring train journey home to West London. The t rain passed
by the McVitie's biscuit factory and the smell of the biscuits made Clive feel hungry. He wrote a
letter to the managing director to complain, in a humorous way, about the fumes coming through
the carriage window. The result? Some free packets of biscuits. But since then there have been
more serious victories as well. On one occasion he managed to get a Volkswagen Golf GTI
within 24 hours for a friend who had been complaining for almost a year (without any success)
about his faulty vehicle. On another occasion he got a travel agent to refund the cost of a holiday
worth $2,000, after Clive's wife Bettina broke her leg when she slipped in a puddle of water in
their holiday apartment in Spain.
These days, there is almost nothing he won't complain about. After Clive was served mouldy
strawberries on a British Airways flight, he used a courier service to send the fruit to the airline's
chief executive. To compensate, BA invited his daughters, Nina and Zoe, to Heathrow to
personally inspect the airline's catering facilities. 'I just can't bear bad service,' says Clive. 'We
have a right to good service, and should expect it and demand it. In fact, what irritates me more
than anything is that, unlike Americans, we British are hopeless at complaining.'
So how do Bettina, his wife, and daughters Nina, 22, Zoe, 18, and 12-yearold son Joe cope with
living with Britain's biggest complainer? Surely he must be a nightmare to live with? Has he ever
asked Bettina to explain why a meal she made is badly cooked? 'Oh no, of course not,' says
Clive. It seems there are some things even he knows you should never complain about!

Adapted from the Daily Mail website

Exercise 8. a. Now read Clive's top tips. Complete the tips with a heading fro1n the list:

DON'T BE TOO SPECIFIC

DON'T LOSE YOUR TEMPER
KNOW WHO YOU ARE WRITING TO
THREATEN ACTION
WRITE A LETTER
220
USE FLATTERY

b. Now look at the highlighted verbs and verb phrases. With a partner, try to work out
their meaning fron1 the context.
c. Which two tips do you think are the most important?

How to complain successfully:

Clive’s top tips
1.
Never shout and swear - it achieves nothing. Don't spoil your meal or your holiday by getting
into an argument with a waiter or customer services call centre operator. Make a mental note of
the circumstances and write a letter later.
2.
Don't send emails, or standard, printed-out complaints forms. Companies may not read these but
they probably will read a letter. And unless you are particularly fond of Vivaldi, don't waste
your time ringing a customer complaints line! Your letter should be short and to the point and
should fit on one side of A4 paper. And type it. Reading other people's handwriting is hard work.
3.
Write to the company's marketing director or finance director, as they're probably the least busy.
Find their name on the internet, or by phoning. Writing Dear Sir/ Madam is lazy. Taking the
time to find a person's name and title shows initiative.
4.
If your complaint is serious enough, make it clear you will not hesitate to change to another
bank/ mobile phone company. Smart companies know that changing an angry customer into a
satisfied one will make the customer more loyal.
5.
Don't say exactly what you expect to receive as compensation. Leave it to t he company.
6.
Use phrases like 'I can only imagine this is an unusual departure from your usual high standards,'
and 'I would love to shop with you again if you can demonstrate to me that you are still as good
as I know you used to be'.
Glossary
lose your temper - become angry
threaten verb - warn that you may punish sb if they do not do what you want
flattery noun – saying good things about smth. that you may not mean

Exercise 9. Complete the sentences:

1. We always book our flights

2. We spent all day looking round the different stores in the sh c .
3. Are you sure that jacket f you?
4. My sister buys all her clothes at an ou st because it's cheaper.
5. There was a queue at the b because all the novels were half price.
6. That's a lovely shirt. Why don't you t it on?
7. They went to the ch to buy some aspirin.
8. That shop is having a s There's 20%, off all winter coats.
9. I wouldn't buy that dress, if l were you. It doesn't s you.
l 0 The sports section is on the top floor of the d st .

Exercise 10. a. Read the article once and match the headings with the paragraphs:

A. Check out the company you are buying from

221
B. Keep copies of all documents
C. Check the terms and conditions of the seller
D. Check your computer before and after buying online
E. Always use a credit card
F. Be security-conscious

Top tips for safe online shopping

Currently, nine out of ten people in the UK shop online at least once a month. Experts predict
that our spending on the internet over the next five years will grow by 129%. Read on to find out
how you can protect yourself when you are shopping online.
1-
When you buy things on the internet, there is always a chance that something may go wrong.
The product could be broken when you get it, or it might not turn up at all. If this happens, your
credit card will offer you the best protection. By law, your credit card company will cover
anything that costs between $100 and $30,000 if there are any problems with your order. Which
is why a credit card is the best way to pay?
2-
Make sure that your device, for example your laptop or tablet, is safe to use at all times. It should
be protected by up-to-date anti-virus software, and you should also install a personal firewall,
which will stop hackers attacking your system. Check that your firewall is turned on before you
start shopping, and when you finish be sure to log out of the system, especially if you share your
computer with other people.
3_
Take a minute to look at the website before you buy anything. Check that the company has a
geographical address as well as a landline telephone number, and write down these details. It is
generally better to use sellers that you know about or ones that have been recommended to you.
4_
Sellers should have a list of all your rights (for example what to do if you have a problem with
the item you bought, or if it hasn't arrived) somewhere on their website, and you need to read this
before you decide to shop there. If you can't find the list, you should probably choose a different
website. As a general rule, online companies usually give their customers seven days to cancel
their order if they change their minds about their purchase. This week is called a 'cooling-off'
period.
5_
A special icon on your screen will tell you if the website you are using is safe. The icon is in the
shape of a padlock, and you can find it on the browser bar at the bottom of the screen. Another
indication of a safe website is its address. The address should begin with 'https' and not 'http' -
the s stands for secure.

6_
The final stage of online shopping is the order confirmation. This is proof that you have bought a
product from this company, and it contains the special reference number for your order. You
should always print this information and keep it somewhere safe - you might need it if there is a
problem.

b. Look at the highlighted words and phrases. What do you think they mean? Use your
dictionary to look up their meaning and pronunciation.

c. Complete the sentences with one of the highlighted words or phrases.

1. That coat is a bit old -fashioned. I think you should get something more .
2. You should change your passwords frequently so that can't get into your computer.
3. We'll exchange your if you return it within a month.
222
4. I put a on the garage door to protect n1y car.
5. My friend said she would meet me outside the cinema, but she didn't .
6. I forgot to of Facebook, and my boss read my messages.
7. Some people don't bother with a these days - they only have a mobile.

Exercise 11. a. Listen to part of a radio consumer programme where people are talking
about bad service. What did the people complain about ... ? (T.8.2):

l. in the taxi 2. in the hotel 3. in the restaurant

b. Listen again and answer the questions :(T. 8.2)

1 Who did each person complain to?

2 What did the people they complained to do as a result?.

Exercise 12. Talk to a partner:

1. Who's best at complaining in your family? Give examples.

2. Can you remember a time when you (or someone in your family) complained ... ?
• to a taxi driver • to a hotel receptionist
• to a waiter • to someone else
Why did you complain? What did you say? What happened?

Exercise 13. Communication I want to speak to the manager. Role-play a customer

complaining to a shop assistant and a restaurant manager:

Student A

Look at the situations and role-play the conversations. Spend a few minutes preparing what you
are going to say.
1. You're a customer. You bought something in a clothes shop in the sales yesterday (decide
what) and there's a problem (decide what). Go back to the shop. B is the shop assistant. You'd
like to change it for another identical one. If you can't, you'd like a refund. You start. Excuse me.
I bought ...
2. You're the manager of a restaurant. Your normal chef is off this week, and you have a
temporary chef who is not very good. One of the waiters has had a problem with a customer,
who would like to speak to you. When customers complain you usually offer them a free drink
or a coffee. If it’s absolutely necessary, you might give a 10% discount on t heir bill, but you
would prefer not to. B is the customer.

Student B

Look at the situations and role-play the conversations. Spend a few minutes preparing what you
are going to say.
1. You're a shop assistant in a clothes shop. A is going to come to you with a problem with
something he/ she bought in the sales yesterday. You can't change it for an identical one because
there are no more in his/ her size. Try to persuade A to change it for something else, because you
don't usually give refunds during the sales. A will start.
2. You're a customer in a restaurant. You have just finished your meal and you didn't enjoy it at
all (decide what was wrong with it). You complained to the waiter, but the waiter didn't solve the
problem. You have asked the waiter to call the manager. Try to get at least a 50% discount on
your meal. A is the manager. You’ll start. Good evening. Are you the manager?
223
Exercise 14 Write a letter to complain about something you bought online:
a. Read the letter of complaint. Then answer the questions:
1. Who is Chris Mason complaining to?
2. What item is he complaining about? Why?
3. Who did he contact first?
4. What problen1 did he have when he phoned to complain?
5. In which paragraph does Chris use flattery?

b. Read it again and complete the gaps with a word from the list:

Dear delivered forward However in stock reference service unhelpful Yours

Sandra Adams
Head of Department
John Leavis Customer Service
PO Box 908
Swindon
May 19th 2013
1. _________Ms. Adams,
Last Wednesday, 25 April, I ordered a coffee machine from your online store (order
2. #CE437184). Before placing the order I read the conditions carefully, and the item
was 3. . Your website says that items in stock are 4. in 48 hours. Two weeks passed, and
nothing arrived. 5. , I noticed that pay1nent had been taken from my
credit card. I phoned your customer service line, and the person that I spoke to, Becky, was rude
and 6._ . She said that the item was not in stock, and that she didn't know when they would
arrive. She could not explain why the money had been taken from my card.
I have bought many things from you over the years, both from your London shop and the online
store, and I have always had good 7. . I can only imagine that this is a
departure fro1n your usual high standards, and I am sure you will be able to resolve the situation
in a satisfactory way.
I look 8. to hearing from you.
9. sincerely,

Chris Mason
Useful language: a formal letter (or email)

You don't know the person's name

Start: Dear Sir/Madam,
Finish: Yours faithfully,
You know the person's name
Start: Dear+ Mr/Ms/ Mrs Garcia,
Finish: Yours sincerely,
Style
• Don't use contract ions
• Write I look forward to hearing from you. As the final sentence
• Write your full name under your signature
Note: a formal email is exactly the same as a formal letter, except in an email we don't write the
address or date.

224
c. Write a letter (or an email) of complaint about something you bought online. Plan
what you're going to write. Use the Usefu1 language to help you.

d. Check your letter or email for mistakes (grammar, vocabulary, punctuation, and
spelling).

Lesson 3.

Grammar: Passive: be+ past participle

Present: am/ is /are+ past participle

+ Kevlar is used to make bullet-proof vests.
- Tippex isn't used very much today.
?Are disposable nappies used all over the world?
Past: was? were + participle
+The dishwasher was invented by Josephine Cochrane.
- Windscreen wipers weren't invented until 1903.
? When was the washing machine invented?
Present Continuous: am/ is /are+ being+ past participle
Our car is being repaired today.
Present Perfect Simple: have/has + been + past participle
Andy's bike has been stolen.
Past Continuous: was/were +being + past participle
The director died when the film was being made.
Future Simple: will +be + past participle
You'll be picked up at the airport by one of our staff.
Passive Infinitive: to be + participle
This bill has to be paid tomorrow.

• You can often say things in two ways, in the active or in the passive.
Josephine Cochrane in vented the dishwasher. (active)
The dishwasher was invented by Josephine Cochrane. (passive)

• In the active sentence, the focus is more on Josephine Cochrane.

• In the passive sentence the focus is more on the dishwasher.
• You can also use the passive when it isn't known or isn't important who does or did the action.
My car was stolen last week.
Volvo cars are made in Sweden.

• Use by to say who did the action.

The Lord of the Rings was written by Tolkien.

Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Complete with present or past passive:

1. Many of the things we use every day by women. (invent)

2. In the UK most children in state schools. (educate)
3. Australia by Captain Cook in 1770. (discover)
4. This morning I up by the neighbour's dog. (wake)
225
5. Cricket in the summer in the UK. ( play)
6. The songs on this album last year. (record)
7. Nowadays a lot of toys in China. (make)
8. Carols are songs which at Christmas. (sing)
9. These birds in northern Europe. (not usually see)
10. 'Rome in a day.' (not build)
11. The Eiffel Tower in 1889. (complete)

Exercise 2. Rewrite the sentences in the passive, beginning with the highlighted words:

1. Jonathan Ive designed the iPod and the iPhone.

2. Most Mediterranean countries produce olive oil.
3. Herschel discovered Uranus in 1781.
4. Barry Sonnenfeld directed the Men in B1ack films.
5. David Hackney painted Mr and Mrs Clark and Percy in 1970-1971.
6. Elvis Presley didn't write Blue Suede Shoes.
7. J K Rowling wrote the Harry Potter books.
8. They make Daihatsu cars in Japan.
9. Shakespeare wrote Hamlet in 1603.

Exercise 3.Circle correct form, active or passive:

1 The costumes for the show are making /are being made by hand.
2 The landscape inspired / was inspired him to write a poem.
3 This castle hasn't inhabited/ hasn't been inhabited for nearly a century.
4 The director 's last film set/ is set in the present.
5 The film will shoot /will be shot in the autumn.
6 The actors aren't recording / aren’t being recorded the dialogue until next week.
7 The house wasn't using / wasn't being used by the owners during the winter.
8 The make-up artist has transformed / has been transformed the actor into a monster.
9 They hadn't owned / hadn't been owned the company for very long before they went bankrupt.
10 The photo took/ was taken by my husband on the balcony of our hotel.
11 The college built/ was built in the 16th century.

Exercise 4. Rewrite the sentences with the passive. Only use by if necessary:

1. They subtitle a lot of foreign films.

A lot of foreign films _
2. Garcia Marquez wrote Love in the Time of Cholera.
Love in the Time of Cholera _
3. Someone is repairing my laptop.
My laptop _
4. They haven't released the DVD of the film yet.
The DVD of the film _
5. They won't finish the film until the spring.
The film _
6. You have to collect the tickets from the box office.
The tickets-----------
7. They haven't told the actor about the changes in the script.
The actor _
8. Jan1es Cameron directed Avatar.
Avatar -------------------
226
9. They've already recorded the soundtrack.
The soundtrack _
10 They were interviewing the director about the film.
The director .

Exercise 5. Put the following sentences into the Passive Voice:

a) 1. They often invite me to their parties. 2. People speak English in different parts of the
world. 3. One uses milk for making butter. 4. We form the Passive Voice with the help of the
auxiliary verb "to be". 5. They build a lot of new houses in this district every year.
b) 1. They built this house in 1950. 2. Somebody locked the front door. 3. Someone broke my
pen last night. 4. They punished the boy for that. 5. They finished their work in time.
c) 1. People will forget it very soon. 2. They will translate this book next year. 3. They will tell
you when to come. 4. Where will they build a new library? 5. Someone will ask him about it.

Exercise 6. Put the following sentences into the Passive Voice:

1. No one has seen him anywhere this week. 2. Somebody has invited her to the party. 3. They
have done all the exercises in written form. 4. They had done everything before we came. 5. I
thought they had already sent the letter. 6. Evidently somebody had informed him of the news
before they announced it. 7. They are constructing some new metro lines now. 8. Wait a little.
They are examining the last student there. 9. They are discussing this question now. 10. We
could not use the cassette-recorder, they were repairing it. 11. When I switched on the radio they
were broadcasting a very interesting programme. 12. They have not yet told him about it. 13.
The branches of the tree hid her face. 14. I know her family. Her brother Charles has taken me
there more than once. 15. I am sure your presents will please them. 16. They informed me that
they had seen you in Oxford Street.

Exercise 7. Use the proper article. Pay attention to the article in adverbial phrases of manner:

1. She nodded to me with ... smile. 2. I shall do it with ... pleasure. 3. He closed the door with
... bang. 4. Everybody looked at her with ... approval. 5. They were talking in ... low voices. 6.
Though he said it in ... whisper I heard everything. 7. She was pulling her gloves on in ... very
slow way. 8. She went up the steps like ... bird. 9. I was trembling like ... leaf. 10. She said it in ...
matter-of-fact voice. 11. The young man smiled in ...amazement. 12. She was weeping like ...
child. 13. With ... deep sigh she rang the bell. 14. They were walking along ... side by ... side. 15.
He worked from ... morning till... night but earned very little. 16. She told me everything ... word
for ... word. 17. The boys were all dirty from... head to ... foot. 18. I always meet them walking
... arm in ... arm.

Exercise 8. Put the following sentences into the Passive Voice making the indirect object the subject
of the passive construction:

Note. It is more usual in English to make the indirect object the subject of the passive construction.

1. He offered me a chair. 2. We gave him all the money. 3. They have just shown me a new
magazine. 4. Mother promised the boy a new toy. 5. Nobody has told me the news yet. 6. They
sent you the invitation last week. 7. I am sure they will offer you a very interesting job. 8. They
recommended me several articles on that problem. 9. Someone taught him French and gave him a
dictionary. 10. They asked us to be there at eight o'clock. 11. They have promised me some
books on this problem. 12. A passer-by showed us the way to Trafalgar Square.

227
 MONEY

Exercise 1. Verbs: Complete the sentences with a verb from the list:

be worth borrow can't afford charge cost earn inherit invest lend owe raise save waste
1. My uncle is going to leave me $2,000. I'm going to $2,000.
2. I put some money aside every week for a holiday. I money every week.
3. My brother has promised to give me €50 until next week. He has promised to me
€50.
4. I need to ask my mum to give me $20 until Friday. I need to $ 20 from my mum.
5. I often spend money on stupid things. I often money.
6. I don't have enough money to buy that car. I to buy that car.
7. I usually have to pay the mechanic $100 to service my car. The mechanic me
$100.
8. These shoes are quite expensive. They are $200. They $200.
9. Jim gave me $100. I haven't paid it back yet. I Jim $100.
10. Iwant to put money in a bank account. They’ll give me 5% interest. I want to
some money
11. I work in a supemarket. They pay me $1,000 a month. I $1 ,000 a month.
12. I could sell my house for about €200,000. MY, house about €200,000.
13. We need to get people to give money to build a new hospital. We want to money
for the new hospital.

Exercise 2. Prepositions: Complete the Preposition column with a word from the list:

back by for (x2) from in (x2) into on to

1 Would you like to pay cash or credit card?
2 I paid the dinner last night. It was my birthday.
3 I spent $50 books yesterday.
4 My uncle invested all his money property.
5 I don't like lending money friends.
6 I borrowed a lot of money the bank.
7 They charged us €60 a bottle of wine.
8 I can only lend you the money if you pay me next week.
9 I never get debt. I hate owing people money.

Exercise 3. Nouns: Match the nouns and definitions.

bill cash machine (AmE ATM) coin loan mortgage note salary tax
1. a piece of paper money
2. a piece of money made of metal
3. a piece of paper which shows how much
4. money you have to pay for something
5. the money you get for the work you do
6. money that you pay to the government
7. money that somebody (or a bank) lends you
8. money that a bank lends you to buy a house
9. a machine where you can get money

Phrasal verbs:
I took out €200 from a cash machine. (= took from my bank account)
When can you pay me back the money I lent you?(= return)
228
I have to live off my parents while I'm at university.(= depend on financially)
It's difficult for me and my wife to live on only one salary. (= have enough money for basic
things you need to live)

Exercise 4. a. Read the questionnaire and choose your answers. b. Compare your answers
with a partner. Say why:

Are You a Spender or a Saver?

1. You go shopping and you see something very expensive that you really want, but can't
afford.
You ..
a. buy it with your credit card. You can worry about the bill next month.
b. already have some money in the bank and plan to save for a couple of weeks and then buy the
thing you want .
c. borrow the money and agree to pay back a small amount every week.
2. You get $ 100 for your birthday. You ...
a. spend some of it and save some.
b. go straight to a shopping centre and spend it all.
c. put all of it in your bank account until you know what you want to spend it on.
3. Do you always know how much money you have, how much money you have spent, and
on what?
a. Yes. I'm very organized and know exactly what I have and what I've spent.
b. No. I haven't got a clue. When I have money I usually just spend it.
c. I usually have a rough idea about what I spend my money on.
4. You've borrowed some money from a friend, but you don't think that you'll be able to
pay it back by the time you promised to. You ...
a. don't worry about it. Hopefully your friend will forget about it too!
b. work out how much money you have and how much you owe. You speak to your friend and
explain the situation and offer to pay the money back in small installments.
c. speak to your friend and promise that you'll pay him/ her back, but it might take a bit longer
than you first thought.
5.You have a friend who often borrows money from you and never pays it back. He/ she
wants to borrow $50. You ...
a. lend him/ her the money. You can afford it and it doesn't matter if you don't get it back.
b. say no; he/ she owes you too much already.
c. lend t he money, but explain that it is the last time, until he/ she has paid back this loan.

Exercise 5. a. Listen to six people answering the question Are you a spender or a saver? How
many are savers?(T.8.3) b. Listen again and match speakers 1- 6 with A- F. Who . ..
?(T.8.3)

A. always has money in the bank

B. often ends up with no money
C. thinks he / she is careful with 1noney, but not mean
D. enjoys spending money on his/her hobby
E. can save money he/ she needs to
F. prefers to live now than worry about the future

Exercise 6. In pairs, answer the questions. Give as much information as you can:

1. Think of two people you know personally or have heard of who are very rich. Did they . .. ?
a. earn their money (how?)
229
b. inherit their money (who from?)
c. win it (how?)
2. If they earned their money, was it because ... ?
a. they were very lucky
b. they worked very hard
c. they had a special talent

Exercise 7. a. Now read an article about a millionaire. How did he become so rich? Why is
his success surprising? How did he make his daughter proud of him? b. Now read the
article again and number the events in the order in which they happened:

A. He became a millionaire again.

B. He learnt to read and write.
C. He lost all his money.
D. He sold old clothes in the market.
E. He opened a department store.
F. He won an important prize.
G. He opened a small clothes shop.
H. He became a millionaire.
I. He sold clothes in the market again.
J. He wrote his autobiography.
K. His shop was on the front page of a newspaper.

The Millionaire with a Secret

His name is not really Jeff. His mother changed it because he could never spell his real name,
James, and she thought Jeff was easier.
Pearce was born in Liverpool in the 1950s, in a very poor family. At school, all the teachers
thought he was stupid because he couldn't learn to read or write - at that time, not many people
knew about dyslexia. But there was something that he was good at: selling things. Pearce's first
experience as a salesman was when he was a boy, and he and his mother used to go door-to-door
asking for old clothes that they could sell in the market. He instinctively knew what people
wanted, and it soon seemed that he could make money from anything. His mother always
believed in him and told him that one day he would be successful and famous.
In 1983, when he already owned a small boutique, he decided to invest $750 in leather trousers,
and to sell them very cheaply in his shop. 'It was a bit of a gamble, to tell you the truth,' he says.
But Liverpool loved it, and there were photos of shoppers sleeping in the street outside his
boutique on the front page of the local newspaper. The first day the trousers went on sale, the
shop took 25.000. Jeff became a millionaire, but later he lost most of his money in the
recession of the Nineties. He was almost 40, and he was broke again. He even had to go back to
selling clothes in the market. But he never gave up, and soon he set up a new business, a
department store, called Jeff's, which again made him a millionaire.
However, success didn't mean anything to Jeff because he still couldn't read or write. Even his
two daughters did not realize that their father couldn't read. When one of them asked him to read
her a bedtime story he went downstairs and cried because he felt so ashamed. At work he
calculated figures in his head, while his wife Gina wrote all the cheques and read contracts.
In 1992 Pearce was awarded a Businessman of the Year prize for the best clothes store in
Liverpool. It was at this moment that he told his friends and colleagues the truth, and decided to
write a book about his experience. But first he had to learn to read and write. He went to evening
classes, and employed a private teacher, but he found it very difficult because of his dyslexia.
Finally, with the help of a ghost-writer*, his autobiography, A Pocketful of Holes and Dreams,
was published, and became a best-seller. Recently, he was woken in the middle of the night by
someone knocking on his front door. It was his daughter to whom he hadn't been able to read a
230
bedtime story all those years earlier. She had come to tell him that she had just read his book.
'Dad, I'm so proud of you,' she said - and burst into tears in his arms.

*A ghost-writer is somebody who writes a book for another person

c. What do you think you can learn from Jeff's story?

d. Look at the highlighted words and phrases related to money and business. With a
partner, try to work out the meaning from the context.
e. Complete the questions with one of the highlighted words and phrases. Then ask and
answer the questions with a partner:
1. When was the last in your country? How long did it last (has it lasted)?
2. Do you know anybody who works as a , What does he (she) sell?
Does he (she) enjoy his (her) job?
3. If you were completely , who would you ask to lend you some money?
4. Have you ever bought something the first day it ? What?
5. Do you know anybody who has on their own? Is it successful?

Exercise 8. Complete the sentences with the correct verb in brackets:

1. My sister a lot of money on clothes she never wears. (wastes / saves)

2. I can't to buy a flat of my own. (pay/ afford)
3. You'll have to a lot of money if you want to travel around the \world next year.
(cost/ save)
4. Kevin about € 1,000 a month in his new job. (wins / earns)
5. That painting a lot of money. (charges / is worth)
6. My uncle is doing a bike ride to _ money for charity. (raise / save)
7. We still______ the bank a lot of money. (owe/ earn)
8. Mary $5,000 from her grandfather when he died. (inherited/ invested)
9. The plumber me €100 for mending my shower. (cost / charged)
10. Can you me $200 until I get paid? (borrow / lend)

Exercise 9. Complete the sentences with the correct preposition:

1. I’ll pay the meal if you get the drinks.

2. They charged us €5 a bottle of water.
3. They got debt when they bought their new house.
4. We've borrowed some money my parents.
5. My grandparents always pay cash.
6. I don't mind lending money family.
7.They spent a lot of money their son's education.
8. Can I pay credit card?
9. If I lend you the money, when can you pay me?
10. Phil invested all his money his own company.

Exercise 10. Complete the advertisement with the words. Bank account, bills, cash
machine, loan, mortgage, note, salary, tax:

What's so good about CASH Internet Banking plc.

Our Account Services
Open a 1. with us and we'll give you a free gift - you'll get a tablet computer if
you earn over €3,000 a month. Consult our online service 24/7 and use your card in the 2.
of any bank to take out as much or as little money as you want - coins aren't available, but you
231
can take out a €5 3. if you wish. Does your company pay your 4.
directly into the bank? Then we won't charge you anything for your card. We'll even pay all your
5. for you, free of charge.
Our Financing Services
Do you need to borrow money for a car, a holiday, or a new laptop? We'll give you a
6. of up to €10,000 for whatever you want to buy.
And how about a new house? We can give you a7. at one of the lowest interest
rates on the market.
Our Extra Services
How much8. do you pay? Talk to our specialists to make sure you're paying the
right amount - they can help you pay less.
Come to CASH Internet for the best accounts, the best services, and the best savings.

Exercise 11. a. Read the first chapter of a book about Daniel Suelo once. Where did he
decide to live?
1. With friends.
2. With family.
3. In the countryside.
4. In a city.

The man who quit money

In the first year of the twenty-first century, a man standing by a busy road in the middle of the
United States took his life savings out of his pocket - $30 - laid it inside a phone booth, and
walked away. He was 39 years old, came from a good family, and had been to college. He was
not mentally ill, nor did he have any problems with drugs or alcohol. The decision was made by
a man who knew exactly what he was doing.
In the twelve years since then, as the stock market has risen and fallen, Daniel Suelo has not
earned, received, or spent a single dollar. In an era when anyone who could sign his name could
get a mortgage, Suelo did not apply for loans. As public debt rose to eight, ten, and finally
thirteen trillion dollars he did not pay taxes, or accept any type of help from the government.
Instead he went to live in a cave in Utah, where he picks fruit and wild onions, collects animals
that have been killed on the roads, takes old food that has gone past its sell-by date out of bins,
and is often fed by friends and strangers. 'My philosophy is to use only what is freely given or
discarded: he writes. While the rest of us try to deal with taxes, mortgages, retirement plans,
and bank accounts, Suelo no longer even has an identity card.
Daniel is not a typical tramp. He often works – but refuses to be paid. Although he lives in a
cave, he is extremely social, remains close to friends and family, and has discussions with
strangers on his website which he checks at the local library. He has cycled far, travelled on
freight trains, hitch-hiked through nearly every state in the United States, worked on a fishing
boat, collected mussels from Pacific beaches, caught salmon in streams in Alaska, and spent
three months living in a tree after a storm.
'I know it's possible to live with zero money,' Suelo declares. And he says you can live well.

b. Read the chapter again and choose the correct answers:

1. What do we learn about the man in the first paragraph?

a. He had just left school.
b. He had thought about his actions carefully.
c. He had had a difficult childhood.
2. What has Daniel Suelo done since he changed his life?
a. He has got into debt.
b. He has bought a house.
232
c. He hasn't used any money.
3 How does he get enough to cat?
a. He finds food.
b. His family cook for him.
c. He buys food.
4 What's Daniel Suelo like?
a. He's shy.
b. He's lazy.
c. He's outgoing.
5. How does he get from one place to another?
a. He cycles everywhere.
b. He uses different methods of transport.
c. He always uses trains.

c. Look at the highlighted words and phrases. What do you think they mean? Use your
dictionary to look up their meaning and pronunciation.
d. Complete the sentences with o ne of the highlighted words or phrases:

l. Clean fresh water often comes from mountain .

2. It’s important to have a for when you get old.
3. The giant fish sculptures in Rio were made using plastic bottles.
4. The early nineteenth century was an important for opera.
5. He has shares in some companies, so he's interested in what happens on the .
6. You might get ill if you eat food after its .

Exercise 12. a. Listen to four speakers talking about how they manage on their incomes.
Match the speakers with their situation (T.8.4):

Speaker 1._ a. a single parent

Speaker 2. b. a family with children
Speaker 3. c. a single retired person on a pension
Speaker 4._ d. a young person who lives with his / her parents

b. Listen again and mark the sentences T (true) or F (false) (T. 8.4):
Speaker 1
l. He doesn't earn n1uch money. .
2. He saves n1ost of his salary.
Speaker 2
3. She doesn't own the flat where she lives.
4. She thinks money is more important than family.
Speaker 3
5 He can't live on his income.
6. He isn't in debt.
Speaker4
7. She only works in a shop at weekends.
8. She spends most of her money on her children.

c. Learn these words and phrases:

cheques , contracts , figures , recession , salesman, broke, a gamble, a millionaire, go on sale,set
up a business.

233
Unit IX
Lesson 1.

Grammar: The Present Perfect Tense

Table 1.
Affirmative Negative
I have written I have not (haven’t) written
Не has written He has not (hasn’t) written
She has written She has not (hasn’t) written
It has written It has not (hasn’t) written
We have written We have not (haven’t) written
You have written You have not (haven’t) written
They have written They have not (haven’t) written
Interrogative Short Answers
Have I written? Yes, I have. No, haven’t.
Has he written? Yes, he has. No, he hasn’t.
Has she written? Yes, she has. No, she hasn’t.
Has it written? Yes, it has. No, it hasn’t.
Have we written? Yes, we have. No, we haven’t.
Have you written? Yes, you have. No, you haven’t.
Have they written? Yes, they have. No, they haven’t.

Basic Constructions
Positive:
Subject + have / has + past participle + object(s) + time Expression

e.g. I have lived in Portland for four years.

Negative:
Subject + have / has not (haven't, hasn't) + past participle + object(s) + time Expression

e.g. Max hasn't played tennis since 1999.

Question:
(Question Word) + have / has + subject + past participle + object(s) + time Expression

e.g. Where have you worked since 2002?

We form the present per fect simple with the auxiliary verb have/has and the past
participle. We form the past participle of R egular verbs by adding -ed to the verb: e.g. play
– played. We form the past participle of Irregular verbs differently: e.g. see - seen. We form
questions by putting have/has before the subject: e.g. Have they read the book? We form
negations by putting not between have/has and the past participle: e.g. He has not/hasn’t
repaired the TV yet.
We use the present perfect simple:
- For actions which happened at an unstated time in the past. The exact time is not
mentioned because it is not important. We put more emphasis on the action:

e.g. Kim has bought a new mobile phone. (When did she buy it? We don’t mention the exact time
because it is not important. What is important is the fact that she’s got a new mobile phone.)

234
- For actions which started in the past and are still continuing in the present:

e.g. He has been a car salesman since 1990. (He started working as a car salesman in 1990
and he still is a car salesman)

- For actions which have recently finished and their results are visible in the present: with
today, this morning/afternoon, etc. When periods are not finished at the time of speaking.

Time expressions used with the present perfect simple include:

for, since, already, just, always, recently, ever, how long, yet, lately, never, so far, today, this
morning/afternoon/week/month/year, etc.

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Study Substitution Table 1. and compose as many sentences as you can.

Exercise 2. Spell and transcribe the four forms of the following verbs:

be, do, have, see, strike, get, open, turn, wash, take, dry, clean, go, dress, put, make, sweep, clear,
stay, say, hurry, begin, prepare, come, work, press, iron, gather, play, repair, knit, listen, hang,
change, want, finish, know, help, fire, show.

Exercise 3. Put the verbs in brackets into correct form of the present perfect simple.

1. Have you ever given an interview? – No, I have never done (never/do) that. 2. What
time does the train leave? - (just/leave)! 3. Is the new restaurant
good? – I (not/eat) there yet. 4. Shall I do the shopping now? – No, I
(already/do) it. 5. Julia, are you ready? – No, I
(not/dry) my hair yet. 6. Would you like to have lunch with me? –
No, thanks. I (already/eat).

Exercise 4. Fill in the gaps with recently, how long, yet, always, ever, already, since or never:

1. How long has she been an air hostess? - she left school. 2. Jonathan has
moved house . – What’s his new address? 3. I can’t phone you. I haven’t got a
phone . – Well I’ll come to your house instead. 4. Has she finished her homework
? – Yes, She’s finished it. 5. He eats a lot of vegetables, doesn’t
he? – Yes. He’s liked vegetables. 6. Have you been to China? –
No, I have been there.

Exercise 5. Fill in the gaps with: have/has been (to) or have/has gone (to)

A: Hi, Roger! Where is everybody? The house is very quiet. B: Well, Mum 1). has gone to the
cinema with Mavis. A: How about your sister? B: She’s having a shower right now because she
2). the gym. A: I 3). the gym twice this week. It’s really
exhausting. B: As for Dad, he 4). the library to get some books. A: So, how about
going to that new café that’s just opened near the park? B: Oh, I 5). there. Isn’t
that great? Why don’t we call Steve and go to the basketball court? A: Okay, let’s do that
instead.

235
Exercise 6. Fill in since or for:
1. for ten years; 2. I was five; 3. 8 o’clock; 4. two hours; 5.
ages; 6. six months; 7. lunch-time; 8. we moved to this town; 9.
three minutes.

Exercise 7. Match Column A with Column B:

Column A Column B
1. Jerry hasn’t typed a. visited Japan?
2. She has always b. talked to them.
3. Have you ever c. the letter yet.
4. We’ve already d. to New York twice this year
5. Ann has already been e. known them?
6. How long have you f. wanted to be a singer.

Exercise 8. Answer the following questions:

1. Have you had dinner yet? 2. Have you had coffee today? 3. Has your brother left for
Kiev? 4. Has she ever met my elder brother? 5. Has Mary been to the canteen yet? 6. Have you
found anything to your taste on the menu? 7. Have they paid for the lunch yet? 8. What book
have you discussed today? 9. How much have you paid for the supper? 10. You have learned this
poem by heart, haven’t you? 11. You have made few mistakes in spelling, haven’t you? 12.
Where have you found this book? 13. Which lesson have you learned by heart? 14. What English
books have you read yet?

Exercise 9. Put the verbs in brackets into the past simple or the present perfect simple:

1. A: I went (go) to the new gym yesterday. B: It’s good, isn’t it? I (go) there a
few times. 2. A: (you/write) to Simon lately? B: Yes, I (write) him a letter last
week. 3. A: How long (you/be) married? B: Only for six months I (get) married
last December. 4. A: I (not/see) Sam for a long time. B: Really? I (see) him
yesterday at the swimming pool. 5. A: (you/type) the report yet? B: Yes, I
(finish) it half an hour ago. 6. A: Mary (know) Steven for six years. B: When (they/meet)?
A: When they (be) at university together. 7. A: (you/ever/play)
rugby? B: Yes, I have. I (play) for the first time last week. 8. A: James (write) a
new book last year. B: I know. I (read) some great reviews about it in the newspaper.

Exercise 10. Put the verbs in brackets into the past simple or the present perfect simple:

Dear Margaret,
Thank you very much for your letter which I 1). received (receive) last week. I 2)
(be) really happy to hear from you after all this time. I’ve got a lot of news to
tell you about myself. I 3) (get) a new job nine months ago. I work as a
reporter for our local TV station now. I 4) (have) many interesting experiences
so far. When I first 5) (start) work, the manager 6) (ask) me
to Interview our old school headmaster. He 7) (be) so surprised to see me with a
microphone in my hand. Last month, a fire 8) (break out) in a big factory in
the area. I 9) (be) the only reporter who 10) (manage) to talk
to the owner! That 11) (make) me feel very proud. As you can see, I enjoy my

236
job very much. I 12) (meet) a lot of important people and a s f o r
me 13)I (have) the opportunity to see lots of new places. I 14)
(buy) a new car because my old one 15)
(break down) a couple of weeks ago. I have to go now
because they 16) (just/inform) me that I have to fly by helicopter to
Middle ford. I have to talk to people whose homes were damaged by the storm which 17)
(hit) the area last night you see, I don’t have a moment’s rest!
Keep in touch.

Exercise 11. Put the verbs in brackets into the present perfect simple or the past simple:

1. Mr and Mrs Pater won (win) two free tickets to Paris in a TV show last week. 2. First,
Robert (brush) his teeth, then he (go) to bed. 3.
“ (you /ever /see) a lion?” “Yes, I saw one when I (go) to
Kenya in 1996.” 4. I (not/see) my family for two years. 5. “Where’s John?” “He
(go) fishing for the day with his f ather.” 6. My sister
(not/play) the violin since she was twelve. 7. I
(Already/see) this film. Let’s
watch something else. 8. Last week. Fred (fall) off a ladder and
(break) his arm. 9. I (never/hear) such a moving song before.
10. Jennifer (always/want) to get Harrison Ford’s autograph.

Exercise 12. Put the verbs in brackets into the present perfect simple or the past simple:

A: Hello, Billy I 1) haven’t seen (not/seen) you for a long time. B: Yes, it 2)
(be) very busy recently. A: Really? Tell me what you 3) (do)
since we last 4) see each other. B: Well I 5) (get) my degree
last month and then I 6) (move) house. A: When 7)
(you/move)? B: Last week, but I 8) (not/unpack)
everything yet. A: I 9)
(phone) you on Tuesday but there 10) (be) no answer. B: I
11) (be) busy at my new house then. A: Never mind, I only 12)
(want) to invite you to a party next week at my house. B: Great! Thank you.

Exercise 13. Correct the mistakes:

1. We have bought a new sofa last month. 2. Jim lives in Germany for three years.3. My
father has went fishing. 4. She is just moved house. 5. We have eaten lunch at one o’clock. 6.
Sophie has do her homework.7. Ann and John have got married ten years ago. 8. I am at
school since nine o’clock.

Exercise 14. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense:

Dear Bert,
1) I’m writing (write) to tell you what a great time we 2) (have) at the Sour
Grapes concert last weekend. It’s a pity you 3) (not/come). The concert 4)
(take) place on the football stadium near the university. There 5)
(be) about 80,000 people there. While we 6) (wait) to get in,
we 7) (see) the members of the group arrive in a big black limo. They 8)
(have) bodyguards with them. Anyway, we 9) (find) our
seats and 10) (wait) impatiently for the concert to begin. The Sour Grapes 11)

237
 (recently/record) an album which 12) (become) very
successful. The concert 13) (last) for two and a half hours. I 14)
(send) you some photos that Alex 15) (take) when we 16)
(be) there. We 17) (hear) that the Sour Grapes 18)
(give) a big concert in London next month. Perhaps you can see them there.

Exercise 15. Read the notes about Paul Vem who is a famous runner. Make sentences using
the prompts given as in the example:

e.g. Paul Vem was born in Sussex. (Be born/in Sussex);

always want/be a runner; start running/at the age of seven; win/the school
championship/when/be/15 years old; join/the national team/four years ago; win/several
medals/so far; recently receive/the “Athlete of the year” award; get married/last month; already
take part/in two international championships.

A STUDENT’S DAY

Exercise 1. Share on: Being a student - What is your daily program? How does your day
start?

Exercise 2. Speak with a partner about your daily routine at the University.

Exercise 3. Read the text. Compare your day with the character of the text:

A student’s day
What is there in this picture? There is a bedroom in it. Is it still dark in the room? No, it is
already light. What time is it now? The clock has just struck seven. Who (m) do you see in this
picture? We see Mary in it. Is she still asleep? No, she is not. She is already up, she has opened
the window and turned on the radio. She is doing her morning exercises to the music. What is
she going to do next? She is going to have a wash. It is a quarter past seven. Mary is in the
bathroom. She has just taken a cold shower, dried herself on the towel and cleaned her teeth.
Now she is doing her hair before the looking-glass. What is she going to do next? She is going to
dress. Mary is in the bedroom again. She has already brushed her clothes and shoes. What is
she doing now? She is dressing. She has just put on her dress. She is putting on her shoes now.
Has she made her bed yet? Yes, she has. It is a quarter to eight. The family has already had
breakfast. While Mary is sweeping the floor with a broom her mother is washing up. Is Mary
going to stay at home? No, she is not. She is going to the Institute. It is eight o’clock. Mary is
hurrying to the Institute. She is a first-year student of the English faculty. Her classes begin at
half past eight. Mary is never late for her classes. Does she walk to the Institute? No, she does
not. She goes to the Institute by Metro. How long does it take her to get to the Institute? It
238
takes her half an hour to get there. 6. It is two o’clock. Has the bell gone? Yes, it has. The
classes are over. Mary and her friends are having dinner. Are they going home after dinner? No,
they are not. Mary is going to the laboratory to have some practice in pronunciation. Her friends
are going to the reading-room to prepare their homework there. It is nearly six o’clock in the
evening. Mary has just come home after a walk. She is having a short rest now. She is reading. Is
Mary going to do any work about the house? Yes, she is She is going to iron her father’s shirts.
It is ten minutes to ten. The working day is over. The family are all together, Mary is playing the
piano. Her brother David is repairing the TV-set. Their mother is knitting. Their father is going
to turn on the radio and listen to the news. The family are not going to bed yet.

Exercise 4. Make up 10 special question on the text (Ex.3).

Exercise 5. Read and role-play the dialogue:

Dialogue
Edward: Hello, Mary!
Mary: Hello, Eddy. It’s so nice to see you. Come in, please. (Edward comes in, takes off his coat
239
and hangs it on the hook.)
Edward: Look here, Mary, there’s a concert this evening at the club. You are sure to like it.
What about going there together?
Mary: Oh, I’m sorry I can’t. I’m making a new dress. I want to wear it at our party and I haven’t
finished it yet.
Edward: Oh, dear, we haven’t been to the club for ages. Besides, it’s a pity to stay at home on
such a fine day, you know.
Mary: All right. Eddy. But will you help me before we go?
Edward: Oh, yes, why not?
Mary: Something has gone wrong with my electric iron. (Mary gives the iron to Edward.) Can
you put it right?
Edward: Let me have a look at it. (Edward examines the iron.) Well, there’s nothing the
matter with the iron. I’m sure it’s the plug.
(Edward repairs the plug. Mary goes out to change. Then she comes back to Edward.)
Edward: Here you are.
Mary: How clever of you! Thank you ever so much!
Edward: Not at all. Are you ready to go now?
Mary: Just a moment! I must switch off the light.
Edward: Hurry up then. We’re going to be late, I’m afraid.
Mary: I’m ready. Come on. (Mary and Edward hurry out.)

Vocabulary
to be asleep ; Ant. to be awake; to turn on (off) the light (electricity, water, gas, TV-set,
radio, tape-recorder, lamp, tap); Syn. to switch on (off); To do: a lesson, housework, an
exercise, the room (flat, house); one’s hair, shopping, ironing, washing, etc., good (harm); To
make: a mistake, a report, a dress, tea, a fire, present, money, friends (enemies), bed; to turn on
(off) the light (electricity, water, gas, TV-set, radio, tape-recorder, lamp, tap)); Syn. to
switch on (off); to (the) music; wash vt, to have a wash; to wash one's hair; to wash clothes
(linen); to wash up; to take (to have) a bath (shower);to dry (oneself) on (with) a towel;
clean vt; to clean one's teeth (nails, clothes, shoes); to clean the blackboard; to clean the
room (the flat); to clean the window; brush vt; to brush one's clothes (shoes, teeth); to put
smth. on, e. g. Put your coat on. It’s cold. Ant. to take smth. off, e. g. He took his hat off and
entered.; Sweep (swept, swept) v.; a first-year student; classes n pl.; in class, e. g. We have
done this exercise in class., after classes, e. g. What are you going to do after classes? ; to be
late for, e. g. Don’t be late for the lecture.; go (went, gone) vi; to go by bus (tram, train,
Metro); to go to bed; It takes her (half an hour) ... e. g. It doesn’t take him long to prepare his
homework. How long has it taken you to read this book?; get (got, got) vt/i; to get to a place; to
get up; Has the bell gone? ; to be over , e. g. The lesson is over.; practice n; to have practice
in smth.; practise vt; iron vt; to iron linen е; Syn. to press clothes (not linen); (electric) iron
n.;to play the piano (the guitar, the violin), to play chess (tennis); repair vt ; Syn. to put
right; news n (plural in form, but treated as singular), e. g. What’s the news?; It is so nice to see
you. ;Look here, Mary ... ; sure adj; to be (feel) sure of smth., e.g. We are sure of our future.
We are sure that he will come. You are sure to like it. = You will certainly like it.; for ages ;
Something has gone wrong with ... ; to have a look at smth. ; There’s nothing the matter
with the iron.; How clever of you!; So kind of you!

to be short of time = to be pressed for time; spare time; on the way home, on the way to..., in
town, out of town; to be through with smth; to look through smth. (Newspaper, article, text); to
look forward to smth. (doing smth.); to manage to do smth., to look in; to listen in; to watch a
TV programme; to go to the laundry; the hairdresser, the barber, the cleaner's; to have one's hair
done, one's clothes cleaned, to have a manicure .

240
Exercise 6. Answer the following questions:

1. (At) what time do you get up? 2. Is it light when you get up? 3. You do your morning
exercises to music, don’t you? 4. What do you do in the bathroom? 5. What do you do with a
tooth-brush (a towel, a comb)? 6. Do you take a shower in the morning or before you go to bed?
7. What do you clean your teeth with? 8. What do you dry yourself on? 9. You do your hair
before a looking-glass, don't you? 10. At what time do you usually have breakfast? 11. What
must you do with the dishes after having a meal? 12. What do you usually do before you leave
the University? 13. What do you clean your flat with? 14. (At) what time do you leave for the
University? 15. It takes you long to get to the University, doesn’t it? 16. How long does it take
you to get to the University? 17. Do you go to the University by bus? 18. (At) what time do your
classes begin? 19. What do you do when the classes are over? 20. Where do you usually have
dinner? 21. Do you prepare for your English lessons at home or do you prefer to work in the
University reading-room? 22. How long does it take you to do your homework? 23. Do you
work at the laboratory every day? 24. When do you usually come home? 25. What do you
usually do when you come home? 26. In what way do you help your mother about the house? 27.
What do you do with an iron (a vacuum-cleaner, a broom)? 28. What do you usually do in the
evening? 29. Do you often go to the theatre or to the cinema? 30. You are fond of skating, aren’t
you? 31. What do you do when you stay at home in the evening? 32. Do your friends often come
to see you? 33. How do you spend the time when your friends come to see you? 34. You listen to
the news every day, don’t you? 35. What do you do when you are going to listen to the latest
news? 36. (At) what time do you usually go to bed? 37. Who does the shopping in your family?

Exercise 7. a) Write the interrogative and negative forms of the following sentences. b) Ask
and answer questions on the following statements as in the model. Use the Present Perfect
Tense. Add a sentence or two to develop a situation:

Model: He has already repaired the iron. Has he repaired the cassette-recorder yet? No, he
hasn’t. But he is sure to do it soon.

1. Mary has already ironed the table-cloth. 2. I have already turned off the light. 3. The girls have
already done the room. 4. It takes me long to prepare for my English lesson. 5. It has taken Peter
five minutes to shave. 6. We are going to the skating-rink after classes. 7. My sister is very good
at sewing. 8. Peter is going to repair our TV-set. 9. We are going for a walk after classes.
10. I must do some knitting today.

Exercise 8. a) Write questions to the parts of the sentences in bold type. b) Each sentence
describes a situation in a concise way. Find out some more details about it by asking
questions. Work in pairs:

1. I have dinner at two. 2. I leave for the Institute at eight o'clock. 3. I go to the Institute
by bus. 4. It has taken me three hours to do my homework. 5. David has already repaired the
radio. 6. It has taken me a fortnight to knit this sweater. 7. I am going to have some practice in
intonation at the laboratory. 8. I am going to the theatre today. 9. Robert is going to press his
coat. 10. I do my room with a vacuum-cleaner once a week. 11. You needn’t switch on the
light, it is quite light. 12. Mary has gone to bed. 13. It takes me a quarter of an hour to have
breakfast. 14. I take a bath every morning. 15. I go to the Institute by Metro. 16. We are going
to the skating-rink. 17. I do my hair with a comb.

Exercise 9. Rewrite the sentences in the Present Perfect using the adverbs already, just:

Model: My brother is going to repair the cassette-recorder. My brother has already repaired the
240
cassette-recorder.

1. I am going to have some practice at the laboratory. 2. I am going to clean the flat. 3. John
is going to shave. 4. They are going to have a rest in the country. 5. Ann is going to turn off the
gas. 6. The boy is going to brush his clothes, isn’t he? 7. I am going to turn on the light. 8. His

242
family are going to listen to the seven o'clock news, aren’t they? 9. Who is going to have a bite?
10. What are you going to do? 11. They are going to stay out of town for a fortnight. 12. I’m
going to look through his article.

Exercise 10. Make up as many sentences as you can according to the following models.
Use the words, word combinations and phrases of the lesson:

Model 1: I am (not) going to turn on the light. I am (not) turning on the light. I have (already,
just) turned on the light. (I have not turned on the light yet.)
Model 2: Are you going to turn on the light? Are you turning on the light? Have you turned on
the light (yet)?

Exercise 11. Fill in articles wherever necessary:

1. Mary has taken ... cold shower and is going to dress. 2. Let me have ... look at your
translation. 3. I always do ... room with ... vacuum-cleaner. 4. Let’s turn on ... cassette-recorder
and dance to ... music. 5. What are your fellow-students doing? - Mary is playing ... piano. Peter
and David are playing ... chess. 6. I don’t go to ... Institute by ... bus. I prefer to go there by ...
Metro. 7. How long does it take you to do ... homework? 8. Something has gone wrong with ...
vacuum-cleaner. I am sure it’s ... plug. 9. It is not pleasant to go by... Metro on such ... fine day.
Let’s go on ... foot. 10. Will you turn on ... radio? I should like to listen to ... seven o’clock news.
It’s ... pity you have never been to ... England. 12. My parents are still in ... town.

Exercise 12. Fill in prepositions or adverbs wherever necessary:

1. Ann begins to work ... half past eight. At half past twelve she goes ... to lunch. After
lunch she comes back ... her office and works ... four o’clock. At four o’clock she puts ... her hat
and coat and goes ... home. 2. The students ... our group are never a minute late ... the classes. 3.
It doesn’t take me long to get... the Institute. 4. When do you usually get...? 5. Will you turn ...
the light? The children are going ... bed. 6. We have turned ... the cassette-recorder and are going
to dance ... the music. 7. When I come ... home I take ... my coat and hang it... the hook. Then I
go ... the bathroom, turn ... the tap, wash my hands and dry them ... the towel. 8. What do you
press your clothes...? 9. Have you cleaned ... the table yet? 10. Let’s hurry or we’ll be late ... the
first lesson. 11. What kind of dress are you going to wear ... our party? 12. The button has come
... my coat. – Shall I sew it... for you? 13. Why have you turned ... the radio? - I am going to
listen ... the seven o’clock news. 14. Are you going ... bus? 15. Hurry ..., I’m short... time. 16.
Are you through ... your housework?

Exercise 13. Fill in the missing words:

1. Something has gone ... with the cassette-recorder. Can you put it...? 2. She is not up yet;
she is still.... 3. The classes are over. I am ... to go home. 4. I am ready to have a hot ... my teeth
and go to bed. 5. If you want to have a ..., let’s go for a walk. 6. I have ... my hands and now I am
going to ... them on the towel. 7. Before putting on my clothes and shoes I always ... them.
8.While the mother serves breakfast Susan and Peter ... the flat and ... the beds. 9. I am going
to present my brother with a sweater, which I have ... myself. 10. In the evening we usually
have some music or ... to the radio or ... the TV programme. Sometimes we ... to see our
friends or our friends ... to see us. Once a week we go to the cinema or to the theatre. 11. Do
you usually sit up late or do you ... to bed early? 12. Peter is a good sleeper, he is late and
often has no time for breakfast. 13. If the water feels cold on winter mornings you must rub
yourself with the. 14. There is a ... this evening at the club. 15. Something has gone wrong
with the.... Will you have a ... at it? 16. Please, turn on (off) the...! 17. Have you cleaned the...?
18. I’m ... for time, will you help me?
243
A. 1. He is forty. His wife is thirty-five. He is ... than his wife. 2. David is ten. Bob is eight.
Bob is ... than David. 3. Seventeen is ... than ten. 4. In August the weather is generally ... than in
October. 5. In May the days are ... than in March. 6. This book is ... interesting than that one. 7. I
think this exercise is the ... difficult. 8. How are you? - Thank you. I’m ... today. 9. I know
German ... than English.
B. 1. ... your lessons and be off! 2. You look so smart today. Where have you ... your hair?
3. How could you possibly ... so many mistakes in your dictation? 4. If you want to make a good
sportsman you must... morning exercises every day. 5. On her way home mother usually ... some
shopping. 6. I’m pressed for time. Will you ... the room yourself? 7. Skating will ... a lot of good.
8. I’d like you to ... friends with all the students of your group. 9. Isn’t it your turn to ... a report
today?

______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 14. Form one sentence of the given two using the following model:

Model: This mistake is gross. That mistake is not so gross. That mistake is not so gross as this
one.

1. These apples are tasty. Those apples are not so tasty. 2. The Volga is long. The Don is
not so long. 3. My house is tall. Your house is not so tall. 4. Tom's pronunciation is good. Your
pronunciation is worse. 5. The winter in Moscow is cold. The winter in London is not so cold. 6.
Your mother is young. My mother is not so young.

Exercise 15. a) Respond to the following sentences as in the model:

Model: I have already swept the floor. - Have you? I haven’t aired the room yet. – Haven’t you?

1. Mary has gone by bus. 2. The bell hasn’t gone yet. 3. I’ve had much practice in English.
4. Something has gone wrong with the gas stove. 5. I haven’t done my washing yet. 6. She has
just come. 7. I’ve done a lot to help him. 8. I haven’t been to the club for ages. 9. I’ve never been
late for the lectures. 10. I’ve already looked through the article.

b) Continue the exercise suggesting your own verbal context.

Exercise 16. Complete the following sentences and let your fellow-student respond to them:

1. I am (not) going to.... 2. Are you going to...? 3. It has taken me.... 4. Something has gone
wrong with.... 5. David is sure to.... 6. Are you sure to...? 7. Look here, Mary.... 8. I’m afraid....
244
9. I should like to.... 10. It is so nice to.... 11. What about...? 12. It doesn’t take me long to. 13.
Has it taken you long to...? 14. How long does it take you...? 15. It’s a pity to.... 16. It’s a pity
you haven’t ... .17. It’s a pity he can’t.... 18. How clever of you to.... 19.1 look forward to....
20. He can’t manage to....

Exercise 17. Think of stimulating phrases to which those below could be replies. Work in
pairs:

1. Thank you ever so much. 2. No more, thank you. 3. I’m afraid, I can’t. 4. Certainly! 5.
Here you are. 6. Just a moment. 7. It is out of the question. 8. I’d love to. 9. That’s all right.

Exercise 18. a) Respond to the following sentences. Work in pairs. b) Continue the
exercise suggesting your own verbal context of the same type:
1. May I come in? 2. What about going to the country together? 3. Will you help me, Nick? 4.
I’ve read many English books this month. 5. I should like to see that magazine. 6. Shall I air the
room? 7. Will you have another cup of tea? 8. Let me have a look at it. 9. Something has gone
wrong with my ball-pen.
Exercise 19. Choose the right verb:
to tell - to say
1. Mr. Smith ... Mr. Brown it is time to have a break for lunch. 2. Mr. Sandford ... his son he
is going to London. 3. Mrs. Watson ... her children that they must not go out on such a nasty day.
4. Susan ... her friends that she has a lot of work to do. 5. Mrs. Smith ... her sons that she has
already made toasts for them. 6. John ... his brother is a perfect sportsman. 7. The boy ... he is not
going to stay at home on such a fine day. 8. Tom ... his friend that he is always up at eight. 9.
The mother ... that she has already served breakfast. 10. The teacher ... the student that he has
made only a few mistakes in pronunciation. 11. The boy ... he has already aired the room. 12.
The girl... her mother that she doesn’t like boiled eggs. 13. The monitor ... we are going to have a
sitting of our English club tonight. 14. Mike ... his little brother is a very hard-working boy

Exercise 20. Use the following sentences in indirect speech. Make all the necessary changes:

1. Mary says to me: “I am already finishing this book.” 2. The girl says to her mother: “I
don't like porridge.” 3. Tom says to his friend: “I am going to the canteen.” 4. The boy says to
me: “I’m thirsty.” 5. The teacher says to the students: “You must be ready for the written test
tomorrow.” 6. Nick says to his mother: “I have already had dinner.” 7. Boris says to me: “My
father is leaving for Kiev.” 8. Nick says to me: “I have already paid for the lunch.” 9. Ida says to
her friends: “There is nothing to my taste on the menu.” 10. The girl says to her sister: “I haven’t
finished my supper yet.” 11. Tom says: “I can speak two foreign languages: English and
Spanish.” 12. Mary asks: “Has the bell gone?” 13. Tom asks: “Is Mary staying at home?” 14.
Nick says to Ann: “Don’t forget to air the room.” 15. John asks his father: “Has she left?” 16.
Tom asks Mary: “What is our next lesson?”

Exercise 21. Translate the following sentences into English:

A 1. Petru încă doarme? – Nu s-a trezit deja. 2.Când vin acasă, merg la baie, deschid robinetul,
îmi spăl mâinile şi le şterg cu prosopul. 3. Trebui să aerisiţi dormitorul înainte sa mergeţi la
culcare. 4. Mama îl roaga pe băiat să ia mătura şi să măture podeaua. 5. Vă deplasaţi la
universitate cu autobuzul? 6. Ce faci de obicei după lecţii? 7. Scoateţi paltonul şi atârnă-l pe
cuier. 8. Dansăm? – Cu plăcere. 9. Faci de obicei gimnastică cu muzică? 10. De cât timp ai
nevoie, ca să te deplasezi la universitate? – Aproximativ de o jumătate de oră. 11. Am nevoie de
un sfert de oră pentru a mă pieptăna şi a mă îmbrăca. 12. Ceva sa întâmplat cu televizorul, nu
funcţionează. 13. Conectează fierul de călcat şi calcă-i tatălui jacheta. (to plug in). 14. Ce faci
245
 acum? – Calc lenjeria. 15. La ora opt tata îşi pune paltonul şi pălăria şi pleacă la lucru. 16. Ce ai
de gând să faci? – Am de gând să fac baie. 17. Să mergem la săniuş! – Mă tem că nu am să pot.
18. Hai, am să te ajut să faci curăţenie în cameră. 19. Ce cât timp ai nevoie să pregăteşti lucrarea
de laborator nr. 12? 20. Este foarte cald. Aş vrea să fac un duş rece. 21. Băiatul a terminat să
mănânce terciul și acum bea cafea cu o tartină. 22. Am deschis fereastra, pentru a aerisi camera.
23. Ai împletit deja puloverul? – Nu încă. Am de gând să-l termin mâine. 24. Grăbeşte-te, altfel
vom întârzia la prima lecţie. 25. Unde este sora ta? – ea spală vesela la bucătărie. 26. Băiatul a
rugat-o pe mama să-i coase un nasture la palton. 27. Hai să conectăm casetofonul și să ascultăm
muzică. 28. Ce faci? – Mă pregătesc pentru lecţia de engleză. – Ce ai de gând să faci după aceea?
– Am de gând să cânt la pian. 29. Ai auzit ultimele noutăţi? – Da. 30. Ce faci? – Am spălat
lenjeria şi acum o calc. 31. Haideţi să ne adunăm după lecţii şi să mergem la plimbare
împreună.32. Îmi place rochia cu care erai îmbrăcată ieri. 33. De ce este întuneric în cameră? –
Ce va s-a întâmplat cu lampa. 34. Eşti sigură că ai stins lumina? – Da.
1. Acum la sat aproape fiecare familie are un aparat de radio şi un televizor. De aceea oamenii
pot privi televizorul şi asculta la radio acasă. Unii din ei merg la sala de citire, ca să citească o
carte, un ziar ori o revistă. Alţii merg la club, dacă este un concert sau se derulează un film nou.
2. Este bine pentru copil să stea în faţa televizorului toată seara? – Desigur că nu. Copiii
trebuie să petreacă mai mult timp la aer. 3. Ce faceţi de obicei serile? – De obicei suntem acasă.
O dată sau de două ori pe săptămână mergem la săniuş, la teatru sau la cinema. Surorii

B. mele îi place foarte mult muzica şi mergem deseori la concert. Uneori privim
televizorul, dacă este în programă (on the programme) ceva interesant. Mergeţi în oraş deseară?
(to go out) – Nu cred. – Atunci să mergem la clubul universităţii. Acolo va fi un concert.
Vă va plăcea cu siguranţă. –Mulţumesc, cu plăcere. 4. Ceva s-a întâmplat cu aparatul de radio.
Nu funcţionează. Lasă-mă să-l văd. Crezi că-l poţi repara? – Desigur. – De cât timp ai
nevoie pentru acesta? – Destul pe puţin. E gata. Poftim. – Ce bravo eşti! Mulţumesc mult! – Cu
plăcere.

Exercise 22. Make up short dialogues using the given statements:

Model: A: I have done a lot of work about the house.

B: What do you tell me?
A: I tell you that I have done a lot of work about the house.
B: What does A tell B?
D: A tells B that she has done a lot of work about the house.

1. I have never been to London. 2. Mary has already had some practice at the laboratory. 3.
We don’t like this poem. 4. They are leaving for the Crimea tomorrow. 5. I am not going to stay
at home. 6. It takes me half an hour to get to the skating-rink. 7. My parents always listen to the
seven o’clock news. 8. I can sew a button on for you. 9. There is a new film on this evening at
the club. 10. Nick can repair your cassette-recorder very easily.

Exercise 23. Read and translate the following. Pick out all the words, word combinations
and phrases that can be used for the topic “Housework” or “The Daily Programme”:

I.
David: Look, dear, a button has come off my coat.
Mary: Have you got the button?
David: Yes, I have.
Mary: Well, bring me my sewing-basket from the next room.
David: Here you are!
Mary: Thank you. I must get a needle and some thread.
David: Shall I thread the needle for you? It is not an easy thing to get the thread through the eye
246
of the needle, is it?
Mary: Ah, I’ve done it. Now take your coat off and I’ll sew the button on for you.

II .
This is my daily programme. I wake at about seven o’clock and then it is time for me to get up. I
like a cold shower every morning, so I put on my dressing-gown and slippers and go to the
bathroom. The water feels very cold on winter mornings, but I rub myself hard with the towel
and soon I feel quite warm.
Then I shave, brush my teeth, wash my face and go back to the bedroom to dress. I brush and
comb my hair, take a clean handkerchief out of the drawer and have breakfast at a quarter past
eight. After breakfast I sit and read my morning paper. If the weather is fine, I usually walk to
my office. At nine o’clock the day’s work begins. At twelve-thirty I have a break for lunch.
I generally finish my work about six o’clock. Then I have a cup of tea and a biscuit, and
in summer I spend an hour or so out-of-doors, play a few games of tennis or volley-ball.
We have supper about seven-thirty or eight o’clock and then we sit and talk, or listen to the
wireless. Often in summer we take out the car and go for a run in the country; in winter we go to
the cinema or the theatre. But that is not often. I have a lot of work to do, and usually after
supper I read or write until twelve or one o'clock.

Exercise 24. a) Make up a dialogue on the following situation:

You ask your friend when she usually gets up and at what time she leaves her house. You ask her
if she does any work about the house in the morning and how long it takes her to get to the
Institute.

b) Suggest a situation for your fellow-student to give it in the form of a dialogue.

Exercise 25. Make up a conversation using the vocabulary of the lesson and conversational
phrases.

Exercise 26. a) Speak on the topic “Housework”. b) Give an account of your own daily
programme (your father's).

Exercise 27. a) Think of a proverb, which could be applied to your daily round. b) Make up
a conversation with your fellow-student to finish it with this proverb.

Lesson 2.

Grammar: The Present Perfect Continuous.

Table 1.

Positive Negative Interrogative

I have been working I haven’t been working Have I been working?

You have been You haven’t been Have you been

working working working?

247
 He, she, it has been He hasn’t been Has she been working?
working working

We have been working We haven’t been Have we been

working working?

You have been You haven’t been Have you been

working working working?

They have been They haven’t been Have they been

working working working?

Basic Construction

Positive
Subject + has / have + been + verb + ing + object(s) + time Expression

e.g. He’s been cleaning house for two hours.

Negative
Subject + has / have not (hasn’t / haven’t) + been + verb + ing + object(s) + time Expression

e.g. Janice hasn't been studying for too long.

Question
(Question Word) + has / have + subject + been + verb + ing + object(s) + (time Expression)

e.g. How long have you been working in the garden?

The present perfect continuous tense uses the auxiliary verb “have - has” and -ing added to
the main verb. It refers to an action that started in the past, but has continued to the present or has
just finished.

The present perfect continuous tense is used when:

- The action started in the past and continues up to the present; to put emphasis on the
duration of an action;
- The action continued at the time of speaking/writing; or the action just finished at the
time of speaking/writing;
- The statement answers “how long” an action has been happening; the action has
happened continuously with stopping;
- The action has recently finished and its result is evident now.

Note: 1). We use the present perfect simple instead of the present perfect continuous with non-
continuous verbs (know, believe, like, etc.)

248
e.g. I’ve known Sharon since we were at school together.

2) With the verbs, feel and work we can use the present perfect continuous or the present
perfect simple with no difference in meaning.

e.g. He has been living/has lived here since 1994.

Time expressions used with the present perfect continuous include:

for, since, all morning/afternoon/week/day. etc., how long (in questions)

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. a) Make up sentences using Table 1. (Lesson 2) b) Compose your own sentences
of the same kind.

Exercise 2. What have these people been doing? Make sentences using an appropriate verb
in the present perfect continuous:
e.g. Catherine went to the supermarket an hour ago. She’s still there. Catherine has been
shopping for an hour.

1. My mum began cooking three hours ago. She hasn’t finished yet. 2. The teams started playing
football twenty minutes ago. They haven’t finished yet. 3. The headmaster started speaking two
hours ago. He hasn’t stopped yet. 4. Bill began building his house six months ago. He hasn’t
finished it yet. 5. I started doing my homework three hours ago. I haven’t finished it yet.

Exercise 3. In pairs, ask and answer questions using the prompts given, as in the example:

e.g.
- What’s your favourite hobby?
- Painting.
- How long have you been painting?
- I’ve been painting since I was fourteen years old.

1. Favourite hobby 2. Best friend/know 3. Favourite TV programme/watch 4. Your

address/live 5. Favourite magazine/read

Exercise 4. Put the verbs in brackets into the present perfect continuous:

A: Hi Uzi. You look exhausted. 1). Have you been working? (You/work) overtime again?
B: Yes, I have. I 2). (help) my boss to update the files in the office
all week. He 3). (read) the files and I 4).
(write) down names. Address, phone numbers and so on. What
about you.
A: Well, I 5). (train) hard for the championship next week.
B: I see! 6). (you/lift) weights all day long?
A: Yes, for two weeks. How’s Sue? 7). (she/study) for her exams?
B: No, she hasn’t. She 8). (go) out every evening. I won’t be
surprised if she fails again!

249
Exercise 5. Give the interrogative and negative forms of the following sentences:
1. He has been working at his report since 10 o’clock. 2. They have been writing their test
for nearly two hours already. 3. She has been waiting long. 4. His daughter has been playing the
piano since the morning. 5. They have been discussing this problem for rather a long time. 6. The
child has been sleeping too long. 7. Ann and Roger have been quarrelling for fifteen minutes. 8.
She has been dreaming to become an actress all her life. 9. I have been doing my lessons since 4
o’clock.

Exercise 6. Put the verbs in brackets in the Present Perfect or the Present Perfect
Continuous:

1. How long you (to wait) for me? 2. I (to know) her since my childhood. 3. He (to think)
about it for three days. 4. They always (to prefer) theatre to TV. 5. How long she (to study)
music? - Oh, she (to study) music since her early childhood. 6. Since she was a little girl she (to
try) not to take things seriously. 7. The students (to write) their test for two hours already. 8. She
(to live) in that house round the corner about thirty years. 9. You (to play) too long. It’s high
time to do your lessons. 10. She (to be ill) for more than two weeks. I (to miss) her terribly.

Exercise 7. Translate the following sentences into English:

1. Eu vă aştept de 20 minute deja. 2. Savanţii lucrează asupra acestei probleme de mulţi

ani. 3. Jean toată viaţa visează să călătorească în Orient. 4. Eu traduc articolul de dis-de-
dimineaţă. 5. Ea doarme de mult timp deacum. E timpul să o trezim. 6. Ana şi Roger se ceartă de
dis-de-dimineaţă. 7. Noi locuim în această căsuţă de o săptămână deacum. 8. De prea mult timp
voi discutaţi această problemă. 9. Locuiţi de mult timp aici? 10. El chiar se ocupă (studiază) atât
de mult? 11. Ai împachetat deacum lucrurile? Taxiul aşteaptă de zece minute deja. 12. El
întotdeauna s-a interesat de fizică. El acum studiază o nouă problemă. El s e ocupă de această de
două luni deja. 13. N. este autorul unor nuvele foarte interesante. Nu demult a finisat o istorioară
şi acum scrie alta. El lucrează asupra ei de o lună şi spune că o scrie cu plăcere.14. Noi suntem
aici de la începutul lunii dar în tot acest timp vremea a fost foarte urâtă. 15. Plouă de dimineaţă.

Exercise 8. Use the Present Perfect or the Present Perfect Continuous instead of the
infinitives in brackets:

1. She (to paint), pretending to paint, for about six hours. 2. I (to do) a great deal of work today.
3. I (to read) your composition. I think you’ll have to polish it up a bit. 4. They (to build) that
bridge for several months, but they (not to finish) it yet. 5. He (to grow) so old that he
spends most of his time sitting in an easy-chair. 6. “You’ll have to speak louder, I’m afraid. I (to
become) very deaf,” said Randan. 7. What you (to do) with yourself, Edward, since I saw you
last? 8. I expect you (to have) already a talk with Henry. He looks more cheerful. 9. This picture
(to hang) here for as long as I can remember. 10. Edward is coming! How nice! I (not to see)
Edward for years. 11. What you (to do) since Sunday? 12. I want to talk to you, Aileen. I (to
want) to talk to you for a long time. 13. Well, Bunter? - Everything (to be done) that can be
done, my lady. 14. It’s no use denying, my dear Dick, that you (to think) too much lately. 15. He
(to lose) his dictionary. He (to look) for it all day, but (not to find) it yet. 16. She (to read) all the
plays by Galsworthy. How many you (to read)? 17. Jim (not to be) here for three weeks. 18. I
can’t wait any longer. I (to wait) since five o’clock. 19. I (not to have) a good night’s sleep since
last week. 20. On the porch he looked over his shoulder and noticed a dark figure disappear
round the corner of the house. “Somebody (to follow) me again,” he thought.

Exercise 9. Complete each sentence with two to five words including the word in bold:
250
e.g. When did Paul sell his house? – since: How long is it since Paul sold his house?
1. Mark started playing the guitar three years ago. – has: Mark playing
the guitar for three years. 2. The children haven’t finished their homework yet. – still: the
children their homework. 3. When did you last decorate your living
room? – since: How long is it your living-room? 4. We haven’t called
the plumber yet. – still: We the plumber.

Exercise 10. Correct the mistakes:

1. I have looked for him all day. I can’t find him. 2. He has trying to fix the car all morning.
3. I have buying lots of food this week. 4. I not have bought any shampoo. 5. It has been snowed.
But it’s stopped now. 6. How long they have been cleaning the house? 6. I’ve been knowing
Lilian for two years. 7. Have you read? Your eyes are red.

OUR UNIVERSITY

Exercise 1. What do you know about the university you’ve been studying?

Exercise 2. How many universities are there in your country/city? Name a few of them.

Exercise 3. Read, translate and retell the text (A Letter):

Our University

Dear Helen,
Don’t be angry with me for my long silence, but really I was too busy to write.
As you know, I left school in June and began to prepare for my entrance exams to the
University. As both my mother and father are teachers I have made up my mind to be a teacher
too. I think teaching is a noble profession.
I had to take four exams and passed all of them with excellent marks. So I’m glad to tell you
that now I’m a first-year student at the Moscow State Teacher Training University.
I should like to show you the main building of our University. I can’t help admiring this fine
old building with its beautiful columns. The first students entered it more than 120 years ago.
It goes without saying we, students, are very proud of this fact.
There are 18 faculties at our University which train teachers in many subjects: Russian,
Literature, Mathematics, Physics, Geography, Chemistry, Biology, Foreign languages and
others. Many well-known professors teach at our University.
We have good libraries and reading-rooms and for those who go in for sports there are good
gymnasiums and a stadium.
At present we have quite a lot of work as we have English practice, Grammar and Phonetics,
Linguistics, History of our native land and other subjects. There is an English speaking club at
our faculty. It gives us a good opportunity to master the language, but I don’t take part in it
yet. I’m working hard at my pronunciation. There is a good language laboratory at our faculty
where we work with cassette-recorders. It helps us to find out our mistakes and to get rid of
them in the shortest possible time.
So that’s the latest news about myself. Please write to me about your life and studies.
My best regards to your parents.

Yours, Ann.

Exercise 4. Read and role-play the dialogue:

251
 A telephone call
Alex is about to ring up a friend of his. He picks up the receiver, and dials the number. The first
time the line is engaged but then he gets through.
A: Bob?
B: Speaking
A: This is Alex. Hello, old chap. Haven’t heard from you for ages. How are you?
B: Oh, hello, Alex. I’m fine, thanks.
A: Wonderful, I hear you passed all your entrance exams with excellent marks. So you are a
student now, aren’t you?
B: Well yes, and you?
A: I wasn’t so lucky at the exams, in fact. I only got good marks in the main subjects: physics
and maths.
B: I wonder if you find it difficult to study mathematics.
A: Rather. I spend a lot of time doing my home assignment. But I’m not at all sorry. You’ve got
to work hard to make good progress.
В: Do you have time to go in for sports?
A: Yes, of course, I joined the University sports society, as I’m fond of skating, skiing and
tennis.
B: As for me, I’m a member of our English speaking club. I’ve joined our drama society and the
choir. They say I’m rather good at both singing and acting.
A: Good, isn’t it? Hope to see you some day. Will you invite me to your club?
B: Sure.
A: By the way, I’ve got a new telephone number. It is now 235...
B: Just a second. I must have a pen to put it down. Yes?
A: So I repeat 235-60-57. I’ll be expecting your call. Bye-bye.
B: So long, then.

Vocabulary
Angry adj., anger n., to be angry with smb., e.g. She was angry with me because I was late.;
silence n.; silent adj.;Keep silent! e.g. Keep silent, I can’t hear anything! ; to leave school (no
article!) – Cf – to go to school, to go by bus, to go to bed; entrance n ; entrance exams; Ant.
exit; enter vt; Syn. come vi; Ant. leave vt, e. g. He entered Room 5. Come in!; mind n.; vt to
make up one’s mind = decide: Never mind! To my mind. ; exam(ination) n; examine vt;
examiner n; to take an exam; to pass one's exam, e. g. Не took an exam in Geography but he
didn’t pass it.; mark n; to give a mark; a mark for an answer; a mark in a subject, e. g. He
got a satisfactory mark in Physics. The teacher gave me a five for my answer yesterday.; train
vt, to train teachers; one can’t help (doing smth.) e.g. I couldn’t help smiling, the child was so
funny. ; admire vt; admiration n, e. g. We all admire your singing. The people looked at the
actress in admiration.; It goes without saying., e.g. It goes without saying we help those who
need our help.; proud adj., pride n., to be proud of smth. e.g. We are all proud of our country.;
subjects; Literature, Mathematics (Maths), Physics, Geography, Chemistry, Biology, a
Foreign language, Linguistics. Professor n.; scientist n., science n., scientific adj.; research
worker; to go in for, e.g. The students of our group go in for sports.; opportunity n., e.g. This
is a good opportunity to help them. To master the language; hard adj./adv/, Cf. hard work, to
work hard at smth., hardworking; to get rid of, e.g. I can’t get rid of my mistakes.; Best
regards to… = syn. Remember me to …; receiver n., to pick up the receiver; to hang up;
dial vt., dial n.; the line is engaged (free); to engage: Hold the line, please.; to get through;
Are you through?; lucky adj., e.g. I know him, he is always lucky; spend (spent, spent) vt. e.g.
He spent much money on books. I spend much time on my English.; to make (good) progress,
e.g. We hope to make good progress in English.; They say… , e.g. They say it is going to be
cold.; to be good at smth. (or at doing smth), e.g. She is very good at singing.
Telephone Talk:
252
a telephone-booth; a call-box; insert a coin in the slot; buzz, buzzing sound; long-distance call; to
be disconnected (to be cut off); to get the wrong number; St. Petersburg is on the wire.
Letter Writing:
Opening greetings endings (on the left-hand side of the page)
Dear Sir (Dear Madam),
Dear Mr. Brown, Respectfully
My dear sister, passionately yours Dearest Mother

Corresponding polite (on the right-hand side of the page)

Yours truly; Yours faithfully, Yours very truly; yours Affect
Your loving daughter

Exercise 5. Make up questions covering the content of text “A telephone call” (ex. 4) for
your fellow-students to answer them.

Exercise 6. Fill in prepositions or adverbs if necessary:

1. First-year students work hard to master ... the language. 2. What mark did you get... Literature
... the entrance exams? 3. What mark have you got... your report? 4. “Try to get rid ... this gross
mistake,” said the teacher. 5. When did you make a report ... this book? 6. Our nephew is very
good ... maths. 7. Why don’t you take part... our discussion? 8. We decided to join ... the English
choir. 9. Where have you been? We haven’t seen you ... ages. 10. When the monitor entered ...
the classroom the students kept silent. 11. Cousin Helen sends her best regards ... everybody. 12.
The girl has invited her friends ... her birthday party. 13. What kind of sports does he go ? – He
is good ... tennis and volley-ball. 14. I see you are angry ... me, but I don’t understand why you
do not answer ... my question. 15. Did he often write ... his mother when he was ... the South?
16. The students are proud ... their Institute. 17. They are all very fond ... the English speaking
club. 18. Two of my fellow-students are away... the lessons today.

Exercise 7. a) Write questions to the parts of the sentences in bold type. b) Each sentence
describes a situation in a concise way. Find out some more details about it by asking
questions. Work in pairs. Use conversational phrases:

1. I left school in June. I began to prepare for my entrance exams to the institute. 2. The first
students entered the Institute more than 100 years ago. 3. We all gathered at my cousin’s
place to see the New Year in. 4.I was just writing a letter to my brother when the door-bell
rang and he himself entered.

Exercise 8. Fill in articles where necessary:

1. His son left ... school two years ago. 2. Helen passed ... entrance exams to ... Institute
with excellent marks. 3. My favourite subject at ... school was ... Literature. 4. My brother goes
in for ... sports. 5. It was decided to finish ... building of ... house in ... shortest possible time. 6.
I’m going to join ... sports society. 7. He is ... member of ... students’ English club. 8. We
haven’t yet had ... discussion on ... book we are reading now. 9. I got ... satisfactory mark for ...
test. 10. Read and translate ... text, do ... Exercise 5 orally and ... Exercise 8 in ... written form.
11. He turned on ... radio as he was going to listen to ... news. 12. ... Pacific Ocean is seldom
quiet. 13. I’m afraid he is so short of... time.

Exercise 9. Express a similar idea by using the synonymic expression to make up one's
mind:
Model: We decided to learn to swim. We made up our minds to learn to swim.
253
1. I decided to go for a walk as it was a pleasant evening. 2. We decided to answer his
question in written form. 3. He decided to speak to the assistant-dean about his work. 4. Our
cousin decided to go to the country for his holiday. 5. He decided to recite his new poem to his
friends. 6. He decided to get an excellent mark in English. 7. He decided to master two foreign
languages.

Exercise 10. Intensify the idea of liking by using to be fond of:

Model: I like dancing. I am fond of dancing.

1. I like Tchaikovsky’s music. 2. The girls liked to spend time in the open air. 3. I like
swimming. 4. He likes Byron’s poetry. 5. We all like Moldavian nature. 6. The old man liked
this beautiful park.

Exercise 11. Intensify the idea by using the construction one can’t help doing smth.:

Model: I laughed at the boy. I couldn’t help laughing at the boy.

1. We love Repin’s work, he is a great artist. 2. I went to my sister’s yesterday, it was my

niece’s birthday. 3. I invited Helen, she is one of my best friends. 4. I entered a teachers’ training
institute, I love children. 5. I told her everything. She wanted to know all about her mother. 6. I
smiled while looking at that funny animal.

Exercise 12. Intensify the idea by adding it goes without saying at the beginning of each of
the given sentences:

Model: We are proud of our University. It goes without saying we are proud of our University.

1. We read a newspaper every day. 2. We must work systematically if we want to know

English well. 3. She will get an excellent mark. 4. His work is very interesting. 5. Teaching is a
noble profession. 6. He is a well-bred person. 7. We are eager to master the English language.

Exercise 13. Give sentences with the construction to take part using the following words:

discussion, concert, work, excursion, expedition, and picnic.

Exercise 14. Give sentences with the constructions to go in for and to be good at using the
following words. Explain their meaning:

Music, sports, poetry, painting, swimming, singing, foreign languages.

Exercise 15. a) Let the members of the class ask and answer questions. Give short answers
and add a sentence of your own in the Past Indefinite or Past Continuous Tenses as in the
models.

Model 1: When did he take his exam in History? - On Wednesday. He passed it successfully.
Model 2: Were they playing chess when he returned? - No, (they weren’t). They were having
supper.

b) Respond to the negative sentence of your fellow-student as in the model. Use contracted
forms in speech.

254
Model 1: He didn’t leave Moscow the other day. - No, (he didn’t). He left only yesterday. Model
2: The girls were not playing the piano when he came. - No, (they weren’t). They were listening
to the news.

Exercise 16. Ask one another questions as in the model. Repeat your question beginning it
with I asked if.... Student B. could start answering with Sorry I didn’t catch that; I’m afraid 1
missed that, I beg your pardon; Would you mind repeating that, please.

Model: A: Did you take part in the discussion?

B: I’m afraid I didn't quite hear what you said.
A: I asked if you took part in the discussion.
B: I did. The discussion was very interesting.

Exercise 17. Translate the following into English:

1. Ne străduim să participăm la discuţiile despre filmele noi. Noi participăm la viaţa socială
a universităţii. Participăm la activitatea clubului de limbă engleză. 2. De ce nu participaţi la
lucrul nostru (la concertul nostru, la discuţia noastră)? 3. El se ocupă cu sportul, muzica, pictura,
limbile, lucrul ştiinţific, cântul, arta. 4. Acei care vin din alte oraşe stau la cămin. 5. El a decis
să intre la universitatea pedagogică din Chişinău (să devină învăţător, să înveţe intens în
semestrul acesta). 6. Nu pot să nu mă opresc când văd acest copil drăguţ. Nu puteam să nu
mă înscriu la universitatea pedagogică, îmi plac copiii. 7. Copiii sunt mândri de tatăl lor
marinar. Sunt mândri de succesul lor. Ei toţi au susţinut examenul şi au primit note excelente.
Locuitorii Chişinăului se mândresc cu oraşul lor. Este într-adevăr un oraş nou şi minunat. 8.
Nu te supăra pe mine. Este greşeala mea. Sunt supărat pe mine, pentru că am întârziat (pentru
că n- am răspuns la scrisoarea lor). 9. Se înţelege de la sine că el ne-a ajutat. 10. Nu pot
să scap de greşeala aceasta de pronunţare (de gânduri rele, de boala aceasta). 11. Când aţi
susţinut ultimul examen. – Am susţinut ultimul examen pe data de 12 august. Ea a susţinut
ultimul examen. Aţi susţinut acest examen? – Da, am susţinut ultimul examen şi acum sunt
liber. El n-a susţinut cu noi examenul, deoarece era bolnav. N-a reuşit la examen. Noi vom
susţine examenul la engleză în ianuarie. Sper că toţi vom reuşi.

Exercise 18. Complete the following sentences:

1. I made up my mind ... .2. Next Wednesday we shall take part in .... 3. Did you take part in ...?
4. It goes without saying ... . 5.1 can’t get rid of ... . 6. He found out that... . 7. I am fond of 8.
Do you find it difficult to .... 9. My elder sister is very good at... . 10. I can’t help ... . 11. We are
proud of ... . 12. Did you manage to...?

Exercise19. Think of situations using the following words and word combinations:

a) to take an exam (exams); to get a mark; to enter an institute; to take part in; not to make
mistakes; to be lucky;
b) to get rid of; to be good at; to make a report on; they say.

Exercise 20. Make up sentences using the following word combinations:

to be angry with; to take part in; to give a mark; to get a mark in (a subject); to make progress; to
be good at; to be lucky; to join smth.; to find out; to make up one's mind; to make mistakes; to do
homework (lab work); to go in for; to take an exam in (a subject); to pass the exam; to get rid of;
to be proud of; one can't help doing smth.; to master the language.

255
 Lesson 3.

Grammar: Used to/ to be used to / to get used to

Used to

Used to + verb refers to a habit or state in the past. It is used only in the past simple.

Past habits
We used to live there when I was a child.
If you used to do something, you did it for a
I used to walk to work every day when I was
period of time in the past, but you don't do it
younger.
anymore.
Past states
We also say used to to express a state that I used to like The Beatles but now I never listen
existed in the past but doesn’t exist now. to them.
States are not actions. They are expressed He used to have long hair but nowadays his hair
using stative verbs such as have, believe, is very short.
know and like.
The form of the question is
did(n’t) + subject + use to be. Did(n’t) he use to work in your office?
The form of the negative is We didn’t use to be vegetarians.
subject + didn’t + use to be.

Be used to
Be used to + noun phrase or verb-ing (in
this pattern used is an adjective and to is a I am used to getting up early in the
preposition). morning. I don’t mind it.
If you are used to something, you have He didn’t complain about the noise next-
often done or experienced it, so it’s not door - he was used to it.
strange, new or difficult for you.
The opposite of be used to is be not used
I am not used to the new system yet.
to.

Get used to
Get used to + noun phrase or verb-ing (in
this pattern used is an adjective and to is a
preposition). I got used to getting up early in the
morning.
If you get used to something, you become After a while he didn’t mind the noise in the
accustomed to it. office – he got used to it.
It is the process of becoming used to
something.

256
 Used to

We use ‘used to’ for something that happened regularly in the past but no longer happens:

e.g. I used to smoke a packet a day but I stopped two years ago. I used to drive to work but now I
take the bus.

We also use it for something that was true but no longer is:

e.g. There used to be a cinema in the town but now there isn’t.

to be used to doing

We use ‘to be used to doing’ to say that something is normal, not unusual:

e.g. I’m used to living on my own. I’ve done it for quite a long time.

to get used to doing

We use ‘to get used to doing’ to talk about the process of something becoming normal for
us:

e.g. I didn’t understand the accent when I first moved here but I quickly got used to it. She has
started working nights and is still getting used to sleeping during the day.

Grammar exercises:

Exercise 1. Choose the correct form of used to:

1. I go to the beach every day. Use to/uses to/used to/use

2. I didn’t play tennis. Use to/uses to/used to/use
3. Susan drink milk when she was young. Didn’t use to/use to/has/was
4. I didn’t watch television. Use to/uses to/used to/use
5. What you use to wear at school? Did/do/are/have
6. Did they go to the cinema? Used to/use/used/use to
7. People travel on horses. Used to/use/used/use to
8. Ted used to my best friend, but he lives in Canada now. Is/be/are/being
9. We play marbles. Used to/used/use to/use
10. My mother cook for me, but now my wife cooks at home. Used to/used/use to/use
11. I start work at o’clock. Used to/used/use to/use
12. We didn’t swim in the river. Used to/used/use to/use
13. Pele play football in Brazil. Used to/used/use to/use

Exercise 2. Complete the sentences with the affirmative, negative or interrogative form of
used to and the words in brackets. Use contractions where possible. (used to/didn’t use
to/didn’t use to/Did they use to/used to/did you use to/didn’t use to/used to):

1. David Beckham play for Manchester United. 2. We

have a computer, but we do now.3. (they) work together?4. That restaurant
be a clothes shop.5. She like him, but now they're married. 6.

257
Where (you) go to school? 7. There be a police station here.
8. I like vegetables, but I do now.

Exercise 3. Complete the sentences with the correct form of used to and the verb in
brackets:

e.g. I didn’t use to watch (not/watch) the news, but now I watch it every day.

1. My aunt (drink) a lot of coffee, but now she prefers to drink tea. 2. We
(live) in a flat, but we live in a big house now. 3. (you/go) to school on
foot? 4. We (not/like) each other but now we’re good friends. 5. I (not/eat)
vegetables, now I eat them every day. 6. My sister (play) the piano, but now she
doesn’t. 7. They (spend) their weekends in the country side. They don’t any more.

Exercise 4. In pairs, ask and answer questions using the prompts as in the example:

SA: Did you use to play with your friends when you were five?
SB: Yes, I did./No, I didn’t.

1. play with your friends? 6. listen to fairy tales?

2. watch many cartoons? 7. have a bath every day?
3. go to bed late? 8. drink milk?
4. cry a lot? 9. dress yourself?
5. make your bed? 10. get pocket money?

Exercise 5. What did people use to do in their free time sixty years ago? And what they do
now? In pairs, ask and answer questions using the prompts below as in the example:

e.g. SA: Did people use to watch TV sixty years ago?

SB: No, they didn’t

Watch TV – dress differently – spend more time together – talk to each other a lot – go out at
night much – read more

Exercise 6. Choose the correct answer:

1. Jacques Cousteau B the ocean.

A explores B explored C is exploring
2. Toby a bicycle, but now he drives a car.
A is riding B used to ride C rides
3. I an interesting book at the moment.
A don’t read B read C am reading
4. He home early yesterday because he felt ill.
A went B i s going C used to go
5. Mr Jones but he does now.
A used to travel B didn’t use to travel C travelled
6. I a noise. So I went to see what it was.
A heard B hear C am hearing
7. Bobby how to use a computer at present.
A learnt B is learning C learns
258
8. My parents to a party tonight.
A used to go B goes C are going
9. The ferry boat every day at quarter past two.
A leaves B leave C is leaving

Exercise 7. Complete the text below:

Life was different sixty years ago. People 1) (not/have) the things we have
nowadays. First of all, they 2) (not/watch) TV and they 3)
(talk) to each other a lot. Nowadays, people 4) (not/talk) to each other much
because they 5) (spend) a lot of time watching TV. Sixty years ago, people. 6)
(dress) differently. For example, women 7) (wear) longer
dresses and men usually 8) (wear) a suit and a tie on Sundays.

COLLEGE LIFE

Exercise 1. First, listen to the conversation, and answer the questions (TS 9.1):

1. What does the man want to do after he graduates? A. He wants to become a teacher. B.
He hopes to go on to graduate school. C. He’d like to work at a hotel.
2. What is the woman majoring in? A. history B. FrenchC. computer science
3. How does the woman pay for college? A. She has a part-time job.B. She received a
scholarship. C. Her parents are paying for it.
4. Where does the man work part-time? A. at a bakery B. in a library C. at a restaurant
5. What thing did the man NOT say about his job? A. His co-workers are friendly. B. He
works long hours. C. The pay is okay.

Exercise 2. Interview another student about the topics below and report your findings to
the class:
• online education programs and graduate schools
• entrance requirements and exams
• classroom environment
• teacher-student relationship
• student housing
• part-time employment
• club activities

Exercise 3. Finding the right school for you can be a long and complicated process, and
school advertisements often make the process even more difficult. What advertising
techniques do colleges and universities use to get the attention of prospective students?
What factors are important to you when choosing a school? Compare the Web sites of two
schools that provide the types of educational experience you are looking for and evaluate
them based on the types of classes they offer, the cost of tuition, the reputation and
experience of the instructional staff, and finally the learning/cultural opportunities in the
local community in which the school is located.

259
 College life

“College life – what can sounds more exciting for a young person? Many people have been
waiting this time since school. Then the school-leavers shall pass the entrance exams. And
finally, one turns from an applicant into a first-year student. I did it! I entered; I got in to the
university! Do you remember this feeling? I do. But just to pass the exams – it’s not quite
enough, because we need to definite our objects in the life. Which college will be yours? The
Teacher’s Training University? The Medical University? The Technical University? Or it will be
the Art School? The world is full of specialties and professions, that’s why everyone can find
something for himself. Finally, all thoughts are left behind and everyone has chosen what he
liked most. The first thing every student will face at the first of September is a teaching staff.
How many people work for the sake of our education: professors, assistant professors, senior
lectures, lectures, tutors, heads of departments, sub deans and the dean? What respectable people
are they! And don’t forget about the rector or the vice-rector. All of them come every day for us.
Many people think that the university is much easier to study than school. But it’s a big
mistake. From the very first classes the avalanche of home assignments falls on us. We have to
keep late hours if we want to manage to keep pace with the curriculum. But if one accidental
misses something, he has to catch up instead hanging out with his friends. As for me, my studies
keep me busy all day long. I have 10 hours of English a week, in spite of many seminars and
lectures. My favourite subjects are history and English, because they make my brain fit. Then
many students start to give up the education. At first they cease to do their homework, and then
miss classes. Many of these people drop out of university, but, basically, they will be expelled.
We need to make right decision and get through this time. But even independently of one’s
decision the examination period comes very soon. Someone will be crammed; someone will drill
till late night. At that time we almost forget about sweet dreams because twenty-four hours a day
we are preparing for our exams.
So, the first session is behind. Everyone is truly overexcited. It is always the day of smiles
and tears: some may say I have passed, while someone is going to resist. But it’s just the
beginning. The summer session will be waiting for us, and if everything will be alright, we will
be the sophomores. I always say: hard to learn, easy in a battle. I firmly believe that it’s
undisputed truth. I wish good luck to every student.”

Vocabulary
Academic Dean: Chief administrator of a college within a university.
Academic Probation: Students with low grades (under 2.0 GPA) will be placed on academic
probation, a written stipulation to improve grades within that semester to avoid dismissal.
Advisor: A staff or faculty assigned to help you discuss your educational plans including your
course scheduling.
Catalogue: A comprehensive resource listing college regulations, program and course
descriptions, degree and graduation requirements, transfer requirements and other essential
information.
CLEP: (College Level Examination Program) Comprehensive tests given in familiar subjects to
earn credit for those subjects without taking the course.
Comprehensive Test: A test that covers all material covered in a course.
Credit: A unit of measure for college work. Generally speaking, one credit hour represents one
hour of classroom attendance each week for the semester, plus the study time, homework, etc.
that go along with it.
Credit Load: The total credit value of the courses a student is currently enrolled in.
Cumulative GPA: The average grade points for all courses taken.
Curriculums: Programs of study; degree requirements
Deficiency: Unsatisfactory progress report of work in a course. Deficiencies are sent out at mid-
term.
260
Degree: A rank conferred by a college or university and earned by a student who has
successfully completed specified courses and requirements.
Drop Date: The last day you can drop a class without a grade being assigned.
GPA: (Grade Point Average) Your GPA is figured out by multiplying class letter grades (A = 4,
B = 3, C = 2, D = 1, F = 0) by the number of credits for each class, totalling your results for all
classes, and then dividing that total by the total credit hours taken.
Major: Specialization in one academic discipline or field of study.
Objective Test: Tests which are mostly multiple-choice or true-false.
Orientation: Events planned to help students adjust to college life.
Plagiarism: Taking credit for someone else’s ideas; copying work from the writing of others
without documentation.
Prerequisite: The beginning of a course series. It must be taken first.
Registrar: The person responsible for registering students in courses and for keeping records of
grades.
Registration: Signing up for specific courses and times.
Satisfactory Academic Progress: If you receive financial aid, you must successfully complete
2/3 (66%) of attempted credit hours. Students classified as juniors or seniors, and students who
have attended UND for two or more academic years, must have a minimum cumulative GPA of
2.00.
Schedule/Study List: The specific courses that an individual students is taking or plans to take
for a given semester.
Subjective/Essay Test: Answers will need to be in paragraphs where you write about information
specific to questions asked.
Syllabus: An outline of course work distributed by an instructor.
Term GPA: The GPA obtained for courses for one semester.
Transcript: An official record of a student’s courses and the grades received for those courses.
Tutor: Person who give extra instructional help to students. Peer tutors are other students.
University Fee: A fee in addition to tuition that pays for assorted student services: health
services, tutoring, technology, etc.
Withdrawal: (W) Grade listed when a student officially drops a class before the drop date

Exercise 4. Read an interview with Bill Fitzgerald, a college freshman. Translate the text
into your mother tongue. Find the correct questions, order them according to the answers
given by him:

1.What helped you overcome them?

2. What are some differences between high school and college life?
3. What is most difficult, or stressful, about college life?
4. What advice can you offer future freshman to make the adjustment process easier?
5. What were your biggest fears about going off to school?

The main difference is the incredible increase in free time. In high school, every day was a
constant grind and I never had any free time. In college I have a surplus. Instead of classes six
hours a day, they take up a mere three hours. I’m no longer forced to sit in the same building all
day. This newfound time provides many luxuries that can easily be abused. I can be productive
or goof-off.
Time management. There were many times this semester when I had to write a paper and heard
my friends were going to a party. That always happened on days that I’d had time to get work
done but had wasted it instead. Then I couldn’t go out.
My biggest fear was how to adjust to this new freedom. I knew living on my own meant my
parents were not going to be breathing down my neck to do my work. They were not going to
260
have me home at certain hour. I was in complete control. These two aspects of being on my own
were very exciting but I wondered how I would do without my parents holding my hand. Once
things got rolling I realized I would be all right as long as I stayed motivated.
Stay on top of things; don’t get so caught up in the social atmosphere of college that you get
behind in your studies -remember what you're there for. There is nothing worse than
approaching the end of a semester and realizing you have procrastinated so much you have an
impossible mountain of work. No one needs that added stress.

Exercise 5. Translate and explain the words in bold, use them in sentences of your own:

To grind, mere, newfound time, luxury, to be abused, to goof-off, to fear, to adjust to ,to be
breathing down one’s neck ( to do) , to get rolling, to get behind , to procrastinate

Exercise 6. A) Read, translate and retell:

A College Student Life

Many students enter college expecting good times, knowledge, friendships, and a new sense of
direction. They soon find out that college comes with challenges and struggles because of the
great demands and expectations that are put on the importance of education. College students
experience a great deal of stress, especially when they are trying to balance a full time job, raise
children, and have a social life. The demands of doing many different things with very little time
can become overwhelming.
The daily tasks of working and meeting the demands of job obligation can leave a college
student exhausted. There is a limited number of students who work full time jobs and attend
college full time. Others, still work late and get up in the wee hours of the morning trying to fit
all of the required tasks of school and work into one day. Students often find themselves more
exhausted when they are trying to schedule tasks, because there just does not seem to be enough
time in one day. Putting in long hours and worrying about class schedules adds stress to a student
life.
The college student who has children is faced with guilt about not being able to spend time with
the children. The children have great demands on time. They need help with their homework,
or need dinner and to be tucked in bed at a certain time. The thought of not being able to keep
up with the demands of the children is very stressful and can be depressing to both the child
and parent. In other words everyone suffers because you are unable to fulfil all the obligations
that you have taken on.
College students find very little time to enjoy extracurricular activities. Even if they attend any
major school functions, games, or dating, they will regret not getting the term paper done that
was due the following day or week. Many students begin to feel pressure that often leads to
depression and social isolation. The fear of being a failure and not measuring up to someone’s
expectations adds more pressure to the sleep-deprived, stressed out student.
College students are often left with no personal time, and must learn to manage job and family.
College has many rewards if you do not get burned out and give up too soon. The pressure and
time managing can all be worked out with patience and lots of understanding from family and
friends.
B) Speak about your college life.

Exercise 7. Think of stimulating phrases to which the following sentences are the replies.
Work in pairs:

1. You are lucky. 2. Certainly. 3. Sure. 4. I hope to. 5. Willingly. 6. Rather. 7. Pardon! 8. All
right. 9. It’s high time to do it. 10. Nothing of the kind. 11. Never mind. 12. I should like to. 13.
You don’t say so. 14. Sorry. 15. It’s out of the question. 16. No more, thank you. 17. Here you
261
 are. 18. I’m afraid, I am (was, did, have). 19. Just a moment. 20. I believe so. 21. So did (have,
was, am) I. 22. Neither did (was, have, am) I. 23. How clever you are. 24. No at all.

Exercise 8. Respond to the following sentences:

1. Will you come to our party? 2 Is it late to go downstairs to the laboratory? 3. Have some
more coffee, will you? 4. I am so thankful to you, you have helped me a lot. 5. It’s so cold today.
6. Let’s go to the museum together. 7. You don’t know our new secretary, do you? 8. I’ve
already invited their parents to our party. 9. I should like to join our English choir. 10. She is
very good at swimming. 11. I find it rather difficult to study a foreign language. 12. Will you go
to the Caucasus in summer? 13. We are going to have a test in oral practice this week. 14. He has
passed his exam in Chemistry and got an excellent mark. 15. The girl has failed at her exam, you
know. 16. Would you like to go to the skating-rink tonight? 17. He is very good at skating. 18.
Will you put my fountain-pen right? 19. Will you turn off the tap? The bath is full of water. 20.
Shall I turn on the radio? I should like to listen to the news. 21. I’m so sorry. I can’t get this
book. 22. It’s so stuffy here. You should air the room. 23. How could you say such a thing?

Exercise 9. Translate the following sentences into English:

1. Am absolvit şcoala doi ani în urmă. Am terminat deja lucrul şi pot să merg cu d-voastră
la cinema. Când am finisat lucrul, am hotărât să merg la plimbare. Adunarea s-a terminat şi noi
ne-am dus acasă. 2. Sora mea s-a înscris la universitate în 1982. Când am intrat în sală, am văzut
că acolo erau mulţi studenţi. 3. Chişinăuienii se mândresc cu oraşul lor. 4. Nu putem să nu ne
gândim la examenele care vin. 5. Părinţii lui au plecat din Kiev, când el avea 10 ani. 6. Am
susţinut examenul la engleză. Câte examene aţi susţinut anul trecut? Nina a reuşit la examenul de
fizică, dar n-a reuşit la chimie. 7. Ce notă aţi primit pentru expunere? 8. Băiatul a răspuns bine şi
profesorul i-a pus 10. 9. Îl cunosc pe acest profesor, el m-a examinat la istorie anul trecut. 10. Ea
are note bune la toate disciplinele. 11. Fratelui meu îi place matematica, fizica şi chimia, dar mie
îmi place literatura şi geografia. 12. Săptămâna trecută am avut o lucrare de control. Am primit
8. 13. La lecţiile de dezvoltare a vorbirii noi citim, răspundem la întrebări, facem exerciţii orale
şi în scris. Faceţi exerciţiul 3 oral, iar 7 şi 8 în scris. 14. Ieri mi-am făcut temele în laborator. Îmi
place să lucrez cu casetofonul. Dacă doriţi să vă descotorosiţi de greşelile d-voastre, trebuie să
lucraţi în laborator. 15. Vreau să particip la activitatea acestei societăţi ştiinţifice. 16. Boris a
decis să intre în echipa noastră sportivă, se ocupă cu sportul. 17. Deşi avem la universitate o sală
sportivă bună, noi mergem deseori la stadion. 18. Când te-ai înscris la cercul de teatru? – Câteva
zile în urmă. 19. Clubul de limbă engleză ne ajută să cunoaştem engleza mai bine. 20. Prietena
mea are o voce frumoasă. Este membră a cercului nostru de cor. 21. Săptămâna trecută am
prezentat un raport la lectura individuală. Am comis multe greşeli şi profesorul mi-a dat o notă
nesatisfăcătoare.

Exercise 10. Retell the following jokes, use indirect speech:

I. English professor: What is the difference between an active verb and a passive verb?
Student: An active verb shows action and a passive verb shows passion.
Professor: Can you tell me anything about the great scientists of the 17th century?
Student: They are all dead, sir.
Friend: And what is your son going to be when he’s passed his final exam?
Father: An old man.
II. Two men were talking in a train. “Are you going to Milberry’s lecture today?” said one.
“Oh, yes, I am,” replied the other. “Take my advice and don’t. I hear he is a very poor lecturer.”
“I am afraid, I must go,” said the other. “I’m Milberry.”

262
III. During a lecture a well-known lecturer on economics mentioned the fact that in some
parts of the world the number of men was larger than that of women, and he added humorously:
“I can therefore recommend the ladies to emigrate to that part of the world.” A young lady who
was sitting in one of the last rows stood up full of anger. She was leaving the room rather noisily,
when the lecturer remarked. “I don’t mean that it must be done in such a hurry as that.”

Exercise 11. a) Make up a dialogue on the following situation:

You ask your friend what marks she got at the entrance exams and what subjects she studies at
the University. You wonder how often she works in the laboratory and whether the work helps
her to correct her pronunciation. You’d also like to know if she takes part in the work of the
English club and what kind of work she does there.

b) Suggest a situation for your fellow-students to make up a dialogue on it.

Exercise 12. Describe situations illustrating the following proverbs:

1. All is well that ends well.

2. It is never late to learn.
3. Out of sight out of mind.
4. Where there’s a will, there’s a way.

Exercise 13. Describe the procedure for telephoning.

Exercise 14. Imagine you are on the phone talking to a friend (asking for information)
about 1) your studies; 2) your social activities.

Exercise 15. Write a letter to a friend (to an English pen-friend, to your former English
Teacher) about your studies. Mind the layout of the letter.

263
Unit X
Lesson 1.

Grammar: 1. Some Verbs and Word Combinations Followed by a Gerund:

Note. The preposition without may be followed by a gerundial construction: e. g. He left the
room without saying a word. One can't learn without making mistakes.

Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Complete the following sentences using a gerund:

1. Go on . 2. He stopped . 3. He couldn't help . 4. We all enjoyed . 5. Have you

finished ? 6.I don't mind . 7. Her cousin is fond of . 8. The child is rather good at . 9.
She goes in for .10.The poem is worth .11. The boy doesn't read a sentence without . 12.
You won't go there without .

Exercise 2. Translate the following sentences into English:

1. Încetaţi să vorbiţi (să zâmbiţi, să fumaţi, să scrieţi, să vă certaţi). 2. Mama le-a ordonat
copiilor să finiseze joaca (citirea, împletirea, cusutul, călcatul hainelor). 3. Continuaţi să cântaţi
(să lucraţi cu acest text, să traduceţi acest articol, să scrieţi, să analizaţi această problemă). 4. Nu
aveţi nimic împotrivă de a deschide fereastra (să ne întâlnim duminică, să mergem acolo
împreună, să repetăm exerciţiul)? 5. Îmi place foarte mult să desenez (să joc tenis, să cânt în cor,
să citesc cu voce tare). 6. Nouă ne-a făcut plăcere să o ascultăm cântând (să înotăm, să vorbim cu
dânsul, să schiem în pădure). 7. Nu am putut să nu fiu de acord cu el (să nu o aştept pe ea, să nu
răspund la întrebarea lui). 8. Merită să vezi această piesă (să vizitezi acest muzeu, să faci aceste
exerciţii oral). 9. El a ieşit din cameră fără să spună vreun cuvânt (fără a privi pe cineva, fără a
lua ceva cu el, fără a-şi lua rămas bun). 10. Fiicele ei se ocupă cu împletirea hainelor (cu
patinajul, cu dansurile).

Exercise 3. Fill in prepositions or adverbs wherever necessary:

1. We enjoyed the performance greatly. 2. He decided to reserve a seat phone. 3. It's

rather easy to get tickets this theatre, but it is difficult to get tickets this play. 4. She
refused our help. 5. She took care her little brother. 6. Will you go to the football
match tomorrow? - No, I don't care football. 7. my way the theatre I met a friend
of mine. 8. I don't like seats the balcony or the gallery, I prefer them the stalls or
264
 the dress-circle. 9. The scene is laid Verona. 10. This is a play Dickens' novel. 11.
I'm so sorry Ann. She has fallen ill. 12. Fleur Forsyte fell love Jon first
sight. 13. The attendant will show you your seats. 14. There is no doubt it. 15. When
the lights went and the curtain rose there was a storm applause.

Exercise 4. Fill in articles wherever necessary. Retell the text:

theatres are very much same in London as anywhere else; main theatres, music-
halls and cinemas are in West End. If you are staying in London for few days, you will
have no difficulty whatever in finding somewhere to spend evening. You will find
opera, comedy, drama, variety, cinema performances start at about eight or
half past, and finish about eleven, best seats are those in stalls, in dress-
circle and upper circle. Then comes pit and last of all gallery. boxes, of
course, are more expensive. most theatres and music-halls have good orchestras with
popular conductors.
The opera house is at Covent Garden. There you get best of everything: first rate
orchestra, famous singers and celebrated conductors. But, of course, if you are not fond of
music, this won't interest you. At West End theatres you can see most of
famous English actors and actresses. plays are staged well. Choose good play, and
you'll enjoy yourself from moment curtain goes up, to end of last act. Get
your seat beforehand either at box-office of theatre itself or at one of agencies.

(Abridged from ELC)

Exercise 5. Fill in yet, still, more, another, other, else:

1. Don't hurry. The performance is not over ... . 2. I'd like to read something ... by this
author. 3. What ... impression did you get there? 4. What ... did Jean say about the performance?
5. I've read two ... books by Dickens. 6. You'd better ask somebody ... . 7. It is ... spring, but it is
getting rather hot. 8. The theatre is going to stage ... play by this playwright. 9. How many ...
English books have you got? 10. Fetch ... chair, please. 11. What ... have you seen in this ancient
town? 12. He hasn't returned from the South. He is ... there. 13. Please book two ... tickets for
me. 14. Will you call ... time? 15. What ... things did you buy?

Exercise 6. Write the correct -ing and –ed form for each verb:

1. shout _________ 6. refer

2. slope 7. return
3. stop ________ 8. enjoy
4. stoop __ _ 9. copy ______________
5. answer 10. die

Exercise 7. Write the correct -ing form for each verb.

1.point 8.flit 15.fill

2.regret 9.exit 16.drain
3 .beat 10.interest 17.fail
4.attempt _ 11.dream 18.fan
5.bet 12.deny 19.annoy
6.shout 13.file 20.interrupt
7.excite 14.scrub

Exercise 8. Write the correct -ed form for each verb:

265
 bother star
blur occur
stare scare
order scar
suffer fear
comb whip
wrap accept
groan permit
occupy merit
spray whisper
wipe infer

Exercise 9. Make the sentences passive (Present Simple):

1. Somebody cleans the office every day. 2. Somebody sends emails. 3. Somebody cuts the
grass. 4. Somebody prefers chocolate. 5. Somebody often steals cars. 6. Somebody plays loud
music. 7. Somebody speaks English here. 8. Somebody loves the London parks. 9. Somebody
wants staff. 10. Somebody writes articles. 11. Somebody loves Julie. 12. Somebody reads a lot of
books. 13. Somebody cooks dinner everyday. 14. Somebody delivers milk in the mornings. 15.
Somebody buys flowers for the flat. 16. Somebody washes the cars every week. 17. Somebody
writes a report every Friday. 18. Somebody fixes the roads. 19. Somebody builds new houses
every year. 20. Somebody sells vegetables in the market.

Exercise 10. Make the present perfect - choose positive, negative or question:

1.(I / go / to the library today) 2. (you / keep a pet for three years) 3. (you / come here before?) 4.
(it / rain all day?) 5. (who / we / forgot to invite?) 6. (we / not / hear that song already) 7. (he /
not / forget his books) 8. (she / steal all the chocolate!) 9. (I / explain it well?) 10 (who / he /
meet recently?) 11. (how / we / finish already?) 12. (he / study Latin) 13. (I / know him for three
months) 14. (where / you / study Arabic?) 15. (what countries / they / visit in Europe?) 16. (he /
hurt his leg) 17. (she / leave her phone in a taxi) 18. (we / not / lose our tickets) 19. (she / call her
mother?) 20. (he / take a taxi?).

Exercise 11. Present Perfect Simple or Present Perfect Continuous:

1.(they / arrive) already? 2. Lucy (run) 2000 metres today. 3. I (clean) all morning – I’m
fed up! 4. How long (you / know) Simon? 5. I (drink) more water lately, and I feel
better. 6. Sorry about the mess! I (bake). 7. How many times (you / take) this exam? 8.
He (eat) six bars of chocolate today! 9. Julie (cook) dinner. Let’s go and eat! 10. The
students (finish) their exams. They’re very happy. 11. The baby’s face is really dirty! What
(he / eat)? 12. Iona is exhausted these days. She (work) too hard recently. 13. Luke
(never / be) abroad. 14. I (wait) for three hours already ! 15. (you / finish) your
homework yet? 16. How long (you / be) a lawyer? 17. I (read) your book all day. It’s
very interesting, but I’m only on chapter 2. 18. She (drink) ten glasses of water! 19. I
(have) my dog for sixteen years. 20. Help, I (lose) my wallet! How can I get home?

Exercise 12. Put the verb into the present simple. Be sure you spell it correctly!
1.She (play) tennis every Sunday. 2. He (buy) a cup of coffee every morning. 3. Julie
(study) French at school. 4. Luke (try) hard to be polite. 5. She (enjoy) going
swimming. 6. Lucy (wash) her hair every day. 7. John never (cry). 8. My mother always
(say) that love is more important than money. 9. I hope Julie (pass) the exam. 10. The
plane (fly) low over the airport.
266
 THEATRE

Jean's first visit to the theatre

When I invited Jean to the theatre I was afraid she would refuse my invitation, but she had
accepted it. I still doubted whether she would come: her religion did not allow to go to a theatre,
play cards or love a man of other religious views. However, when I met her at the entrance to the
theatre I saw she had thrown off her religious scruples. She looked eager and her dark eyes
sparkled with excitement. Our seats were in the pit. They were not expensive, but we could see
the stage quite well. I gave her the programme and my opera glasses.
Presently the lights went down; then the curtain rose upon a scene of eighteenth-century Paris
at the time of the French Revolution. It was a melodrama full of hopeless love and heroic self-
sacrifice, a play after Dickens's novel "A Tale of Two Cities". When Martin Harvey, a famous
actor, who played the leading part of Sydney Carton appeared on the stage, Jean's eyes were
full of interest and delight. She was greatly impressed by pale, dark Carton and delicate,
charming Lucie Manette, the girl he loved.
During the interval Jean said: "Oh, Mr. Shannon, how splendid it is! So different from what I
expected! I can't tell you what a treat it is for me! I feel so sorry for poor Sydney Carton! He is
so much in love with Lucie and she ... It must be a frightful thing to be in love and not to be
loved!"
"Quite," I agreed gravely. "At least they are good friends, and friendship is a wonderful
thing."
She consulted her programme to conceal her flush. "The girl who does Lucie is very sweet,
she has such lovely, blonde hair and is so young!" "Well, in real life she is Martin Harvey's wife,
must be about forty-five, and that blonde hair is a wig."
"Please, don't, Mr. Shannon! How can you joke about such things?" she cried in a shocked
voice...
As the last scene was under way Jean's hand, small and hot, touched mine. We sat hand in
hand as though to support each other while watching Carton with a pale face and carefully
arranged hair mount the guillotine and meet his death. Jean couldn't keep her tears and they fell
upon the back of my hand like raindrops in spring.
When at last the play came to its end there was a storm of applause and many curtain calls
for Miss de Silva and Martin Harvey. Miss Jean Law, however, was too overcome to join in such
a banal applause; her feelings were too deep for words. Only when we were in the street she
whispered with shining eyes. "Oh, Robert, you can't believe me how much I've enjoyed myself!"
It was the first time she had used my Christian name.
(After "Shannon's Way" by A. Cronin)

Vocabulary
refuse vt; Ant. accept e. g. Irene refused Soames several times before she accepted him, refusal
n; accept vt; to accept a present (invitation, offer, help, plan) but to receive guests (visitors);
doubt vt/i e. g. We doubted whether he would follow your advice; doubt n; no doubt e. g.
There is no doubt he tells the truth.; excite n, e. g. The performance excited Jean so greatly that
she could hardly speak, excited p. p.; to be (look, feel) excited; excitement n; seat n; in the
stalls; in the orchestra stalls; in the pit stalls; in the pit; in the dress-circle; in the upper
circle; Syn. in the balcony; in a box; in the gallery; stage n; e. g. When the singer came onto
the stage there was a storm of applause, stage vt, e. g. This play was staged by K. S.
Stanislavsky.; program(me) n; to be on the programme, e. g. My favourite songs were on the
programme.; the lights went down ; rise (rose, risen) vi, e. g. He slowly rose to his feet.; e. g.
When the sun rose we started off. Note: raise vt: to raise one's head (hat, voice, etc.), e. g. At
seeing Fleur he raised his hat. Syn. put up, e. g. If you want to ask a question put up your
hand.;scene n. е. g. I like the final (last) scene in that ballet, scenery n (used only in the
singular), e. g. The scenery was beautiful. The scene is laid in Paris.; act n, e. g. I like the
267
second act of "Swan Lake" most of all. actor, actress n, as a great (famous, popular, talented,
favourite) actor; act vi, e. g. He had to act at once. There was no time to lose, active adj, as an
active person (support, part, etc.). Our students take an active part in school life. Ant. Passive;
to play the part of ; leading adj; leading article ; delight n ; charming adj, e. g. The doctor
was a charming young woman, charm vt, n, e. g. We were all charmed by her manners. His
short stories have a charm of style that cannot be found in other writers.; to be in love with
smb., е. g. Fleur was in love with Jon. to fall in love with smb. (at first sight); touch vt; е. g.
Her story touched the listeners, touch n; touching adj, e. g. We were excited by this touching
scene.; support vt e. g. Michael helped his father to support their family, support n, e. g. I need
your friendly support.; carefully adv, e. g. Не took the baby carefully in his arms, care n, e. g.
The car needs constant care, to take care of, e. g. Не took care of the flowers in the garden. Syn.
look after, care (for smb.), e. g. I don't care much for fish. I don't care!; careful adj., e. g. I'll
be careful with your books, be careful not to ;e. g. Be careful not to lose the tickets.; as careful
work (preparation, examination); careless adj as careless person (work, attitude); as careless
little; singing birds; death n; Ant. life, e. g. After his parents' death little Shannon was brought
up by his grandparents, die vi, e. g. Her father died when the girl was twelve, dead adj, e. g.
When the doctor came the old man was already dead.; applause n; a storm of applause, e, g.
There was a storm of applause when the curtain rose. The scenery was wonderful indeed,
applaud vi, e. g. As soon as we saw the famous actor we began to applaud to him.; curtain call
; ticket п, as a ticket to the theatre (cinema), a ticket for a play (performance, etc.); the first
night ; the play is worth seeing ; to call for smb., e. g. I'll call for you and we shall go there
together, to call on smb., e. g Last night I called on Ann. She's ill as you know. That suits me
perfectly; opera, drama, comedy, circus, variety show, concert, concert hall, conservatoire,
symphony music, composer, conductor, cloak-room, refreshment-room, attendant,
rehearsal (dress rehearsal), matinee, opera-glasses.

A telephone conversation
(Nick dials the number. Helen answers the call.)
Helen : Hello!
Nick : Thank God, is that you, Helen?
Helen : Sure, that's me, Nick, darling. You sound a bit annoyed. Is anything the matter?
Nick : Well, I've been trying to get connected with you for nearly ten minutes and...
Helen : But what's wrong? The line wasn't engaged, I hope?
Nick : Yes, it was. Besides, I got the wrong number several times...
Helen : Oh, Nick, I'm so sorry!
Nick : That's all right now. I say, Helen, have you got anything special on tonight?
Helen : No, not really. Why?
Nick : I suggest our going to the theatre.
Helen : I'd love to. What are we going to see?
Nick : I've got two tickets for "Lady Windermere's Fan" by Oscar Wilde. It's the first
night.
Helen : Oh, it's at the Maly Theatre, isn't it?
Nick : I have heard the play is worth seeing. It is staged very well. The scenery is simple,
but good and the acting is splendid.
Helen: And what about the seats? I hope they are not in the balcony or in the gallery?
Nick: Oh, dear, no. They are in the dress-circle, box 5.
Helen: Let's hope we'll enjoy ourselves. Will you call for me or shall we meet at the
theatre?
Nick: I'd rather call for you. I don't like waiting and you take such a long time to get ready.
Helen: So I do. But I love to look smart when I go to the theatre.
Nick: All right, then. I'll call for you at 5.30, so we'll have plenty of time to get to the
theatre before the performance starts.
268
 Helen: That suits me perfectly. I'll be waiting for you. And, oh, Nick! Thank you ever so
much for your invitation.
Nick: That's all right, dear. See you tonight.
Helen: Bye-bye!

Exercise 1. Find in the text sentences that might be the answers to the questions given below:

1. What did Jean look like when Robert met her at the theatre? 2. Where were their seats? 3.
Upon what scene did the curtain rise? 4. What kind of play was it? 5. Who (m) was Jean greatly
impressed by? 6. What did Robert say about the leading actress? 7. What showed that Jean was
deeply touched by what was going on the stage? 8. Why didn't Jean join in applause? 9. What
showed that the performance was a success? 10. Jean had always used Shannon's Christian
name, hadn't she?

Exercise 2. Answer the following questions. Use conversational phrases. Work in pairs and enlarge
the dialogue:

Model: - Could you possibly tell me why Robert invited Jean to the theatre?
- I 'm not sure but I believe he wanted to give her a treat.
- Then why on earth did he take her to a melodrama and not to a comedy or something?
- To my mind he was afraid she would refuse to come if she knew it was a comedy. Don't you
remember her religious scruples?, etc.

1. I wonder what made Robert doubt if Jean would come to the theatre? 2. Do you happen to
know anything about Jean's religion? 3. Could you tell me what made Jean throw off her
scruples? 4. Do you happen to know anything about Charles Dickens? 5. I'd like to know why
Jean was so impressed by the play and the actors? 6. My question may be personal but is it really
so frightful to love and not be loved in return? 7. Why did Robert say gravely that friendship was
a wonderful thing? 8. Could you tell me why Robert was ironical when he spoke about the
leading actress? 9. I wonder if that visit to the theatre was a real treat to Jean? 10. I wonder why
Jean had used Shannon's Christian name for the first time?

Exercise 3. Choose the correct word:

to rise - to raise
1. He ... his head when he heard a slight noise. 2. When we started the sun had already. 3.
There was a storm of applause when he curtain .... 4. He ... his hat to greet us. 5. Ann slowly ... to
her feet. 6. It was very noisy and the reporter had to ... his voice. 7. The curtain wouldn't... and
we had to ... it.
stage - scene
1. The ... was so touching that Jean began to cry. 2. Carrie was told to come onto the ... in the
second act. 3. The play consists of two acts and four .... 4. When the actor appeared on the ... the
audience began to applaud. 5. I don't quite like the final ... in this play. 6. Our seats were in the
orchestra stalls and we saw the ...well.

Exercise 4. Fill in the missing words:

1. Jean looked ... when she came to the theatre. 2. I ... the invitation with joy. 3. The play consists
of three ... and four .... 4. He ... our help and said he could do everything himself. 5. When the ...
rose and the audience saw the ... everybody began to .... 6. When Alison appeared on the ... she
was ... . 7. Our ... were in the ... and we could see the ... very well without the .... 8. The play made
such an ... upon me that I would never forget it. 9. I never expected that you would ... our
suggestion. 10. We made up our minds to ... a party in English. 11. I don't remember the name of
269
the ... who played the ... part in the play. 12. Seats in the boxes and in the stalls are ... and seats in
the gallery are .... 13. She said she was telling the truth, but we ... her words.

Exercise 5. Change the following sentences according to the models:

Model 1 : I like to read plays. -I enjoy reading plays.

1. We like to play chess. 2. My eldest sister likes to sing folk songs. 3. They like to ski in the
forest on a sunny frosty day. 4. The children like to bathe and splash the water all around. 5.
They also like to lie in the sun.

Model 2 : He is excited. He cannot speak. - He is very excited and can hardly speak.

1. Our seats were far from the stage. We could not see well what was going on. 2. The scene was
touching. Jean couldn't hide her tears. 3. It was very noisy in the hall. We didn't hear the speaker
well. 4. Her lips trembled. She spoke with difficulty. 5. The news is so exciting. I cannot believe
it. 6. The child is so active. He cannot sit still for a minute. 7. Bill was extremely tired. He rose to
his feet with great difficulty. 8. His hand was shaking. He couldn't open the door at once. 9. The
patient is very weak. He cannot raise his hand.

Exercise 6. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct form:

Model: Neither you nor he is right.

Neither my girl-friend nor her parents have forgotten you.
Neither of you is wrong.

1. Neither Mike nor his sister (to expect) us to return so soon. 2. Neither Helen nor Alice (to be)
eager to go anywhere that night. 3. Neither of you (to know) the end of that story. 4. Neither my
sister nor my brother (to go) on excursions very often. 5. Neither of us (to be) mistaken. 6.
Neither my brother-in-law nor his schoolmates (to be) good at playing chess. 7. Neither my
parents nor my grandmother (to travel) by air. 8. Neither David nor his fellow-students (to be
excited) at the exams. 9. Neither my sister's younger daughter nor her son (to be) fond of
symphony music. 10. Neither John nor his companion (to be) lazy.

Exercise 7. Translate the following sentences into English:

1.Nici nepoata mea, nici soţul ei nu ne vizitează. 2. Nici prietenii, nici rudele lui nu-l pot ajuta.
3. Nici noi nici studenţii grupei 104 nu au întârziat la lecţie. 4. Nici limba franceză, nici limba
germană nu sunt atât de răspândite cum este limba engleză. 5. Nici ploile, nici gerul nu poate să-i
oprească pe adevăraţii călători. 6. Pe cer nu erau nici stelele, nici luna. 7. Nici studenţii, nici şeful
grupei nu au adus căştile. 8. Nici dumneavoastră, nici Ana nu sunteţi vinovaţi. 9. Nici el, nici
prietenii lui nu au de gând să facă aceasta. 10. Nici William, nici fratele lui nu au citit cartea
până la sfârşit. 11. Nici eu, nici vecinii mei nu-l cunosc pe acest om. 12. Nici prietenii mei, nici
eu nu jucăm cărţi.

Exercise 8. Respond to the following statements. Use conversational phrases. Work in pairs,
trying to enlarge the dialogue:

Model: - Jean looked so eager and excited when she came to the theatre.
-No wonder. It was her first visit to the theatre, wasn't it?
-Yes, it was, but I think she was so excited because she had had thrown off her
religious scruples.
270
 -That's just what I'm thinking, etc.
1. I hear your friend is fond of opera. 2. The best seats are in the dress-circle. 3. It's rather a
problem to get tickets to the Bolshoi Theatre. 4. Girls often take such a long time to get ready to
go somewhere, especially to the theatre. 5. Tikhonoff was very good playing the part of Stirlitz.
6. It's so nice to go to a concert and hear some good music! 7. The ballet Romeo and Juliet is
worth seeing. 8. Going to a theatre is a real treat.

Exercise 9. Correct the given not-true-to-fact (false) statements and give your reasons. Use
conversational phrases. Work in pairs. Enlarge the dialogues:

Model: - Jean did not like theatre but she didn't refuse Robert's invitation not to hurt him.
- I'm afraid you've got it all wrong. It was her first visit to the theatre, etc.

1. Jean wasn't going to accept Robert's invitation to the theatre. 2. She looked quite calm
when Robert met her at the entrance to the theatre. 3. The tickets were rather expensive. 4. The
play was a merry comedy. 5. The leading actors produced little impression on Jean. 6. During the
intervals Jean spoke with Robert about the play. 7. Neither Robert nor Jean liked the play. 8.
While watching the last scene Jean couldn't help laughing. 9. The public didn't like the
performance and there was no applause when the curtain fell.

Exercise 10. Translate the following sentences into English:

1. Robert a propus să se întâlnească la teatru. 2. Ana a sugerat să cumpărăm bilete la acest

spectacol. 3. Ea a propus să cumpere programa la intrarea în teatru. 4. Mama a propus să o
invităm pe Liza în week-end. 5. El a sugerat să nu abordăm această problemă. 6. Regizorul a
propus ca rolul principal să-i fie dat celei mai bune actriţe. 7. Ana a propus să mergem la bufet
în timpul antractului. 8. Eu propun să expediem imediat telegrama. 9. Petru a propus să mergem
la Ana mai devreme. Ei întotdeauna îi trebuie mult timp să se aranjeze. 10. Interesant, cine a
propus să mergem la ţară pe o vreme aşa urâtă.

Exercise 11. Read the instructions below and write 25 - 35 words in the space provided:

You want to send an e-mail to a friend who is coming to see you. Your father will go to meet
her. Ask when your friend is coming, and say what your father looks like.
Dear...

Exercise 12. Translate the following sentences into English:

1. Unde se mai poate de vizionat această piesă? 2. Noi am hotărât să mai organizăm
asemenea serate în limba engleză. 3. Eu aş mai vrea o ceaşcă de cafea. 4. Mă tem că el încă
doarme. 5. Noi ne temeam să nu întârziem, dar spectacolul încă nu începuse. 6. Eu am nevoie de
încă o carte a istoriei teatrului. 7. Câte repetiţii vor mai fi în această săptămână. 8. Peste o lună va
mai fi o premieră la acest teatru. 9. Ce alţi actori participă la acest spectacol? 10. Ploaia încă nu
s-a oprit dar s-a încălzit. 11. Încă mai lucraţi asupra raportului? – Da. Încă nu am adunat tot
materialul necesar. 12. Avem nevoie de încă trei bilete la acest spectacol. 13. Pe cine aţi mai
întâlnit la teatru?

Exercise 13. Pick out words and phrases from Text 1 and Text 2 and group them under the
following headings: a) theatre; b) appearance. Learn them. Make up a dialog on cinema
situation. Retell Text 1.

271
Exercise 14. Let one of the students give a brief impression of his visit to the theatre. Find out
some more details about the performance by asking questions:

Model:
A: Last night I was at one of the best theatres in Moscow. The performance was perfect
and I enjoyed every minute of it. Though my seat was in the balcony I could see the
stage very well and hear each sound perfectly. Guess where I was and what I saw.
B: Were you at the Art Theatre?
A: No, I wasn't.
B: But you say you could hear each sound perfectly!
A: So I could. I meant the music.
B: Ah, that means you were at the Bolshoi Theatre.
A: That's right.
B: Was it an opera or a ballet?
A: Try to guess.
B: And who is the composer?
A: P. I. Tchaikovsky.
B: Is the scene laid in Russia?
A: No, it isn't.
B: Was the scenery beautiful?
A: Oh, yes, it was so beautiful, that there was a storm of applause when the curtain rose.
B: It's a fairy-tale, isn't it?
A: In a way, yes.
B: Then it was either "Swan Lake", or "The Sleeping Beauty"...
A: No, neither of them. It's not a ballet.
B: If it is an opera, and the composer is Tchaikovsky, and the scene is not laid in Russia I
really can't guess. Well, one more question: how many acts are there in this opera?
A: It's a one-act opera in two scenes.
B: Then it is "Jolanta"!
A: This time you are right.

Exercise 15. a) Read and translate the text:

...Pauline Eraser had a few minutes to herself in her room while waiting for the time she was
wanted on the stage. Suddenly the door flung open and a young girl, wearing a short brown tweed
coat and dark green slacks darted in. Pauline knew at once she was an actress. She wasn't pretty,
but she had a good stage face. "You're Pauline Fraser, aren't you?" cried the girl in admiration.
Pauline smiled. "Yes, but who are you?" "Oh, you've never heard of me. I'm Ann Steward from
the Rep* at Wanley. I hear Mr. Cheveril is going to stage his new play. I'd be delighted to get a
part in it. I'm ready to do anything!" Pauline smiled at her. The girl went on: "Miss Fraser, you're
great. I saw you in Mr. Cheveril's play 'The Wandering Light' three times. You were wonderful!
But... er... would you mind if I say this?" Pauline was amused. "Probably. But go ahead!" "Well,
at the end of the Second Act, when you learn that your lover is back and waiting for you, couldn't
it he better to drop everything from your hands and then run out into the garden?" Pauline looked
at the girl with interest. "Why, as a matter of fact I wanted to do it like that, only the producer
wouldn't let me. Look here -- you are a real actress!" "I know I am," cried the girl, "but I could
be a thousand times better if only I get a chance in a Cheveril play! Please, Miss Fraser, I don't
want to be a nuisance, but I simply must talk with him." "I'm afraid he won't speak with you, but
I'll try to persuade him. You'd better wait outside, he may come any moment."
"Oh, Miss Fraser, you're a darling!" said Ann and went out.
Some minutes later Cheveril entered the room carrying his script. "We've made a little cut
and the scene is all right now, Pauline. You'll be wanted on the stage in a minute or two."
272
 "I'm ready, Martin. Oh! I quite forgot! There is a girl here who is eager to see you. She's with
a local repertory company, and I shouldn't be surprised if she's quite a good actress. You'll see
her, won't you?" Without turning Martin answered firmly: "No. I'm sorry, Pauline, but I'm fed
up with young promising actresses." "But... but you must see her!" Pauline was reproachful. At
that moment she was called to the stage and left the room.
Cheveril was looking through his script when he heard a young voice behind him: "Mr.
Cheveril, I'm that young actress... !" "You had no right to come here. Will you please go?" He
didn't even look at her. "But... but I've acted in lots of your plays - and loved them all!" "I don't
care. Please, go out at once." There was a strange little pause. "You'll be sorry soon you said
that..." The girl spoke with an odd certainty...
(After J. B. Priestley "A Story of the Theatre")
(*Rep. - repertory theatre.)

b).Determine the main idea of the extract. c) Make up a plan of the extract. d) Choose a suitable
headline to the story from those suggested:

1) "Ann Looks for a Job"; 2) "Meeting a Famous Actress"; 3) "He was Fed Up!" 4) "Talent
or... Chance?"; 5) "The Crash of Hopes".

e) Give a short summary of the extract. f) Give your own ending to the story.

Lesson 2.

Grammar: Past Perfect Tense

We don't use the past perfect a lot in English, but it is useful, and it sounds very good if you can
use it correctly. Also, it's really easy to make - just the past simple of 'have' and the past
participle.
The positive - make it with 'had' + the past participle (usually made by adding '-ed' to the
infinitive, but a few verbs have irregular past participles:
• I had been (I'd been)
• You had gone (you'd gone)
• She had met (she'd met)
• He had played (he'd played)
• It had rained (it'd rained)
• We had bought (we'd bought)
• They had studied (they'd studied)
The short form for 'had' is- 'd. (Be careful not to confuse it with 'would'. Would is followed by
the infinitive - 'I'd go', whereas had is followed by the past participle - 'I'd gone').
For the negative just add 'not':
• I had not been (I hadn't been)
• You had not gone (you hadn't gone)
• She had not met (she hadn't met)
• He had not played (he hadn't played)
• It had not rained (it hadn't rained)
• We had not bought (we hadn't bought)
• They had not studied (they hadn't studied)
And to make a 'yes / no' question put 'had' before the subject:
• Had I come?
• Had you eaten?
• Had she gone?
273
 • Had it rained?
• Had he studied?
• Had we met?
• Had they left?
For 'wh' questions put the question word at the beginning:
• When had I come?
• Why had you eaten?
• Where had she gone?
• When had it rained?
• Why had he studied?
• How had we met?
• When had they left?
We use the past perfect tense fairly often in English.
1: A completed action before something else in the past.
e.g. When we arrived, the film had started. (= first the film started, then later we arrived)
2: To explain or give a reason for something in the past.
e.g. I'd eaten dinner so I wasn't hungry.
It had snowed in the night, so the bus didn't arrive.
3: Stative verbs only: something that started in the past and continued up to another action
in the past.
e.g. When he graduated, he had been in London for six years.
(= he arrived in London six years before he graduated and lived there continuously until he
graduated, or even longer)
4: As part of the third conditional.
e.g. If I had known you were ill, I would have visited you.

Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Using the words in parentheses, complete the text below with the appropriate
tenses: Simple Past / Present Perfect / Past Perfect:

1. When I (arrive) … home last night, I discovered that Jane (prepare) … a beautiful candlelight
dinner. 2. Since I began acting, I (perform) … in two plays, a television commercial and a TV
drama. However, I (speak, never even) … publicly before I came to Hollywood in 1985. 3. By
the time I got to the office, the meeting (begin, already) ... without me. My boss (be) … furious
with me and I (be) … fired. 4. When I (turn) … the radio on yesterday, I (hear) … a song that
was popular when I was in high school. I (hear, not) … the song in years, and it (bring) … back
some great memories. 5. Last week, I (run) … into an ex-girlfriend of mine. We (see, not) …
each other in years, and both of us (change) … a great deal. I (enjoy) … talking to her so much
that I (ask) … her out on a date. We are getting together tonight for dinner. 6. When Jack
(enter) … the room, I (recognize, not) … him because he (lose) … so much weight and
(grow) … a beard. He looked totally different! 7. The Maya established a very advanced
civilization in the jungles of the Yucatan; however, their culture (disappear, virtually) … by the
time Europeans first (arrive) … in the New World. 8. I (visit) … so many beautiful places since
I (come) … to Utah. Before moving here, I (hear, never) … of Bryce Canyon, Zion, Arches, or
Canyon lands.

Exercise 2. Make the positive or negative past perfect simple:

274
1) When I arrived at the cinema, the film … (start). 2) She … (live) in China before she went to
Thailand. 3) After they … (eat) the shellfish, they began to feel sick. 4) If you … (listen) to me,
you would have got the job. 5) Julie didn’t arrive until after I … (leave). 6) When we …
(finish) dinner, we went out. 7) The garden was dead because it … (be) dry all summer. 8) He …
(meet) her somewhere before. 9) We were late for the plane because we … (forget) our
passports. 10) She told me she … (study) a lot before the exam. 11) The grass was yellow
because it … (not/rain) all summer. 12) The lights went off because we … (not/pay) the
electricity bill. 13) The children … (not/do) their homework, so they were in trouble. 14)
They … (not/eat) so we went to a restaurant. 15) We couldn’t go into the concert because we …
(not/bring) our tickets. 16) She said that she … (not/visit) the UK before. 17) Julie and Anne …
(not/meet) before the party. 18) I … (not/have) breakfast when he arrived. 19) He …
(not/use) email before, so I showed him how to use it. 20) You … (not/study) for the test, so you
were very nervous.

Exercise 3. Choose the past perfect, or the past simple:

1. We had already eaten when John …(come) home. 2. Last year Juan … (pass) all his exams.
3. When I … (get) to the airport I discovered I had forgotten my passport. 4.I went to the library,
then I … (buy) some milk and went home. 5. …I opened my handbag to find that I (forgot) my
credit card. 6. When we … (arrive) at the station, the train had already left. 7. We got home
to find that someone … (break) into the house. 8. I opened the fridge to find someone … (eat) all
my chocolate. 9. I had known my husband for three years when we … (get) married. 10. Julie
was very pleased to see that John … (clean) the kitchen. 11.It … (not / rain) all summer, so the
grass was completely dead. 12.When he …(arrive) at the party, Julie had just left. 13. After
arriving home, I realised I …(not / buy) any milk. 14.The laundry was wet – it … (rain) while I
was out. 15. William felt ill last night because he … (eat) too many cakes. 16. Keiko … (meet)
William last September. 17. First I tidied the flat, then I … (sit) down and had a cup of coffee.18.
John … (play) the piano when he was a child, but he doesn’t play now. 19.When I opened the
curtains the sun was shining but the ground was white. It … (snow) during the night. 20. When
Julie got home from her holiday, her flat was a mess. John … (have) a party.

Exercise 4. Make past perfect simple ‘yes / no’ or ‘wh’ questions:

1. … (you / go) there before we went together? 2. … (she / see) the film already? 3. Why … (he /
forgot) about the meeting? 4. … (it / be) cold all week? 5. … (I / read) the book before the class?
6. When she arrived, … (we / eat) already? 7. Where … (you / be) when I saw you? 8. … (they /
travel) by bullet train before? 9. … (John / meet) Lucy before they went on holiday together?10.
… (you / do) your homework before I saw you? 11. Where … (she / work )? 12. … (I / pay) the
bill before we left? 13. … (we / visit) my parents already that winter? 14. When you called, …
(they / eat) dinner? 15. How … (he / manage) to fix the cooker? 16. … (my sister / be) sick for a
long time? 17. How much … (she / study) before the exam? 18. What … (you / cook) for dinner
that night? 19. When … (they / arrive)? 20. How many coffees … (she / drink) before the
interview?

Exercise 5. Put the verb in brackets into Past Simple or Past Perfect:
1. I got up late because I (forget) … to set my alarm clock. 2. When she (hear) … the noise
she turned to see what it was. 3. When I saw her I knew we (never meet) … before. 4. When I
looked at the lorry I could see that somebody (drive) … into the back of it. 5. The movie (start
already) … when we arrived to the cinema. 6. The doctor examined her leg and (find) … that she
had broken it. 7. I was hungry because I (not eat) … since breakfast. 8. I was frightened because
the police (come) … for my sister. 9. I was feeling very thirsty because I (drink) … too much

275
alcohol the night before. 10. I told him twice that I (not know) … him. 11. I told him I didn't
know who (steal) … his pen. 12. I paid for the window because my son (break) … . 13. I felt
really stupid because I (make) …a lot of mistakes. 14. I couldn't get in because I (lose) … my
keys. 15. I (write) … a long letter to my mother yesterday. 16. He told me he (never see) …
anything like that. 17. He told me he (never be) … to Australia before. 18. He started to read the
newspaper he (buy) … an hour earlier. 19. He (spend) … three years in Tahiti when he was a
child. 20. Before he came to Warsaw he (live) … in Prague. 21. After she (finish) … breakfast
she left the house.

Exercise 6. Fill in prepositions or adverbs wherever necessary:

1. Soames had courted ... Irene for a long time before she accepted ... him. 2. I'm going to
introduce you ... my friend. 3. I'd like to get acquainted ... your plan. 4. Who is she married ...? -
She is married ... a well-known artist. 5. Will you inform me ... your decision? 6. We got some
information ... the matter we were interested ... . 7. We were surprised ... her refusal. 8. George
Meadows went ... sea when his brother married ... Emily. 9. I'm sure you will regret ... your act.
10. She is going to marry.... one ... our students. 11. ... our surprise we found nobody ... home.
12. He likes to boast... his strength. 13. What is she ...? - She is tall and very beautiful. 14. She is
... her mother.

Exercise 7. Past tense or past perfect .Complete with the right tense:

1. The meeting was at nine o'clock. When I … (arrive) at ten, the meeting had finished. 2. When
we got to the airport, I realized that I … (leave)my passport at home. 3. He didn't realize that he
had gone through a red light, until a policeman … (stop) him. 4. They didn't want to go to the
cinema because they … (see) the film the week before. 5. Barbara … (change) so much that I
didn't recognize her. 6. The next day, she moved away, as she … (plan) to. 7. They wondered
where she … (go) . 8. When she had cried for half an hour she … (begin) to feel better. 9. For
three weeks she behaved as if nothing … (change). 10. She … (take) the news as calmly as if she
had expected it.

Exercise 8. Give the interrogative and negative forms of the following sentences:

1. He has been working at his report since 10 o'clock. 2. They have been writing their test
for nearly two hours already. 3. She has been waiting long. 4. His daughter has been playing the
piano since the morning. 5. They have been discussing this problem for rather a long time. 6.
The child has been sleeping too long. 7. Ann and Roger have been quarrelling for fifteen minutes.
8. She has been dreaming to become an actress all her life. 9. I have been doing my lessons since
4 o'clock.

Exercise 9. Put the verbs in brackets in the Present Perfect or the Present Perfect Continuous:

1. How long you (to wait) for me? 2. I (to know) her since my childhood. 3. He (to think)
about it for three days. 4. They always (to prefer) theatre to TV. 5. How long she (to study)
music? - Oh, she (to study) music since her early childhood. 6. Since she was a little girl she (to
try) not to take things seriously. 7. The students (to write) their test for two hours already. 8. She
(to live) in that house round the corner about thirty years. 9. You (to play) too long. It's high time
to do your lessons. 10. She (to be ill) for more than two weeks. I (to miss) her terribly.

Exercise 10. Translate the following into English:

276
1. Eu vă aştept de 20 minute deja. 2. Savanţii lucrează asupra acestei probleme de mulţi
ani. 3. Jean toată viaţa visează să călătorească în Orient. 4. Eu traduc articolul de dis-de-
dimineaţă. 5. Ea doarme de mult timp deacum. E timpul să o trezim. 6. Ana şi Roger se ceartă de
dis-de-dimineaţă. 7. Noi locuim în această căsuţă de o săptămână deacum. 8. De prea mult timp
voi discutaţi această problemă. 9. Locuiţi de mult timp aici? 10. El chiar se ocupă (studiază) atât
de mult? 11. Ai împachetat deacum lucrurile? Taxiul aşteaptă de zece minute deja. 12. El
întotdeauna s-a interesat de fizică. El acum studiază o nouă problemă. El s e ocupă de această de
două luni deja. 13. N. este autorul unor nuvele foarte interesante. Nu demult a finisat o istorioară
şi acum scrie alta. El lucrează asupra ei de o lună şi spune că o scrie cu plăcere. 14. Noi suntem
aici de la începutul lunii dar în tot acest timp vremea a fost foarte urâtă. 15. Plouă de dimineaţă.

Exercise 11. Fill in articles wherever necessary:

1. We received ... very interesting information about this country. 2. Last summer we had ...
lovely time in ... South. 3. He went to ... sea hoping to save ... money and make ... fortune. 4.
This boy doesn't deserve ... praise. 5. Will you do me ... favour? 6. She gave me ... good advice
how to get rid of my mistakes. 7. It was ... hard work and Mike did not like it. 8. She is making
... good progress in English. 9. Where is ... money? - I put it on the table. 10.1 don't like ... rainy
weather. 11. She has ... long, beautiful hair. 12. It was ... unexpected news and we were surprised
to hear it. 13. ... Bickets were eager to save ... money. 14. The girl had ... snub nose and ... fair
complexion. 15. My father was of ... dark complexion, with ... very great forehead and ... dark
hazel eyes, overhung by ... eyebrows which were black though his hair was white. He had ...
straight nose and ... full lips.

CINEMA
Cinema
Cinema plays an important role in the life of any society. It is an available popular form of art.
Lots of people find going to the cinema one of the best ways of spending their leisure time. The
movie audience is predominantly a young one.Due to numerous video facilities, cinema
attendances have declined sharply. But there is no denying the fact that the cinema-going habit is
still a strong one. No matter how large the place you live in is (whether it’s a big city or a small
provincial town, or even a settlement) there’s most likely to be a cinema there.There are such
genres of feature films as the western, the thriller, the musical, the drama and the comedy. The
performance lasts from two or three hours and most cinemas have at least 4 performances a day.
There is no doubt that a good cinema show is an excellent entertainment and quite cheap. Of late
cinema screens in this country have been dominated by films produced in the USA. And this
tendency is growing.As for me, I’m fond of going to the cinema. It’s a pity, I don’t always have
time for it. It’s an open secret that we live in a very difficult time now. But people do need
something amusing and pleasant, something to laugh at. That’s why I give my preference to
comedies. The last comedy, I saw, is “Crocodile Dandy”. The film tells about amusing
adventures of a young lovely woman – reporter and a strong and brave crocodile hunter. At first,
their relations were not friendly. She even looked down on him and he in return neglected her.
But after he rescued her out of some difficult situations, their relations became more friendly. A
happy end is an essential; feature of American films. The same is true of this comedy. The main
characters fall in love with each other in the end of the film.

A Visit to the Cinema

Once I read an article about various kinds of entertainment. According to it TV, radio and
cinema have made great changes in the entertainments with which people fill their free time.
277
 There was a time when people knew what to do to enjoy themselves: they played games,
sang, played musical instruments, went out shooting.
Nowadays we can get entertained by the TV, the radio, the theatre or the cinema. Cinema
is available no matter where you live. You can always find the film you like among horror films,
thrillers, westerns, detective, love, musical films or comedies.
Not so long ago most people used to visit cinema every week. Often cinema houses were
overcrowded. But at present video production has flooded the market and cinema became less
popular.
I don’t go often to the cinema and my friends are not regular cinema-goers either. But if
there is a film, which is a hit with the public, I do my best to watch it. The last film I saw was
Hollywood remake of Shakespeare’s “Romeo and Juliet”. The action takes place in the modern
world but all the rest is just like great Shakespeare had described: people, action, feelings. The
original text was used in the film. And I have to mention that the music was great. I think the
actors and the actresses did their best and looked great. I’ll remember the film for a long time.

Vocabulary
To spend one’s leisure time; movie audience; predominantly; video facilities; to emerge;
cinema-going habit; a settlement; adventures; grown-ups; look grown-up; not without
pleasure; to include; a feature film /full-length film an underground film; genre; western;
thriller; an adventure film; a historical film; a documentary; a cartoon; an epic; a comedy;
a horror; a science fiction movie; performance; entertainment; cinema screens; to
dominate; to be fond of; it’s a pity; it’s an open secret; to give preference to smth.; amusing
adventures; woman-reporter; hunter; to look down on smb.; to rescue smb. out of smth.;
an essential features; to fall in love with each other; to enjoy; overcrowded; to flood; to
mention; pavement; Everyone had somewhere to go.; except; shop window; There was a
cowboy film showing.; notice; watch the people go past; as well; a man wearing a suit; keep
on doing; parcel; rush off; put out a cigarette; the cinema entrance; laugh at; pretend;
stare; take hold of ticket office; squeeze; a film/a movie/a motion picture; the movies; a
short film; a silent film; a black-and-white film; a film library; a trailer; the title; subtitle;
credits; the screenplay; a film maker; actor/actress; the producer; to direct a film; the cast;
the leading role; the supporting role; a minor role (to have a minor role); the screen; to
screen; to shoot; shooting; to dub; dubbed; The film is dubbed; The movie is subtitled;
special effects; film music; film poster; a hit or a blockbuster; a flop; a review of film;
viewer; Cannes festival; Oscar; sitcom;

Exercise 1. Answer the following questions:

1. How do lots of people find going to the cinema? 2. Who makes up the movie audience? 3.
Why have cinema attendances declined sharply? 4. Is the cinema going habit still a strong one?
5. What genres of feature films are there? 6. How many performances have many cinemas a day?
7. What films have cinema in this country been dominated by? 8. Are you fond of going to the
cinema? 9. In what time do we live now? 10. What do you give your preference to? 11. What
does the film you saw last tell? 12. What is an essential feature of American films?

Exercise 2. Find the right word:

1. A film with inspector, murders, policemen is a 2. A film watched by children is a 3.

A film nearly broadcast all days by channels is a 4. A film with frightening characters and
often broadcast during Halloween is a 5. A person who makes a film is a 6. A person
who writes the story of the film is a 7. It is the synonymous of ' to make a film' then it
is: 8. It is a ceremony where the best actors and actresses are awarded, it is 9. It is a
prize given to actors, it is an 10. A person who watches a film on TV is a .
278
Exercise 3. Write an essay on the topic “My favourite film/actor’’.

Exercise 4. Translate the following sentences into English:

A. 1. Am invitat-o pe Ana la petrecere, dar ea a refuzat să vină. 2. Interesant, va accepta el

invitaţia noastră sau o va refuza. 3. Acum medicul nu primeşte pacienţi. 4. Eu sper că veţi susţine
planul nostru. 5. Robert era atât de emoţionat că de abia vorbea. 6. Nu aţi putea să-mi spuneţi ce
s-a întâmplat? De ce sunteţi atât de agitat? 7. Când cortina a fost ridicată, publicul a aplaudat. 8.
Auzind paşi, ea a ridicat capul. 9. Mi-a plăcut foarte mult scena finală a operei ,,Viaţa sacrificată
pentru Rege”. 10. Robert a simţit cum Jean s-a atins de mâna lui. 11. Povestirea era atât de
emoţionantă încât fata nu a putut să-şi oprească lacrimile. 12. Cântul lui Alison l-a impresionat
foarte mult pe Robert. 13. Noi aveam locuri la balcon de unde vedeam foarte bine scena.
B. 1. Actriţa ce juca rolul principal era foarte frumoasă. 2. Îmi place cum este montat baletul
,,Lacul lebedelor” la teatrul Stanislavski. 3. Filmul a fost foarte interesant şi mi-a făcut plăcere
să-l vizionez. 4. Treci pe la mine când voi merge la patinoar. 5. Ei ne vizitau des vara. 6. În drum
spre casă trebuie să trec pe la bibliotecă. 7. Decoraţiile acestei opere sunt pur şi simplu
nemaipomenite. 8. Nu am reuşit să cumpăr bilete la acest spectacol din timp, dar am reuşit să
obţin locuri bune de la casa teatrului. 9. Mai bine aş merge astăzi la conservator, în programă
sunt operele compozitorilor mei preferaţi. 10. Ne-a plăcut foarte mult petrecerea, a fost foarte
bine organizată. 11. Ce aţi făcut în timpul antractului? – Am mers la bufet? 12. Cînd veniţi la
teatru lăsaţi paltonul la vestiar. Tot acolo puteţi să luaţi binoclul şi programa. 13. Cele mai bune
locuri la teatru sunt cele de la arter şi din balcoane, ele sunt şi cele mai scumpe. Celelalte locuri
sunt mai ieftine şi mai rele. 14. Spectacolul a avut un mare succes la public, actorii au fost
chemaţi de multe ori la bis.

Exercise 5. Choose the right word from the list to fill in the gaps. Go to the next page to
check your answers:

fast food, cookbook, recipe, dish, menu, take-away, bill, ingredients, service, wait person, tip,
dessert, bar, lounge, restaurant, order

I really hate . I prefer to go to a good that serves everything, including the ,

using the best . Sometimes, I like to something that I have tried at home. First, I
look up the in the and then I cook the . Next, I go to the restaurant, and
when the comes to my table I ask for the and order what I have already cooked at
home! Sometimes, I like to go out for a . You can have a drink in either a or a
, which are usually nicer. At the end of the evening, it's time to ask for the and,
usually, if the has been good, it's a good idea to leave a 15%-20% tip.

Exercise 6. Group work:

a) Although watching movies online from the comfort of one's homes is becoming very popular,
many people still enjoy the pleasure of buying movie tickets and watching a movie at a local
theatre. What is the attraction that draws people to the movies? How much do movie tickets cost
in your area? What do people like to do before or after seeing a movie?
b) First, study the map. Then, listen to the conversation and answer the questions. (T 10.1)

279
1. When is Steve going out with Jennifer?
A. Friday B. Saturday C. Sunday D. Monday
2. Where is the movie theater?
A. 2 B.1 C. 12 D. 4
3. Where is the restaurant located?
A. 6 B. 11 C. 14 D. 8
4. What time does the restaurant close on Sundays?
A. 10:30 PM B. 11: 00 PM C. 11:30 PM D. 12:00 AM
5. Where is the florist?
A. 10 B. 6 C. 15 D. 5

Exercise 7. Make up 10 sentences using the verbs to want, to ask, to expect, to like, to tell, to make,
to hear, to see, to notice, to watch, to feel + Complex Object. b) Read them out in English for your
fellow-students to translate them into Romanian. Correct their mistakes if any at all.

Exercise 8. a) Read and translate the text:

On Thursday evenings the two librarians at the library in Benham, Pamela Cream and Violet
Meade were to work until nine o'clock. The girls didn't mind staying late; in their small town
there was very little for two unmarried girls to do anything. That's why when Inspector Ellis of
the local police offered to give judo lessons to anybody who wanted them, Pamela was the first
to enrol. She began learning judo exactly as she did everything else, thoroughly and with great
interest. She always insisted on doing her best. She was a small woman, but in judo that does not
matter. She was healthy, strong and brave. If not really beautiful she was pleasant to look at and
no wonder Inspector Timothy Ellis fell in love with his best pupil. They were to get married
soon.
That Thursday Tim was to call for her at nine o'clock to take her out to dinner. It was already
eight-thirty and Pamela was returning the books to the shelves, while Violet was serving the
remaining readers.
When Pamela was passing the windows near the back door she noticed that the blind was up.
She tried to pull it down, but it kept rolling to the top of the window, making a very loud noise. At
last Pamela managed somehow to make it stay down, then went to the next aisle. To her greatest
surprise she saw two men there. "Oh," she said, "I'm sorry, gentlemen, but readers are not
allowed in this section of the library!" "I'm sorry, Miss," said the smaller of the two men with an
ugly face, who seemed as surprised as Pamela, "we didn't know it." The other man, much larger
than the one who spoke stood with his back to Pamela, leaning against the shelves. The smaller
man said: "I'm afraid my friend is feeling rather weak. He wants some fresh air. Could you help
me take him out, Miss?" "Oh, I'm so sorry," said Pamela and put her arm about the bigger man
who was quite heavy. The smaller man took his friend by the other arm and the three of them
started moving slowly to the back door. Suddenly Pamela stopped in horror. She saw blood on the
man's coat. Looking at him closely she saw he was dead. The truth flashed in her mind. "You ...
you killed him... here, in our library!" "Aren't you a smart young lady!" hissed the short man
angrily, "go on helping me and avoid attracting attention, or you'll get what Blackie got." Pamela
280
obeyed. They were in front of the window when suddenly Pamela had an idea. That new judo
hold that Tim had taught her, maybe it would work! She must take her chance. That murderer
was very dangerous; one more dead body that could well be her own wouldn't make him lose
sleep. Oh, if only the hold worked!
Her hand touched the window blind. It went up with a loud noise. The man, greatly surprised
by it, dropped Blackies arm and Pamela let go of the other arm. The heavy body fell to the floor.
The murderer snatched out a knife and rushed at Pamela, who was ready for him...
When the frightened people from the library came running into the back room they saw two
men lying on the floor and white-faced Pamela standing over the unconscious murderer...

b) Determine the main idea of the story. c) Make up a plan of the story. d) Choose a suitable
headline to the story from those suggested below:

1. "It Worked!"; 2. "A Brave Girl"; 3. "Sport Is Your Saving"; 4. "The Inspector's Girl"; 5.
"Murder in the Library".

e) Say what you think of Pamela's character. f) Give a short summary of the story. g) Think of a
logical end to the story.

Exercise 9. Explain the meaning of the proverb and use it in a situation of your own:

Handsome is that handsome does.

Exercise 10. Make up short dialogues concerning the appearance of:

a child, an elderly person, your favourite actor (actress) or fiction character.

Exercise 11. Translate the following sentences into English:

A. 1. Ei se râdeau atât de zgomotos încât nu am putut să nu zâmbesc şi eu. 2. Poporul moldovean

este talentat şi muncitor. 3. Domnul Dick era foarte generos. El era foarte bun cu David, şi
băiatul îl iubea pe acest om vesel şi caraghios. 4. Deşi domnul Burton părea să fie foarte bun la
inimă, în realitate el era o persoană foarte crudă. 5. Eu cred că băiatul nu merită să fie pedepsit.
6. Când el zâmbea, în colţurile ochilor săi căprui apăreau câteva riduri fine. 7. Domnişoara Betsy
era o femeie perspicace. 8. După ce mama şi fratele său murise, David hotărâse să-şi găsească
mătuşa. 9. Părinţii lui Oliver murise şi el se simţea foarte singuratic. 10. Purtarea lui stranie ne-a
surprins foarte mult. 11. Era o noutate nemaipomenită, şi Jean nu putea să nu i-o comunice lui
Robert. 12. Irene era foarte frumoasă, frumuseţea căreia era admirată de toţi omenii. 13. Fata era
neobişnuit de deşteaptă pentru vârsta ei. 14. Spre marea noastră surprindere el era acasă. 15. Noi
l-am anunţat că vom avea o adunare peste trei zile.
B. 1.Părul ei lung şi ondulat avea o culoare frumoasă. 2. Felul caraghios în care arăta băiatul a
făcut-o pe bătrânică să zâmbească. 3. Băiatul ne distra povestindu-ne istorioare amuzante. 4. El
mi-a făcut cunoştinţă cu soţia sa, demult doream să o cunosc. 5. Domnul Hill i-a făcut cunoştinţă
Ericăi cu noul său proiect. 6. El ne-a făcut cunoştinţă cu părinţii lui pe care încă nu-i cunoşteam.
7. Domnişoara Emily nu ştia cu cine să se căsătorească: cu Tom sau cu George. 8. Michael s-a
căsătorit cu Flor deşi ea nu-l iubea. 9. Tinerii s-au căsătorit cu doi ani în urmă, şi sunt foarte
fericiţi. Ei merită să fie fericiţi. 10. Deşi Soms înţelegea căsătoria lui era nefericită, el nu putea să
se despartă de Irene. 11. Ca şi toţi băieţii lui Tom Sawyer îi plăcea să se laude. 12. Nu puteam să
nu admirăm jocul excelent al tânărului actor în piesa ,,Furtuna”. 13. Domnul Pickwick era o
persoană mică de statură, grăsuţ şi foarte bun, bun la inimă. 14. Ochii mari ai Florensei cu gene
lungi, părul ei blond şi tenul ei superb o făceau nemaipomenit de frumoasă. 15. Ea nu este
frumoasă, dar foarte atrăgătoare. Şi mâinile ei au o formă foarte frumoasă. 16. Fetiţa e grăsuţă,
281
cu faţa rotundă, nasul cârn, ochi albaştri, sprâncene subţiri, gene lungi şi un păr lung roşcat. Are
o piele de culoare deschisă şi un ten frumos. Deacum este minunată, dar cu timpul va fi şi mai
frumoasă. 17. Jeane nu era prea drăguţă, dar avea nişte ochi minunaţi şi o siluetă suplă. 18.
Domnişoara Betsy era o femeie înaltă suplă cu părul negru şi drept, cu un ten palid şi ochi negri
pătrunzători.

Exercise 12. Give a ten-line continuation of the following dialogue:

A: Have you seen Bob's sister?

B: No, I haven't, have you?
A: I've met her several times.
B: If she is like her brother she must be very good-looking. Bob is handsome, isn't he?

Exercise 13. Let one of the students give a very short description of the appearance (and
character) of a person, male or female, you all know very well. Try to find out who that person is
by asking questions as in the model. All those present are to take part in the game.

Model: A: How old is she?

B: She's young, tall and slim.
A: Is her complexion rosy?
B: No, rather pale, I'd say.
A: She is blue-eyed, isn't she?
B: No, her eyes are dark.
A: And what about her nose?
B: She has a very nice turned-up nose.
A: Is her hair (does she wear her hair) long or short?
B: Her hair is short and straight.
A: Is she dark-haired?
B: Red.
A: It's Ann, isn't it?
B: No, it's not. You are mistaken. (That's right. You've guessed).
Note. You are allowed to ask any questions about appearance, disposition, hobbies, habits, interests, but
the name and occupation.

Exercise 14. a) Read the text "A Lovers' Quarrel" (Part One). Translate it into Romanian:

A Lovers' Quarrel
Scene: Daphne's house.
Part One
The telephone rings
D a p h n e (picking up the receiver): Hullo! Is that you, James?
R o b e r t : Hullo! Is that you, Daphne?
D: Yes, James. I was wondering whether you'd call this evening.
R: Listen, Daphne. This is Robert, not James. Who the devil is James, anyway?
D: Oh ! It's you, Robert. I'm sorry. I was expecting a call from somebody else.
R: I've been trying to get you on the phone since 2 o'clock.
D: Have you? I've been out. I only came in half an hour ago.
R: Where have you been?
D: I've been playing tennis at the club.
R: You told me you weren't going to play tennis today.
D: Yes, I know. But Madge asked me to go and make up a four.
R: Well! That's a bit thick!
282
b) Explain the use of tenses:

1. I was wondering whether you'd call this evening. 2. I was expecting a call.... 3. I've been
trying to get you ... .4. I've been out. 5. Where have you been? 6. I've been playing tennis ...... 7.
You told me you weren't going...

c) Make up situations in which you can use the tenses mentioned above. Ask other students to
explain their use.

d) Read the text "A Lovers' Quarrel" (Part Two). Translate it into Romanian:
Part Two
R: What's the matter, Daphne? You seem to have been avoiding me recently.
D: Avoiding you? Of course I haven't been avoiding you. We went out together on Wednesday,
didn't we?
R: Yes, but that's three days ago, Daphne. I'm longing to see you. Will you come with me
tonight?
D: Oh, not tonight, Robert. I'm feeling a bit tired.
R: Couldn't we go out just for an hour? I've been looking forward to seeing you all day.
D: I can see you haven't been playing tennis all day or you ...
R: I wish I had. I've been helping the old man in the garden.
D: Then you must be feeling tired too!
R: Listen, darling! Are you telling me the truth? Or are you going out with this James, whoever
he is?
D: Of course not. He’s...
R: You're going out with him this evening, aren't you?
D: No. I've told you. I don't want to go out this evening.
R: Now I know why. You're going to sit by the phone all evening, waiting for your beloved
Jimmy to give you a call.
D: Don't be ridiculous, Robert. He isn't my beloved Jimmy. And anyway ... his name is James.
He doesn't like to be called Jimmy.

e) Explain the use of tenses:

1. You seem to have been avoiding me ... . 2. I'm longing to see you. 3. I'm feeling a bit tired. 4.
I've been looking forward .... 5. You haven't been playing tennis ... . 6. You've been helping the
old man ... . 7. ... you must be feeling tired too. 8. Are you telling me the truth?

f) Make up situations in which you can use the tenses mentioned above. Make other students
explain the use.

g) Read the text "A Lovers' Quarrel" (Part Three). Translate it into Romanian:
Part Three
R: Oh! He doesn't, does he? Well, if I get my hands on him people will be calling him Scarface
Jimmy. I suppose you've been seeing this poor fish every day. That's why you haven't been
seeing me.
D: Of course it isn't. Do stop talking nonsense, Robert, and listen...
R: To your explanation? You needn't bother. I understand everything perfectly. (He imitates her.)
Oh, hullo, James darling. I was wondering whether you'd call this evening. I'm not a fool, you
know.
D: For the last time ... will you listen?
R: Go on. I'm all ears.

283
D: James is my cousin. He's thirty-four, he's married, and he has 3 children. He's coming to
London next week from Scotland, and he'll be staying with us. We're expecting a call from him
this evening.
R: Your cousin? Honestly? Married? Why the devil didn't you say so?
D: You didn't give me the chance.
R: When can I see you again?
D: I'll see you in half an hour ... unless you're feeling too ashamed of yourself.

h) Explain the use of tenses:

1. If 1 get my hands on him people will be calling him .... 2. You've been seeing this poor fish ...
3. He's coming to London ... and he'll be staying with us ....

i) Make up situations in which you can use the tenses mentioned above. Make other students
explain their use.

Exercise 15. Write a letter following the given points:

You have been asked to write for your school magazine in English.
• The article should be a review of your favourite film.
• Write to describe the film, and say what you liked and didn't like about it.
• Your letter should be about 200 words long.
The film I want to review in this article is......

Lesson 3.

Grammar: Reported Speech

Direct Speech is the exact words someone said. We use quotation marks ('') in direct speech.

e.g. I'm very tired,' Mary said.

Reported Speech is the exact meaning of what someone said, but not the exact words. We do
not use quotation marks in reported speech. We can either use the word that after the
introductory verb or we can omit it.

e.g. Mary said (that) she was very tired.

SAY-TELL
We use the verb say:
◆ both in direct and reported speech without the preposition to when it is not followed by the
person being spoken to.
e.g. Jerry said. 'I need some money.' Jerry said (that) he needed some money.
♦both in direct and reported speech with the preposition to when it is followed by the
person being spoken to.
e.g. Jerry said to me, I need some money.' Jerry said to me (that) he needed some money.
♦in expressions such as: say good morning/afternoon, etc., say something, say one's prayers, say
so, etc.
We use the verb tell without the preposition to:
♦both in direct and reported speech when it is followed by the person we are talking to.
e.g. Jerry told me. I need some money.' Jerry told me (that) he needed some money.
284
♦in expressions such as: tell the truth, tell a lie, tell a secret, tell a story, tell the time, tell the
difference, tell sb one's name, tell sb the way, tell one from another, etc.

Reported Statements
We use a 'reporting verb' like 'say' or 'tell'. If this verb is in the present tense, it's easy. We just
put 'she says' and then the sentence:
Direct speech: “I like ice cream”.
Reported speech: She says she likes ice cream.

We don't need to change the tense, though probably we do need to change the 'person' from 'I' to
'she', for example. We also may need to change words like 'my' and 'your'.
But, if the reporting verb is in the past tense, then usually we change the tenses in the reported
speech:
Direct speech: “I like ice cream”.
Reported speech: She said she liked ice cream.

Tense Direct Speech Reported Speech

present simple “I like ice cream” She said (that) she liked ice cream.
present
“I am living in London” She said she was living in London.
continuous
She said she had bought a car OR She said she
past simple “I bought a car”
bought a car.
“I was walking along the
past continuous She said she had been walking along the street.
street”
present perfect “I haven't seen Julie” She said she hadn't seen Julie.
“I had taken English lessons
past perfect* She said she had taken English lessons before.
before”
will “I'll see you later” She said she would see me later.
would* “I would help, but..” She said she would help but...
can “I can speak perfect English” She said she could speak perfect English.
“I could swim when I was
could* She said she could swim when she was four.
four”
shall “I shall come later” She said she would come later.
should* “I should call my mother” She said she should call her mother
might* "I might be late" She said she might be late
She said she must study at the weekend OR She
must "I must study at the weekend"
said she had to study at the weekend
* doesn't change.
Occasionally, we don't need to change the present tense into the past if the information in direct
speech is still true (but this is only for things which are general facts, and even then usually we
like to change the tense):
Direct speech: “The sky is blue”.
Reported speech: She said that the sky is/was blue.

Reported Questions
So now you have no problem with making reported speech from positive and negative sentences.
But how about questions?
Direct speech: "Where do you live?"

285
How can we make the reported speech here?
In fact, it's not so different from reported statements. The tense changes are the same, and we
keep the question word. The very important thing though is that, once we tell the question to
someone else, it isn't a question any more. So we need to change the grammar to a normal
positive sentence, this example will help:
Direct speech: "Where do you live?"
Reported speech: She asked me where I lived.
Do you see how it’s made it? The direct question is in the present simple tense. We make a
present simple question with 'do' or 'does' so I need to take that away. Then I need to change the
verb to the past simple.
Another example:
Direct speech: "where is Julie?"
Reported speech: She asked me where Julie was.
The direct question is the present simple of 'be'. We make the question form of the present
simple of be by inverting (changing the position of) the subject and verb. So, we need to change
them back before putting the verb into the past simple.
Here are some more examples:

Direct Question Reported Question

“Where is the Post Office, please?” She asked me where the Post Office was.
“What are you doing?” She asked me what I was doing.
“Who was that fantastic man?” She asked me who that fantastic man had been.

So much for 'wh' questions. But, what if you need to report a 'yes / no' question? We don't have
any question words to help us. Instead, we use 'if':
Direct speech: "Do you like chocolate?"
Reported speech: She asked me if I liked chocolate.
Here are a few more examples:

Direct Question Reported Question

“Do you love me?” He asked me if I loved him.
“Have you ever been to Mexico?” She asked me if I had ever been to Mexico.
“Are you living here?” She asked me if I was living here.

Reported Requests
There's more! What if someone asks you to do something (in a polite way)? For example:
Direct speech: "Close the window, please"
Or: "Could you close the window please?"
Or: "Would you mind closing the window please?"
All of these requests mean the same thing, so we don't need to report every word when we tell
another person about it. We simply use 'ask me + to + infinitive':
Reported speech: She asked me to close the window.
Here are a few more examples:
Direct Request Reported Request
“Please help me”. She asked me to help her.
“Please don't smoke”. She asked me not to smoke.
“Could you bring my book tonight?” She asked me to bring her book that night.
“Could you pass the milk, please?” She asked me to pass the milk.
“Would you mind coming early tomorrow?” She asked me to come early the next day.

286
To report a negative request, use 'not':
Direct speech: "Please don't be late."
Reported speech: She asked us not to be late.

Reported Orders
And finally, how about if someone doesn't ask so politely? We can call this an 'order' in English,
when someone tells you very directly to do something.

e.g. Direct speech: "Sit down!"

In fact, we make this into reported speech in the same way as a request. We just use 'tell' instead
of 'ask':
e.g. Reported speech: She told me to sit down.

Direct Order Reported Order

“Go to bed!” He told the child to go to bed.
“Don't worry!” He told her not to worry.
“Be on time!” He told me to be on time.
“Don't smoke!” He told us not to smoke.

Time Expressions with Reported Speech

Sometimes when we change direct speech into reported speech we have to change time
expressions too. We don't always have to do this, however. It depends on when we heard the
direct speech and when we say the reported speech.
e.g. It's Monday. Julie says "I'm leaving today".
If I tell someone on Monday, I say "Julie said she was leaving today".
If I tell someone on Tuesday, I say "Julie said she was leaving yesterday".
If I tell someone on Wednesday, I say "Julie said she was leaving on Monday".
If I tell someone a month later, I say "Julie said she was leaving that day".

Here's a table of some possible conversions:

now then / at that time

today yesterday / that day / Tuesday / the 27th of June
yesterday the day before yesterday / the day before / Wednesday / the 5th of December
last night the night before, Thursday night
last week the week before / the previous week
tomorrow today / the next day / the following day / Friday

Grammar Exercises:

Exercise 1. Fill in the gaps with say or tell in the correct tense:

A Richard (1) ...told... Sarah that he was having a party on Saturday night. He (2) that it
would start early but it would finish quite late. He (3) her to bring her sister along as well.
Sarah (4) she was looking forward to going. Richard (5) her he would probably call again
on Friday to (6) her the way to his house.

287
В What shall we do?' asked Carrie. It's raining outside, so let's watch television,' I (1) I
turned on the television and Carrie (2) to me. Look! That's my favourite programme. Let's
watch it.' 'To (3) you the truth, I don't like it.' I (4) .
С Good morning. Mr Pearson,' (1) Bella. Good morning, Bella,' he replied. I've got lots of
letters for you to type today.' he (2) to her. Alright,' Bella (3) I’ll type them after I finish
writing this report for you.'

Exercise 2. Change this direct speech into reported speech:

1. “He works in a bank”. She said 2. “We went out last night”. She told me 3. “I’m
coming!”. She said 4. “I was waiting for the bus when he arrived”. She told me 5. “ I’d
never been there before”. She said 6. “I didn’t go to the party”. She told me 7. “Lucy’ll
come later”. She said 8. “He hasn’t eaten breakfast”. She told me 9. “I can help you
tomorrow”. She said 10. “You should go to bed early”. She told me 11. “I don’t like
chocolate”. She told me 12. “I won’t see you tomorrow”. She said 13. “She’s living in
Paris for a few months”. She said 14. “I visited my parents at the weekend”. She told me
15. “She hasn’t eaten sushi before”. She said 16. “I hadn’t travelled by underground before I
came to London”. She said 17. “They would help if they could”. She said 18. “I’ll do
the washing-up later”. She told me 19. “He could read when he was three”. She said 20.
“I was sleeping when Julie called”. She said .

Exercise 3. Put in ‘said’ or ‘told’:

1.Julie that she would join us after work. 2. She me that she was going running this
evening. 3. John us that he couldn’t come to the party. 4. John that he had been to the
cinema at the weekend. 5. She them she wanted to quit. 6. David he was going to arrive
at eight. 7. They that they didn’t want to meet us on Tuesday. 8. I him I wasn’t
impressed. 9. Lucy Julie that she was leaving on Wednesday. 10. We that we were going
on holiday the following week. 11. Jack my mother he would be in Spain this week.
12. I that I hated mushrooms. 13. She she loved chocolate. 14. They they were
meeting Luke today. 15. They us they were going to the museum this afternoon. 16. He
he wouldn’t start without us. 17. I them I’d bring pudding. 18. Jonathan it would
rain today. 19. They us that it was fine to come late. 20. The boss me that I should do
some more work on this report.

Exercise 4. Reported Requests and Orders. Change the direct speech into reported speech:

1.“Please help me carry this” She asked me . 2. “Please come early” She . 3. “Please buy
some milk” She . 4. “Could you please open the window?” She . 5. “Could you bring the
book tonight?” She . 6. “Can you help me with my homework, please?” She . 7. “Would
you bring me a cup of coffee, please?” She .8. “Would you mind passing the salt?” She .
9. “Would you mind lending me a pencil?” She

Exercise 5. Change these direct questions into reported speech:

1. “Where is he?” She asked me . 2. “What are you doing?” She asked me . 3. “Why did
you go out last night?” She asked me . 4. “Who was that beautiful woman?” She asked me
. 5. “How is your mother?” She asked me . 6. “What are you going to do at the
weekend?” She asked me . 7. “Where will you live after graduation?” She asked me . 8.
“What were you doing when I saw you?” She asked me . 9. “How was the journey?” She
asked me _.

288
Exercise 6. Pe masă sunt cartofi. Pe masă sunt cărţi. În urcior este lapte. Pe farfurie este unt. Pe
masă este sare. Pe tablă este scrisă o propoziţie. 2. Pictura este pe perete. Ceasul este pe perete.
Tabla este pe perete. Cutiile sunt pe masă. Genţile sunt pe masă. Laptele este în urcior. Untul
este pe farfurie. Sarea este pe masă. Propoziţia este scrisă pe tablă. 3.Pe masă este o lampă.
Lampa este pe masă. Pe masă este un ziar. Ziarul este pe masă. Pe stradă este o maşină. Maşina
este pe stradă. Lângă perete stă (este) un divan. Divanul este lângă perete. În cutie sunt creioane.
Creioanele sunt în cutie. 4. Nu sunt cărţi pe masă. Cartea nu este pe masă. Nu este pălăria pe
scaun. Pălăria nu este pe scaun. Nu sunt caiete pe scaun. Caietul nu este pe scaun. Nu este stiloul
în penal. Stiloul nu este în penal. Nu sunt bani în geantă. Banii nu sunt în geantă. Nu sunt trei
dar patru cărţi în geantă. În geantă nu sunt cinci dar şase creioane. În geantă nu sunt două dar
numai un stilou. 5. Este timpul mesei. Este timpul de a bea ceai.

B. 1. Aceasta este camera mea. În mijlocul camerei este o masă. Pe masă este un urcior. În
urcior este lapte. Pe farfurie este unt. 2. Lasă Benny să se aşeze la masă. Este timpul dejunului.
Laptele este în urcior. Untul este pe farfurie. Cuţitul este lângă farfurie. Unde este pâinea. Pâinea
este în bufet. 3. Unde este revista? Revista este pe masă. Revista nu este pe masă, ea este pe
scaun. 4. În penal nu este stiloul. Stiloul nu este în penal, el este pe masă. 5. Unde sunt banii.
Banii tăi nu sunt în geantă. Ei sunt pe masă. 6. Ai multe caiete în geanta ta? Nu prea multe, două
ori trei. Aveţi cretă la tablă? Da, eu aşa cred. 7. Sunt multe case pe strada Dumneavoastră? Da,
sunt multe case frumoase. Sunt multe flori în parcul Dumneavoastră? Nu prea, dar ele îmi plac
foarte mult.

Exercise 7. Present Perfect Simple or Present Perfect Continuous:

1.I (not / do) the housework yet. 2. They (study) very hard recently. 3. She
(promise) to help many times. 4. He (clean) the kitchen. Everything is sparkling clean. 5.
She (write) her essay and (send) it to her professor. 6. He (see) the film ‘The King’s
Speech’ about six times. 7. We (paint) our living room. I think it looks a lot better. 8. She
(take) French lessons lately. 9. It (not / rain) for three hours! Only about one hour. 10.
Lucy (already / leave). 11. How many times (you / visit) Scotland? 12. I (call) John
for hours and hours and he hasn’t answered. I’m really angry with him! 13. I (be) in London
for three years. 14. We (know) James for ages. 15. It’s really smelly in here. (somebody
/ smoke)?16. How much petrol (she / buy)? 17. She (eat) chocolate all morning, so she
feels sick. 18. I (paint) my house all day, but it’s not finished yet. 19. Julie (be) at the
office since 6 am. 20. The writer (deserve) this award for a long time.

Exercise 8. Render these jokes. Use indirect speech:

1. The well-known singer Enrico Caruso was once driving not far from New York. It so
happened that something went wrong with his car and he had to spend some time in the house of
a farmer. Soon they became friendly and the farmer asked Caruso his name.
When the farmer heard the name, he rose to his feet. "My, I never thought I should see a man
like you in my kitchen, sir," he cried out. "Caruso. The great traveller. Robinson Caruso!"
2. "I say, Dad," said a schoolboy, returning home, "we gave a wonderful performance at
school. A lot of parents came and although some of them had seen it before they all had a jolly
good time."
"How do you know?" asked his father.
"Why, they laughed all through the play," the boy replied.
"And what was the play?" the father asked.
"Hamlet," said the boy.

289
Exercise 9. Render the following dialogue in indirect speech. Explain the difference between
a concert hall and a music-hall:

Gi1da : I went to a very good concert at the Festival Hall last month. You call that hall "a
concert hall", don't you?
Mrs. G r e e n : Yes.
Gi1da : Well, what's "a music-hall"? I've seen that name several times and heard it used in
broadcasts, too.
Mrs. G r e e n : A music-hall is something very different from a concert hall! If you want to hear
a symphony orchestra playing good music, you go to a concert hall. A music-hall is more like a
theatre. The seats are arranged like those in a theatre. There's a stage with curtains like in the
theatre. There's scenery on the stage. We often use the name "Variety Theatre".
G i 1 d a : What would I see and hear if I went to a music-hall?
Mrs. G r e e n : There'd be popular music and singing and dancing. There'd be performances by
acrobats and jugglers. There might even be performing animals.
G i 1 d a : To my mind music-halls are not so popular now. People prefer films today, and
radio and television keep people at home more.
Mrs. G r e e n : I agree with you. The most popular singers and comedians are seen and heard by
millions of viewers and listeners in their own homes.

MUSIC

What is music?
A. Music has probably existed for as long as man has been human, and it certainly predates
civilization by tens of millennia. Yet even today there is no clear definition of exactly what
music is. For example, birdsong is certainly melodic, but it is not tuneful, and it is not created
with the intention of being musical (in fact it is sometimes meant to sound threatening) -
therefore does it count as music?

B. On the other hand, some modern composers have been challenging the idea that music should
be arranged in a pleasant manner with the notes falling in an orderly succession. Others,
famously the avant-guarde composer John Cage have even used silence and called the result
music. As a result there is no one definition of music. Perhaps it should be said that music, like
beauty, is what the person who sees or hears it believes it to be.

C. Music is divided in many ways. Music itself is split into notes, clefts, quavers, and semi-demi
quavers. Ancient and medieval musicologists believed that these notes could be arranged
'horizontally' into melody (making notes that match on the same scale) and 'vertically' (going up
and down the scales to create harmony). Another very basic measurement of music is the 'pulse'.
This is present in almost all forms of music, and is particularly strong in modern popular music.
The pulse is the regular beat which runs through a tune. When you tap your foot or clap your
hands in time to a song, you are beating out the pulse of that song.

D. Another way of dividing music is by genre. Even a child who does not know that (for
example) rock and roll and classical music are different genres will be instantly aware that these
are very different sounds; though he will not be aware that one is a percussion-led melody while
the other emphasizes harmony over rhythm and timbre. Each genre of music has numerous sub-
divisions. Classical music is divided by type - for example symphonies, concertos and operas,
and by sub-genre, for example baroque and Gregorian chant. Just to make it more fun, modern
musicians have also been experimenting with crossover music, so that we get Beatles tunes
290
played by classical orchestras, and groups like Queen using operatic themes in songs such as
'Bohemian rhapsody'.

E. Almost all music is a collaboration between the composer, and the performer, while song
requires a lyricist to write the words as well. Sometimes old tunes are adapted for new lyrics -
for example the song 'Happy Birthday' is based on a tune originally called 'Have a nice Day'. At
other times a performer might produce a song in a manner which the original composer would
not recognize. (A famous example is the punk rock band the Sex Pistols performing the British
national anthem 'God save the Queen'.)

F. This is because the composer and lyricist have to leave the performer some freedom to
perform in the way that suits him or her best. While many classical compositions have notes
stressing how a piece should be performed (for example a piece played 'con brio' should be light
and lively) in the end, what the listener hears is the work of the performer. Jazz music has fully
accepted this, and jazz performers are not only expected to put their own interpretation on a
piece, but are expected to play even the same piece with some variation every time.

G. Many studies of music do not take into account where the music is to be played and who the
audience will be. This is a major mistake, as the audience is very much a part of the musical
experience. Any jazz fan will tell you that jazz is best experienced in small smoky bars
sometime after midnight, while a classical fan will spend time and money making sure that the
music on his stereo comes as close as possible to the sound in a large concert hall. Some music,
such as dance music, is designed to be interactive, while other music is designed to remain in the
background, smoothing out harsh sounds and creating a mood. This is often the case with
cinema music - this powerfully changes the mood of the audience, yet remains so much in the
background that many cinemagoers are unaware that the music is actually playing.

H. Music is very much a part of human existence, and we are fortunate today in having music of
whatever kind we choose instantly available at the touch of a button. Yet spare a thought for
those who still cannot take advantage of this bounty. This includes not only the deaf, but those
people who are somehow unable to understand or recognize music when they hear it. A famous
example is United President Ulysses Grant, who famously said 'I can recognise two tunes. One
is 'Yankee doodle' and the other one isn't.'

Vocabulary
new research; sad music; common wisdom; miserable; weepy movies; aesthetic;
relationships; mood; emotional distress; personal bond; frustrated; interrupted; blues;
country; rock and roll; classical; techno; jazz; pop; hip-hop; overcome; sad; relationship;
substitute; turmoil; comfort; weepy; defeat; console; harmony ; edition; congruency;
intimate; surrogate; pleasant; to concentrate e.g. It’s high time you concentrated on your
career and got a good job.; favourite e.g. My favourite colour is green; country music e.g.
Country music becomes more and more popular in Europe due to the young US artists trying to
revive the American tradition of the West.; to take a shower e.g. I take a quick shower several
times during a hot summer day in order to feel clean and fresh all day long.; to take a bath e.g.
I enjoy having a long hot bath in the evening.; live music e.g. The experience of listening to the
live music cannot be compared to any top quality CD or TV broadcast.; music band e.g.
Many music bands fall apart because of the singers taking up individual career; mood e.g.
I’d rather not talk to her at all today. She’s in a terrible mood since yesterday. to influence e.g.
You won’t influence her decision, she’s too stubborn.; lyrics e.g. She’s famous for writing lyrics
for the most talented artists’ songs; foreign e.g. Teenagers’ motivation for learning languages is
often to understand lyrics of foreign songs.; stereo system e.g. It is typical for him to spend all
his money on a new stereo system. He loves music so much.; electronic device e.g. Most people
291
cannot imagine the world without all the modern electronic devices that make our lives so much
easier.; to download e.g. Downloading music and films from the internet is illegal.; theft e.g.
The shop in the corner suffered several thefts during the last weeks.

Basic Music Vocabulary

A cappella Singing without accompaniment

Accent Emphasis on a note, word, or phrase
Articulation The way a sound is started and ended
Attack The beginning of a sound
Breath One cycle of inspiration/expiration
Chord Two or more pitches sounding together
Chromatic Moving in half-steps
Compound meter Meter that is made up of simple meters 2/4+3/4
Counting Mentally breaking down a rhythm into divisions
Diatonic Moving within a key without changes
Diction Correct and clear pronunciation of consonants
Diphthong Two or more vowel sounds blended together
Dynamics Relative loudness or softness
Embouchure Mouth position in brass and woodwinds
Harmony The system of moving from chord to chord
Homophonic A style where all parts have the same rhythm
Intonation Being in tune with accompaniment or others
Key--major Based on a scale of w/w/h/w/w/w/h steps
Key--minor Based on a scale of w/h/w/w/h/w/w steps
Melody Pitches in sequence that form a pattern
Meter The division of time into units
Phrase Notes played or sung in one breath
Pitch The highness or lowness of sound measured in Hz.
Placement Vocal term--where the sound is placed in the head
Polyphonic Where each part has an independent rhythm
Posture Sitting/standing correctly and efficiently
Pulse Feeling where the beat is
Release How a sound is ended
Rhythm How a sound is placed in time
Sacred Music that is written for spiritual or religious use
Secular Music that is written for entertainment
Slur Playing a series of pitches without tonguing
Solfege Italian system of pitch and interval ear training
Tempo The speed at which a regular pulse is repeated
Tone color/Timbre The relative brightness or darkness of a sound
Tongue To start a sound with the tongue on reed or mthpce
Unison Everyone on the same pitch

Sad music helps mend broken hearts.

New research suggests listening to sad music can help overcome the heartbreak of an ended
relationship. The study contradicts common wisdom that upbeat music is best when feeling the
blues after emotional turmoil. It might account for why people began singing the blues – music
to accompany painful or miserable times. The research is from the University of California at
Berkeley. It says people find comfort in listening to tunes that reflect their negative mood. It also
says weepy movies and books, or gloomy artwork provide comfort and console broken hearts.
292
Study co-author Stephen Palmer said: "Emotional experiences of aesthetic products are
important to our happiness and well-being." The research is to be published in the August
edition of the "Journal of Consumer Research" and is titled: “Interpersonal Relationships and
Preferences for Mood-Congruency in Aesthetic Experiences.” The authors say: "Consumers
experience serious emotional distress when intimate relationships are broken, and look for a
surrogate to replace the lost personal bond….[In] negative moods, [they] might choose aesthetic
experiences consistent with their mood (sad music; tear-jerking dramas) even when more
pleasant alternatives are also available." They report on another study that found we prefer
"angry music" when we are frustrated - by being interrupted, by someone being late, or after
losing an Internet connection.

Exercise 1. Read the headline. Guess if a-h below are true (T) or false (F):

1. New research goes against what we usually think about broken hearts. T / F
2. The research said blues music started to mend broken hearts. T / F
3. Researchers said people like to listen to things that match their mood. T / F
4. A co-author said art doesn't help people who are brokenhearted. T / F
5. The research says we look for a musical substitute for a lost love. T / F
6. The study said we would choose nicer music if it were available. T / F
7. People prefer to listen to jazz when they are frustrated. T / F
8. The study said not being connected to the Internet was a frustration. T / F

Exercise 2. Match the following synonyms from the article:

1. overcome a. sad
2 relationship b. substitute
3. turmoil c. comfort
4. weepy d. defeat
5. console e. harmony
6. edition f. confusion
7. congruency g. close
8. intimate h. nice
9. surrogate i. romance
10. pleasant j. issue

Exercise 3. PHRASE MATCH: (Sometimes more than one choice is possible.):

1. sad music can help overcome a. artwork

2 The study contradicts b. with their mood
3. emotional c. and well-being
4. gloomy d. dramas
5. important to our happiness e. common wisdom
6. published in the f. an Internet connection
7. when intimate g. the heartbreak
8. experiences consistent h. relationships are broken
9. tear-jerking i. turmoil
10. losing j. August edition

Exercise 4. The sentences below are not complete. There are four options for each question.
Choose the best word to complete the sentence:
1. Mr Jones ...... the company since 1990.
293
a. runs b. is running c. has run d. ran
2. The bookshop ..... next to the town hall
a. is put b. has the post c. position d. is located
3. ..... his parents allow him or not, John intends to go to the party.
a. Whether b. While c. Although d. Despite
4. ..... people know the town better than old Jake here.
a. The few b. Only the few c. Only few d. Few
5. You must boil those vegetables before .... in the stew.
a. using them b. their used c. the use d. using
6. ..... knows that Dallas is not the capital of Texas.
a. Anyone b. Many persons c. Not everyone d. Some body
7. The first congress .... in 1776.
a. was hold b. were held c. took place d. took over
8. If we are in town we ..... go to the cinema.
a. should too b. might as well c. do have to d. used to
9. The park is named ...... the town's first mayor.
a. in respect of b. owing to c. in honour of d. of the memory of
10. She got married .... while on holiday in Hawaii.
a. secretly b. together c. unexpected d. with Tom
11. What did you want to do that ....?
a. reason b. for c. because d. thing
12. Spring is ...... . It will be warmer soon.
a. on the way b. to be coming c. eventually d. prepared now

Exercise 5. a) Read, translate and retell the following text:

Forests and Global warming

(Greg Samdon, environmentalist, writes for Science and the News magazine.)
'The interaction between forests and global warming is turning out to be more
complicated than was originally assumed. Some of the basic assumptions which have
underpinned theories of how deforestation affects the atmosphere are having to be re-examined.
First of all, it needs to be said that forests are an asset to the environment of the planet.
They provide a haven for wildlife, and are both beautiful and economically productive in their
own right. Also, there can be no doubt that trees are essential 'carbon sinks'. That is, a forest
takes global-warming carbon dioxide out of the environment and converts it into solid carbon in
the form of wood. Forests also have a role to play as 'green lungs' for the planet. That is, in the

294
process of photosynthesis, carbon dioxide is converted to oxygen without which humans would
not be able to breathe. The process of photosynthesis requires water, which is released into the
atmosphere through the plant's leaves, cooling the air in the process. Every tree may cause only a
tiny drop in temperature, but when taken across forests which make up a considerable percentage
of the earth's surface, the effect is noticeable.
That said, the role of forests as 'green lungs' for the planet must not be over-estimated. It
has been found that a huge amount of the oxygen in the atmosphere comes not from forests but
from other plants on the earth's surface (including crops planted by humans), and even more
comes not from the land but from plants such as algae, seaweed and plankton in the sea.
Nor does the absorption of carbon dioxide come without a price. Recently scientists
discovered that growing plants emit methane, a gas usually associated with swamps and decay. It
has now been shown that growing plants put out hundreds of times more methane that would be
emitted if the plants were simply dead and rotting away. Since methane is a greenhouse gas, this
means that forests are actually helping with some global warming. In fact some scientists believe
that the deforestation which has been happening in some parts of the world has helped to slow
methane build-up in the atmosphere.
Another way in which plants help to warm the atmosphere is because the leaves of trees
absorb sunlight, and this makes them rather warmer than the air around them. Therefore though
the overall effect of trees is cooling, both because they put out evaporated water and because
leaves reflect some light back into space (and of course all the green light in the spectrum that
falls on them), this effect is less than was originally thought.
So should we consider reducing the number of forests on the earth's surface? Of course
we should not. It is not the forests which are the problem, it is the human race. Recent decades
have seen the fastest amount of warming that has ever been recorded, and almost all of it is due
to human activity. Even methane emitted by all the forests on earth comes to less than 10% of
the methane in the atmosphere, while humans have released so much carbon dioxide into the
atmosphere that the air now has 25% more than it had a century ago.
Nevertheless, the results of the recent scientific studies show that we must always be
careful to avoid the law of unintended consequences, which says sometimes what you try to do
has the opposite effect to what was intended. For example, it has been shown that the removal of
pollutants from the atmosphere has had two effects. Firstly, as the air in some countries has
become cleaner, both humans and the rest of the environment have benefitted from the improved
air quality. But at the same time, many of these airborne pollutants were reflecting sunlight back
into space. With them gone, the earth is absorbing more sunlight and becoming warmer.
In the same way it has been shown that if much of the earth's surface was covered with
forests, especially in the temperate zones, then so much carbon would be absorbed from the
atmosphere that it would start to release the huge amounts of carbon dioxide that are now stored
in the seas of the planet. If all this was released, then combined with the extra methane from the
trees, global temperatures would actually start to rise. What all this shows is that, though
deforestation is a major environmental issue, especially in the tropics (in some parts of Europe
the forest cover is actually increasing) we cannot do as we have done in the past and try to make
major changes to the environment without considering the full effects of our actions on the
enormously complicated ecology of our planet.'
(Reprinted with permission from Biscuit Publications 2006)

b) Read the summary, and then write into the spaces five of the ten words you see
underneath, choosing the best word to go into each space:
Forests are good for the planet, but 1. the planet with forest would not necessarily help to
slow down global warming. This is because trees act both to warm the air and to cool it, and so
the cooling effect is lower than some previous 2. . Also, scientists have found that growing
plants emit large amounts of methane, and this is also a greenhouse gas, that is, one of those
gasses in the atmosphere which hold heat and warm the air. Trees are valuable in extracting
295
carbon from the air, and holding it as wood, which is also a 3. economic resource. Also,
trees change carbon dioxide for oxygen, which allows animals to breathe, but other plants do this
besides trees in forests, and in fact the amount of oxygen produced by the oceans is 4. .
Overall, it may be that the only solution to global warming is for humans to change their 5. ,
and try to maintain rather than restore the balance of nature.
valuable epidemic ways development pollution covering carbon greater
deforestation estimates
c) Do the sentences below agree with Mr Samdon's opinions or not? (Answer yes, no,
doesn't say):
Doesn't
Yes No
say

1. Global warming is the biggest threat to the environment today.

2. Trees are the major reason for global warming.

3. The ocean is a major source of oxygen.

4. Deforestation has reduced the amount of carbon dioxide in the

atmosphere.

5. Forest growth in the tropics is best for the planet.

d) Choose the best ending for each sentence (a, b, c or d)

1. Mr. Samdon says that forests ...
a. are causes of global warming.
b. have bad but mostly good effects on global warming.
c. should not be replanted in temperate areas.
d. are beautiful, but not an environmental issue.
2. New scientific research has shown ...
a. that we need to look again at some ideas.
b. that some older ideas were wrong.
c. that global warming is caused by people.
d. that methane comes from swamps.
3. Mr Samdon believes that the amount of forest on the planet ....
a. should be greatly increased.
b. should be kept to a natural level.
c. need to be reduced slightly.
d. must be considered, if this is the problem.
e) Give the summary of the text.

Exercise 6. Write an essay on the following topic. Give your opinion, and your reasons for
having that opinion:

Do you think film and music stars are paid too much money?
Essay plan:
Start: Give examples or say why some stars are paid too much .. what about other people, their
work is important too (about 70 words)
Main part: Give my opinion. People decide how much is enough because they won't pay more -
$100 for a cinema/ concert ticket? I think not. Also only a few people earn big money - lots of
poor actors too. Stars are an inspiration. (about 110 words)
Conclusion: We pay, so we don’t think it is too much (the rest)
296
Exercise 7. In class discussion:

You are a member of a music club at your university. You have been asked to give a
description of your favourite song, and to say why you like that song most of all.

Exercise 8. Fill in the blanks with a word below, make sure to conjugate the verbs:
Compose, conduct, write, play, blow, tap, improvise, sing, hum, beat

1.Don't you think the Maestro the orchestra well? 2. He beat the like a madman! 3. John
Lenon the lyrics to many of the Beatles's best songs. 4. You can tell when Peter is in a good
mood, she one of her favorite tunes. 5. The most famous opera by Mascagni was
"Cavelleria Rusticana". 6. Jazz musicians almost always _ their solos. 7. The always tune
their instruments before they begin the concert. 8. I can remember the time when President
Clinton got up on MTV to his horn - the saxophone. 9. Would you please not tap your in
time to the music? 10. Some of the best rock singers don't their songs, they shout them!

Exercise 9. Match the verb in the column on the left with the correct noun from the column
on the right:
VERB NOUN
compose tune
conduct drum
write horn
play instrument
blow piece of music
tap orchestra
improvise lyrics
sing song
hum solo
beat foot

Exercise 10. Put each of the following words or phrases in the correct gap:

tag, label, cashier, bargain, receipt, exchange, take back, try on, fit, advice, shop assistant,
credit card, check, select, cash, refund, size, sale
If you want to go shopping there are a number of things you have to consider. If you would like
to find a you should make sure to go to a . The only problem with a sale is that it is
sometimes hard to something once you buy it. Many stores also refuse to give a on
anything you have bought. If you are looking for clothes, make sure to , check the
to make sure that it is a good . Another good idea is to look at the and to see
instructions for washing, etc. It's always a good idea to also ask the for _. Finally,
when you go to the you can usually pay by or if you don't have the .
Never forget to get the !

Exercise 11. Here you can find some questions you can ask your partner during
conversation about music:

1. How often do you listen to music? 2. When do you normally listen to music 3. Are you able
to concentrate on other activities when you are listening to music? 4. What kind of music is
your favourite? 5. Do you like classical music? 6. Do you like country music ? 7. Do you like

297
jazz? 8. Do you listen to all kinds of music? 9. Is there any kind of music that you hate? 10. Can
you play any musical instrument? If not, which instrument would you like to play? 11. Which
musical instruments do people from your country usually play? 12. Is there any traditional
musical instrument in your country? 13. Do you like singing? 14. Are you a good singer? 15. Are
you singing while taking a shower/a bath? 16. Do you like live music? 17. Have you ever been to
a concert? If so, what kind of concert was it? 18. Who is your favourite singer? 19. What is your
favourite music band? 20. If you could start a band, what type of music would you play? 21.
How does music influence your mood? 22. What kind of music does make you feel relaxed? 23.
What is your favourite song? 24. What is more important for you, the lyrics or the melody of a
song? 25. What makes a song popular, the lyrics or the melody? 26. Do you like songs in your
own language? 27. Do you like English songs? 28. Do you learn vocabulary from foreign songs?
29. Do you have a stereo system? 30. Which electronic devices do you use to listen to music? 31.
Do you listen to MP3 files on your computer? 32. What do you think about downloading MP3
files from the Internet? 33. Do you find downloading MP3 files from the Internet a theft? 34. Do
you listen to the radio? 35. Can you imagine life without music?

Exercise 12. Choose which of these sentences is closest to the meaning in the text 1:

1. a. Modern composers do not always want their music to sound pleasant

b. Some modern composers do not want their music to be enjoyable
c. A modern musical composition should not be orderly
2. a. Crossover music is when classical orchestras play modern tunes
b. Crossover music moves between musical genres
c. Crossover music is a modern musical genre
3. a. Performers, lyricists and composers each have a separate function
b. Performers of a song will need to become lyricists
c. Composers instruct musicians to play their work 'con brio'

Exercise 13. Match these groups of words with one of the words in the box opposite - you
do not need two of the words.

1. Rock and roll, classical music, jazz

A. Collaborators
2. Composer, lyricist, performer B. John Cage
C. Classical
D. Baroque
3. Symphony, concerto, opera E. Audience
F. Genres
4. Cinemagoer, Jazz fan, dancer

Exercise 14. The paragraphs are numbered A-H in “ What is music?”. Write the letter of
the paragraph which contains the following information (You can choose a paragraph
more than once):

1. People can tell genres of music apart even without musical training.
2. Where you hear music can be as important as the skill of the performer.
3. Music has been a part of human existence for many thousands of years.
4. A piece of music might have more than one set of words to go with it.
5. Some people cannot tell the difference between classical music and birdsong.

Exercise 15. Essay writing: Write an essay on the following topic “My favourite song”.
298
 Appendix
Modern English Alphabet

Pronunciation
Vowels and diphthongs
This chart shows the vowels and diphthongs used in standard varieties of English spoken in the
USA, Australia, England, Canada, Ireland, New Zealand, South Africa, Scotland and Wales.
There is significant variation in the vowel sounds used within most of these countries, and in
other countries where English is spoken.

Key
AmE = American English (General American), AuE = Australian English, BrE = British English
(RP), CaE = Canadian English, IrE = Irish English, NZE = New Zealand English, SAE = South
African English, ScE = Scottish English, WeE = Welsh English
299
 Consonants

Sample text in English

All human beings are born free and equal in dignity and rights. They are endowed with reason
and conscience and should act towards one another in a spirit of brotherhood.
(Article 1 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights)
Phonetic transcription (British pronunciation)
[ɔ ːl ˈhjuːmən ˈbiːɪ ŋz ə bɔ ːn friː ənd ˈiːkwəl ɪ n ˈdɪ gnɪ tɪ ənd raɪ ts ðeɪ ə
ɪ nˈdaʊ d wɪ ð ˈriːzn ənd
ˈkɒ nʃ əns ənd ʃ ʊ d ækt təˈwɔ ːdz wʌ n əˈnʌ ðə ɪ n ə ˈspɪ rɪ t ɒ v ˈbrʌ ðəhʊ d]
300
 Phonetic transcription (American pronunciation)
[ɔ ːl ˈhjuːmən ˈbiːɪ ŋz ɑ ːr bɔ ːrn friː ænd ˈiːkwəl ɪ n ˈdɪ gnɪ tiː ænd raɪ ts ðeɪ ɑ ːr
enˈdaʊ d wɪ ð ˈriːzən ænd ˈkɑ ːnʃ əns ænd ʃ ʊ d ækt təˈwɔ ːrdz wʌ n əˈnʌ ðər ɪ n ə
ˈspɪ rɪ t əv brʌ ðərˌhʊ d]
Table 1.
Countable/Uncountable Nouns
Used with Countable Nouns Only
a a doctor, a pen, a meal, a class,
many many cups, many books, many libraries
few few questions, few tables, few apples
a few a few questions, a few problems, a few issues
Used with Uncountable Nouns Only
much money, much time, much food, much
much
water
little trouble, little equipment, little meat,
little
little patience
a little bit of confidence, a little bit of sleep,
a little bit of
a little bit of snow
Used with Countable & Uncountable Nouns
the schools, the teachers, the
countable
boats, the bananas
the
the cheese, the luggage, the
uncountable
grass, the knowledge
some tables, some stores, some
countable
grapes, some cities,
some
some time, some news, some
uncountable
bread, some salt, some mail
any forks, any socks, any
countable
bathrooms, any waiters
any
any advice, any soap, any
uncountable
transportation, any homework
no magazines, no pilots, no
countable
no rings, no markers
uncountable no trouble, no scenery, no
money, no furniture
a lot of animals, a lot of coins, a
countable
lot of babies
a lot of uncountable a lot of help, a lot of
aggravation, a lot of happiness
lots of computers, lots of buses,
countable
lots of parties, lots of colleges
lots of
lots of cake, lots of ice cream,
uncountable
lots of energy, lots of laughter
enough plates, enough onions,
countable enough restaurants
enough
enough courage, enough
uncountable
wisdom, enough spaghetti,
plenty of houses, plenty of
countable
concerts, plenty of guitars

301
 plenty of oil, plenty of sugar,
plenty of uncountable
plenty of cheese, plenty of space

302
 Table 2.
Common Irregular Verbs
Basic Translation
Past Simple Past Participle
Form

Arise Arose Arisen

Awake Awoke Awoken

Be Was/Were Been

Bear Bore Born/Borne

Beat Beat Beaten

Become Became Become

Begin Began Begun

Behold Beheld Beheld

Bend Bent Bent

Bet Bet Bet

Bind Bound Bound

Bite Bit Bitten

Bleed Bled Bled

Blow Blew Blown

Break Broke Broken

Breed Bred Bred

Bring Brought Brought

Broadcast Broadcast/Broadcasted Broadcast/Broadcasted

Build Built Built

Burn Burnt/Burned Burnt/Burned

Burst Burst Burst

Bust Bust Bust

Buy Bought Bought

Cast Cast Cast

Catch Caught Caught

Choose Chose Chosen

Cling Clung Clung

303
Come Came Come

Cost Cost Cost

Creep Crept Crept

Cut Cut Cut

Deal Dealt Dealt

Dig Dug Dug

Dive Dived/Dove Dived

Do Did Done

Draw Drew Drawn

Dream Dreamt/Dreamed Dreamt/Dreamed

Drink Drank Drunk

Drive Drove Driven

Dwell Dwelt Dwelt

Eat Ate Eaten

Fall Fell Fallen

Feed Fed Fed

Feel Felt Felt

Fight Fought Fought

Find Found Found

Fit Fit/Fitted Fit/Fitted

Flee Fled Fled

Fling Flung Flung

Fly Flew Flown

Forbid Forbade/Forbad Forbidden

Forget Forgot Forgotten

Forgive Forgave Forgiven

Freeze Froze Frozen

Get Got Got/Gotten

Give Gave Given

Go Went Gone/Been

304
Grind Ground Ground

Grow Grew Grown

Hang Hung/Hanged Hung/Hanged

Have Had Had

Hear Heard Heard

Hide Hid Hidden

Hit Hit Hit

Hold Held Held

Hurt Hurt Hurt

Keep Kept Kept

Kneel Knelt/Kneeled Knelt/Kneeled

Know Knew Known

Lay Laid Laid

Lead Led Led

Lean Leant/Leaned Leant/Leaned

Leap Leapt/Leaped Leapt/Leaped

Learn Learnt/Learned Learnt/Learned

Leave Left Left

Lend Lent Lent

Let Let Let

Lie Lay Lain

Light Lit Lit

Lose Lost Lost

Make Made Made

Mean Meant Meant

Meet Met Met

Melt Melted Molten/Melted

Pay Paid Paid

Prove Proved Proven/Proved

Put Put Put

305
Quit Quit Quit

Read Read Read

Rid Rid/Ridded Rid/Ridded

Ride Rode Ridden

Ring Rang Rung

Rise Rose Risen

Run Ran Run

Saw Sawed Sawn/Sawed

Say Said Said

See Saw Seen

Seek Sought Sought

Sell Sold Sold

Send Sent Sent

Set Set Set

Sew Sewed Sewn/Sewed

Shake Shook Shaken

Shed Shed Shed

Shine Shone Shone

Shoot Shot Shot

Show Showed Shown

Shrink Shrank Shrunk

Shut Shut Shut

Sing Sang Sung

Sink Sank Sunk

Sit Sat Sat

Sleep Slept Slept

Sow Sowed Sown

Speak Spoke Spoken

Spell Spelt/Spelled Spelt/Spelled

Spend Spent Spent

306
Spill Spilt/Spilled Spilt/Spilled

Spread Spread Spread

Spring Sprang Sprung

Stand Stood Stood

Steal Stole Stolen

Stick Stuck Stuck

Strike Struck Struck/Stricken

String Strung Strung

Strive Strove Striven

Swear Swore Sworn

Sweat Sweat/Sweated Sweat/Sweated

Sweep Swept/Sweeped Swept/Sweeped

Swim Swam Swum

Take Took Taken

Teach Taught Taught

Tear Tore Torn

Tell Told Told

Think Thought Thought

Throw Threw Thrown

Thrust Thrust Thrust

Understand Understood Understood

Undertake Undertook Undertaken

Wake Woke Woken

Wear Wore Worn

Weep Wept Wept

Win Won Won

Wind Wound Wound

Write Wrote Written

307
 Bibliography:

1. Elementary- intermediate Timesaver 50 Mixed – Ability Grammar Lessons, Jane

Rollason, Scholastic
2. English File, Elementary student’s book, Paul Selingson and Clive Oxenden, Oxford
University Press, published in 2008
3. English File, Intermediate student’s book, Paul Selingson and Clive Oxenden Oxford
University Press, 2008
4. English File, Pre-Intermediate student’s book, Paul Selingson and Clive Oxenden Oxford
University Press, 2008
5. English Grammar in Use, Third Edition, A self – study refrence and practice book for
intermediate students of English, Raymond Murphy, CambridgeUniversity Press
6. Fundamentals of English Grammar, Third Edition, Betty Schrampfer Azar, Published in
1941
7. Grammarway 1, Jenny Dooley -Virginia Evans , Published in 1999 by Express
Publishing, Liberty House, New Greenham Park, Newbury.
8. Grammarway 2, Jenny Dooley -Virginia Evans , Published in 2001 by Express
Publishing, Liberty House, New Greenham Park, Newbury.
9. New Headway Elementary, Student’s book and Workbook, John and Liz Soars, Oxford
University Press, published in 2001.
10. New Headway Intermediate, Student’s book and Workbook, John and Liz Soars, Oxford
University Press, published in 2001.
11. New Headway Pre-Intermediate, Student’s book and Workbook, John and Liz Soars,
Oxford University Press, published in 2001.
12. Round-up 1, Virginia Evans, Longman, Edinburg Gate, Harlow, first Published in 1992.
13. Round-up 2, Virginia Evans, Longman, Edinburg Gate, Harlow, first Published in 1992.
14. Round-up 3, Virginia Evans, Longman, Edinburg Gate, Harlow, first Published in 1993.
15. Internet (Sources) - http://www.omniglot.com/writing/english.htm
16. Internet (Sources) - http://www.soundcomparisons.com; http://www.english-portal.com
17. Internet (Sources) http://www.polite-english.com ;http://www.english-daily.com
18. Internet (Sources) http://www.esl-lab.com/school1/scholrd1.htm

19. Практический курс английского языка, 1 курс : учеб. для студентов вузов под ред.
В. А. Аракина, М.: Гуманитар. изд. центр ВЛАДОС, 2005.

308